HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) ISBN:0764519956 Wh...

2 downloads 159 Views 8MB Size
HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

ISBN:0764519956

Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

Chapter 3

- Creating Your First HTML Page

Part II - Getting Started with HTML

Chapter 4

- Structuring Your HTML Documents

Chapter 5

- Linking to Online Resources

Chapter 6

- Finding and Using Images

Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting

Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Back Cover ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts Do you speak HTML? Never fear—this friendly book will save you from getting tangled in the language of the Web. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) It’s loaded with examples, illustrations, and step-by-step instructions on everything from basic tags and attributes goal is tolike build a simple, text-oriented site making pages dynamic with to cool new stuff ourWhether readers your asked about, adding sound, video, and Web animation, scripting, and more.or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. About the Authors Table Ed Tittel, of Contents a 20-year veteran of the computer industry, ahs worked on over 20 For Dummies books. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Natanya Pitts is a writer, trainer, Web guru, and HTML instructor. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

Chapter 3

- Creating Your First HTML Page

Part II - Getting Started with HTML

Chapter 4

- Structuring Your HTML Documents

Chapter 5

- Linking to Online Resources

Chapter 6

- Finding and Using Images

Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting

Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) by Ed Tittel & Natanya Pitts Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepPublished by by-step Wiley Publishing, Inc. book will put you on the right track. 909 Third Avenue Newof York, NY 10022 Table Contents www.wiley.com HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

Introduction Copyright © 2003 by Wiley Publishing, Inc., Indianapolis, Indiana Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter Published 1 by - The Wiley Least Publishing, You NeedInc., to Know Indianapolis, about HTML Indiana and the Web Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

Published simultaneously in Canada - Creating Your First HTML Page

Chapter 3

Part II - Getting Started with HTML

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by

Chapter 4 - electronic, Structuringmechanical, Your HTML Documents any means, photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise, except as permitted Chapter 5 Linking to Online under Sections 107 or 108 of Resources the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without either the prior written Chapter 6 -ofFinding and Using permission the Publisher, or Images authorization through payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to the Chapter 7 Clearance - Top Off Your Page222 withRosewood FormattingDrive, Danvers, MA 01923, (978) 750-8400, fax (978) 750Copyright Center, Part IIIRequests - Taking HTML the Next Level 4470. to thetoPublisher for permission

should be addressed to the Legal Department, Wiley

Chapter 8 -Inc., HTML Tables Publishing, 10475 Crosspoint Blvd., Indianapolis, IN 46256, (317) 572-3447, fax (317) 572-4447, email:[email protected]. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Trademarks: Wiley, thewith Wiley Publishing logo, For Part IV - Extending HTML Other Technologies

Dummies, the Dummies Man logo, A Reference for the Rest of Us!, The Dummies Way, Dummies Daily, The Fun and Easy Way, Dummies.com and related Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Wiley Publishing, Inc., in the United States and Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting other countries, and may not be used without written permission. All other trademarks are the property of Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic their respective owners. Wiley Publishing, Inc., is not associated with any product or vendor mentioned in Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML this book. Part V of - From Web Page to Web Site Limit Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty:

While the publisher and author have used their best efforts in

Chapter 16 this - Creating an HTML preparing book, they makeToolbox no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or Chapter completeness 17 - Setting of theUp contents Your Online of thisPresence book and specifically disclaim any implied warranties of

merchantability or fitness for aUser particular purpose. No warranty may be created or extended by sales Chapter 18 - Creating a Great Interface representatives Part VI - The Partor of written Tens sales

materials. The advice and strategies contained herein may not be suitable for your situation. You should consult with aBugs professional where appropriate. Neither the publisher nor Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web author shall be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damages, including but not limited to Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts special, incidental, consequential, or other damages. Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

For general information on our other products and services or to obtain technical support, please contact our Customer Care Department within the U.S. at 800-762-2974, outside the U.S. at 317-572-3993, or fax Appendix C - Glossary 317-572-4002. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Index

Cheat WileySheet also publishes - HTML 4 For its books Dummies, in a variety 4th Edition of electronic formats. Some content that appears in print may

notofbeFigures available in electronic books. List List of Tables

Library of Congress Control Number: 2002114830

List of Listings

List of Sidebars ISBN: 0-7645-1995-6

Manufactured in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4O/TR/QR/QT/IN About the Authors

Ed Tittel is a full-time who 4th manages a small gang of technoids at LANWrights, his company HTMLwriter-trainer 4 for Dummies, Edition in Austin, TX. Ed by has been writing for the trade press since 1986 and has worked on more than 100 books. ISBN:0764519956 Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts In addition to this John title, Wiley Ed has worked on more than 30 books for Wiley, including Networking Windows NT & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Server For Dummies, XML For Dummies, and Networking with NetWare For Dummies . Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

Ed teaches NetWorld + Interop and private on demand. He also writes regularly for Certification by-step book will putfor you on theclients right track. magazine, Cramsession.com, and a variety of Web sites. When he's not busy doing all that work stuff, Ed likes to travel, shoot pool, spend time with his family, and wrestle with his indefatigable Labrador retriever, Table of Contents Blackie. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

You can contact Ed Tittel by e-mail at [email protected]. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Natanya Pitts is a writer, trainer, and Web guru in Austin, TX. She has extensive experience in the - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web technical training realm, including overseeing the development of the materials for in-class and WebChapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web based training offerings. She also helped establish the Austin Community College Webmaster Certification Chapter 3 - Creating First HTMLfor Page program and taught inYour the program two years. Natanya has authored, coauthored, or contributed to Part II Getting Started with HTML more than a dozen Web- and Internet-related titles, including XML For Dummies (1st, 2nd, and 3rd Chapter 4 The - Structuring HTML Editions), XML BlackYour Book, andDocuments XML In Record Time . Natanya has also taught classes on HTML, Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources Dynamic HTML, and XML at several national conferences (including MacWorld, Networld + Interop, and Chapter 6 -as Finding and Images HP World), well as at Using the NASA Ames Research Center. Chapter 1

Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting

YouIII can contactHTML Natanya Pitts at Level [email protected]. Part - Taking to the Next Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Authors' Acknowledgments

Chapter 10 this - HTML Because is the Forms eighth iteration of HTML For Dummies, we'd like to start by thanking our many readers Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies for making this book a continued success. We'd

also like to thank them and the Wiley editorial team for

Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish CSS the feedback that drives thewith continuing improvement of this book's content. Please, don't stop now - tell us Chapter what you 12 want - HTML to doand with Scripting HTML, and what you do and don't like about this book. Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Let me go on by thanking my sterling coauthor, Natanya Pitts, for her efforts on this revision. I am eternally - Integrating a Database into Your HTML grateful for your ideas, your hard work, and your experience in reaching an audience of budding Web Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages experts. Chapter 14

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter Creating an HTML Next, I'd16like- to thank the great Toolbox teams at LANWrights and Wiley for their efforts on this title. At LANWrights, Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Presence my fervent thanks go to MaryOnline Burmeister, for her services and the time spent on this book. Because Mary Chapter - Creating Great User she Interface herself 18 revised quite aabit of copy, gets 'nodding credit' for her more substantive contributions, too. Part VI - The Part Tens I Thanks Mary! Atof Wiley,

must thank Bob Woerner and Nicole Haims for their outstanding efforts, and

Chapter 19 - Ten Ways Barry Childs-Helton fortohisExterminate marvelousWeb waysBugs with our words. Other folks we need to thank include the folks Chapter in Composition 20 - TenServices HTML Do’s for and theirDon’ts artful page layouts, and the Media Development team for their assistance Part withVII the- HTML Appendixes For Dummies

Web site on Dummies.com.

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

I'd like to thank and welcome my lovely wife, Dina Kutueva-Tittel, for signing up with me all the way from Kyrgyzstan, and for making the big move from central Asia to central Texas. Welcome to my home, my Appendix C - Glossary heart, and my house, honey! Finally, I'd like to thank my parents, Al and Ceil, for all the great things they Index did for me. I must also thank my faithful sidekick, Blackie, who's always ready to pull me away from the Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition keyboard - sometimes literally - to explore the great outdoors. List of Figures - Ed Tittel Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

List of Tables

List First of and Listings foremost I'd like to thank my coauthor, Ed Tittel, for giving me the opportunity to work on this

book again. It's been fun! In addition to being a great coauthor, you've been a great friend. This book List of Sidebars wouldn't have been possible without the editorial and managerial efforts of Mary Burmeister. Thank you so much for keeping me on track and keeping me sane. Special thanks to my beloved husband, Robby, and my beautiful daughter, Alanna. All things are easier because you are a part of my life. Thanks to my parents, Charles and Swanya, for always believing in me and supporting me. - Natanya Pitts Publisher's Acknowledgments

We're proud of this book; please send us your comments through our online registration form located at HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition www.dummies.com/register/. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

John Wiley & Sons © 2003 pages) Some of the people who helped bring this(408 book to market include the following: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

Acquisitions, Editorial, and Media Development or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

Senior Project Editor: Nicole Haims Table of Contents

Acquisitions Editor:4th Edition HTML 4 For Dummies, Bob Woerner Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Senior Copy Editor: - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Barry Childs-Helton

Chapter 1 Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Technical Editor: Part II - Getting Started with HTML Matthew Haughey

Chapter 4

- Structuring Your HTML Documents Editorial Chapter 5 Manager: - Linking to Online Resources

Leah Cameron Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting Permissions Editor: Carmen Krikorian

Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter Media Development 9 - HTML Frames Specialist:

Megan10 Decraene Chapter - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Media Development Manager: - Getting Stylish with CSS Laura VanWinkle

Chapter 11 Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Media Development Supervisor: Chapter - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Richard14Graves Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Editorial Assistant: Part V - From Web Page to Web Site Amanda Chapter 16Foxworth - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Cartoons: Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Rich Tennant Part VI - The Part of Tens www.the5thwave.com Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Production Part VII - Appendixes

Project ACoordinator: Appendix - HTML 4 Tags Dale White Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary

Layout and Graphics:

Index Michael Kruzil Cheat - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition KristinSheet McMullan List of Figures Tiffany Muth List of Tables

Proofreaders: List of Listings Tyler Connoley List of Sidebars John Greenough Susan Moritz TECHBOOKS Production Services Indexer: TECHBOOKS Production Services Special Help

Diana Conover

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition

by Ed Tittel Natanya Pitts Publishing and Editorial forand Technology Dummies

ISBN:0764519956

John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

Vice President and Executive Group Whether your goal is to Publisher build a simple, text-oriented Web site Richard Swadley or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

Vice President and Publisher Andy Cummings Table of Contents

Editorial HTML 4 ForDirector Dummies, 4th Edition Mary C. Corder Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Publishing for Consumer Dummies

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2 - HTML at Publisher Work on the Web Vice President and Chapter 3 - Creating Diane Graves SteeleYour First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML

Acquisitions Director Your HTML Documents Chapter 4 - Structuring Joyce 5Pepple Chapter - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

- Finding and Using Images

Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting

Composition Services

Part III - Taking HTML to the NextServices Level Vice President of Production

Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Gerry Fahey Chapter 9

- HTML Frames Director Chapter 10of-Composition HTML Forms Services

Debbie Stailey HTML with Other Technologies Part IV - Extending Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

Overview

ISBN:0764519956

John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepWelcome to the wild, by-step wacky, bookand will wonderful put you on possibilities the right track. inherent on the World Wide Web, simply referred

to as the Web. In this book, we introduce you to the mysteries of the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), which is used to build Web pages, and initiate you into the still-select, but rapidly growing, community of Table of Contents Web authors. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

Introduction If you've tried to build your own Web pages before but found it too forbidding, now you can relax. If you can Part dialIa- telephone Meeting HTML or find in Its your Natural keys in Environment the morning,

Chapter 1

you too can become an HTML author. (No kidding! )

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

When we first wrote this book, we took a straightforward approach to the basics of authoring documents - HTML at Work on the Web for the Web. In this edition, for the latest generation of Web page designers, we mix the best of old and Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page new approaches. As always, we keep the amount of technobabble to a minimum and stick with plain Part II - Getting Started with HTML English whenever possible. Besides plain talk about hypertext, HTML, and the Web, we include lots of Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents examples, plus tag-by-tag instructions to help you build your very own Web pages with minimum muss and Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources fuss. We also provide more examples about what to do with your Web pages once created, so you can Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images share them-with the world. We also explain the differences between HTML 4 and XHTML, so you can Chapter - Top withmost Formatting decide 7if you wantOff to Your stick Page with the widely used and popular Web markup language (HTML) or the Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level latest and greatest Web markup language (XHTML). Chapter 2

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables We also a companion Chapter 9 have - HTML Frames Web site for this book that contains HTML examples from the chapters in

usable 10 form- -HTML plus a number of pointers to interesting widgets that you can use to embellish your own Chapter Forms documents and astound yourOther friends. Part IV - Extending HTML with Technologies Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

4 for Dummies, 4th Edition About This HTML Book by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

Think of this bookJohn as aWiley friendly, approachable guide to taking up the tools of HTML and building readable, & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) attractive pages for the Web. Although HTML isn't hardtext-oriented to learn, it does Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web pack site a plethora of details. You need to wrestle with these details some while you build your Web pages. Some sample topics you find in or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepthis book include by-step book will put you on the right track. Designing and building Web pages Table of Contents

and publishing HTML Uploading 4 For Dummies, 4th EditionWeb pages for the world to see Introduction

Creating interesting page layouts

Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1 - and The debugging Least You Need Know about HTML and the Web Testing yourto Web pages Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web Although, glance, building WebPage pages may seem to require years of arduous training, advanced Chapter 3 at - first Creating Your First HTML

aesthetic capabilities, ablutions Part II - Getting Startedand withritual HTML

in ice-cold streams, take heart: It just ain't so. If you can tell

somebody how to drive across townDocuments to your house, you can certainly build a Web document that does Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML what you it to. The purpose of this book isn't to turn you into a rocket scientist (or, for that matter, a Chapter 5 want - Linking to Online Resources rocket scientist into aand Web site). The purpose is to show you all the design and technical elements you Chapter 6 - Finding Using Images need to7build a good-looking, Web page, and to give you the know-how and confidence to do it! Chapter - Top Off Your Pagereadable with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

4 for Dummies, 4th Edition How to UseHTML This Book by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

This book tells you how to use HTML 4 to(408 getpages) your page up and running on the World Wide Web. We tell you what's invo John Wiley & Sons © 2003 ideas and information to the whole online world - if that's what you want do - and maybe have some high-tech fun com Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web to site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

All HTML code appears monospaced such as track. this: by-step in book will put youtype on the right

What's in a Title?...

Table of Contents

HTML 4 you For Dummies, 4th Edition When type HTML tags or other related information, be sure to copy the information exactly as you see it between the Introduction of the magic that makes HTML work. Other than that, you find out how to marshal and manage the content that makes y Part I - Meeting HTMLwith in Its Natural Environment elements of HTML your own work.

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

The margins of a book don't the same room as the vast reaches of cyberspace. Therefore, some long lines of H Chapter 2 - HTML at Work ongive the us Web Resource Locators), may wrap to the next line after we present them here. Remember that your computer shows such w Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page typing that hunk of code, keep it as one line. Don't insert a hard return if you see one of these wrapped lines. We clue yo Part II - Getting Started with HTML line at a slash, or other appropriate character, Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents (to imply 'but wait, there's more!') and slightly indenting the overage, as in

http://www.infocadabra.transylvania.com/nexus/plexus/lexus/ praxis/okay/this/is/a/makeChapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

- Finding and Using Images

Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting

Tip HTML doesn't care if you type tag text in uppercase, lowercase, or both (except for character entities, also known a of this book). To make your own work look like ours as much as possible, enter all HTML tag text in lowercase only. Tho Chapter 8 - HTML Tables reversal of earlier instructions. That it is! But the keepers of the eternal and ever-magnanimous standard of HTML, the W Chapter 9 - HTML Frames so we changed our instructions to follow their lead. We may not make the rules, but we do know how to play the game! Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Three Presumptuous Assumptions by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

They say that making assumptions a pages) fool out of the person who makes them and the person who is John Wiley & Sons ©makes 2003 (408 subject to those assumptions (and just who are They, text-oriented anyway? We Web assume Whether your goal is to build a simple, site we know, but . . . never mind). Even so, practicality demands that we make a few assumptions about you, our gentle reader: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

You can turn your computer on and off. Table of You Contents know how to use a mouse and a keyboard. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

You want to build your own Web pages for fun, for profit, or for your job.

Introduction

Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

In addition, we assume you already have a working connection to the Internet, and one of the many fine

Chapter 1 - The Least You Know about HTML and thefrom Web that same Internet. You don’t need to be Web browsers available byNeed hook,toby crook, or by download Chapter 2 logician - HTMLorataWork on in the Web a master wizard the arcane arts of programming, nor do you need a Ph.D. in computer Chapter 3 You - Creating Your FirstaHTML Page science. don’t even need detailed sense of what’s going on in the innards of your computer to deal Part - Getting Started HTML withIIthe material in thiswith book.

Chapter 4

- Structuring Your HTML Documents If you can a sentence and know the difference between a heading and a paragraph, you’re better off Chapter 5 write - Linking to Online Resources

than nine of ten playground bullies — and you can build and publish your own documents on the Web. Chapter 6 out - Finding and Using Images If you have active imagination and the ability to communicate what’s important to you, even better — Chapter 7 -an Top Off Your Page with Formatting you’ve theNext key Level ingredients Part III -already Taking mastered HTML to the

necessary to build useful, attractive Web pages. The rest consists of details, and we help you with those! Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4Is forOrganized Dummies, 4th Edition How This Book by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

This book contains seven major parts, arranged like Russian Matrioshka,otherwise known as nesting John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) dolls: All these parts contain three or more chapters, each chapter several modular sections. Whether your goal is to build a simple,and text-oriented Webcontains site Any time you need help or information, pick up the book and start anywhere you like, or use the Table of or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepbook will put you on right track. Contents or Indexby-step to locate specific topics or the keywords. Here is a breakdown of the parts and what you find in each one. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

Part I: Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Introduction

Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

This part sets the stage and includes an overview of and introduction to the Web and the software that

Chapter Least You Need toThis Know aboutalso HTML and thehow Webthe Web works, including the HTML to people1use -toThe mine its treasures. section explains Chapter 2 book - HTML at Work on Web which this is devoted, andthe the server-side software and services that deliver information to end-users Chapter 3 us- are Creating (as all of whenYour we'reFirst not HTML doingPage battle with the logical innards of our systems). Part II - Getting Started with HTML

HTML documents, also called WebDocuments pages, are the fundamental units of information organization and Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML delivery5 on -the Web.toHere, you also discover what HTML is about and how hypertext can enrich ordinary Chapter Linking Online Resources text. Next, take aand walk on the Web side and build your very first HTML document. Chapter 6 you - Finding Using Images Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting

Part II: Getting Started with HTML

Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables HTML mixes ordinary text with special strings of characters, called markup, used to instruct browsers how Chapter 9 - HTML Frames

to display documents. In this part of the book, you find out about markup in general and HTML in Chapter 10 HTML - HTML Forms particular. We startHTML with with a fascinating discussion Part IV - Extending Other Technologies

of HTML document organization and structure (well . . . we think it's fascinating, and hope you do, too). Next, we tackle how the hyperlinks that put the H into Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS HTML work. After that we discuss how you can find and use graphical images in your Web pages, and Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting make some fancy formatting maneuvers to spruce up those pages. Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14 - this Integrating a Database Your HTML Throughout part of the book, weinto include discussion of HTML markup elements (also known as tags) Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup and how they work. Thus, at the same time you Languages learn how to lay out and design Web pages, you'll also Part V -about From the Web Page to Web Site markup learn not-so-mysterious

Chapter 16

that really makes HTML work.

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

By the time finishUp Part II, Online expectPresence to have a good overall idea of what HTML is, what it can do, and how Chapter 17 -you Setting Your you can18use- itCreating yourself. Chapter a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens

Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Part III: -Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 19 Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

PartVII III takes the same Part - Appendixes

approach used in Part II and kicks it up a notch. That is, it covers the ins and outs of

more complex collections Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags of markup - specifically tables, frames, and forms - and explores and explains them in B detail, with Character lots of examples, Appendix - HTML Codes to help you design and build commercial-grade HTML documents. You canCget- started Appendix Glossaryworking with related HTML tag syntax and structures that you need to know so you

can build complex Web pages. By the time you knock off this section, you'll be ready to create some pretty and sophisticated Web pages of your own.

Index

Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures

Part IV: Extending HTML with Other Technologies

List of Tables

List of Listings

By itself, HTML is good at handling text and graphics. But HTML's not terribly good at snazzing up the way such text and graphics look when they're on display, and HTML really can't do too much by itself. Because modern, savvy Web designers want to build interactive, dynamic Web pages, other add-ins and technologies help provide such characteristics within an HTML framework.

List of Sidebars

Thus, in this part of the book you learn about the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) markup language that can really add color and pizzazz to Web pages. You also learn about scripting languages that enable Web pages to interact with users in interesting ways, and that also provide ways to respond to user input or actions and to grab and massage data along the way. Next, we cover what's involved in adding audio,

video, or animations to your Web pages to bring them to life, as we explore various multimedia options that HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition work well on the Web. After that, we explore various ways you can grab data from a database and import it Edexplain Tittel and Natanya into a Web page,by and how HTMLPitts relates to other, moreISBN:0764519956 modern markup languages like the John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Extensible Markup Language (XML) and a recasting of HTML into XML form called the Extensible your(XHTML). goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Hypertext MarkupWhether Language or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

by-step book will we put combine you on the right track. Throughout this part of the book, examples, advice, and details to help you see and understand how these extra components can enhance and improve your Web site's capabilities - and your users' when visiting your pages. Table of experiences Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

Part V: From Web Page to Web Site

Introduction

Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

In this part, expand yourNeed viewto onKnow what's involved working with HTML. By themselves, Web pages Chapter 1 -we The Least You about HTMLinand the Web provide2the -focus activity Chapter HTMLfor at most Work real on the Web and development work when using HTML. But without some sense of how the sets of interlinked and interlocking Web pages known as Web sites work together, or a notion - Creating Your First HTML Page of how to design and manage collections of Web pages on a bigger scale, we wouldn't really be showing Part II - Getting Started with HTML you how to make the most of HTML. Chapter 3 Chapter 4

- Structuring Your HTML Documents

Chapter Linking to Online Resources Thus, in5 this- part of the book we explain how to manage collections of Web pages and work with entire Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images Web sites. We begin this adventure with a discussion of typical and useful HTML tools, and exploring the Chapter 7 of -aTop Off Web Your Page with Formatting contents typical professional's toolbox. We also explain what's involved in setting up a Web site Part III -and Taking HTML to the Next Level online, in arranging to share the fruits

of your labors with the world. Finally, we explain what's involved

Chapter 8 - an HTML Tables in designing entire Web site so that all its parts work together well, and so that users can understand Chapter how to 9find -their HTML way Frames around and get things done within your HTML documents. As always, we provide

ample examples illustrations to show you what to do, and how to make things work. Chapter 10 - HTMLand Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

GettingPart Stylishof with CSS Part VI:- The Tens

Chapter 11 Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter In the concluding 13 - Making part Multimedia of the book, Magic we sum up and distill the very essence of what you now know about the

mystic secrets of HTML.aHere, you review how to catch and kill potential bugs and errors in your pages Chapter 14 - Integrating Database into Your HTML before 15 anybody sees them,toget a second to review top do's and don'ts for HTML markup, and Chapter - Howelse HTML Relates Other Markupchance Languages canVperuse compendium top Part - From our Web Page to Web of Site Chapter 16

HTML resources available online.

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Up Your Online Presence Part VII:- Setting Appendixes

Chapter 17 Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

TheVIlast partPart of this book Part - The of Tens

ends with a set of appendixes designed to sum up and further expand on the book's contents. Appendix A is an alphabetical Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugslist of HTML tags, designed for easy access and reference. Appendix B contains a set of tables that Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts document the various kinds of character codes that you can use to cause kinds of special and interesting characters to appear within your Web pages. And finally, Part VII all - Appendixes Appendix a Glossary for the technical terms that appear in this book. Appendix A C- provides HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

By the time you make it through all the materials in the book, you'll be pretty well equipped to build your own Web documents and perhaps even ready to roll out your own Web site!

Appendix C - Glossary Index

Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

4 for Dummies, Icons UsedHTML in This Book 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

Technical Stuff John ThisWiley icon signals details that are informative and interesting, but not critical to & Sons ©technical 2003 (408 pages) writing HTML. Skip these if you want (but please, cometext-oriented back and read Whether your goal is to build a simple, Webthem site later). or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

Tip This icon flags useful information that HTML markup, Web page design, or other important by-step book will put you onmakes the right track. stuff even less complicated than you feared it might be. Table Remember of Contents This icon points out information you shouldn't pass by - don't overlook these gentle

reminders (the life, sanity, or page you save could be your own). HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction

Warning Be cautious when you see this icon. It warns you of things you shouldn't do; consequences can be severe if you ignore the accompanying bit of wisdom.

Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2 Web - HTML Work on thethis Web On The Textatmarked with icon contains information about something that can be found on this Chapter - Creating Your First HTML book's 3companion Web site. You can Page find all the code examples in this book, for starters. Simply visit the Part II - section Gettingof Started with HTML(www.dummies.com/extras) Extras Dummies.com

and click the link for this book. We also

Chapter - Structuring use this4 icon to point out Your greatHTML WebDocuments resources we think you'll find useful. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources

Tricks6of the Tradeand The information Chapter - Finding Using Images highlighted with this icon gives best practices - advice that we wish we'd had started out! The techniques here can save you time and money on migraine Chapter 7 when - Topwe Offfirst Your Page with Formatting medication. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4 for Here Dummies, 4th Edition Where to Go from by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

This is the part where you pick a direction andpages) hit the road! HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition, is a lot like John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 the parable of theWhether six blindyour mengoal andisthe elephant: Where you start out matter; you'll look at lots of to build a simple, text-oriented Webdoesn't site different parts as or you prepare yourself to build your own Web pages and each part has a distinctive one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on theDon't rightworry. track. You can handle it. Who cares if anybody else nature, but the whole is something else again. thinks you're just goofing around? We know you're getting ready to have the time of your life. Table of Contents Enjoy! HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

Chapter 3

- Creating Your First HTML Page

Part II - Getting Started with HTML

Chapter 4

- Structuring Your HTML Documents

Chapter 5

- Linking to Online Resources

Chapter 6

- Finding and Using Images

Chapter 7

- Top Off Your Page with Formatting

Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Part I: Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

In This Part: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

Chapter 1: The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Table of Contents

2: HTML4th at Edition Work on the Web HTML Chapter 4 For Dummies, Introduction

Chapter 3: Creating Your First HTML Page

Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

In this part . . .Your First HTML Page - Creating

Chapter 3

Part II - Getting Started with HTML

This part introduces you to the Hypertext Markup Language, a.k.a. HTML. It explains the basic principles - Structuring Your HTML Documents behind the way HTML works, including the markup to which this book is primarily devoted. It covers how Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources HTML makes Web pages work, surveys how full-scale Web sites work, and offers pointers for taking best Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images advantage of HTML's many capabilities. We conclude this part with some thrilling hands-on exposure to Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting HTML, as you design, build, save, and view your very own first Web page. Chapter 4

Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8

- HTML Tables

Chapter 9

- HTML Frames

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 1: The Least You Need ISBN:0764519956 to Know about HTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) and the Web

Overview

Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

In This Chapter Table of Contents

HTML in text files HTML Creating 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction

Serving and browsing Web pages

Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Understanding links and URLs Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

Understanding basic syntax Chapter 3 - Creating YourHTML First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML

Welcome to- the wonderful world of the Web and HTML. With just a little bit of knowledge, some practice, Structuring Your HTML Documents and, of course, something to say, you too can build your own little piece of cyberspace or expand on work Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources you've already done. This book is your down-and-dirty guide to putting together your first Web page, Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images sprucing up an existing Web page, or creating complex and exciting pages that integrate intricate designs, Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting multimedia, scripting, and more. Chapter 4

Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Chapter 8 way - HTML The best to getTables started working with HTML is to jump right in, so that's what this chapter does: It brings Chapter - HTML you up 9to speed onFrames the basics of how HTML works behind the scenes of Web pages, introducing you to Chapter HTML's10building - HTML blocks. FormsWhen you're done here, you'll have a good idea of just how HTML works so you Part canIV start - Extending creating Web HTMLpages with Other right Technologies away.

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting

Chapter 13

- Making Multimedia Magic

Chapter 14

- Integrating a Database into Your HTML

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter 16

- Creating an HTML Toolbox

Chapter 17

- Setting Up Your Online Presence

Chapter 18

- Creating a Great User Interface

Part VI - The Part of Tens

Chapter 19

- Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

Chapter 20

- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

Part VII - Appendixes

Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

4 for Dummies, Edition IntroducingHTML Web Pages in 4th Their Natural Habitat by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

ISBN:0764519956

Web pages can contain many different kinds of content: John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Text Graphics

Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

Forms Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

Audio and video files

Introduction

Part IInteractive - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment games

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

And that's a partial list. on Browse the Web for just a little while, and you'll come across a veritable Chapter 2 just - HTML at Work the Web smorgasbord of information and content displayed in various ways. And although every Web site is Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page different, each has one thing in common: Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4

Structuring Your HTML Documents That's right,- no matter what information a Web page may contain, every single Web page is created using

Chapter - Linking to Online Resources HTML. 5Consider HTML to be the mortar that creates a Web page's structure; the graphics, content, and Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images other information are the bricks. But what exactly is HTML and how does it work? Read on to find out. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

Using hypertext to add structure to Web pages - HTML Tables

Chapter 8

Chapter 9 -are HTML Frames Web pages nothing more than text documents. In fact, that's what makes the Web work as well as it Chapter 10 HTML Forms does. Text is the universal language of computers, which means that any text file (including a Web page) Part - Extending with Other Technologies thatIV you create on HTML a Windows computer works equally

well on a system running the Mac OS, Linux, Unix,

Chapter 11 - operating Getting Stylish with CSS or any other system. Chapter 12

- HTML and Scripting Okay, so pagesMultimedia aren't merely text documents. They're documents made with text of a special, Chapter 13 Web - Making Magic

attention-deprived, sugar-loaded kind. is a collection of instructions you include along with your Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database intoHTML Your HTML content15 in a- plain-text file that specifies yourLanguages page should look and behave. If this doesn't make sense Chapter How HTML Relates to Other how Markup to you well, to it will. Part V - right Fromnow Web- Page Web Site Chapter 16

an HTML Toolbox Remember- Creating Hypertext or not, a Web page's status as a text file means you can create and edit it in any

Chapter 17 -that Setting Up Your Presence application creates plainOnline text (such as Notepad or SimpleText). In fact, when you're getting started with Chapter - Creating Great HTML, 18 a text editor is athe bestUser tool Interface to start with. Just break out Notepad, and you're ready to go. There are, Part VI - Thea Part Tens of of course, wideofvariety

software tools with fancy options and applications (which we discuss in Chapter

Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to create Exterminate Bugs 16) designed to help you Web Web pages, but essentially, they generate text files just as plain-text Chapter editors 20 do. - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

Web browsers were specifically for the purpose of reading HTML instructions and displaying the Appendix A - HTML 4 created Tags resultingBpage accordingly. example, take a look at the Web page shown in Figure 1-1 and make a Appendix - HTML CharacterFor Codes quick mental list of everything you see. Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

ISBN:0764519956

Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

Chapter 3

- Creating Your First HTML Page

Part II - Getting Started with HTML

Chapter Figure 4 -1-1: Structuring This Web Your page HTML hasDocuments several different components. Chapter 5

- Linking to Online Resources The components on and this Using page Images include an image, a heading that describes the information on the page, a Chapter 6 - Finding

paragraph of text about red wine, and a list of common varietals. Notice, however, that different - Top Off Your Page with Formatting components of the page have different formatting. The heading at the top of the page is larger than the Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level text in the paragraph, and the items in the list have bullet points before them. The browser knows to Chapter 8 - HTML Tables display these different components of the page in specific ways thanks to the HTML, which looks like Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Listing 1-1. Chapter 7

Chapter 10

- HTML Forms

Part IV - Extending HTMLHTML with Other Technologies Listing 1-1: Sample Markup

Chapter 11

- Getting Stylish with CSS

Chapter 15

- How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Wine Varietals Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

Chapter

Red Setting Up Your Online Presence Grapes Chapter 18

- Understanding Creating a Great User Interface Red Wine Varietals

Part VI

- The Part of Tens

Chapter

Although 19 - Ten Wayswines to Exterminate Webbe Bugs tend to generically categorized as Chapter 20 either - Ten HTML "white" Do’s andor Don’ts "red," in reality, there is a Part VII - Appendixes collection

of wine varietals each with its own

characteristics. The red category Appendix A distinguishing - HTML 4 Tags a robust Appendix B includes - HTML Character Codescollection of over 20 varietals, Appendix C including: - Glossary Index



    - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Cheat Sheet
  • Barbera
  • Brunello
  • List of Tables
  • Cabernet Franc
  • List of Listings
  • Cabernet Sauvignon
  • List of Sidebars
  • Carignan
  • Carmenere
  • Charbono
  • Dolcetto
  • Gamay
  • Grenache
  • Malbrec
  • Merlot
  • List of Figures

  • Mourvedre
  • HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition
  • Neebiolo
  • ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts
  • Petite Sirah
  • John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)
  • Pinot Noir
  • Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site
  • Sangiovese
  • or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step
  • Syrah
  • by-step book will put you on the right track.
  • Tempranillo
  • Zinfandel
Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

Chapter 1

- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

Chapter 2

- HTML at Work on the Web

The text enclosed in the less-than and greater-than signs (< >) is the HTML (often referred to as the - Creating Your First HTML Page markup). For example, the

...

markup identifies the text about red varietals as a paragraph, Part II - Getting Started with HTML and the
  • ...
  • markup identifies each item in the list of varietals. And that's really all there is to Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents it. You embed the markup in a text file along with your text to let the browser know how to display your Chapter 5 Web page. - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 3

    Chapter 6

    - Finding and Using Images

    Chapter Tip We 7 delve - Top into Offthe Your basic Pagesyntax with Formatting of markup a bit later in the chapter in the section 'Introducing HTML Part Syntax III -and Taking Rules.' HTML For tonow, the Next what's Level important

    is that you understand that markup lives inside of a text file

    along with content to give instructions to a browser. Chapter 8 your - HTML Tables Chapter 9

    - HTML Frames

    HTML Forms Using a- server to host your pages

    Chapter 10

    Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

    Chapter Your HTML 11 -pages Gettingwouldn't Stylish with be much CSS good if you couldn't share them with the rest of the world, and Web

    servers12 make that possible. A Web server is a computer that's connected to the Internet, has Web server Chapter - HTML and Scripting software and can respond Chapter 13installed, - Making Multimedia Magicto requests for particular pages from Web browsers. Chapter 14

    - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

    Remember Just about any computer can be a Web server, including your home computer; however, - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Web servers are generally computers dedicated to the task. Although you don't have to be an Internet or Part V - From Web Page to Web Site computer guru to put your Web pages out so anyone can access them, you do have to find a Web server Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox for your Web pages. If you're building pages for a company Web site, you may already have a Web server Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence to put them on; you just have to ask your IT guru for the information. However, if you're starting a new site Chapter - Creating a Great Interface for fun 18 or for profit, you'll needUser to find a host for your pages. Chapter 15

    Part VI - The Part of Tens

    Chapter Tip Web 19 hosting - Ten Ways is a big to Exterminate business these Webdays, Bugs so finding an inexpensive host is easy. We lay out all of the

    details 20 on figuring out what hosting needs are and finding the perfect provider in Chapter 17. Chapter - Ten HTML Do’s your and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

    Understanding basic browser technology

    Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

    Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

    Appendix The lastCpiece - Glossary of the Web puzzle is a Web browser. Web browsers take instructions written in HTML and

    use these instructions to display a Web page's content on your screen. Think of it this way: Microsoft Word Index documents best using Microsoft Word. You can use other word-processing programs (or even Cheat Sheet -are HTML 4 viewed For Dummies, 4th Edition different versions of Word) to view Word documents, and for the most part, the documents look pretty List of Figures much the same. This concept applies to HTML documents. You should always write your HTML with the List of Tables idea people will be viewing the content using a Web browser. Just remember that there's more than List of that Listings one kind of browser out there, and each one comes in several versions.

    List of Sidebars

    Usually, Web browsers request and display Web pages available via the Internet from a Web server, but you can also display HTML pages you've saved on your own computer before making them available on a Web server on the Internet. When you're developing your own HTML pages, you view these pages (called local pages), in your browser. You can use local pages to get a good idea of what people see when the page goes live on the Internet. Remember The most important thing to remember about Web browsers is that each browser interprets

    HTML in its own way. The same HTML doesn't look exactly the same from one browser to another. When HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition you're working with basic HTML, the variances aren't significant, but when you start integrating other byscripting Ed Tittel and and Natanya Pitts things get a little ISBN:0764519956 elements (such as multimedia), hairy. The bottom line is that the browser John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408pages pages) look, so you should concentrate on creating solid has the ultimate control over how your Web goalrest. is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site HTML and let theWhether browseryour do the or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

    A bevy of browsers

    The Web world is full of browsers of many shapes and sizes - or rather versions and feature-sets. The two most popular browsers available today are Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition (sometimes called Mozilla), but there are others like Opera and Amaya in use as well. As a user, you Introduction have probably chosen a browser you like best, but as an HTML developer you have to think beyond Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment your own browser needs. Every user has his or her own browser preference and browser settings.

    Table of Contents

    Chapter 1

    - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

    Chapter - HTML Workmore on the Web To 2make thingsateven complicated (or challenging if you choose to see the glass as half-full), Chapter 3 browser - Creating Your First each renders your HTML HTMLPage just a bit differently. In addition, every browser handles JavaScript, Part II - Getting Started with HTML multimedia, style sheets, and other

    HTML add-ins just a bit differently. When you throw in different

    Chapter operating 4 - Structuring systems (Mac Youror HTML Windows), Documents things get really fun. Most of the time, the differences in the way

    two5 browsers display the same HTML will be negligible, but other times, a particular combination of Chapter - Linking to Online Resources HTML, and and media may bring a particular browser to its knees. Chapter 6 -text, Finding Using Images Chapter 7

    - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

    The bottom line is as you begin to work more with HTML, you'll need to test your pages on as many different browsers as you can manage. You should install two or three different browsers on your own Chapter 8 - HTML Tables system (we recommend the latest versions of Internet Explorer, Netscape, and Opera) for testing Chapter 9 - HTML Frames purposes. To access a fairly complete list of the browser's available, visit Yahoo!'s Web browser Chapter 10 - HTML Forms category (http://dir.yahoo.com/Computersand_Internet/Software/Internet/ Part IV Extending HTML with Other Technologies World_Wide_Web/Browsers/_ ). Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

    Chapter 11

    - Getting Stylish with CSS

    Chapter 12

    - HTML and Scripting

    Chapter 13

    - Making Multimedia Magic Tip In14 Chapter 3, you find out how to use a Web Chapter - Integrating a Database into Your HTMLbrowser to view a local copy of your first Web page. You

    can choose ofRelates severaltoWeb browsers to view your pages, but we suggest that you start with the Chapter 15 - from How one HTML Other Markup Languages browser you Web use now Web. Part V - From Pageto tosurf Webthe Site

    That way you don't have to get used to a new browser andget comfortable with HTML all at the same Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox time. Chapter 17

    - Setting Up Your Online Presence Tricks of the Trade Most people view the Web with graphical browsers (such as Netscape or Internet Chapter 18 that - Creating Great User Explorer) display aimages, text Interface formatting, complex layouts, and more. However, some people prefer to Part VI The Part of Tens use text-only browsers (such as Lynx) because they're visually impaired and can't take advantage of a Chapter 19 display - Ten Ways to Exterminate Bugs graphical or because they likeWeb a lean, mean Web server that just displays content. Even if you Chapter 20 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts choose to view the Web with a graphical browser, you should always be sensitive to the fact that at least Part VIIof - Appendixes some the viewers of your page will only see your page in text. Chapter 18 includes more information on Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags how to make your Web page accessible to everyone regardless of the type of browser they choose to use. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary

    Understanding how hyperlinks make the Web the Web

    Index

    Cheat Sheet Wide - HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition The World Web comes by its4th name honestly. It's quite literally a Web of HTML pages hosted on List of Figures Web servers around the world, connected in a million different ways. Of course, those connections aren't List made of Tables with spider webbing, but are instead created by hyperlinks that connect one page to the next.

    Without those links (as they're called for short), the Web could still exist, but rather than being a collection List of Listings of interrelated List of Sidebars pages that users can easily traverse, it would just be a group of standalone pages. In fact, a healthy portion of the Web's value is its ability to link to pages and other resources (such as images, downloadable files, and media presentations) on the same Web site or on another one. For example, FirstGov (www.firstgov.gov) is a gatewayWeb site - its sole function is to provide access to other Web sites. If you aren't sure which government agency handles first-time loans for homebuyers, or want to know how to arrange a tour of the Capital, you can visit this site (shown in Figure 1-2) to find out.

    HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

    ISBN:0764519956

    Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

    Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

    Chapter 1

    - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

    Chapter 2

    - HTML at Work on the Web

    Chapter 3

    - Creating Your First HTML Page

    Part II - Getting Started with HTML

    Chapter Figure 4 -1-2: Structuring FirstGovYour is a HTML gateway Documents that uses hyperlinks to help visitors find government information on

    the5Web. Chapter - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

    - Finding and Using Images

    Chapter 7

    Stuff Introducing Internet protocols - Top Off Your Page Technical with Formatting

    Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

    Interactions between browsers and servers are made possible by a set of computer-communication - HTML Tables instructions called the Hyper-text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) protocol. This protocol defines all the rules Chapter 9 - HTML Frames about how browsers should request Web pages and how Web servers should respond to those Chapter 10 - HTML Forms requests. Chapter 8

    Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

    Chapter HTTP 11 isn't - Getting the only Stylish protocol with CSS at work on the Internet. The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and

    Post Protocol (POP) protocols make e-mail exchange possible, and the File Transfer Protocol Chapter 12Office - HTML and Scripting (FTP) youMultimedia to upload,Magic download, move, copy, and delete files and folders across the Internet. Chapter 13 allows - Making The news is that Web browsers and servers do all of the HTTP work for you, so you don't have Chapter 14good - Integrating a Database into Your HTML to do moreRelates than put onLanguages a server or type a Web address into a browser to take Chapter 15 anything - How HTML to your Otherpages Markup of Page this protocol. Part Vadvantage - From Web to Web Site Chapter 16

    - Creating an HTML Toolbox

    If you're interested in how HTTP works, we recommend Webmonkey's article 'HTTP Trans-actions - Setting Up Your Online Presence and You' at

    Chapter 17 Chapter 18

    - Creating a Great User Interface

    Part VI - The Part of Tens

    http://hotwired.lycos.com/ webmonkey/geektalk/97/06/index4a.html

    Chapter 19

    - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

    Chapter 20

    - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

    Part VII for -aAppendixes good overview.

    Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

    4 for Dummies, 4th Edition IntroducingHTML URLs by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

    ISBN:0764519956

    The Web is madeJohn up of millions of ©resources, each of them linkable. Knowing a page's (or some other Wiley & Sons 2003 (408 pages) resource's) exactWhether location your is thegoal keyistotocreating a successful hyperlink tosite it. Also, without the exact address build a simple, text-oriented Web (called a Uniformor Resource Locator or URL), you can't use the Address bar one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-in a Web browser to visit a book will put you on the right track. Web site or Web by-step page directly. Remember URLs provide the standard addressing system for resources on the Web. Each resource Table of Contents (whether Web page, site, or individual file) has a unique URL. URLs work a lot like your postal address. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition For example, your address includes some general information, such as the state and city you live in, but Introduction then it narrows to specify what street you live on, and then what building, and maybe which apartment in Part - MeetingAnd HTML in Its Natural Environment thatIbuilding. if that isn't specific enough, when

    you add your name to the address, you have a very

    Chapter - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web precise1definition of to whom a piece of mail is supposed to go. Chapter 2

    - HTML at Work on the Web A URL 3uses- aCreating similar Your approach to zero in on its destination: It begins with generic information and includes Chapter First HTML Page

    increasingly specific information Part II - Getting Started with HTMLuntil

    it points to a single, unique file on the Web. Figure 1-3 identifies the components of a URL. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5

    - Linking to Online Resources

    Chapter 6

    - Finding and Using Images

    Chapter 7

    - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

    Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

    Chapter 8

    - HTML Tables

    Chapter 9

    - HTML Frames

    Chapter 10

    - HTML Forms

    Figure 1-3: The components of a URL help it define the exact location of a single file on the Web.

    Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

    Chapter 11 - Getting with CSS Each component of aStylish URL plays a particular role in defining the location of a Web page or other Web Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting resource: Chapter 13

    - Making Multimedia Magic Protocol: This portion of the link specifies which protocol the browser should follow when it requests Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

    the15 file.- The for Web pagesMarkup is http:// (the familiar precursor to most Web URLs). Chapter Howprotocol HTML Relates to Other Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

    Domain: This part of the link points to the general Web site (such as www.sun.com) where the file - Creating an HTML Toolbox resides. A single domain may host a few files (as does a personal Web site) or millions (as does a Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence corporate site like www.sun.com). Chapter 16 Chapter 18

    - Creating a Great User Interface

    Part VI - TheThis Partpart of Tens Path: of the link

    names the sequence of folders through which you have to navigate before

    Chapter you19get- to Ten a particular Ways to Exterminate file. For example, Web Bugs to get to a file in the evangcentral folder that resides in the

    developers folder, you would use the /developers/evangcentral/ path. Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

    Filename: The4name Appendix A - HTML Tags of the file specifies exactly which file in a directory path the browser should access.

    Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix - Glossary The URLC shown in Figure 1-3 points to the Sun domain and offers a path that leads to a specific file Index namedbios.html: Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures

    http://www.sun.com/developers/evangcentral/bios.html

    List of Tables List of Listings Tip Chapter 5 provides the complete details on how you use HTML and URLs to add hyperlinks to your List Web of Sidebars pages, and Chapter 17 discusses how to obtain a URL for your own Web site after you're ready

    move it to a Web server.

    4 for Syntax Dummies, 4th Edition IntroducingHTML HTML and Rules by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

    ISBN:0764519956

    All things considered, HTML&isSons a very straightforward language for describing the contents of a Web page. Its John Wiley © 2003 (408 pages) components are Whether easy to use and when you know how to use a little bit of your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web siteHTML, the rest follows naturally. HTML has three main components: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

    Elements: Identify different pieces and parts of an HTML page. Table of Attributes: ContentsProvide additional information about an instance of an element. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

    Entities: Represent non-ASCII text characters such as copyright symbols (©) and accented letters (É). (See Appendix B for more details.) Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Introduction

    Chapter 1 of -HTML The Least You that Needyou to Know HTML a and thepage's Web content includes some combination of elements, Every bit markup used about to describe Web Chapter 2 and - HTML at Work on the Web attributes, entities. Chapter 3

    - Creating Your First HTML Page

    TipII The following sections cover Part - Getting Started with HTML

    the basic form and syntax for elements, attributes, and entities. All the chapters in

    Parts II4and-IIIStructuring of the book include on how to use elements and attributes to do the following: Chapter Your HTMLdetails Documents Chapter 5

    - Linking to Online Resources

    Chapter 6

    - Finding and Using Images

    Describe particular kinds of text (such as paragraphs or tables)

    Chapter 7 -aTop Off Your Pageon with Create particular effect theFormatting page (such as changing a font style) Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

    Add and links to a page Chapter 8 images - HTML Tables Chapter 9

    - HTML Frames

    - HTML Forms Elements

    Chapter 10

    Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

    Elements at the core of with HTML, Chapter 11 are - Getting Stylish CSSand you use them to describe every piece of text on your page. Elements are made up and anScripting element may have either a start and end tag, or just a start tag. Here's how you know which Chapter 12 of-tags, HTML and kind of 13 tag or tags toMultimedia use: Chapter - Making Magic Chapter 14

    - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

    Elements that describe content use a tag pair: Content like paragraphs, headings, tables, and lists always - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages use a tag pair that follows the same syntax:

    Chapter 15

    Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

    Chapter 16

    - Creating an HTML Toolbox

    Chapter 17

    - Setting Up Your Online Presence

    ...

    Chapter - Creating a Great Interface For 18 example, the red wineUser varietal page in Listing 1-1 used the paragraph element (

    ) to describe a Part paragraph: VI - The Part of Tens

    Chapter 19

    - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

    Chapter 20

    - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

    Although wines tend to be generically categorized as either "white" or "red," in reality, there is a collection of wine varietals each with Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags its own distinguishing characteristics. The red category includes a Appendix B - HTML Character Codes robust collection of over 20 varietals, including: Appendix C -

    Glossary Part VII - Appendixes

    Index

    paragraph uses a tag pair (that is, two tags, one at the start and the other at the end) CheatRemember Sheet - HTMLThe 4 For Dummies,element 4th Edition toFigures surround the text of the paragraph. Think of the start tag as an on switch that says to the browser, 'The List of paragraph begins here' - and the end tag as an off switch that says, 'The paragraph ends here.' List of Tables List of Listings

    Elements that insert something into the page use one tag: Content like an image or a line break always uses a single tag:

    List of Sidebars

    Listing 1-1 also uses the image element () to include an image on the page: Red Grapes
    align="middle" hspace="5"> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 The element by Ed Tittel usesand a single Natanya tag Pitts (called an empty element) to reference an image. When the browser displays the page, John it Wiley replaces & Sons the © 2003 (408 element pages) with the file that it points to (it uses an attribute to do the pointing, whichWhether we discuss your next). goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

    or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you the own rightHTML track. elements. The elements that are legal in HTML form a Warning You can't go around making uponyour very specific set - if you try to use elements that aren't part of the HTML set, every browser in the universe will ignore them. The actual set of elements you can use is defined in the HTML 4.01 specification, discussed later in this Table of Contents chapter. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

    Introduction Many page structures (like the list of red wines you saw earlier) use combinations of elements to describe part of Part yourI -page. Meeting In the HTML case in of ItsaNatural bulletedEnvironment list, for example,

    the
      element specifies that the list is unordered (bulleted),

      and
    • mark in theabout list. HTML and the Web Chapter 1 elements - The Least Youeach Needitem to Know Chapter 2

      - HTML at Work on the Web

      Tip When-you combine elements by this method (called nesting), be sure you close the inside element completely Creating Your First HTML Page before you close the outside element: Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 3 Chapter 4

      - Structuring Your HTML Documents

        5 Chapter

        - Linking to Online Resources

      • Barbera
      • Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images
      • Brunello
      • - Top Off Your Page with Formatting
      Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 7 Chapter 8

      - HTML Tables Think of your elements as suitcases that fit neatly within one another, and you can't go wrong.

      Chapter 9

      - HTML Frames

      Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Attributes

      Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Chapter 11

      - Getting Stylish with CSS

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Attributes allow variety in the way an element describes content or works on the page. Think of attributes as Chapter 12 an - HTML andso Scripting extending element you can use it differently depending on the circumstances. For example, the Chapter 13uses - Making Multimedia element the src attribute Magic to specify the location of the image you want to include at a particular spot on your Chapter 14 Integrating a Database into Your HTML page: Part V - From Web Page to Web Site



      Chapter 16 Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter In this bit 18of-HTML, Creating thea Great User element Interface itself is a general flag to the browser that you want to include an image; the Part srcVIattribute - The Part provides of Tens the

      specifics on the image you want to include, red_grapes.jpg in this instance. Other

      attributes width, height,align, and hspace) provide information about how to display the image, and Chapter 19 (such - Tenas Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs thealt20 attribute a text to the image if the browser doesn't display the image. Chapter - Ten provides HTML Do’s and alternative Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

      Tip Chapter 6 discusses the element and its attributes in detail.

      Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

      Appendix B -include HTML Character You always attributesCodes within the start tag of the element you want them to go with - after the element name Appendix C the - Glossary but before closing greater-than sign, like this: Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition



      List of Figures List of Tables Remember Attribute values must always appear in quotation marks, but you can include the attributes and their List values of Listings in any order within the start tag. List of Sidebars

      Every HTML element has a collection of attributes that can be used with it, and you can't mix and match attributes and elements. Some attributes can take any text as a value because the value could be anything, like the location of an image or a page you want to link to. Others have a specific list of values the attribute can take, such as your options for aligning text in a table cell. The HTML 4.01 specification defines exactly which attributes you can use with any given element and which values (if explicitly defined) each attribute can take. Tip Each chapter in Parts II and III of the book covers which attributes you can use with each HTML element.

      Entities

      HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

      ISBN:0764519956

      Although text makes the Web possible, it does have its limitations. There are characters that basic ASCII text doesn't John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) include, such as trademark symbols, fractions, and accented characters. For example, the list of white wine varietals Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site shown in Figure 1-4 includes two accented e characters (é) and two u characters with umlauts (ü). or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter 2

      - HTML at Work on the Web

      Chapter 3

      - Creating Your First HTML Page

      Part II - Getting Started with HTML

      Chapter 4

      - Structuring Your HTML Documents

      Chapter 5

      - Linking to Online Resources

      Chapter 6

      - Finding and Using Images

      Chapter 7

      - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

      Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Chapter 8

      - HTML Tables

      Chapter 9

      - HTML Frames

      Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Figure 1-4: ASCII test can't represent all text characters so HTML entities do instead.

      Part IV - Extending HTML withinclude Other Technologies Because ASCII text doesn't either the accented

      e or the umlauted u, the HTML uses entities to represent

      Chapter 11 - Getting with CSS them instead. When Stylish the browser comes across the entity, it replaces it with the character it references. Every entity Chapter begins 12 with -an HTML ampersand and Scripting (&) and ends with a semicolon (;). The following markup shows the entities in bold: Chapter 13

      - Making Multimedia Magic

      Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Part V - From WebVarietals Page to Web Site Wine<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox </head> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> <body18bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> Chapter - Creating a Great User Interface Varietals</h2> Part<h2>White VI - The Part of Tens <ul> Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter<li> 20 - Chardonnay</li> Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts <li>Chenin Part VII - Appendixes Blanc</li> <li>Fumé Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Blanc</li> <li>Gewürztraminer</li> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes <li>Grüner Veltliner</li> Appendix C - Glossary <li>Marsanne</li> Index <li>Muscat</li> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <li>Pinot Blanc</li> List of Figures <li>Pinot Gris</li> List of Tables <li>Reisling</li> List of Listings <li>Sauvignon Blanc</li> List of Sidebars <li>Sémillon</li> <li>Trebbiano</li> <li>Viognie</li> </ul> </body> </html><br /> <br /> The entity that represents the e with the acute accent is é and the entity that represents the umlauted u is HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ü. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wileythe & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) lays out exactly which entity you use to replace every non-ASCII Tip As you might expect, HTML specification character the specification supports. includes a complete listsite of characters and the entities you use to Whether your goal is Appendix to build a B simple, text-oriented Web one HTML. loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this steprepresent them inoryour by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> In addition to non-ASCII characters, you also use entities to represent the characters that HTML uses to differentiate itself from the text around it:<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML less-than 4 For Dummies, 4th < Edition sign (<): Introduction<br /> <br /> sign (>):Natural > Environment Part Igreater-than - Meeting HTML in Its Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> ampersand (&): &<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 - Creating Your have First HTML Page Remember As you may noticed, the < and > signs are used all the time as part of the markup, but these Part II - Getting Started with HTML symbols are instructions to the browser<br /> <br /> and won't actually show up on the page. So if you ever need these symbols<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 on - Structuring Your you HTML Documents to appear the Web page, have to include the entities for them in your page, like this: Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6 paragraph - Finding andelement Using Images <p>The identifies some text as a paragraph:</p> Chapter 7 - Top Off Your with Formatting <p><p>This isPage a paragraph.</p></p> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> In the first of the following markup, we use tags to describe a simple paragraph. The second line shows how to Chapter 8 line - HTML Tables use entities describe the < and > symbols. Figure 1-5 shows how the browser converts these entities to characters Chapter 9 -toHTML Frames to show10the-results of your markup in a browser window. Chapter HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Figure Part VI - The 1-5: Part Always of Tens use<br /> <br /> entities when you want to display a less-than sign, greater-than sign, or ampersand in the browser window. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4Specification for Dummies, 4th Edition The HTML 4.01 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The HTML 4.01 specification the ©rulebook of HTML - it tells you exactly which elements you can use, John Wiley & is Sons 2003 (408 pages) which attributes go with those elements, and you use elementsWeb in combinations to create lists, forms, Whether your goal is to build how a simple, text-oriented site tables frames, and other page structures. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> The HTML specification uses Document Type Definitions (DTDs) written in the Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML) - the granddaddy of all markup - to define the details of HTML. In its earlier Table of Contents versions, HTML used elements for formatting; over time, developers realized that formatting needed its HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition own 4language (now called Cascading Style Sheets, or CSS) and that HTML elements should just describe Introduction a page's structure. That's how the three flavors of HTML that the specification includes came to be: Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> HTML version of HTML that includes elements to describe font faces and page Chapter 1 -Transitional: The Least YouANeed to Know about HTML and the Web colors. represents a version that accounts for formatting elements in older versions Chapter 2 -HTML HTML Transitional at Work on the Web of HTML. Formatting HTML Transitional are deprecated (considered obsolete) because Chapter 3 - Creating Yourelements First HTMLinPage the W3C would likewith to see HTML Part II - Getting Started HTML<br /> <br /> developers move away from them and to a combination of HTML Strict and CSS. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 -Strict: Linking OnlineofResources HTML A to version HTML that doesn't include any elements that describe formatting. This Chapter 6 Finding and Using version is designed to workImages with CSS driving the page formatting. Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Tip The CSS-with-HTML Part III - Taking HTML to the NextStrict Levelapproach<br /> <br /> is an ambitious way to build Web pages, but in practice it has its pros and cons. CSS provides more control over your page formatting, but creating style sheets Chapter 8 - HTML Tables that work well in all browsers can be tricky. Chapter 11 discusses style sheets and the issues around Chapter 9 - HTML Frames using them in more detail. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> HTML Frameset: A version of HTML that includes frames, which is markup that allows you to display - Getting Stylish with CSS more than one Web page or resource at a time in the same browser window.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter - Making Multimedia Magic in HTML Transitional; thus you can choose to use elements from it All Web13browsers support all elements Chapter or stick14 with- HTML Integrating Strictainstead. Database If you into use Yourframes, HTML you'll technically be working with HTML Frameset, but<br /> <br /> all of the workRelates in the same way. Chapter 15elements - How HTML to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> In this book,- we cover all HTML tags in all versions, lumping them into a single category (aptly called Creating an HTML Toolbox HTML) because all real-world Web browsers support these three flavors - and they're extremely unlikely to Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence withdraw support for HTML Transitional or HTML Frameset any time soon. What this means is you have a Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface large assortment of elements to choose from when you create your HTML, so you can build the best Part VI - The Part of Tens possible Web page. Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter - Tenyou'll HTMLfind Do’salland Tip Of20course, theDon’ts details of the HTML elements, their attributes, and their usage here in this Part - Appendixes veryVII book - so you don't<br /> <br /> have to struggle with reading DTDs or arcane technical specifications if you want<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML 4 Tags to learn AHTML. Even so, if you ever want to go to the source, it's good to know where the horse's mouth is Appendix and what B it -says. HTMLYou Character can review Codes the HTML 4.01 specification and the HTML DTDs at<br /> <br /> www.w3.org/TR/html4. Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 2: HTML at Work on theISBN:0764519956 Web by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Understanding how others are using HTML Table of Contents<br /> <br /> what you your Web page to do for you HTML Deciding 4 For Dummies, 4thwant Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Thinking about your page design and features<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Planning for future expansion Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> HTML is straightforward, and it's pretty simple to create a tag or two and throw some text in - which Chapter 3 rather - Creating Your First HTML Page is great if you want to create a one-line Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Web page. However, there's much more to building a Web page than just creating a couple of tags and adding Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents some text. Even the simplest Web page is a well-planned collection of textResources with images thrown in for good measure. Chapter 5 - elements Linking to and Online Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images In the end, your goal is to use HTML to put information on the Web. Whether you want to sell a product, Chapter 7 - clients Top Offmore Your Page tell potential aboutwith yourFormatting services, or share Christmas pictures, be sure you have a clear idea Part III Taking HTML to the Next of what you want HTML to do for Level you. When you have that firmly in mind, it's just a matter of using the right Chapter 8 get - HTML Tables HTML to the result you're looking for (which is what the majority of this book is about, of course). Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames This chapter looks Forms at what others are doing with HTML on the Web - it may spark your imagination if you Chapter 10 - HTML<br /> <br /> don't a Web HTML page goal in mind just yet, or help Part IVhave - Extending with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> you refine your ideas if you do. Then we take a look<br /> <br /> at how 11 you -might want to use different Chapter Getting Stylish with CSS elements such as images, multimedia, and even (gasp) programming in your page so you can bring your Web-page plan closer to its final form. Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> You don't have to know exactly how your page will behave or how it will look before you start creating - Integrating a Database into Your HTML HTML. In fact, you'll soon discover that Web pages are constantly evolving entities that take on a life of Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates Otherplan Markup Languages their own. Even so, if you have atobasic in mind, you'll be able to better direct your HTML work and Part V From Web Page to Web Site focus first on those elements and attributes that you need most. You can pick up other elements as your Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox page requires. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th HTML Edition What Others Are Doing with by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Spend a few moments surfing the Web John Wiley & Sons © 2003and (408you'll pages) quickly see how others are using HTML. From news sites to online stores to personal home pages, people around Whether your goal is to build a HTML simple,helps text-oriented Web sitethe world share information of incalculable variety. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Building Web pages and Web sites Table of Contents<br /> <br /> At its4heart, the Web 4th is aEdition collection of Web pages, all built with HTML. Although Web technologies have HTML For Dummies,<br /> <br /> greatly evolved to include complex programming, streaming multimedia, and intricate interfaces, every Web site starts with a single Web page, and every Web page starts with HTML. The complexity of a Web Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment page has everything to do with both its content as well as the message its creator needs to convey. (Often, Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web these are two sides of the same coin.) Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 - Creating YourOnline First HTML For example, the Impact Web Page page (www.impactonline.com), shown in Figure 2-1, serves as a Part II - marketing Getting Started with HTML simple tool for a consultant<br /> <br /> to let potential clients know what services he offers.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 -2-1: Creating a GreatOnline User Interface Figure The Impact Web page is simple but direct - the best way to present its creator's Part VI - The Part of Tens message.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs In contrast, WebDon’ts Consortium (W3C) home page (www.w3.org), shown in Figure 2-2, is Chapter 20 -the TenWorld HTMLWide Do’s and Part much VIImore - Appendixes complex<br /> <br /> and contains more content (hence more HTML) because the page serves as a portal<br /> <br /> to the vast of the W3C. Appendix A resources - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 4 -2-2: Structuring The W3C Your home HTML page Documents is complex and robust; it helps visitors access the hundreds of other<br /> <br /> pages the W3C site. Resources Chapter 5 on - Linking to Online Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Even though these two pages are vastly different, they use the same collection of HTML elements and Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting attributes to make content appear in a Web browser. The W3C page has more markup and may use Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level different HTML constructs (such as complex tables) than the Impact Online page does. In the end, they're Chapter 8 - HTML Tables both just Web pages built with HTML. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Remember If you're thinking that you have to do something different with your HTML to build a Web site, Part IVagain. - Extending with Othermore Technologies think A WebHTML site is nothing than a collection<br /> <br /> of Web pages. You'll most likely use hyperlinks<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 -inGetting with5)CSS (discussed detail inStylish Chapter to connect pages so visitors can easily navigate your site, but all you're Chapter 12 - isHTML and Scripting really doing connecting several pages into a cohesive collection of related information. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic Tip With right tools,aaDatabase hosting provider, a good interface, you can grow a single Web page into a Chapter 14 the - Integrating into Your and HTML<br /> <br /> larger Web-site. Check out Chapters 16 through 18 in Part V of this book for the basics. How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Creating - Creating programmingan HTML Toolboxand database-driven sites<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Many Web theseadays beyond plain HTML to include programming code that makes the sites Chapter 18 -sites Creating Greatgo User Interface interactive and responsive to individual user needs and preferences. For example, when you visit an online Part VI - The Part of Tens store and add items to your shopping cart, the Web pages you see are different from the ones other Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs visitors see. Each visitor's shopping cart is unique; everyone's view of the shopping cart in a Web browser Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts is unique. Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML only 4 Tags HTML isAdesigned to help you display information. If you want that information to provide a smart Appendix B HTML Character response for different viewersCodes (such as varying the display automatically to fit the person viewing it), you'll Appendix C -other Glossary need some technologies in addition to HTML. Index<br /> <br /> For example, sites 4that advanced features - such as shopping carts, bill payment, customized news, Cheat Sheet - HTML Foroffer Dummies, 4th Edition andofpersonalized displays - use both programming code and databases to make these features work. List Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Don't let the words programming and database intimidate you. Neither is required to put together a solid<br /> <br /> List of Listings Web site of well-designed and robust pages. There are entire Web sites that meet their goals beautifully List of Sidebars without using a lick of programming code (the W3C is a great example). Fortunately, if you find that the<br /> <br /> only way to meet your page's goals is with programming (selling products online is a typical example), the Web is chock-full of resources to help you. Tip Chapters 10,12, and 14 look more closely at what it takes to add programming and database functionality to your Web page or site.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4thUse Edition Deciding What You Want to HTML For by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> You've looked around the Web a bit© and what others are dong with their pages, and you have an John Wiley & Sons 2003 know (408 pages) idea of what you Whether want youryour page to do, but now it's timetext-oriented to solidify that idea goal is to build a simple, Web siteinto a more concrete plan. (Okay, we admit that your plan will probably change along the way, but you or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-have to start somewhere.) by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> To help formulate that plan, answer the four questions that head the upcoming sections as best you can now; revisit them from time to time as your Web page evolves. You can consult the resulting design for Table Contents yourof page as you write your HTML. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> What do you want your page to do for you?<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 you - The LeastaYou Need to Know about and the Web of both? The most important thing you Why are building Web page? Is it for fun,HTML for profit, for some Chapter - HTML Workpage on the Web you want it to do for you. Everything else about your page, from the need to2know aboutatyour is what Chapter 3 -to Creating Your Firstand HTML Pageyou use to build it, grows out of that one idea. way it looks the information HTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> For example, if you decide to HTML build aDocuments Web version of your résumé to give to potential employers or to help Chapter 4 - Structuring Your drum up consulting business, you can make some good assumptions about how that page should Chapter 5 some - Linking to Online Resources look and whatand information absolutely must be on it: Chapter 6 decide - Finding Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> The design should be professional.<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Graphics won'tTables play a large role because the meat of the page should be your work history and other Chapter 9 - information. HTML Frames relevant Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> You will use aHTML combination of headings, paragraphs, Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> lists, and other text elements to build the page.<br /> <br /> The page may link to the Web sites of companies you've worked on in the past.<br /> <br /> Chapter 13might - Making Magic You want Multimedia to include downloadable versions of your résumé in text, PDF, or Microsoft Word Chapter format 14 -for Integrating easy printing. a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Although youWeb mayPage decide to expand Part V - From to Web Site<br /> <br /> your résumé page later into a site that includes examples of your work or references, initially your presence will be just a single page. Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17 -you're Settingplanning Up Your to Online Presencea digital scrapbook that chronicles your growing family's If, however, put together Chapter 18 - you Creating a Great User Interface adventures, will make a completely different set of assumptions, such as these: Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> The betofun, playful, and a reflection of your family's personality. Chapter 19design - Tencan Ways Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Graphics, digital video, and even audio clips will play a significant role in the site because images are what digital scrapbook is all about.<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTMLyou Character Codes TheBmarkup use may very well run the entire HTML gamut because your page will include Appendix C - Glossary everything from text to images to media. Index<br /> <br /> may want 4toFor linkDummies, to other family members' Web sites, to your kid's favorite toy stores, or to maps CheatYou Sheet - HTML 4th Edition show the places you visited on vacation. List ofthat Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> You might want to set up a family mailing list or a guest book so visitors to your site can play an active role in the site.<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Your site may begin with a single page, but chances are it will rapidly grow into an entire Web site. When you lay out the assumptions for your page along the same general lines shown here, you catch a glimpse of how your page will evolve from an idea to a Web creation - and what it will take to get you there.<br /> <br /> How do you want your page to look?<br /> <br /> The way your page looks is critical to how effectively HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition it does its job. Don't believe us? Read the following list and imagine what you might think if you saw pages that matched these descriptions: ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Plain = uninteresting: If the site is too plain, people won't be inter- ested and may not stick around Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site long enoughor to one get loaded to the important information. with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Busy = disorienting: If the page is a riot of images and colors, people may be overwhelmed and visit another site just to give their eyes a rest. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Theme doesn't match content = a joke: Visitors won't take you or your information seriously if your design doesn't match the information on the page. (A Hawaiian luau, for example, really isn't an Introduction appropriate theme for a résumé page unless you cater luaus for a living.) HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 you - The You Need to Know about HTML and and the Web Although canLeast continually tweak and update the look feel of your page, it's a good idea to set aside Chapter 2 - HTML you at Work Webto decide what you want it to look like. Some quick and easy routes some time before buildon thethe page Chapter 3 - Creating First these: HTML Page to an initial design ideaYour include Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Bookmark or print pages from other Web sites whose designs are similar to what you want to use. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Sketch a design on paper or even a napkin at a restaurant. Just don't smear ketchup on the design.<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 ads - Top Your Page with Clip and Off other layouts fromFormatting magazines if they spark your interest. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Remember The Tables goal here isn't to become a graphic designer or to finalize every detail of your page's Chapter 8 - HTML appearance. Rather, you want to begin to build an overall idea of what you want your HTML to do for you Chapter 9 - HTML Frames so you 10 can -construct it accordingly. Chapter HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Getting multimedia, Stylish with CSS Do you -need scripts, or other advanced features?<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting You need theMagic overall plan for your page requires that you use multimedia, a shopping Chapter 13 to- decide Making whether Multimedia<br /> <br /> cart, a guest book, or any other features that HTML go beyond what HTML can do for you. For example, if you Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your plan to build- an online store, you'll need a shopping cart and some form of online payment system. How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages However, a site that just lists your consulting services may not need these features at all. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 shows - Creating an HTML kinds Toolbox Table 2-1 you different of features you might consider, what kind of effort and skills you might Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence need to do the work yourself, and where you can find information on these skills. Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI -2-1: TheAdding Part of Tens Table Advanced<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Features to a Page<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Feature Degree ofand Difficulty Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s Don’ts<br /> <br /> See<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Forms to<br /> <br /> Although many of your Web pages will be designed to present<br /> <br /> Appendix 4 Tags gather A - HTMLusers with information, you may want to gather information Appendix B HTML Character information from users Codes as well. Suggestion forms, a guest book, and a<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary from visitors request for more information page are just a few examples of Index how you can use forms to interact with your users. Creating Cheat Sheet - HTMLHTML 4 For isn't Dummies, 4thbut Edition difficult, you'll need to have a script or other List of Figures application running in the background to work with the form List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Image rollovers, drop-down menus, and other dynamic features<br /> <br /> data. Luckily, many such scripts are available on the Web for free. To make your Web page do interesting things such as dynamically swap images, display menus that appear and disappear, and hide and show content with the click of a button, you'll need to use JavaScript or VBScript. Neither is difficult to learn, and the Web is full of example scripts you can leverage.<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> Multimedia<br /> <br /> Actually adding audio, 4th video, and multimedia to your Web HTML 4 for Dummies, Edition<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> page is easy. and editing the multimedia ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel andDigitizing Natanya Pitts presentations however requires John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)a bit of knowledge and the right equipment. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepWithout any programming knowledge, creating a shopping by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Shopping cart<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> cart from scratch is not easy. However, many Web site hosting providers have shopping cart tools you can easily Table of Contents integrate into your site for a small fee. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> If your page needs advanced features to meet its goal, you'll need to plan for those at the beginning of Introduction yourI -page-building especially if you plan to Part Meeting HTMLfun in -Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> have someone (such as a consultant or even a friend with<br /> <br /> the right help you. Think your advanced features to behave. Consider Chapter 1 skills) - The Least You Needcarefully to Know about about how HTMLyou andwant the Web whether2 (and then decide they will fit with the other elements on your page. Then write everything Chapter - HTML at Workhow) on the Web down so have a guide for the person Chapter 3 you - Creating Your First HTML Pagehelping you put the features together. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> If you're not sold on using advanced features now but you think they may be nice to have later on, you can - Structuring Your HTML Documents always make a few notes about how you might integrate them into your page, and then set a time frame Chapter 5 - Linking to to Online for either learning how buildResources them, or for working with someone to have them built. Chapter 4 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Do you plan to create a Web site?<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> HTML Tables If you intend- for your Web page to grow into a larger site, start thinking about that larger site as you build<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 Sketch - HTMLsome Frames the page. ideas of other pages your site might include, and how those pages relate to the Chapter 10 HTML Forms first page you plan to build. Don't worry too much about those future pages themselves just yet; often an Part IV - page Extending HTML with Other Technologies overall design is different when there are more<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> pages to follow.<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Tip Planning ahead a complete site later can save you a lot of rework on the page you build now. Chapter 12 - HTML andfor Scripting Chapters and 18 Multimedia provide youMagic the basics about planning and building a site that is easy for visitors to use Chapter 13 17 - Making and that your site goals. into Your HTML Chapter 14achieves - Integrating a Database Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> If you aren't sure whether you want your page to grow into a larger site later on, don't sweat it. The great thing about HTML is that you can quickly update it and place a new version of your page on the Web Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox immediately for all to see. When you take advantage of HTML's organic nature, every markup, design, and Chapter - Setting YourisOnline Presence content17 decision youUp make reversible. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 3: Creating Your First HTML Page ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Planning your Web page Table of Contents<br /> <br /> some HTML HTML Writing 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Saving your page<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - your The Least Need to online Know about HTML and the Web Viewing pageYou offline and Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Editing pageYour First HTML Page Chapter 3 -your Creating Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Creating your very first Web page can seem a little daunting, but it’s definitely fun, and our experience tells - Structuring Your HTML Documents us the best way to get started is to jump right in with both feet. You might splash around a bit at first, but Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources you’ll keep your head above water without too much thrashing. Chapter 4 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 - Top Offyou Your Page with This chapter walks through fourFormatting simple steps to creating a Web page. We won’t stop and explain Part IIInuance - TakingofHTML to the Next Level every the markup you’re using<br /> <br /> — we save that for other chapters. Instead, we just want you to<br /> <br /> Chapter get comfortable 8 - HTML working Tableswith markup and content to create and view a Web page. Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Before YouHTML Get4Started by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Creating HTML documents is Sons a little© different from creating word-processing documents in an application John Wiley & 2003 (408 pages) like Microsoft Word because you have to use applications: You Web do the work in one (your text or HTML Whether your goal is to build atwo simple, text-oriented site editor) and view the results in the other (your Web browser). Well, okay, it is or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-a bit unwieldy to edit in one by-step will in putorder you on the right track. application and switch to book another to look at your work, but you’ll be switching like a pro from text editor to browser and back in (almost) no time. Table of Contents To get started on your first Web page, you need two things: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> A text editor such as Notepad or SimpleText Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> A Web browser<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 in - this HTML at Work on the Webcreated with TextPad, a shareware plain-text editor available from All figures chapter show HTML Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page www.textpad.com. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> We discuss basic tools in a little more detail in Chapter 6. Also, if you plan to use an HTML editor Chapter 4 -these Structuring Your HTML Documents such as5 FrontPage to do your HTML work, put it away for now and whip out good ol’ Chapter - Linkingor toDreamweaver Online Resources Notepad More HTML editors often hide your HTML from you, and for the purposes of Chapter 6 instead. - Finding andadvanced Using Images your first seewith yourFormatting HTML in all of its glory. You’ll be able to make a smooth transition to Chapter 7 page, - Topyou Offwant Your to Page a more editor later. Part III - advanced Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables Although you might be tempted to use Microsoft Word or some other word processor instead of Notepad<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 - HTML or a plain-text editorFrames to work with HTML, we strongly recommend that you don’t. Word processors tend to Chapter 10 HTML Forms store a lot of extra information behind the scenes of the files they create (for example, formatting Part IV - Extending HTML with Otherto Technologies instructions your computer needs display or print<br /> <br /> said files) that you can’t see or change, but that will<br /> <br /> Chapter 11with - Getting Stylish with CSS interfere your HTML. Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th Edition Creating a HTML Page4 for from Scratch by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Using HTML to create a Web page©from involves four straightforward steps: John Wiley & Sons 2003 scratch (408 pages) your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site 1. Plan yourWhether page design. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepbooktext will in putayou the right track.that design a reality. 2. Combine by-step HTML and texton editor to make<br /> <br /> 3. Save your page.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML4.4 For View Dummies, your page 4th in Edition a Web browser. Introduction<br /> <br /> So break out your text editor and Web browser and roll up your sleeves.<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Step 1: -Planning HTML at Work a onsimple the Web design<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Although you can just start Part II - Getting Started withwriting HTML<br /> <br /> HTML without a final goal in mind, we’ve discovered (painfully) over time that a few minutes spent planning general approach to a page at the beginning of your work will make Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTMLyour Documents the whole page creation process much easier. You don’t have to create a complicated diagram or elaborate Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources graphical display in this step; just jot down some ideas for what you want on the page and how you want it Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images arranged. Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part - Taking to be theat Next YouIII don’t even HTML have to yourLevel desk<br /> <br /> to plan your simple design. Take a notepad and pencil outside and<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML Tables design 8in the sun, or scribble on a napkin while you’re having lunch. Remember, this is supposed to be fun. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> The example in thisForms chapter is our take on the traditional “Hello World” exercise used as the most basic Chapter 10 - HTML example for just about existing programming Part IV - Extending HTMLevery with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> language. Customarily, you learn how to use a<br /> <br /> programming language to display the phrase Hello World on-screen. In our example, we create a short Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS letter to12 the-world so the page is a bit more substantial and gives you more to work with. Figure 3-1 Chapter HTMLinstead, and Scripting shows our basic design for this page. - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 3-1: Taking a few minutes to sketch your page design makes writing HTML easier. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> and Natanyafour Pittsbasic components:ISBN:0764519956 The basic designby forEd theTittel page includes John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> A serviceableWhether title: “Hello yourWorld”. goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> A few paragraphs explaining the on page’s author plans to help the Earth meet its yearly quota of by-step book will how put you the right track. Znufengerbs. Table of A salutation Contents of “Sincerely”. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> A signature.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Don’t forget to jot down some notes about that color scheme you want to use on the page. For effect, we<br /> <br /> Chapter - our The example Least Youpage Needshould to Knowhave about HTML background and the Web and white text, and the title should be decided1 that a black Chapter 2 - HTMLYour at Work on Znufengerb the Web “Greetings From Future Minister.” Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> When knowStarted what kind information Part II -you Getting withof HTML<br /> <br /> you want on the page, you can move on to Step 2 — writing the<br /> <br /> markup. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Finding and some Using Images Step 2: -Writing HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> YouIII have a couple of to different options Part - Taking HTML the Next Level<br /> <br /> when you’re ready to create your HTML. If you already have some content that you just want to describe with HTML, you can save that content as a plain-text file and add text Chapter 8 - HTML Tables around it. Alternately, you can start creating markup and add the content in as you go. In the end, you’ll Chapter 9 - HTML Frames probably use some combination of both. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> In our example, we already had some text to start with that was originally in a Word document format; we just - Getting Stylish with CSS saved the content as a text file and added markup around it.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter - Making Multimedia Magic To save13a Word file as a text document, choose FileØSave As. In the dialog box that appears, choose Text Chapter Only (*.txt) 14 from - Integrating the Savea As Database Type drop-down into Your HTML list. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Figure 3-2 shows how our draftSite letter Part V - From Web Page to Web<br /> <br /> appears in Microsoft Word before we convert it to text for our page.<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 3-2: The letter that is the text for our page in word-processing form.<br /> <br /> “Hello World” in HTML The complete HTML page looks like Listing 3-1:<br /> <br /> Listing 3-1: The Complete HTML Page for the Zog Letter HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> <html> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<head> by-step book will put you on the right track. <title>Greetings From Your Future Znufengerb Minister Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition text="white"> Hello I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment World

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter 2 - HTML at Work the attention Web

      It has come to on our that Earth has fallen well short of Chapter producing 3 - Creatingits Your yearly First HTMLquota Page of Znufengerbs. To help you improve your Part II - production Getting Startedand with establish HTML

      a plentiful Znufengerb colony, I, Zog, the

      of Agriculture of Grustland, will be arriving on your planet Chapter Minister 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents thetoweek with my herd experts to take command of your Chapter within 5 - Linking Onlinealong Resources enterprise. Chapter Znufengerb 6 - Finding and Using Images

      Chapter 7

      - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

      Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Do not fear, Chapter 8 - HTML TablesI have the highest expectations for a smooth transition from your current production of the creatures you call cows to our beloved - HTML Frames Znufengerbs. The future of the galaxy hinges on Earth’s ability to meet Chapter 10 - HTML Forms its Znufengerb quota, and I will do all in my power to make you the most Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies productive source of Znufengerbs in the universe. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS

      Chapter 9

      Chapter 12

      - HTML and Scripting

      Chapter 13

      - Making Multimedia Magic

      I have studied your history extensively and feel that I am the best

      Chapter candidate 14 - Integrating into Your of HTML fora Database the position Znufengerb Minister. I look forward to Chapter placing 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup a Znufengerb in every Languages home to bring you joy. Part

      V - From Web Page to Web Site

      Chapter 16

      - Creating an HTML Toolbox

      Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Sincerely,
      Chapter Zog, 18 - Creating a Great Interface Minister of User Agriculture Part

      VI - The Part of Tens

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary

      What Index

      the markup is doing

      Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

      The HTML includes a collection of markup elements and attributes that describe the letter’s contents:

      List of Figures

      List ofThe Tables element defines the document as an HTML document. List of Listings

      element creates a header section for the document, and the element inside of it List ofThe Sidebars defines a document title that will be displayed in the browser’s title bar. The<body> element holds the actual text that will display in the browser window. The bgcolor and text attributes work with the <body> element to set the background color to black and the text color to white. The<h1> element marks the Hello World text as a first-level heading.<br /> <br /> The<p> elements identify each of the paragraphs in the document. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 The<br> element by Ed Tittel adds and a manual Natanya line Pitts break after the word Sincerely in the salutation.<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Don’t worry aboutWhether the ins and how all aofsimple, these elements work. They yourouts goal of is to build text-oriented Web siteare covered in detail in Chapters 4 and 7. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> After you create a complete HTML page, or at least the first chunk of it that you want to review, you must save it before you can view your work in a browser. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Step 3: Saving your page<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML Itsa Natural Environment Remember that you in use text editor to create your<br /> <br /> HTML documents and a Web browser to view them, but<br /> <br /> Chapter Thelet Least Need loose to Know HTML and theyou Webhave to save that page. When you’re just before 1you -can yourYou browser onabout your HTML page, Chapter - HTML atshould Work on the a Web building2 a page, you save copy of it to your local hard drive and view it locally with your browser. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Choosing a location and name for your file<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents When you yourto fileOnline to your hard drive, keep two things in mind: Chapter 5 save - Linking Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> You need to be able to find it again soon.<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking the Next Level The name HTML shouldtomake sense to you<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> and work well on a Web browser.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> That said, recommend Chapter 9 we - HTML Frames that you create a folder somewhere on your hard drive especially for your Web pages. 10 Call-itHTML “WebForms Pages” or “HTML” (or any other name that makes sense to you), and be sure you put it Chapter somewhere easy to find.with Other Technologies Part IV - Extending HTML Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS When you choose a name for your page, don’t include spaces in it because some operating systems — most Chapter HTMLLinux and Scripting notably12 Unix- and (the most popular Web-hosting operating systems around) — don’t tolerate spaces in Chapter 13 Choose - Makingnames Multimedia filenames. that Magic make sense to you and that you can use to identify file contents without Chapter - Integrating actually14opening the file.a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> In our saved our Site file in Part V - example, From Webwe Page to Web<br /> <br /> a folder called Web Pages and named it (drumroll, please)<br /> <br /> zog_letter.html, as HTML shownToolbox in Figure 3-3. Chapter 16 - Creating an Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> 3-3: Choose an easy-to-access location and a descriptive filename for your HTML pages. List ofFigure Sidebars<br /> <br /> .htm or .html Notice that our filename, zog_letter.html, uses the .html suffix. You can actually choose from one of two suffixes for your pages: .html or .htm. The shorter .htm is a relic from the 8.3 DOS days when filenames could only have eight characters followed by a three-character suffix that describes the file’s type. Today, operating systems can support very long filenames and suffixes that are more than three letters long<br /> <br /> so we suggest you stick with .html.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 That said, you can byuse Ed Tittel eitherand .htm Natanya or .html, Pitts and Web servers and Web browsers will handle both equally John Wiley & Sons ©that 2003you (408stick pages)with one option or the other to be consistent. Even though well. We do, however, recommend .html and .htmWhether files areyour treated same browsers and servers, they goalthe is to buildby a simple, text-oriented Web siteare different suffixes. The name or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepzog_letter.html is different from zog_letter.htm, and this matters when you create hyperlinks, as by-step you learn in Chapter 5. book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Step 4: Viewing your page<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> After you save a copy of your page, you’re ready to view it in a Web browser. If you haven’t opened your Introduction browser, do that now.inNext, chooseEnvironment FileØOpen Part I - Meeting HTML Its Natural<br /> <br /> and click the Browse button. Navigate your file system until<br /> <br /> you find1 your HTML file,You as Need shown Figure 3-4.HTML and the Web Chapter - The Least to in Know about Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Getting Stylish with CSS Figure -3-4: Use Internet Explorer to navigate to your Web pages.<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13Open - Making Multimedia Magic appears in your Web browser in all its glory, as shown in Figure 3-5. Click the button, and the page Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List ofFigure Listings3-5: Viewing a file in your Web browser. List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> You aren’t actually viewing this file on the Web yet; you’re just viewing a copy of it saved on your local hard drive. You can’t give anyone the URL for this file yet, but you can edit and view the changes you make.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Editing an Existing Web Page by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Chances are you’ll want to change (at least) about your page after you view it in a Web browser John Wiley & Sons ©one 2003thing (408 pages) for the first time. After all, you can’t really see the page is goingWeb to look Whether your goal is to build ahow simple, text-oriented site when you’re creating the markup, and youor might decide that a first-level heading is too big or that you really want purple text on a one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. green background. To make changes to the Web page you’ve created in a text editor and are viewing in a browser, follow Table ofsteps: Contents these HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> 1. Leave the browser window with the HTML page display open and go back to the text editor.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part 2. I - Meeting HTMLpage in Itsisn’t Natural Environment If the HTML open in the text<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> editor, open it.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> theon same file open in both the browser and the text editor, as shown in Figure 3-6. Chapter You 2 -should HTML have at Work the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Figure - Creating 3-6:anViewing HTML Toolbox an HTML file in your text editor and Web browser at the same time. Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> 3. Make your changes to the HTML and its content in the text editor.<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 - the Ten changes. Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs 4. Save Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> is an important Part VII This - Appendixes<br /> <br /> step. If you don’t save your changes, you won’t see them in the Web browser.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> 5. Move back to the Web browser and click the Refresh button.<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary 6. Repeat these steps until you’re happy with the final display of your page. Index<br /> <br /> Although don’t 4have to keep the HTML file open in both the text editor and the browser while you work, Cheat Sheetyou - HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition it’s of easiest if you do. You can quickly make a change in the editor, flip to the browser and refresh, flip back List Figures to the editor to make more changes, flip back to the browser and refresh, and so on.<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings In our example letter, we decided after our initial draft of the HTML page that we should add a date to the List of Sidebars letter. Figure 3-7 shows the change we made to the HTML to add the date and the resulting display in the<br /> <br /> Web browser.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 4 -3-7: Structuring A change Your in the HTML HTML Documents is displayed in a browser after a quick save and refresh. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources This approach to editing an HTML page only applies to pages saved on your local hard drive. If you want Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> to edit a page that you have already stored on a Web server, you have to save a copy of the page to your - Top Off Your Page with Formatting hard drive, edit it, verify your changes, and then upload the file again to the server, as discussed in the Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level following section. Chapter 7 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, Posting Your Page Online 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> After you’re happy withWiley your &Web time to put it online. Chapter 17 is devoted to a detailed John Sonspage, © 2003it’s (408 pages) discussion of what you need to do to put your page online, but to sum it up Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web sitein a few quick steps: or hosting one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, 1. Find a Web provider to hold your Web pages. this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Your Web host might be a company Web server or space that you pay an ISP for. If you don’t have a provider yet, double-check with the ISP you use for Internet access — see whether you get some Table of Contents Web-server space along with your access. Regardless of where you find space, get details from the HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition provider on where to move your site’s files and what your URL will be. Introduction<br /> <br /> Part 2. I - Meeting in Its Natural Environment Use an HTML FTP client or a Web browser to<br /> <br /> make a connection to your Web server as specified in<br /> <br /> Chapter the 1 information - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web from your hosting provider. Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web 3. Copy the HTML fileFirst from your hard drive to the Web server. Chapter 3 - Creating Your HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> 4. Use your Web browser to view the file via the Internet.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking Online For example, to hosttoour letterResources online at ftp.io.com/~natanya, we used Internet Explorer to access Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images the site and provided the appropriate name and password (which you will get from your ISP). A collection Chapter of folders 7 and - Top files Offappeared. Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> We copied file to the server with a simple drag-and-drop operation from Windows Explorer to Internet Chapter 8 -the HTML Tables Explorer, as- shown in Figure 3-8. HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Figure Drag and drop HTML files from your local system to a Web server to make them available Appendix C -3-8: Glossary Indexon the Internet. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> The URL for this page is http://www.io.com/~natanya/zog_letter.html, and the page is now served from the Web browser instead of from a local file system, as shown in Figure 3-9.<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 4 -3-9: Structuring After youYour transfer HTMLaDocuments file to a Web server, it’s available via a URL to anyone with a Web<br /> <br /> browser livetoInternet Chapter 5 - and Linking Online connection. Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Again, see Chapter 17 for more details on how to serve your Web pages to the world. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Part II: Getting Started with HTML ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> In This Part: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4: Structuring Your HTML Documents Table of Contents<br /> <br /> 5: Linking Online Resources HTML Chapter 4 For Dummies, 4thtoEdition Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 6: Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - 7: The Least Need to with KnowFormatting about HTML and the Web Chapter Top OffYou Your Page Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> In this part . .. - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources In this part of the book, we describe the markup and document structures that make Web pages workable Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images and attractive. To begin with, we explore and explain basic HTML document structure and talk about Chapter 7 - Top Yourand Page withNext, Formatting organizing text in Off blocks lists. we explain how linking works in HTML, and how it provides the Part - Taking toWorld the Next Level glueIII that ties theHTML entire Wide Web<br /> <br /> together. Then we explain how to add graphics to your pages.<br /> <br /> Chapter HTMLthe Tables Finally,8we -cover elements of HTML formatting — including colors, backgrounds, and fonts — so you Chapter can make 9 your - HTML HTML Frames documents (and Web pages) really stand out! Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 4: Structuring Your HTML Documents ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Creating a basic document structure Table of Contents<br /> <br /> metadata HTML Defining 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Working with paragraphs, headings, and other block elements<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least numbered, You Need to and Know about HTML Creating bulleted, definition lists and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web HTML documents consist text, images, Chapter 3 - Creating Your of First HTML Page multimedia files, links, and other pieces of content that you bring<br /> <br /> together into a single Part II - Getting Startedpage with using HTML markup<br /> <br /> elements and attributes. You use blocks of text to create headings, paragraphs, lists, and more. The first step in creating a solid HTML document is laying a firm Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents foundation that establishes the document’s structure. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images This chapter covers the major elements that you use to set up a basic HTML document structure — Chapter 7 the - Top Offand Your Page Formatting We also show you how to define the various large chunks of including head body ofwith the document. Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level text that will make up your document. Finally, you find out how to use HTML’s three different kinds of lists Chapter 8 -numbered, HTML Tables — bulleted, and definition — to group like information and add a little visual variety to your Chapter 9 HTML Frames page. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Establishing a Basic Document Structure by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Although no two HTML pages are alike each employs a unique combination of content and elements to John Wiley & Sons © 2003— (408 pages) define the page — every HTML page must have the same basic document Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web sitestructure that includes or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> A statement by-step that identifies theput document as an HTML book will you on the right track.document A document header Table of Contents<br /> <br /> body HTML A 4 document For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Every time you create an HTML document, start with these three elements; then you can fill in the rest of your content and markup to create an individual page.<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter Tip Although 2 - HTML a basic at Work document on the structure Web is a requirement for every HTML document, creating it over and<br /> <br /> over again can be a little Most HTML editing tools — shareware, freeware, and commercial Chapter 3 - Creating Yourmonotonous. First HTML Page — can set up HTML the basic Part II - automatically Getting Started with<br /> <br /> document structure for you when you start a new HTML document.<br /> <br /> As you 4evaluate potentialYour HTML editors, look for this feature and others that help you create commonly Chapter - Structuring HTML Documents used chunks of HTML, such as list structures and basic tables. Chapter 16 includes more information on Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources finding 6a good HTMLand editor to make your page creation more efficient. Chapter - Finding Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTMLDocument 4 for Dummies,as 4than Edition Labeling Your HTML Page by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Every HTML document must& begin DOCTYPE John Wiley Sons ©with 2003a(408 pages) declaration that specifies which version of HTML you used to create the document. (DOCTYPE is short for document type.) There Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site are three possible DOCTYPE declarations for HTML or one4.0 loaded documents, with frames, onegraphics, for each and of the animation, three flavors this stepof HTML: by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> HTML 4.0 Transitional: The most inclusive version of HTML 4.0 that incorporates all HTML structural elements as well as all presentation elements.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"><br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -4.0 The Least A You Need to Know about Web HTML Strict: streamlined version of HTML HTMLand thatthe excludes all presentation-related elements in Chapter 2 of- style HTMLsheets at Work the Web nism for driving display. favor ason a mechaChapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN"<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/strict.dtd"><br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources HTML Frameset: A version of HTML that begins with HTML 4.0 Transitional and includes all the Chapter 6 -4.0 Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> elements thatOff make possible. Chapter 7 - Top Yourframes Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<!DOCTYPE - HTML Tables HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Frameset//EN" Chapter 9 - HTML Frames "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/frameset.dtd"> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Regardless of the HTML HTMLwith flavor youTechnologies choose to use, Part IV - Extending Other<br /> <br /> always begin every document with a DOCTYPE declaration. Most browsers can display your page even if you don’t, but some others won’t, so it’s always Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS better to be safe than sorry. Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Tip Chapter 1 includes more information on why there are three different flavors of HTML and shows you Chapter 14 Integrating a Database Your HTML how to choose the right flavor for aninto individual HTML document. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> After specify version of HTML Part V you - From Web which Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> the document follows, you must create an <html> element to<br /> <br /> hold all16 the -other content markup in your page: Chapter Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter <!DOCTYPE 18 - Creating HTML a Great PUBLIC User Interface "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" Part VI - The Part of "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> <html> Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> </html> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Remember It’s easy, but also important: Never forget that a single <html> element holds all other text in your HTML page.<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Adding a Document Header by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> After you’ve declared HTML your document adheres to and created an <html> element, John which Wiley &version Sons ©of 2003 (408 pages) you set up a document header that provides some basic informationWeb about Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented sitethe document, including its title and metadata, which provides useful information about the document such or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-as keywords, author information, book willifput you going on theto right a description, andby-step so forth. Also, you’re usetrack. a style sheet (internal or external) with your page, you include information about that style sheet in the header. Table Contents Tip ofChapter 11 includes a complete overview of creating style sheets with CSS and shows you how to HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition include them in your 4th HTML documents. Introduction<br /> <br /> TheI<head> element, defines the page header, Part - Meeting HTML inwhich Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> immediately follows the <html> opening tag:<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter <!DOCTYPE 2 - HTML HTMLatPUBLIC Work on the "-//W3C//DTD Web HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> <html> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> <head> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> </head> Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting </html> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> - HTML page Frames a title Giving your<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Every pageHTML needswith a descriptive title that helps Part IV HTML - Extending Other Technologies<br /> <br /> a visitor understand at a glance why the page exists in<br /> <br /> the first11 place. The page titlewith should Chapter - Getting Stylish CSS be concise, yet informative. (For example, My home page isn’t nearly as informative Ed’sand IT Consulting Chapter 12 -as HTML Scripting Service.) Chapter 13 -the Making Multimedia Magic You define title for your page using the <title> element inside the <head> element: Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"><br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> <html> - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface <head> Part VI<title>Ed’s - The Part of Tens IT Consulting Service Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

      The document title 4doesn’t Appendix A - HTML Tags actually show up in the middle of a browser window in huge boldface text. Instead,Bmost browsers display the page title as in the browser window’s title bar, as shown in Figure 4-1. Appendix - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

      Figure 4-1: HTML page titles usually appear in a Web browser’s window title bar. Remember Search engines use the contents of the bar when they list Web pages in response to<br /> <br /> a query. Your page title may be the first thing your visitors read about your Web page, especially if they find it HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition via their favorite search engines because your page will most likely be listed (by its title) with many others on ISBN:0764519956 by Ed— Tittel and got Natanya Pitts a search results page you’ve one chance to grab your audience’s attention and get them to choose John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) your page over the others. A well-crafted title can do just that, as discussed in more detail in Chapter 17. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Defining metadata<br /> <br /> The term metadata refers to data about data; in the context of the Web, it means data that describes the data Table of Contents on your Web page. Metadata for your page may include HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Keywords Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> A description of your page<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Information about the page author Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> The software application you Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> used to create the page<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> You use the <meta> element and the name and content attributes to define each piece of metadata for - Linking to Online Resources your HTML page. For example, the following elements create a list of keywords and a description for a Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images consulting-service page: Chapter 5 Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" - HTML Tables "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"><br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> <html> <head> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS <title>Ed’s IT Consulting Service Chapter Chapter Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      The HTML predefine the different kinds of metadata you can include in your page, nor Chapter 16 -specification Creating an doesn’t HTML Toolbox does it 17 specify how toUpname pieces of metadata, such as keywords and descriptions. So, for Chapter - Setting Your different Online Presence example, of using keywords and description as names for keyword and description metadata, Chapter 18 instead - Creating a Great User Interface youVI can justPart as easily use Part - The of Tens

      kwrd and desc, as in the following markup:

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs
      "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

      B - HTML Character Codes Appendix Appendix C - Glossary Ed’s IT Consulting Service Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables Index

      List of Listings

      List Sidebars Soofif you can use just any old values for metaname and content attributes, how do systems know what to

      do with your metadata? The answer is — they don’t. Each search engine works differently, although keywords and description are commonly used metadata names, many search engines may not recognize or use other metadata elements that you include. Instead, many developers use metadata as a way to leave messages for others who might look at the source of their page later, or with the hope that one day browsers and search engines will make better use of the metadata they’ve provided. Tip Although you may not want to take the time to load your page with metadata, be sure you do include

      keywords and a page description. Those two metadata elements are most commonly used by search HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition engines. Keywords help engines catalog your page more precisely; many engines display your description ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel andgives Natanya Pitts along with the page title, which prospective visitors a bit more information about your site — and maybe John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) incentive to visit it. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Automatically redirecting users to another page

      You can use metadata in your header to send messages to Web browsers about how they should display or Table of Contents otherwise handle your Web page. You commonly see the element used this way to automatically HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition redirect page visitors4th from one page to the other. For example, if you’ve ever come across a page that says Introduction This page has moved. Please wait 10 seconds to be automatically sent to the new Part location I - Meeting (or HTML something in Its similar), Natural Environment you’ve seen

      Chapter 1

      this trick at work.

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      To use the - element to send messages to the browser, you use the http-equiv attribute in place HTML at Work on the Web of the name attribute. Then, you choose from a predefined list of values that represents instructions for the Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page browser. These values are based on instructions you can also send to a browser in the HTTP header, but Part II - Getting Started with HTML changing the HTTP header for a document is more difficult than embedding the instructions into the Web Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents page itself. Chapter 2

      Chapter 5

      - Linking to Online Resources

      Chapter 6 - Finding Using Images To instruct a browserand to redirect users from one page to another, you use the element with an Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting http-equiv attribute with a value of refresh and a value for content that specifies how many seconds Part III -the Taking HTML to the Next LevelURL before refresh happens and what

      you want to jump to. For example, this element creates a

      Chapter refresh8that-jumps HTML Tables to www.w3.org after 15 seconds: Chapter 9

      - HTML Frames

      Chapter - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Warning Web browsers may not know what to do with elements that use the http-equiv Chapter 11 Older - Getting Stylish with CSS element redirector page. Be sure to include some text and a link on your page to enable a visitor Chapter 12to -create HTML aand Scripting to link manually to your redirector page if your element fails. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      The line shown in bold in the following markup shows you how:

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site



      Chapter 16 Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Part VI - The Part of Tens

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts All About Markup Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Chapter 19

      Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index

      This page is still in development. Until we are done, please visit Cheat Sheetthe - HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition W3C Website for the definitive List of Figures collection of markup-related resources.

      List of Tables List of Listings

      Please wait 10 seconds to be automatically redirected to the W3C.

      List of Sidebars If a user’s browser doesn’t know what to do with your redirector information, the user can simply click the link in the page body to go to the new page, as shown in Figure 4-2.

      HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

      ISBN:0764519956

      Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part IFigure - Meeting in you Its Natural Environment 4-2:HTML When use a element

      to create a page redirector, include text that visitors can

      Chapter 1 if their - Thebrowsers Least Youcan’t Needhandle to Know HTML and the Web click theabout redirector. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web

      On The You can useFirst theHTML http-equiv attribute with the element for a variety of other Chapter 3 Web - Creating Your Page purposes, including setting expiration Part II - Getting Started with an HTML

      date for a page, specifying the character set (that is, language) the

      page uses, more. ToYour findHTML out what your http-equiv options are (and how to use them), check out the Chapter 4 -and Structuring Documents Dictionary HTML META tags at the following URL: Chapter 5 of - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

      - Finding and Using Images

      http://vancouver-webpages.com/META/metatags.detail.html Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Chapter 8

      - HTML Tables

      Chapter 9

      - HTML Frames

      Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Chapter 11

      - Getting Stylish with CSS

      Chapter 12

      - HTML and Scripting

      Chapter 13

      - Making Multimedia Magic

      Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      Chapter 16

      - Creating an HTML Toolbox

      Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Part VI - The Part of Tens

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Chapter 20

      - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

      Part VII - Appendixes

      Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

      HTML 4 for Dummies, EditionDocument Creating the Body of Your4th HTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

      ISBN:0764519956

      After you set up your a title, and define some metadata, you're ready to create the Johnpage Wileyheader, & Sons ©create 2003 (408 pages) HTML and content that will show up in a browser window. The holds every bit of content Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web element site and markup not defined in the header. In general, if you want to see something in your browser window, or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. put it in the element: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction

      Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Ed's IT Consulting Service Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Chapter 4

      - Structuring Your HTML Documents

      Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter

      Ed's 6 - Finding Using Images IT and Consulting Service Homepage

      Chapter

      Ed 7 - Top Your Page with Formatting hasOffover 20 years of IT consulting experience and is available Part III - Taking HTML you to thewith Next Level to help any

      IT need you might have. From network design

      Chapter 8 and - HTML Tables configuration to technical documentation and training, you can Chapter 9 count - HTMLon Frames Ed to help you create and manage your IT infrastructure.

      Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Part IV

      For - Extending more HTML information with Other Technologies please

      contact Ed by e-mail at [email protected] or

      phoneStylish at 555.555.5555.

      Chapter 11 by - Getting with CSS Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Figure 4-3 shows how a browser displays this complete HTML page. Again, notice the following:

      Part VThe - From Web of Page Web Siteelement content the to <br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> is in the window's title bar.<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> The <meta> elements affect the page display at all. Chapter 17 - Setting Up Yourdon't Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Only the paragraph text contained in the <p> elements in the <body> element actually displays in the browser window.<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 4-3: Only Content in the <body>element appears in the browser's window. Remember You can use a variety of attributes with the <body> element to define the default text and link colors for your document text. Chapter 7 covers these attributes in detail.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Working with Blocks of Text by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Here’s a super-ultra-technical definition a block John Wiley & Sons © 2003of (408 pages) of text: some chunk of content that wraps from one line to another in an HTML element. Every bit of content ontext-oriented your Web page Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web has site to be part of an initial block element, and every block element sits within the <body> element on your page. In the end, your HTML or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put page is a giant collection of blocks of you text.on the right track. Remember Inline content is a word or string of words inside a block element. The difference between Table of Contents the inline content and a block of text is important because certain HTML elements (like those discussed in HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition this chapter) are designed to describe blocks of text, whereas others (such as linking and formatting Introduction elements) are designed to describe a few words or lines of content found inside those blocks. The Part I - Meeting HTML of inthis Its Natural Environment remaining chapters book often refer to block<br /> <br /> elements and inline elements. Just remember that<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - Themust Leastbe You Need within to Know aboutelement HTML and Web inline elements nested a block orthe your HTML document won’t be syntactically Chapter correct.2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> HTML several different Part II -recognizes Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> kinds of text blocks that you might want to use in your document, including (but not limited to) Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Paragraphs Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Headings Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Block quotes - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 Lists<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV Tables - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Forms Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter - Making Multimedia Magic This list13 is far from complete, but it gives you a good idea of what kinds of text are labeled as text blocks in Chapter 14 Integrating a Database into markup Your HTML HTML. This chapter looks at the HTML you use to describe less-complicated text blocks such as Chapter 15 -and Howlists. HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages paragraphs Later chapters delve into the more complicated text structures such as tables and Part V - From Web Page to Web Site forms.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence Inserting paragraphs Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens used more Paragraphs are probably<br /> <br /> often in Web pages than any other kind of text block. To label a<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 -simply Ten Ways to your Exterminate Bugselement. Presto! Here’s what it looks like: paragraph, place content Web in a <p> Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN"<br /> <br /> Appendix A - "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix <html>C - Glossary Index <head> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 About For Dummies, 4th Edition <title>All Blocks List of Figures List of Tables

      List of Listings

      This is a paragraph. It’s a very simple structure that you will use List of Sidebars time and again in your Web pages.

      This is another paragraph. What could be simpler to create?

      This HTML page includes two paragraphs, each marked with a separate

      element. Most Web browsers add a line break and full line of white space after every paragraph on your page, as shown in

      Figure 4-4.

      HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

      ISBN:0764519956

      Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter 2

      - HTML at Work on the Web

      Figure 4-4: Web browsers delineate paragraphs with a line break and white space.

      Chapter 3 -alignment Creating Your HTML Page The default for aFirst paragraph is left, and you can use the align attribute with a value of center, Part II - Getting Started HTML right, or justify towith override that

      Chapter 4

      default and control the alignment for any paragraph.

      - Structuring Your HTML Documents

      Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources

      This paragraph is centered.

      Chapter 6 - Finding and Using paragraph Images

      This is right-justified.

      Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting is double-justified.

      This paragraph Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Figure 84-5 shows a Web browser aligns each paragraph according to the value of the align Chapter - HTMLhow Tables attribute. Chapter 9

      - HTML Frames

      Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Chapter 11

      - Getting Stylish with CSS

      Chapter 12

      - HTML and Scripting

      Chapter 13

      - Making Multimedia Magic

      Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      Chapter 16

      - Creating an HTML Toolbox

      Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Figure the Part VI - The 4-5: Part Use of Tens Chapter 19

      align attribute with a paragraph to specify its horizontal alignment.

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Warning If you look at other people’s markup, you may find that many eliminate the closing

      tag - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts when they create paragraphs. Although some browsers will let you get away with this, leaving out the Part VII - Appendixes closing tag doesn’t follow correct syntax and will cause problems with style sheets (at the very least). Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Additionally, leaving out closing tags can get in the way of a consistent display for your page across all Appendix B - HTML Character Codes browsers. Chapter 20

      Appendix C - Glossary Index

      Breaking down information with headings

      Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures

      Headings are commonly used to break a document into sections. This book, for example, uses headings

      List Tables andofsubheadings to divide every chapter into sections — and you can do the same with your Web page. In List of Listings addition to creating an organizational structure, headings help break up the visual display of the page and List of readers Sidebarsvisual clues about how the different pieces of content are grouped. give

      HTML includes six different elements to help you define six different heading levels in your documents. Every browser has a different way of displaying these different heading levels. Most graphical browsers use a distinctive size and typeface, although text-only browsers may use a different convention because all content is displayed in a single size and font. In graphical browser displays, first-level headings (

      ) are the largest (usually two or three font sizes larger than the default text size for paragraphs); sixth-level headings (

      ) are the smallest and may be two or three font sizes smaller than the default text size.

      The following excerpt of HTML markup shows all six headings at work: HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

      ISBN:0764519956

      Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      All About Blocks Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I -

      First-level Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment heading



      Chapter

      Second-level 1 - The Least You Need heading

      to Know about HTML and the Web

      heading Chapter

      Third-level 2 - HTML at Work on the Web heading

      Chapter

      Fourth-level 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II

      Fifth-level - Getting Started with heading
      HTML

      heading Chapter
      Sixth-level 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter 7

      - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

      Figure 4-6 shows this HTML page as rendered in a browser.

      Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Chapter 8

      - HTML Tables

      Chapter 9

      - HTML Frames

      Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Chapter 11

      - Getting Stylish with CSS

      Chapter 12

      - HTML and Scripting

      Chapter 13

      - Making Multimedia Magic

      Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      Chapter 16

      - Creating an HTML Toolbox

      Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Part VI - The Part of Tens

      Chapter Figure 19 -4-6: TenWeb Waysbrowsers to Exterminate displayWeb headings Bugs in decreasing size from level one to level six. Chapter 20

      - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

      TipVII You shouldn’t use Part - Appendixes

      a second-level heading until you’ve used a first-level heading, nor a third-level heading until you’ve used Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags a second, and so on. If you want to change the way headings display in a browser, you can either use elements (as discussed in Chapter 7) or style sheets (as discussed in Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Chapter 11). Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

      HTMLLayout 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Exerting More Control Over Blocks of Text by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

      ISBN:0764519956

      Although blocks of textWiley form&the foundation your page, you'll occasionally want to break those blocks up to John Sons © 2003 (408for pages) better guide readers through your content. Two of the most common methods for breaking up the blocks of Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site text on your pageorare line breaks and horizontal rules. one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Using block quotes Table of Contents

      Ablock quote is a long HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thquotation Edition or excerpt from a printed source that you want to set apart on your page. You use the
      element to identify block quotes, as in this markup:

      Introduction

      Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment


      - "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> HTML at Work on the Web

      Chapter 3

      - Creating Your First HTML Page

      Part II - Getting Started with HTML - Structuring Your HTML Documents Famous Quotations Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 4 Chapter 6

      - Finding and Using Images

      Chapter 7

      - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

      An Inspiring Quote

      Chapter 8 - HTML Tables

      When I need a little inspiration to remind me of why I spend my days Chapter 9 in - HTML the Frames classroom, I just remember what Lee Iococca said:

      Chapter
      10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies In a completely rational society, the best of us would be teachers Chapter 11 Getting Stylish with CSS and the rest of us would have to settle for something else. Chapter
      12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      Most Web block-quote Chapter 16 browsers - Creatingdisplay an HTML Toolbox content with a slight left indent, as shown in Figure 4-7. Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Part VI - The Part of Tens

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Chapter 20

      - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

      Part VII - Appendixes

      Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List ofFigure Tables 4-7: Web browsers typically indent a block quote to separate it from paragraphs. List of Listings List of Sidebars

      Using preformatted text HTML ignores white space; if your block elements include hard returns, line breaks, or too many large spaces, the browser won't display them. For example, in the following markup we included several hard returns, some line breaks, and a lot of spaces, but as you can see in Figure 4-8, Web browsers ignore every bit of formatting you might try to add.

      This is a paragraph HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Ed Tittel andspace Natanya Pitts with a lotby of white

      ISBN:0764519956

      John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your fun goal is(and to build Web site thrown in for asa simple, a testtext-oriented of course).

      or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter 2

      - HTML at Work on the Web

      Chapter 3

      - Creating Your First HTML Page

      Part II - Getting Started with HTML

      Chapter 4 -4-8: Structuring Your HTML Documents Figure Web browsers routinely ignore white space. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources

      Sometimes, you mayImages want the browser to display the white space you include in an HTML page (for Chapter 6 - however, Finding and Using example, code samples or text tables where proper spacing is important). The preformatted Chapter 7 when - Topyou Off include Your Page with Formatting textIII element (
      ) instructs browsers to Part - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      keep all white space intact when it displays your content (as in the sample that follows). Use the
       element in place of the 

      element to get the browser to honor all your Chapter 8 - HTML Tables white space, as shown in Figure 4-9. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms


      HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN"

      Chapter 11

      - "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> Getting Stylish with CSS

      Chapter 12

      - HTML and Scripting

      Chapter 13

      - Making Multimedia Magic

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML White space Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Chapter 14

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      Chapter 16

      - Creating an HTML Toolbox

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      This is a paragraph

      Chapter 17 Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Part VI - The Part of Tens

      with a lot of white space

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Chapter 20 thrown - Ten HTML Don’ts in Do’s for and fun (and as a test of course). Part VII - Appendixes


      Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

      Figure 4-9: Use preformat-ted text to force browsers to recognize white space.

      Using preformatted text in4th block HTML 4 for Dummies, Editionquotes by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

      ISBN:0764519956

      You can nest
       elements inside 
      elements to carefully control the way the lines of John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) quoted text appear on the page. This feature is particularly useful for poetry stanzas or other quoted text in your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site which line breaksWhether and white space are important, as shown in this bit of markup and Figure 4-10. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

      Table of Contents



      HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Shakespeare in HTML Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page

      Shakespeare's Sonnets XVIII: Shall I compare thee to a summer's day?

      Part
      II - Getting Started with HTML

      Chapter
      Shall 4 - Structuring I compare Your HTMLthee Documents to a summer's day?

      more lovely and more temperate. ChapterThou 5 - art Linking to Online Resources windsand doUsing shake the darling buds of May, ChapterRough 6 - Finding Images summer's lease hath all too short a date. ChapterAnd 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting tooto hot theLevel eye Part IIISometime - Taking HTML the Next

      of heaven shines, And often is his gold complexion dimm'd; Chapter 8 - HTML Tables And every fair from fair sometime declines, Chapter 9 - HTML Frames By chance or nature's changing course untrimm'd; Chapter 10 - HTML Forms But thy eternal summer shall not fade Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Nor lose possession of that fair thou ow'st; Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Nor shall Death brag thou wander'st in his shade, Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting When in eternal lines to time thou grow'st: Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic So long as men can breathe or eyes can see, Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML So long lives this, and this gives life to thee.
      Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages
      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Part VI - The Part of Tens

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Chapter 20

      - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

      Part VII - Appendixes

      Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

      Figure 4-10: Use
       with  to control white space within a quotation.

      HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts Adding linebybreaks

      ISBN:0764519956

      John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

      Whether yourtext goalthat is to build a simple, Webassite Typically, browsers wrap any appears in blocktext-oriented elements such paragraphs, headings, and block one loaded withof frames, graphics, and you animation, this stepquotes; if the textor reaches the end a browser window, don't have much control over where a line ends by-step book will put you on the right track. (unless you use preformatted text). If you don't want to worry about accounting for every space in your content, you can always turn one paragraph into two - but you may not want the extra line of white space that most browsers include after each paragraph. What to do? Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

      The best way to specify when you've reached the end of a line in a paragraph, but aren't ready to create a new paragraph, is to use a line break, denoted by the
      element. The
      is the HTML equivalent of the Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment good, old manual hard return that you use in paragraphs and other blocks of text when you're working in a Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web word-processing program. Introduction

      Chapter 2

      - HTML at Work on the Web Any time sees
      , it breaks Chapter 3 a -browser Creating Youra First HTML Page the text there and moves to the next line. The following markup Part shows II - aGetting different Started way to with break HTML the

      lines of text in a poem. The entire poem is described as a single paragraph,

      and the4
      element marks the end of each line: Chapter - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5

      - Linking to Online Resources

      Chapter 6 - Finding Using "-//W3C//DTD Images Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Chapter 8

      - HTML Tables

      Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Shakespeare in HTML Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part</head> IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> <body> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <h1>Shakespeare's Sonnets XVIII: Shall I compare thee to a summer's day? </h1> Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic <p> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Shall I compare thee to a summer's day? <br> Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Thou art more lovely and more temperate. <br> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site Rough winds do shake the darling buds of May, <br> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox And summer's lease hath all too short a date. <br> Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence Sometime too hot the eye of heaven shines, <br> Chapter 18 - Creating Great User Interface And often ais his gold complexion dimm'd; <br> Part VI - The Part of Tens And every fair from fair sometime declines, <br> Chapter 19 Ten Waysor to Exterminate Bugs By - chance nature's Web changing course untrimm'd; <br> Chapter 20 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts But thy eternal summer shall not fade <br> Part VII - Nor Appendixes lose possession of that fair thou ow'st; <br> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Nor shall Death brag thou wander'st in his shade, <br> Appendix B HTML Character When in eternalCodes lines to time thou grow'st: <br> Appendix C So - long Glossary as men can breathe or eyes can see, <br> So long lives this, and this gives life to thee. <br> Index </p> - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Cheat Sheet </body> List of Figures </html> List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 4-11 shows how a browser handles each line break. In this example, the poem isn't left-indented because the <p> element replaces the <block quote> element.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Figure 4-11: Using the <br> element to specify where lines in block elements should break.<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Remember UsingTables the <br> element isn't necessarily better than using preformatted text in block quotes, but Chapter 9 HTML Framesin the visual results. it does offer you a choice Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Adding -horizontal rules Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 - HTML Scripting The horizontal ruleand element (<hr>) helps you include solid straight lines (rules) on your page - and put them Chapter 13 Making Multimedia anywhere you'd rather not use aMagic graphic. If you want to break your page into logical sections (or just separate Chapter 14 - Integrating Database into of Your your headers and footersa from the rest theHTML page), a horizontal rule is a good option. Users don't have to wait Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages for a graphic to download because the browser creates the rule based on the <hr> element, not an image Part V - From Web Page to Web Site reference.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox When you anUp <hr> in your page, as in the following HTML, the browser replaces it with a line, Chapter 17 include - Setting Your element Online Presence<br /> <br /> as shown 4-12. Chapter 18 in- Figure Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Figure 4-12: Use the <hr> element to add horizontal lines to your page.<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars Tip A horizontal rule must always sit on a line by itself; you can't add an <hr> element in the middle of a<br /> <br /> paragraph (or other block element) and expect the rule to just appear in the middle of the block. <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> <html> <head><br /> <br /> <title>Horizontal Rules HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

      ISBN:0764519956

      Whether your goal is followed to build a simple, Web rule.

      site

      This is a paragraph by atext-oriented horizontal or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.




      This Table of Contents is a paragraph preceded by a horizontal rule.

      HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Four different attributes help you control the display of each horizontal rule:

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter 2 - Specifies HTML at Work on theinWeb width: line width pixels or by percentage. For example, your rule can be 50 pixels wide or Chapter 3 up- 75 Creating Your Firstpage. HTML Page take percent of the Part II - Getting Started with HTML

      size: Specifies the Your height of the line in pixels. The default is 1 pixel. Chapter 4 - Structuring HTML Documents Chapter 5

      - Linking to Online Resources

      align: Specifies the horizontal alignment of the rule as left (the default), center, or right. If you - Finding and Using Images don't define a width for your rule, it takes up the entire width of the page, preventing any alignment you set Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting from showing up in the display. Chapter 6

      Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Chapter noshade: 8 - HTML Specifies Tables a rule with no shading. By default, most browsers display hard rules with a shade. If

      you9 include theFrames noshade attribute in your
      element, the line will appear as a solid line. Chapter - HTML Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      ThisIVbit- Extending of HTML creates a horizontal rule that takes Part HTML with Other Technologies

      up 45 percent of the page, is 4 pixels high, aligned to the

      center, and has shading turned off: Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12

      - HTML and Scripting is Multimedia a paragraph Chapter

      This 13 - Making Magic followed by a horizontal rule.

      Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML


      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Chapter 15

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      This is a paragraph preceded by a horizontal rule.



      Chapter 16

      - Creating an HTML Toolbox

      Chapter Settinghow Up Your Online Presence Figure 17 4-13- shows the addition of these attributes can greatly alter the way a browser displays the rule. Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Chapter 20

      - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

      Part VII - Appendixes

      Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List ofFigure Tables 4-13: Use the
      attributes to better control how a browser displays the rule. List of Listings

      For a look at how you can use horizontal rules in the real world to highlight important content, take a gander at Figure 4-14. The LANWrights, Inc. site uses colored hard rules to surround a key statement on the site's home page that tells visitors exactly what the company does. The rules make the statement stand out from the rest of the page.

      List of Sidebars

      HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

      ISBN:0764519956

      Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter 2

      - HTML at Work on the Web

      Chapter 3

      - Creating Your First HTML Page

      Part II - Getting Started with HTML

      Chapter Figure 4 -4-14: Structuring The LANWrights, Your HTML Documents Inc. Web site uses hard rules to draw your attention to important

      information on the Chapter 5 - Linking to page. Online Resources Chapter 6

      - Finding and Using Images

      Chapter 8

      - HTML Tables

      Chapter 9

      - HTML Frames

      Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Tip Cascading Style Sheets give you much more control over the placement of horizontal rules; you can Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting even fancy them up with color and shading options. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

      Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Chapter 11

      - Getting Stylish with CSS

      Chapter 12

      - HTML and Scripting

      Chapter 13

      - Making Multimedia Magic

      Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      Chapter 15

      - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

      Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

      Chapter 16

      - Creating an HTML Toolbox

      Chapter 17

      - Setting Up Your Online Presence

      Chapter 18

      - Creating a Great User Interface

      Part VI - The Part of Tens

      Chapter 19

      - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

      Chapter 20

      - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

      Part VII - Appendixes

      Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

      4 for Dummies, 4thLists Edition OrganizingHTML Information into by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

      ISBN:0764519956

      Lists are powerfulJohn tools for arranging similar together and giving visitors to your site an easy way Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 elements pages) to hone in on groups of information. You can put just about anythingWeb in asite list: from a set of instructions to a Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented collection of hyperlinks or navigational tools. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      HTML provides for three different kinds of lists: Table of Numbered Contentslists HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

      Bulleted lists

      Introduction

      Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

      Definition lists

      Chapter 1

      - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

      Chapter Unlike the 2 other - HTML markup at Work elements on the Web you’ve seen in this chapter (which use a single element to describe a

      chunk of listsYour are First a little more complex. They use a combination of elements — at least two Chapter 3 content), - Creating HTML Page components: Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4

      - Structuring Your HTML Documents

      Chapter 5

      - Linking to Online Resources

      A markup element that says “Hey browser. This is a list.”

      Chapter 6 - elements Finding and Using Markup that say Images “Hey browser. This is an item in the list.” Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

      Lists are easy toHTML create youLevel get the Part III - Taking to once the Next

      hang of using markup elements together. Mastering lists can also make the more complicated combinations of elements easier to handle when you create tables and Chapter 8 - HTML Tables forms. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10

      - HTML Forms

      Using numbered lists

      Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

      Chapter 11

      - Getting Stylish with CSS

      Anumbered consists of one or more items, each prefaced by a number. Usually, lists are numbered Chapter 12 - list HTML and Scripting when the order of the items is important. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14

      - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

      You use the ordered list element (
        ) to specify that you’re creating a numbered list, and a list item - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages element (
      1. ) to mark each item in the list. This bit of markup defines a three-item numbered list:

        Chapter 15

        Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

        Chapter 16

        - Creating an HTML Toolbox



        Chapter 17 Chapter 18

        - Creating a Great User Interface

        Part VI - The Part of Tens

        - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Numbered Lists Part VII - Appendixes Chapter 19

        Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossaryto do today

      Things Index
        Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 cat For Dummies, 4th Edition
      1. Feed List of Figures
      2. Wash car


      3. Grocery shopping
      4. List of Tables
      List of Listings List of Sidebars Figure 4-15 shows how a browser renders this markup. Notice that you don’t actually have to specify a number for each item in the list, the HTML infers it from the markup.

      HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

      ISBN:0764519956

      Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

      Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

      Figure 4-15: Use the
        and
      1. attributes to create a numbered list. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

        If you swap twoYou items in the list, their numbers change when the page displays again, as in Figure Chapter 1 -the Thefirst Least Need to Know about HTML and the Web 4-16. 2 Chapter

        - HTML at Work on the Web

        Chapter 3

        - Creating Your First HTML Page

        Part II
          - Getting Started with HTML

          car Chapter 4
        1. Wash - Structuring Your HTML Documents cat
        2. Chapter 5
        3. Feed - Linking to Online Resources shopping
        4. Chapter 6
        5. Grocery - Finding and Using Images
        - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

        Chapter 7

        Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

        Chapter 8

        - HTML Tables

        Chapter 9

        - HTML Frames

        Chapter 10

        - HTML Forms

        Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

        Chapter 11

        - Getting Stylish with CSS

        Chapter 12

        - HTML and Scripting

        Chapter 13

        - Making Multimedia Magic

        Chapter 14

        - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

        Chapter 15

        - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

        Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

        Figure Webanbrowsers set the numbers for your list according to the order items appear in the Chapter 16 -4-16: Creating HTML Toolbox list.17 Chapter

        - Setting Up Your Online Presence

        Chapter 18

        - Creating a Great User Interface

        You can use two different attributes with the
          element to control the display of any given list:

          Part VI - The Part of Tens

          Chapter 19 - Specifies Ten Ways what to Exterminate Web Bugs start: number you want the list to start with. The default starting number is 1, but if Chapter 20 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts you interrupt a list with a paragraph or other block element, and want to pick it up again later, you can Part VII - Appendixes specify any number

          as the start number for the new list.

          Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

          type: the numbering Appendix B Specifies - HTML Character Codes style from the list. You can choose from five predefined numbering styles: Appendix C - Glossary Index

          1: Decimal numbers

          Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures a: Lowercase letters List of Tables

          A:Uppercase letters List of Listings List of Sidebars

          i: Lowercase Roman numerals I: Uppercase Roman numerals

          This bit of markup uses ordered list elements and attributes to create a list that uses uppercase Roman numerals and begins numbering at 5 (V in Roman numerals):


          1. Wash car
          2. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition
          3. Feed cat
          4. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts
          5. Grocery shopping
          6. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)


          ISBN:0764519956

          Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or how one loaded with frames, and animation, this stepFigure 4-17 shows the attributes affectgraphics, the list display in a browser. by-step book will put you on the right track.

          Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

          Chapter 1

          - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

          Chapter 2

          - HTML at Work on the Web

          Chapter 3

          - Creating Your First HTML Page

          Part II - Getting Started with HTML

          Chapter 4

          - Structuring Your HTML Documents

          Chapter Figure 5 -4-17: Linking Use tothe Online start Resources and type attributes to guide the display of a numbered list in a browser. Chapter 6

          - Finding and Using Images

          Chapter 7

          - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

          Using bulleted lists

          Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

          Chapter 8

          - HTML Tables Abulleted consists of one or more items each prefaced by a bullet. This type of list is commonly used if Chapter 9 list - HTML Frames

          the order presentation of the items isn’t necessary for understanding the information presented. Chapter 10 of- the HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

          You use the unordered list element (
            ) to specify that you’re creating a bulleted list, and a list item - Getting Stylish with CSS element (
          • ) to mark each item in the list. The following markup changes a three-item numbered list to Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting a three-item bulleted list: Chapter 11 Chapter 13

            - Making Multimedia Magic

            Chapter 14

            - Integrating a Database into Your HTML



            Chapter 15

            Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

            Chapter 16

            - Creating an HTML Toolbox

            - Setting Up Your Online Presence ChapterBulleted 18 - Creating a GreatLists User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens Chapter 17

            Chapter 19

            - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

            Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

            Things

            to do today



            Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags
              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes
            • Feed cat
            • Appendix C
            • Wash - Glossarycar
            • Index

            • Grocery shopping


            Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings

            Figure 4-18 shows how a browser renders this list with bullets instead of numbers.

            List of Sidebars

            HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

            ISBN:0764519956

            Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

            Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Figure 4-18: An unordered list uses bullets instead of numbers to mark items. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

            You can the type attribute the
              tothe specify Chapter 1 use - The Least You Needwith to Know about element HTML and Web what kind of bullet you want the list to use: 2 Chapter

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3 - Creating First(the HTML Page disc: Solid circleYour bullets default) Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter square: 4 - Structuring Solid square Your bullets HTML Documents Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              circle: Hollow circle bullets - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 6

              Chapter 7 - Top Offtype Your Page withtoFormatting The addition of the attribute the bulleted-list markup just given changes the bullets from discs to Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              squares, as shown in Figure 4-19. Here’s what the relevant markup looks like:

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

                - HTML Forms
              • Feed cat
              • Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies
              • Wash car
              • Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS
              • Grocery shopping
              • Chapter
              12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 10

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Figure 4-19: Use the type attribute to change the bullet style for an unordered list.

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index

              Adding definition lists

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures

              Definition lists group terms and definitions into a single list and require three different elements to

              List of Tables complete the list: List of Listings

              Holds the list definitions. List of
              : Sidebars
              : Defines a term in the list.
              : Defines a definition for a term. You can have as many terms (defined by
              ) in a list as you’d like, and each term can have one or more definitions (defined by
              ). The following definition list includes three terms, one of which has two definitions:

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step by-step book will put you on the right track. Definition Lists Table of Contents

              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Markup Language Definitions

              Introduction
              SGML
              Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web
              The Standard Generalized Markup Language
              Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web
              HTML
              Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page
              The Hypertext Markup Language
              Part II - Getting Started with HTML
              The markup language you use to create Web pages.
              Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents
              XML
              Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources
              The Extensible Markup Language
              Chapter
              6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames Figure 10 4-20- shows how a browser displays this HTML. Chapter HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII Figure - Appendixes 4-20: Definition

              lists group terms and their related definitions into a single list.

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Tip If you think the items in a list are spaced too closely together, you can put two
              elements before each or
              element to add more white space. You can also use CSS styles to more carefully Appendix C - Glossary control all aspects of your list display, as discussed in Chapter 11. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Index

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Creating nested lists

              List of Figures List of Tables

              One handy way that HTML lists behave is to break up the display of your page and add some horizontal depth to it. You can take such lists one step further and group a large number of related items when you List of Sidebars nest lists, creating subcategories. Some common uses for nested lists include List of Listings

              Site maps and other navigation tools Table of contents for online books and papers Outlines You can combine any of the three kinds of lists to create nested lists. The following example starts with a

              numbered list that defines a list of things to do for the day, and uses three bulleted lists to further break 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition down those itemsHTML into specific tasks: by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table ofNested Contents Lists HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter

              Things 1 - The Least toYou doNeed today

              to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter
                2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3
              1. Feed - Creatingcat
              2. Your First HTML Page

                  Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4

                • Rinse bowl
                • - Structuring Your HTML Documents

                  Chapter 5

                • Open catResources food
                • - Linking to Online

                  Chapter 6

                • Mix dry and wet food in bowl
                • - Finding and Using Images

                • Deliver on a silver platter to fluffy
                • - Top Off Your Page with Formatting
                Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level
              3. Wash car
              4. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables
                  Chapter 9 - HTML Frames
                • Vacuum interior
                • Chapter 10 - HTML Forms
                • Wash exterior
                • Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies
                • Wax exterior
                • Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS
                Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting
              5. Grocery shopping
              6. Chapter 13
                  - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14 - Integrating into Your HTML
                • Plana Database meals
                • Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates Other Markup Languages
                • Clean outtofridge
                • Part V - From Web Page to Web Site
                • Make list
                • Chapter 16 - Creating HTML Toolbox
                • Goanto store
                • Chapter 17
                - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter
              18 - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 7

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Notice the pattern that the nested list uses: Each list item in the top-level ordered list is followed by a complete second-level list. The second-level lists don’t sit inside the list items; instead, they sit inside the Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags top-level list. Figure 4-21 shows how a browser reflects this nesting in its display of the nested list. Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources Figure Nested lists combine Chapter 6 -4-21: Finding and Using Images two or more lists for a multi-level organization of information. Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Warning As you build nested lists, watch your open and close tags carefully. Close first what you opened last is an especially important axiom here.

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 5: Linking to Online Resources ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              Overview

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Creating links Table of Contents

              behind the HTML Looking 4 For Dummies, 4th scenes Edition of URLs Introduction

              Linking two Web pages

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1 -up The Least You aNeed Know about HTML and the Web Setting links within Webtopage Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web Creating links to things other thanPage Web pages Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Hyperlinksconnect resources on the Web. When you include a link in your page, you give users the - Structuring Your HTML Documents capability to jump from your page to somewhere else on the Web, somewhere else on your site, or even Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources somewhere else on the same page. Without links, your page stands alone, disconnected from the rest of Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images the Web. With links, it becomes part of an almost boundless collection of information. Chapter 4

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Creating a HTML Basic Link by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              To create a hyperlink, you need three things: John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

              The Web address Uniform Resource or URL)this of stepthe place you want to link to. or one(called loaded a with frames, graphics,Locator, and animation, by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Some text in your Web page to hang the link on. Usually, the text you attach a link to describes the resource being linked. Table of Contents

              Ananchor element () to bring it all together. The element you use to create links is called anchor element (as opposed to the link element) because you use it to anchor a URL to some text on your Introduction page. When a user views your page in a browser, he or she can click the text to activate the link and Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment jump to the page whose URL you specified in the link. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web Say you2 have a Web page that describes HTML standards. You might want to refer Web surfers to the Chapter 3 - Web Creating Your First(W3C) HTML Page World Wide Consortium - seeing as it's the organization that governs all things related to the Part II -standard Getting Started with HTML HTML - for detailed information.

              A basic hyperlink to the W3C's Web site, www.w3.org, looks

              Chapter 4 like this:

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6
              The href="http://www.w3.org">World Wide Web Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page standards with Formatting Consortium is the body that oversees Part - Taking HTML to NextHTML Level theIIIdevelopment ofthethe

              Chapter 8

              specification.



              - HTML Tables

              You specify linkFrames URL (http://www.w3.org) in the anchor element's href attribute. The text (World Chapter 9 -the HTML Wide Web Chapter 10 Consortium) - HTML Formsyou include between the anchor element's open and close tags ( and ) is the IV text- Extending you hang your on. Figure 5-1 shows Part HTMLlink with Other Technologies

              how a browser displays this bit of markup.

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19 -5-1: TenAWays to Exterminate Web Figure paragraph with a link to Bugs the W3C. Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              TipVII You can also anchor Part - Appendixes

              URLs to images so users can click the image to activate a link. (For more about

              creating Aimages that link, see Chapter 6.) Appendix - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

              For a detailed discussion of the ins and outs of URLs, see Chapter 1.

              Appendix C - Glossary Index

              Anchor elements aren't block elements

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              List ofNotice, Figuresin the W3C link example, that the anchor element sits inside a paragraph (

              ) element. List ofAnchor Tables elements are inline elements - they don't define blocks of text, but instead apply to a few

              or characters within a block of text. When you create a link, you should always do so within a List ofwords Listings element (such as a paragraph, list item, heading, or even a table cell). Turn to Chapter 4 for List ofblock Sidebars more information on block elements. Although many Web browsers may display your anchors just fine (even if you don't nest them in block elements), some browsers don't handle this breach of HTML syntax very well. A good example is textonly browsers like those on Palm devices and mobile phones, as well as those used by the visually impaired with text-to-speech readers. These browsers have to display your pages with text and nothing more, and they rely heavily on block elements to help them properly divide the sections of your page. Without a block element, these browsers may not know what to do with your links and put the links in

              the wrong place in their final display.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4the for Dummies, 4th Edition Understanding Difference Between Absolute and Relative Links by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              As mentioned in aJohn later section ('Beyond Basic Links'), you can link to a variety of online resources. You Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) can create links to other HTML pages (either on your Web site or onWeb another Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site Web site), create links to different locationsoron the same HTML page, or to resources that aren't even one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- HTML pages at all (such as book willtext putfiles). you on the right track. e-mail addresses,by-step pictures, and The kind of link you create is determined by where you link to: Table of Contents

              absolute link4th uses a complete URL to connect browsers to a Web page or online resource. HTML An 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction

              Links that use a complete URL to point to a resource are labeled absolute because they provide a complete, standalone pointer to another Web resource. When you link to a page on someone else's Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Web site, the Web browser needs every bit of information in the URL to help it find the page. The Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web browser starts with the domain in the URL and works its way through the path to a specific file. When Chapter 3 Creating Your First HTML Page you link- to files on someone else's site, you must always use absolute URLs in the href attribute of Part II - Getting Started with HTML the anchor element. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Arelative link uses a kindResources of shorthand to specify the URL for the resource you're pointing to. You Chapter create 6 relative - Findinglinks and between Using Images resources on the same domain, and because the two resources are on

              the7same domain, youPage canwith omitFormatting the domain information from the URL. A relative URL uses the Chapter - Top Off Your location of HTML the resource you're linking Part III - Taking to the Next Level Chapter 8

              from to identify the location of the resource you're linking to.

              - HTML Tables

              Imagine that the following URLs identify documents on your Web site. The only difference between them - HTML Frames is the specific file they point to:

              Chapter 9

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              http://www.mysite.com/webdocs/home.html Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS http://www.mysite.com/webdocs/about.html - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 12 Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic Because both of these pages reside on the same Web site, you can take advantage of relative URLs when

              Chapter 14 a - Integrating a Database intowant Yourto HTML you create link between them. If you make a link from home.html to about.html, you can Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages use this simplified, relative URL in the anchor element: Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Learn more about our company.



              Part VI - The Part of Tens Remember When a browser

              encounters this link and finds that the link doesn't include a domain name,

              Chapter 19 - assumes Ten Waysthe to Exterminate Web Bugs the browser link is relative and uses the domain and path of the linking page (http://www.mysite.com/webdocs/) as a guide for finding the linked page (about.html). Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

              Tip As Ayour site grows more complex and you organize your files into a variety of folders, you can still use Appendix - HTML 4 Tags relative links. However, you have to provide some additional information in the URL to help the browser find files that aren't stored in the same directory as the file you're linking from.

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary

              Index Use../ (two periods and a slash) before the filename to indicate that the browser should move up one Cheat HTML 4 structure. For Dummies, Edition level Sheet in the -directory The 4th notation in this anchor element instructs the browser to move up one List of Figures folder from the folder the linking document is stored in, find a folder called docs, and then find a file called List home.html. of Tables The markup for this process looks like this: List of Listings List Sidebars Documentation home

              Remember When you create a relative link, the location of the file you're linking to is always relative to the file you're linking from. As you create your relative URL, trace the path a browser must take if it starts on the page you're linking from before it can get to the page you're linking to. That path defines the URL you will use in your relative link.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Avoiding Common URL Mistakes by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Every site, page, John image, or other resource onpages) the Web has its own unique URL, and even one incorrect Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 letter in your URLWhether can leadyour to agoal broken link. Broken links lead to an Web errorsite page. is to build a simple, text-oriented or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

              URLs are such finicky creatures simple typo cantrack. lead to links that simply don't work. If you have a by-step book willthat put ayou on the right URL that doesn't work, try these tactics to solve the problem: Table of Check Contents the case. Some Web servers, Linux and Unix most notably, are case-sensitive. Thus the

              treat the4th filenames HTML servers 4 For Dummies, Edition Bios.html and bios.html as two different files on the Web server. That also means that browsers must use uppercase and lowercase letters when necessary. Be sure Introduction case you're the link matches the actual Part Ithe - Meeting HTML using in Its in Natural Environment Chapter 1

              case of the URL that works in a Web browser.

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Check the extension.Bios.htm and Bios.html are two different files. If your link's URL uses one - HTML at Work on the Web extension but the actual filename uses another, your link won't work.

              Chapter 2 Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              The importance of http:// in HTML links

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter You've 5 -probably Linking to noticed Onlinethat Resources browsers are designed to make it as easy as possible for you to surf the

              Web. type and www.sun.com Chapter 6 If-you Finding Using Imagesin your browser's link window, the browser obligingly brings up http://www.sun.com. this technique works when you type URLs into your browser Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page Although with Formatting window, it won't when Part III - Taking HTMLwork to the Nextyou're Level writing Chapter 8

              markup for your Web page.

              - HTML Tables

              The URLs you use in your HTML need to be fully formed. Browsers won't interpret URLs that don't - HTML Frames include the page protocol. Forget the http://, and your link simply won't work.

              Chapter 9

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter Check 12 -the HTML filename. and Scripting If you change one part of a URL from the name of the domain to the path or

              filename (say you type bio.html Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic instead of bios.html), you've got a completely different URL on your or you'vea got a broken Chapter 14hands - Integrating Database intolink. YourEnter HTMLthe URL with bios.html at the end, and you're golden. Enter following URL, and a File Not Languages Found error page appears in your browser: Chapter 15 the - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16 http://www.sun.com/developers/evangcentral/bio.html - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Tip and paste. The best and most foolproof way to create a URL that works is to load a page in Chapter 18 Cut - Creating a Great User Interface your browser, copy the URL from the browser's address or link field, and then paste the URL into your Part VI - The Part of Tens HTML markup. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTMLLinks 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Beyond Basic by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              In the section 'Creating a Basic Link' at the beginning of this chapter, we gave you a perfect example of John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) how to create a link in your Web page to a Web page interdocument hyperlink) on another site. You Whether your goal is to build a simple, (an text-oriented Web site pick a page to linkorto, find some text in your document to hang the link on, create an anchor element, and one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. you're done. However, you can go beyond the basics when you link to other Web pages: You can create links that Table ofbrowsers Contentsto open linked documents in new windows, link to specific locations within a Web page, direct HTML 4 For 4ththan Edition and link to Dummies, things other HTML pages, such as Portable Document Format (PDF) files, compressed Introduction files, word-processing documents, and more. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Creating a link that opens in a new window Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3 works - Creating Youryou Firstcan HTML The Web because linkPage pages on your Web site to pages on other people's Web sites with Part - Getting Started with HTMLelement. the II simple addition of an anchor

              However, when you link to someone else's site, you're sending

              Chapter 4 -from Structuring Your HTML users away your own site, andDocuments you have no guarantee that they will find their way back. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources

              An increasingly common approach to linking users to other sites without sending them away from your site Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images is to use the browser to open the linked page in a new window. A simple addition of Chapter 7 HTML - Topthat Off instructs Your Page with Formatting

              thetarget attribute to your anchor element sends the link to a new browser window instead of opening it in the current window: Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              The href="http://www.w3.org" target="_blank">World Wide Chapter 10
              WebIVConsortium
              isOther the Technologies standards Part - Extending HTML with

              body that oversees the development of the HTML specification.

              Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting When you give the target attribute a value of _blank, that tells the browser to keep the linking page Making Multimedia Magic open in the -current window and open the linked page in a new one, as shown in Figure 5-2.

              Chapter 13 Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings

              Figure 5-2: Use the target attribute to open a new window in a Web browser to display a linked file.

              List of Sidebars

              Warning This technique gives you the best of both worlds: You can link to an off-site resource without really sending your users off site. However, many users are easily irritated when new window after new window pops up on their screens. Use this technique with care and sparingly, or your users will leave your site without benefiting from any links you might provide. Tip You can use JavaScript to control the size and appearance of pop-up windows, as well as give them buttons that help users close them quickly. Learn more about this in Chapter 12.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Linking to specific locations in the same Web page by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Just as you can use Johnlinks Wiley to &help Sons your © 2003 users (408navigate pages) your Web site or the Web in general, you can help users navigate onWhether a singleyour Webgoal page. you've ever seen 'Back to top' is toIf build a simple, text-oriented Weblinks site or a table of contents section or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, stepfor a very long Web page, you've seen intradocument hyperlinks at this work. Creating an intradocument by-step book will put you on the right track. hyperlink is a two-step process: 1. Identify and mark the places in your document that you want to link to. Table of Contents

              For example, mark the top of your page or its major headings.

              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction 2. Link to those spots.

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter When you 1 create - The Least a linkYou from Need onetoWeb Know page about to HTML another, andyou theuse WebURLs to define the location of the page

              you want to. at However, apply to a whole page, not segments of a page. If you want to direct Chapter 2 to-link HTML Work onURLs the Web your links specificYour place on HTML the page, Chapter 3 to- aCreating First Page you first have to mark the spot you want to link to. You use the anchor elementStarted with the name attribute Part II - Getting with HTML Chapter 4

              to make your mark:

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Notice 7that -there isn'tYour any Page text between the opening and closing tags. That's because an anchor tag that Chapter Top Off with Formatting marks a spot doesn't need text to hang Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level the spot on. Instead, you simply create an empty anchor tag and you've created a spot in your document that you can link to. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter - HTML To link 9to this spot, Frames you use a slightly different URL than you've seen before: Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Back to top

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12 -sign HTML Scripting The pound (#)and indicates that you're pointing to a spot on the page, rather than another page. Listing 5Chapter 13how - Making Multimedia 1 shows these two anchor Magic elements work together as part of a more complete page. Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Listing15 5-1:- How Intradocument Chapter HTML RelatesHyperlinks to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence ChapterIntradocumment 18 - Creating a Great User Interface hyperlinks at work Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Web-Based Part VII - Appendixes

              Training



              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Given importance of the Web to businesses and Appendix B - HTMLthe Character Codes organizations, individuals who seek to improve Appendix C other - Glossary job skills, or fulfill essential job functions, are turning to HTML and XML to deliver training. We Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition believe this provides an outstanding opportunity for List of Figures participation in an active and lucrative adult and List of Tables continuing education market.

              Index

              List of Listings

              List of Sidebars

              Back to top





              Remember Listing 5-1 is shorter than most documents that integrate intradocument links. It's designed as an example of the markup you should use and how to use it.

              Figure 5-3 showsHTML how this HTML appears in Edition a Web browser. If the user clicks the Back to top link, the 4 for Dummies, 4th browser jumps back to the top spot marked ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts by . John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5 -5-3: Linking Onlineelements Resourcesto mark spots on a page and link to them. Figure Useto anchor Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images

              Remember TheOffanchor element marks the spot doesn't affect the appearance of the first-level Chapter 7 - Top Your Page with that Formatting heading. You can mark spots wherever Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              you need to without worrying about the final display of your page.

              Tip You generally use intradocument navigation for long pages that users need help navigating.

              Linking to specific locations in another Web page

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              You can combine intradocument and interdocument links to point users to a specific spot on a different Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Web page. For instance, if you want to point to a spot named descriptions on a page named Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic home.html on your site, the link would look like this:

              Review the document descriptions to find the documentation specific to Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox your product.

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18 you - Creating GreataUser Because have to adefine spotInterface before you can link to it, you'll find that intradocument linking works Part Tens bestVIon- The yourPart ownofsite where you

              create and control the markup. However, if you happen to know that a

              Chapter 19someone - Ten Ways to site Exterminate Web Bugs marked on them, you can use an absolute URL to point to page on else's has spots already Chapter 20 for - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts that spot, example: Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A out - HTML 4 Tags

              Find how to register for upcoming training Appendix C lead - Glossary courses by LANWrights instructors.

              Index

              Warning linkDummies, to spots on Cheat Sheet When - HTMLyou 4 For 4thsomeone Edition else's Web site, you're at their mercy because they control theofspots. You never know when someone will completely rework the markup and content on a page, and List Figures your will break if the site designer removes the spot. Be sure you check all of your links regularly to List of links Tables catch and fix broken links to both Web pages and spots on Web pages. List of Listings List of Sidebars

              Linking to non-HTML resources Although links on the Web were originally used strictly for linking from one Web page to another or within a single Web page, the uses for links have expanded significantly over time to link to a variety of other kinds of files, including these: Word-processing documents

              Spreadsheets

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              PDFs

              ISBN:0764519956

              ZIP files and Whether other compressed your goal isfiles to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

              Tip You can also use anbook anchor element tothe linkright to multimedia files, but there are generally better ways to by-step will put you on track. embed media clips in your Web pages. Chapter 13 covers media file linking in detail. A great use for this kind of link is on software and PDF download pages. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Creating Introduction

              a file download link

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Even non-Web files have unique URLs just like good old HTML pages. When you put a file on a Web - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web server (regardless of its type) you can use a URL to point to it from a link. For instance, if you want your Chapter 2 HTML at Work on the Web users to be -able to download a PDF file named doc.pdf and a .ZIP archive called software. zip Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page from a Web page, you use this HTML: Chapter 1

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Download the new version of our software

              - Linking to Online Resources

              The software

              Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images

              The documentation

              Chapter 5 Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - TakingYou HTML to the Next how Levelany Remember can't be sure

              given user's browser will respond when he or she clicks on a link

              Chapter 8 - HTML Tables to a non-Web file. The browser may prompt the user to save the file, or the browser may have a plug-in Chapter 9 that - HTML installed allowsFrames the user to view the file without downloading. (This is common for PDFs.) In some rare Chapter instances, 10 the - HTML browser Forms may present an error message (such as a pop-up window) to let the user know the Part browser IV - Extending can't handle HTML thewith file.Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Tip To help users download files successfully, you should provide them with as much information as Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting possible about the file formats and any special tools they might need to work with the files. For example, to Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic work with the contents of a ZIP file you need WinZip or another utility; to view a PDF file, you need the free Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Acrobat reader. You can make the previous download markup a little more user-friendly by adding some Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages supporting text and links: Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Download the new version of our software

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              The software
              Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Note: Part VI - The Part of Tens You need a zip Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs utility to open this file.

              Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              The documentation
              Part VII - Appendixes Note: Appendix - HTML 4 Tags YouA need the free Acrobat Reader Appendix - Glossary to C view the documentation.

              Chapter 17

              Index

              Figure 5-4 shows a Dummies, browser renders this HTML and the dialog box it displays when you click the Cheat Sheet - HTMLhow 4 For 4th Edition software link. List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter Figure 4 -5-4: Structuring This browser Your HTML prompts Documents you to save or view the ZIP file. Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Linking to an e-mail address Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              In addition to linking to non-Web files to create download pages and the like, you can also link to e-mail

              Chapter 8 -You HTML addresses. useTables the standard anchor element and href attribute, but you preface the e-mail address Chapter 9 HTML Frames you want to link to with mailto:, as shown here: Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Send us your - Getting Stylish with CSS comments.



              Chapter 11 Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13 the - Making Multimedia Magic Although user's browser configuration ultimately controls how the browser handles an e-mail link, most Chapter browsers 14 automatically - Integrating open a Database a newinto e-mail Your message HTML window with the e-mail address you specify in the

              href attribute already the Totofield. This is a great way to help users send you e-mail while a request or Chapter 15 - How HTMLinRelates Other Markup Languages issue in theWeb forefront of Web their Site mind. Part V -isFrom Page to Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Tricks of the Trade Web page mailto links are one of the prime sources of e-mail addresses for spam - Setting Up Your Online Presence systems. If you choose to use an e-mail link as a way for users to contact you (a form is another option for Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface receiving feedback, as discussed in Chapter 10), consider creating a special e-mail address just for your Part VI - The Part of Tens site feedback. You can keep the messages you receive at this address separate from your personal or Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs other mail, so you can more easily filter out junk mail. Chapter 17

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part - Appendixes TipVII Regardless of what

              kind of link you include in your Web page, where you place your links, the text

              Appendix A -them HTMLto, 4 and Tagsthe clues you give your users about where a link is taking them have a significant you anchor Appendix impact on B the - HTML effectiveness Characterof Codes your links. Chapter 18 discusses some best practices for including links in

              your overall design. Appendix C - site Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 6: Finding and Using Images ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              Overview

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Finding the right format for your images Table of Contents

              markup to4th addEdition images to Web pages HTML Using 4 For Dummies, Introduction

              Creating images that link

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1 - The Least You maps, Need toanimated Know about HTML the Web images Understanding image GIFs, andand transparent Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web

              Finding use First in your Web pages Chapter 3 - images CreatingtoYour HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Although the Web was once a text-heavy place where images played only a supporting role, things are - Structuring Your HTML Documents very different today. Web page designers use text and images equally to deliver important information, Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources direct site navigation, and of course contribute to the overall look and feel of a page. Images are a Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images powerful weapon in your Web design armory, but you need to use them carefully and properly or you risk Chapter 7 their - Top Off Your Page with Formatting reducing effectiveness. Chapter 4

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter Remember 8 - HTML WhenTables used well, images are a key element of your page design. When used poorly, they

              can make page unreadable or inaccessible. Chapter 9 your - HTML Frames Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              This chapter gives you a crash course in using images on your Web pages. You find out which image formats are Web-friendly, how to use HTML elements to add images to your Web pages, how to attach Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS hyperlinks to your images, how to create image maps and animated images, and how to find and edit Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting images for your Web page. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition The Role ofHTML Images in a Web Page by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Think back to theJohn last Wiley several Web ©pages you’ve & Sons 2003 (408 pages)visited and consider the role images have played in each. Images may be logos, clickable navigation aids, or display content; they Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web may site also make the page look prettier, or serve or to unify a page’s theme. A perfect example of the many different ways images can one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step to book willpages put you on the right track.home page at www.whitehouse.gov, shown enhance and contribute Web is the White House inFigure 6-1. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Figure 6-1: The White House Web page uses images in a variety of ways.

              Chapter - How HTML analyzing Relates to this Other Markup Spend 15 a few moments page, andLanguages you’ll see that images play the following roles on the Part V - From Web Page to Web Site page:

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox For17navigation: The navigation at the top of that page uses graphics with stylized text to link you to Chapter - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              information aboutathe President, the Vice President, a search of the site, and more. These navigation Chapter 18 - Creating Great User Interface elements could have Part VI - The Part of Tens

              been text based (like those on the left-side of the screen), but using graphics to help visitors link to key areas of the siteBugs makes it just a little prettier and helps establish an overall flow Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web and formal look and feel for the site. Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

              As content: The picture on the right side of the screen isn’t just there to break up the text on the page; it conveys content in a way text simply can’t. The site could easily use text to describe the President Appendix B - HTML Character Codes making calls to world leaders from the Oval Office with the sun streaming through the windows on a Appendix C - Glossary beautiful day in Washington, D.C., but the picture captures the moment more effectively (and Index concisely) than words ever could. This illustrates the many times images are better vehicles for Cheatconveying Sheet - HTML 4 Forthan Dummies, Edition content text can4th be. Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              List of Figures

              decoration and to establish an overall look and feel for the site: The site uses a smattering of List ofFor Tables List ofgraphics Listings to make the site look good and establish an overall look and feel. Notice the White House List ofbalcony Sidebarsin the upper-right corner. It helps emphasize that this is the White House home page and

              adds a sense of dignity and formality to the site’s look and feel. A picture of Grover Cleveland sitting next to links to information about goings on in the Cleveland White House back in 1893 adds some variety and visual appeal to the page.

              Overall, the White House site balances images and text beautifully. Many of the images on the page perform double-duty as both navigation tools and decorations, and the images the designer chose help convey a consistent and appropriate look and feel for the site.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Creating Web-Friendly Images by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              There are a lot ofJohn different to ©create andpages) save graphics, but only a few are actually appropriate for Wileyways & Sons 2003 (408 images you want Whether to use onyour thegoal Web. As you work to create Web-friendly images, you have to take two is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site factors into account: file format and file size. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Choosing the right file format Table of Contents

              Usually, graphic file formats are particular to one operating system or another, or even to one software HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              application or another. However, because you can’t predict what kind of computer visitors might be using, or what software (other than a Web browser) they have installed, you need to create images that anyone Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment can view with any browser. This means you need to use file formats that can be viewed whether a person Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web uses any version of Microsoft Windows, the Mac OS, or any of the various varieties of Linux on the scene. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Such file formats are called cross platform. Introduction

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II -are Getting with HTML There only Started three graphics formats

              Chapter 4

              that are appropriate for use on the Web:

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              GIF5 (Graphics Format): GIF is the original cross-platform, application-independent Chapter - Linking Interchange to Online Resources image format created by CompuServe. It’s a compressed file format, which means that images saved Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images as 7GIFs- tend to be smaller thanFormatting those saved in other file formats. However, GIF supports up to 256 Chapter Top Off Your Page with colors (andHTML that’stoall, folks), if you Part III - Taking the Next so Level

              try to save an image created with millions of colors as a GIF, you may lose some image quality. Generally, GIF is the best format for line art, clip art, and other types of Chapter 8 - HTML Tables less-complex images. Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10 (Joint - HTMLPhotographic Forms JPEG Experts Group): JPEG is a file format that supports 24-bit color (millions Part IV Extending with Other Technologies of -colors) andHTML consequently more complex images,

              like photographs. JPEG is both cross-platform

              Chapter 11application-independent, - Getting Stylish with CSS and just as GIF is. JPEG also offers compression to make images smaller, Chapter 12a good - HTML and Scriptingtool can help you tweak the level of compression that you use so you can and image-editing Chapter 13 the - Making Multimedia strike optimum balanceMagic between image quality and image size. Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              PNG Network The latest cross-platform and application-independent image file Chapter 15 (Portable - How HTML RelatesGraphics): to Other Markup Languages together Part Vformat - Fromdeveloped Web Page to to bring Web Site

              the best of GIF and JPEG. PNG provides the same level of compression as GIF does, but supports 24-bit color (and even 32-bit color) like JPEG. Because PNG Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox supports such rich color and uses more advanced compression schemes than either GIF or JPEG, it’s Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence the best of the three formats and works with any kind of art. However, Internet Explorer 4 and Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Netscape 4 and older browsers don’t support it, so many designers still shy away from it. Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19 graphics-editing - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web discussed Bugs Any good tool (like those in Chapter 16) allows you to save your images in any Chapter Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts of these20file- formats. You can experiment with each to see how converting a graphic from one format to Part - Appendixes the VII other changes its

              appearance and file size, and then choose the format that gives you the best results.

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Tip ForBa complete overviewCodes of graphics formats and how to match a format to a particular graphic, visit Appendix - HTML Character Builder.com’s Graphics 101 http://builder.cnet.com/webbuilding/0-3883-8-48921401.htmland Webmonkey’s "Web Graphics Overview" at Index http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/01/28/index1a.html . Appendix C - Glossary

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures

              Achieving the smallest possible file size

              List of Tables

              List of Listings

              The fact that all three cross-platform graphics file formats (GIF, JPEG, and PNG) include file compression capabilities should be your first clue that file size is extremely important when you create Web graphics. Before users can view the images on your Web site, they have to download copies of those images to their local hard drives, which means the wrong set of circumstances can make your pages so difficult to access that visitors won’t stay long enough to see your content and certainly won’t be making a return visit:

              List of Sidebars

              You have several big images on your HTML page: If the graphics on your page take up several hundreds of kilobytes (K), they will take quite a while to download regardless of the speed of a user’s Internet connection.

              A visitor hasHTML a slow Internet connection: If it takes a minute or more (a very long time in 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition cyberspace) by forEd your page to load on users’ computers, you can lose traffic. Most users don’t have ISBN:0764519956 Tittel and Natanya Pitts that much patience, and they’ll leave your page in search of one that loads faster. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

              The good news isoryou can create graphics that look good and that have a reasonable file size. The few one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepminutes you spend optimizing yourput images make them more effective and help you keep the by-step book will you onfor theWeb rightuse track. users who visit your site on your site. Table of Contents

              Optimizing images for the Web

              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Introduction As you build graphics for your Web page, you’ll find yourself in a constant struggle to maintain a healthy Part I - Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment balance between fileinquality and file size. The more

              colors an image has, the better it looks, but the larger

              Chapter 1 -As The Least You to Know about HTML and the Webquality begins to decline, but so does file its file size. you begin to Need reduce the number of colors, image Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web size. Finding the right balance in an image is called optimizing it, and there are a variety of tools designed Chapter Creating Your First HTML Page to help 3you -do just that. Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              The first in optimizing your graphic for the Web is choosing the proper file format. For example, if you Chapter 4 step - Structuring Your HTML Documents try to save as a GIF, you’ll only have 256 colors to work with, which typically isn’t Chapter 5 a- complex Linking tophotograph Online Resources enough6 for -a Finding photograph. The Images file size might be smaller, but the quality probably won’t be that great. On Chapter and Using the other hand, if you try to use JPEG to save some simple line art, you’ll have millions of colors to work - Top Off Your Page with Formatting with (that you really don’t need), and your file size will typically be larger than you need. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 7

              Chapter 8 offers - HTML Tables Table 6-1 some very general guidelines for choosing a file format for an image type. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10 -Choosing HTML Forms Table 6-1: the Right File Format Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              File Format Best Used Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSSFor

              Watch Out

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              Don’t use this format if you have a complex image or photo.

              Chapter 14

              - Making Multimedia Magic few colors and less detail. - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              JPEG15 Chapter

              Photos to and otherMarkup images with - How HTML Relates Other Languages

              GIF

              Line art and other images with

              millions of colors and lots of Part V - From Web Page to Web Site detail. Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter PNG 17 Chapter 18

              - Setting Up Your Online Photos and Presence other images with - Creating a Great User millions of Interface colors and lots of

              Part VI - The Part of Tens detail.

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Don’t use with line art. Be sure that you don’t compromise too much quality when you compress the file. Don’t use with line art. Older browsers don’t support PNG, so you may still lose Web surfers even though PNG offers the best balance between quality and file size.

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix Tip Although A - HTML many 4 Tags visitors to your Web site may have broadband Internet connections, many more

              probablyBdo- not. The best way to ensure that your page is accessible to everyone and downloads quickly Appendix HTML Character Codes — regardless of connection speed — is to remember the 1-second, 1K rule. If you assume that it takes 1 Appendix C - Glossary second for every K of information on your page to download, you can add the total file size for the HTML Index file and all images theDummies, page and4th getEdition a good idea of how long your page will take to download on a slow Cheat Sheet - HTML on 4 For Internet connection. Try to keep it to 60 seconds, which is 60K, or less, and you’ll be just fine. List of Figures List of Tables

              Remember Webmonkey has two good tutorials on trimming your image file sizes and optimizing your

              List of Listings entire site so it downloads faster. For a healthy collection of tips and tricks that can help you create pages List Sidebars quickly, review “Optimizing Your Images” at thatofdownload

              http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/99/15/index0a.html and the "Site Optimization Tutorial" at http:// hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/design/site_building/tutorials/ tutorial2.html.

              HTML 4 for 4th Edition Adding an Image toDummies, Your Page by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              After you have anJohn image to work with and(408 optimized Wiley & Sons © 2003 pages) it for the Web, you need to use the correct markup to make sure the image is added to your page. enough. The image element is an empty Whether your goal is to build Easy a simple, text-oriented Web() site element, sometimes called a singleton tag, which you place on the page wherever you want your image to or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. go. Remember An empty element only has an open tag, and no close tag. Table of Contents

              The following markup places an image named three_cds.jpg between two paragraphs: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - MeetingHTML HTML in Its Natural Environment
              HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN"

              Chapter 1

              - "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              at Your Work ChapterCDs 4 - Structuring HTML Documents </head> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> <body> Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> <h1>CD - as a Storage Media</h1> HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> <p>CD-ROMs have become a standard storage option in today’s computing world - HTML Forms because they are an inexpensive and easy to use media.</p><br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> <img src="three_cds.jpg"><br /> <br /> Chapter 14 read - Integrating intoonly Your HTML <p>To from aaDatabase CD, you need a standard CD-ROM drive, but to create Chapter CDs, 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup you need either a CD-R orLanguages a CD-R/W drive.</p> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox </body> Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence </html> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> A Web Part VI - browser The Part replaces of Tens<br /> <br /> the <img> element with the image file referenced by the src attribute, as shown in Figure 6-2. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 6-2: Use the <img> element to place graphics in a Web page. Thesrc attribute is very much like the href attribute that you use with an anchor (<a>) element. The src<br /> <br /> attribute specifies the URL for the image you want to display on your page. The previous example points to for Dummies, 4th Edition an image file thatHTML sits in4the same folder as the HTML file referencing it, so the URL is relative. You’ll find by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pittsjust because you ISBN:0764519956 that most of your links to images are relative usually keep image files on your site. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Remember You make relative links between resources (like a Web page Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site and graphic) on the same or one loaded links with frames, andon animation, this Web step- sites. Turn to Chapter 5 for a Web site. You make absolute betweengraphics, resources two different by-step book will put you on the right track. complete discussion of the differences between relative and absolute links. Tricks of the Trade So why should you keep all of the images you reference in your HTML on your site with your other files? After all, you can point to any image anywhere from your HTML. An image is just HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition another Web resource. There are three compelling reasons to link to images on your own site:<br /> <br /> Table of Contents Introduction<br /> <br /> Part IWhen - Meeting in are Its Natural Environment the HTML images stored on your site, you<br /> <br /> have complete control over them. You know they aren’t<br /> <br /> Chapter going 1 to - disappear The Least You or change, Need to and Knowyou about canHTML work and to optimize the Webthem. Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> If you link to images on someone else’s site, you never know when that site might go down or be - Creating Your First HTML Page unbelievably slow. You know these things about your own site. Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 link - Structuring HTML Documents If you to images Your on someone else’s Web site, you may very well be violating his or her copyright Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources (see the “Copyright matters” sidebar at the end of the chapter), and that’s just plain illegal. Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> Top Off Your Page with Formatting Adding -alternative text<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter HTML Tables Images8are-designed, obviously, to be seen. However, there two important reasons why your image might Chapter 9 not be seen: HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Users who areHTML visually may not be Part IV - Extending withimpaired Other Technologies Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> able to see them.<br /> <br /> Users with slow modem connections may turn images off.<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 -Stuff Making Multimedia Technical Some searchMagic engines and other cataloging tools also use alternative text to index Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML images. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Although most of Page your to users see your Part V - From Web Webwill Site<br /> <br /> images, you should always be prepared for those who won’t.<br /> <br /> The HTML specification requires Chapter 16 -4.0 Creating an HTML Toolboxthat you provide alternative text that describes the image with every image on page.Up You useOnline the alt attribute with the <img> element to add this information to your Chapter 17 your - Setting Your Presence markup: Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"> Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> <html>A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix <head>B - HTML Character Codes Appendix <title>Inside the Orchestra

              Appendix C - Glossary Index

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Among the different sections of the orchestra you will find:

              List of Tables

              violin and sheet music Strings

              List of Listings src="brass.jpg" alt="trumpet"> Brass

              clarinet Woodwinds

              List of Figures

              When browsers don’t display an image (or can’t, in the case of text-only browsers such as Lynx), they display the alternative text instead, as shown in Figure 6-3.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter Figure 4 -6-3: Structuring When a Your browser HTMLdoesn’t Documents show an image, it shows alternative text instead. Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources Even when show an Images image, many (Internet Explorer 4 and Netscape 4 and later) typically show Chapter 6 -browsers Finding and Using

              the alternative text as a pop-up tip when you hold your mouse over the image for a few seconds, as shown - Top Off Your Page with Formatting in Figure 6-4. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 7 Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List ofFigure Figures6-4: Even when a browser shows an image, it may display the alternative text as a pop-up tip

              well. List ofas Tables List of Listings

              This means you can use alternative text to describe the image to those who can’t see it and to provide additional information about the image to those who can.

              List of Sidebars

              Tip The W3C’s Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) includes a variety of helpful tips on how to create useful and usable alternatives to visual content at www.w3.org/TR/WCAG10-TECHS/#gl-provideequivalents.Chapter 18 also discusses making your site accessible in more detail.

              Specifying image size

              You can use the height and width attributes with the element to let the browser know just how HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition tall and wide an image is (in pixels): by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              trumpetBrass



              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepMost browsers download the HTML and text associated with a page long before they download all of the by-step book will put you on the right track.

              page graphics. Rather than make users wait for every bit of a page to download, browsers typically display the text first and fill in graphics as they become available. If you let the browser know how big a graphic is, Table the browser of Contents can reserve a spot for it in the display. This technique makes the transition from a page without graphics displayed to a page with graphics displayed much smoother for the user. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction

              Tip Any image-editing program or even the image viewers built into Windows and Mac OS display the width and height of an image in pixels. Also, you may be able to simply view the properties of the image in Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web either operating system to see how wide and tall it is. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter - Creating Your First HTML Another3 good use of the height andPage width attributes is to create colored lines on a page using just a Part II -colored Gettingsquare. Started For withexample, HTML small

              Chapter 4

              this markup adds a 10 by 10-pixel blue box to an HTML page:

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images

              When the width attributes in the element match the height and width of the image, it Chapter 7 height - Top Offand Your Page with Formatting Part displays III - Taking as a blue HTML boxtointhe a browser Next Level window,

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              as shown in Figure 6-5.

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Figure A small abox. Chapter 14 -6-5: Integrating Database into Your HTML Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              However, a change to the height Part V - From Web Page to Web Siteand

              width values in the markup turns this small blue box into a line 20 pixels high and 500 pixels long: Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Part VI - The Part of Tens

              The browser will expand the image to fit the height and width specifics in the markup, as shown in Figure - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs 6-6.

              Chapter 19 Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List ofFigure Tables 6-6: A small box becomes a long line. List of Listings

              Tricks of the Trade Using this technique, you can turn a single image like the blue box (only 1K in size by the way) into a variety of lines and even boxes. This is a good way to ensure all of the dividers and other border elements on your page use the same color — because they are all based on the same graphic. Also, if you decide you want to change all of your blue lines to green, you simply change the image, and every line you’ve created changes colors.

              List of Sidebars

              Warning When you specify a height and width for an image that are different from the image’s actual height and width, you rely on the browser to scale the image display accordingly. Although this works great for single-color images like the blue box, it doesn’t work well for images with multiple colors or images that

              display actual pictures. The browser doesn’t size images well, and you’ll wind up with a distorted picture. 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Figure 6-7 showsHTML how badly a browser handles enlarging the trumpet image from the previous example ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pittsin the markup: when we double the image height and width John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

              trumpet Brass

              or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Figure 6-7:HTML Don’ttouse browser Part III - Taking theaNext Levelto resize

              complex images.

              Tricks of the Trade If you need several sizes of the same image, say a logo or navigation button, use - HTML Frames the largest size image to make smaller versions in an image-editing tool so you can better control the final Chapter 10 - HTML look and feel of theForms image. Chapter 9

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Setting the image border Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13

              Making Multimedia Magic By default, -every image has a border of 1, which doesn’t really show up until you turn that image into a

              Chapter 14 (as - Integrating a Database intothat YourLink” HTML hyperlink discussed in the “Images section coming up). You can use the border attribute Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages with the element to better control what border the browser displays around your image. This Part V - From Page tofor Web markup setsWeb the border theSite clarinet

              Chapter 16

              image to 10 pixels:

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence clarinet

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part - The Part of Tens TheVIbrowser applies this

              border to all four sides of the image, as shown in Figure 6-8.

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              Figure 6-8: Use the border attribute to create a border around your image. Notice that the border is black and applies to all four sides of the image. If you want to control the color of the border, or want the border to appear differently on each side of the image, you have two options:

              Build the border into the image in an image-editing tool. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition

              by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts Use Cascading Style Sheets (covered in Chapter 11).

              ISBN:0764519956

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              If you use an image-editing toolgoal to create youra border, can take Web advantage of the tool’s features to Whether your is to build simple, you text-oriented site create a patterned border or apply a unique effect. However, the additional information in the image may or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the your right image track. size in relation to its final appearance to be make it bigger. You’ll need to carefully manage sure it doesn’t take too long to download. Table Contents If youofuse CSS to apply a border, your image won’t get any bigger, but your border may not show up in HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition older4browsers that don’t support CSS well. The choice you make depends on how crucial the border is to Introduction your image (if it’s very important, embed it in the image) and what browser you think your visitors use Part I - Meeting Its Natural Environment (newer browserHTML haveinbetter support for style sheets).

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Tip If 2you -don’t plan to make your image into a hyperlink and don’t want a border, don’t worry about Chapter HTML at Work on the Web setting a border attribute at all. However, if you want to turn your image into a hyperlink and don’t want a Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page bright blue line around it, be sure to set the value of border to 0. Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Controlling image - Linking to Onlinealignment Resources

              Chapter 5 Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Thealign attribute works with the element to control the way your image appears relative to the Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting text around it. The possible values for this attribute are: Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8 Aligns - HTML top: theTables text around the image with the top of the image. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames

              middle: Aligns the text around the image with the middle of the image. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              bottom: Aligns the text around the image with the bottom of the image.

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12 The - HTML and sits Scripting left: image on the left, and text floats to the right of the image. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic

              right: image sits on the right, and HTML text floats to the left of the image. Chapter 14 - The Integrating a Database into Your Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              By default, most browsers align images to the left and float all text to the right. The following markup shows how five different elements use the align attribute to change the way text floats around the Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox mouse images: Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              VI
              alt="mouse on a white background" height="108" width="72" align="top"> Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs This text is aligned with the top of the image. Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              mouse on a yellow background Appendix C - Glossary This text is aligned with the middle of the image. Index

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures

              grey mouse on a red background List of Listings This text is aligned with the bottom of the image. List

              of Sidebars

              three button mouse This image floats to the left of the text.

              trackball mouse and keyboard
              height="108" width="72" align="right"> HTMLfloats 4 for Dummies, Edition This image to the 4th right of the text. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)



              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site onealoaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepFigure 6-9 showsorhow browser interprets these different alignments. by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Figure canRelates vary image alignment to control image placement on the page. Chapter 15 -6-9: HowYou HTML to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Tip You may find that the attributes don’t give you as much control over your image alignment as - Creating an HTML Toolbox you’d like. One of the primary uses for tables is to better control the way images sit relative to other content Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence on the page. Find out more about using tables and images together in Chapter 8. In addition, CSS, Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface discussed in Chapter 11, includes a variety of properties you can use to better control the way your images Part VI - The Part of Tens sit on the page. Chapter 16

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Setting image spacing

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Most browsers only leave a pixel or so of white space between images and the text or other images next to them. You can use the vspace and hspace attributes to give your images a little more breathing room Appendix C - Glossary both on the top Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Index

              Cheat and bottom Sheet -(vertical HTML 4 space) For Dummies, and to 4th the Edition left and right (horizontal space). This HTML gives the mouse

              graphic 20 pixels of white space on either side, and 25 pixels on the top and bottom: List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings

              List of This Sidebars text doesn’t crowd the image on top.


              mouse on a white background And this text is a little further away from the sides.

              Figure 6-10 shows how a browser adds space around the image to separate it from the text.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter Figure 2 -6-10: HTMLThe at Work hspace on the andWeb vspace attributes control the white space around an image. Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Tricks of the Trade Part II - Getting StartedThe withdefault HTML

              value for hspace and vspace is 1. If you want to place images so close together that their sides are touching, as you might for a set of navigation buttons, set the value for Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents these attributes to 0 to eliminate that extra 1 pixel of space. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Images thatHTML Link by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              One of the most common for ©images is pages) as navigation tools. They are prettier than plain-text links, and John Wileyuses & Sons 2003 (408 as you saw on theWhether White House page earlier in the chapter, they allow your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Webyou siteto include both form and function on your page withorone element. To create an image that links, you simply substitute an element in one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you onto. theThis rightmarkup track. hangs a link on some text: place of the text you would anchor your link

              Visit the W3C

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction

              This markup replaces the text Visit the W3C with an appropriate icon:

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Visit the W3C Web Site Part II - Getting Started with HTML



              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5 - a Linking Onlinethat Resources This creates linkedtoimage points to http://www.w3.org. Also, notice that the alternative text now Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images saysVisit the W3C Web Site, to let users who can't see the image know where the link takes them. Chapter - Top Off Your Formatting When a7 user moves his orPage her with mouse pointer over the image, the cursor turns from a pointer into a pointing Part III(or - Taking HTML to his theor Next hand whatever icon herLevel browser

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              uses to indicate a link), as shown in Figure 6-11.

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16 -6-11: Creating an HTML Toolbox Figure Combine image and anchor elements to create a linked image. Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              A quick18 click of the image launches the W3C Web site. It's as simple as that. Chapter - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Tricks of the Trade As discussed earlier in the chapter, you should set the border of any image you use in - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs a link to 0 to keep the browser from surrounding your image in an ugly blue line. Without the line, however, Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts users will need other visual (or alternative text) clues so they know an image is a link. Be sure images that Part VII - Appendixes serve as links scream to the user (tastefully of course) "I'm a link." Chapter 18 discusses building a good user Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags interface in more detail. Chapter 19

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary

              Creating an image map

              Index

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              When you use an element with an anchor element to create a linking image, you can only attach one link to that image. If you want to create a larger image that connects several different links to different regions List on of theTables page, you need an image map. List of Figures

              List of Listings

              To of create an image map you need two things: List Sidebars An image with several distinct areas that would be obvious to users that point to different areas on your site. A set of markup to map the different regions on the map to different URLs. You use the element to add the map image into your page, just as you would any other image. In addition, you include the usemap attribute to let the browser know that there's image map information to go

              with the image. The value of the usemap attribute is the name of your map. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition

              ISBN:0764519956 You use two elements by Ed and Tittelaand collection NatanyaofPitts attributes to define the image map: to hold the map information and John Wiley to link & Sons specific © 2003parts (408 pages) of the map to URLs. The element uses the name attribute to identify the map. The value name shouldtext-oriented match the value Whether your goal is toof build a simple, Web of siteusemap in the element one loaded with frames, graphics, animation, thistostepthat goes with theormap. The element takes and several attributes define the specifics for each region by-step book will put you on the right track. in the map:

              shape: Specifies the shape of the region. You can choose from rect (rectangle), circle, and poly (a triangle or polygon).

              Table of Contents

              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Introduction coords: Define the region's coordinates. A rectangle's coordinates include the left, right, top, and Part Ibottom - Meeting HTMLAin Its Natural Environment points. circle's coordinates include

              the x and y coordinates for the center of the circle and the

              Chapter circle's 1 -radius. The Least A polygon's You Needcoordinates to Know about areHTML a collection and theofWeb x and y coordinates for every point in the

              polygon. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              href:Specifies the URL to which the region links. This can be an absolute or relative URL.

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4 Provides - Structuring Your HTML Documents alt: alternative text for the image region. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources

              This markup defines and a three-region map called NavMap linked to the navigation.gif image: Chapter 6 - Finding Using Images Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III -src="navigation.gif" Taking HTML to the Next Level
              height="30" usemap="#NavMap" border="0">

              Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter Home

              About Chapter 10 shape="rect" - HTML Forms shape="rect" coords="202,0,301,30" Part Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              href="products.html" alt="Products">

              Figure 6-12 shows how a browser displays this markup.

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Figure 6-12: Image Part VII - Appendixes

              maps turn different areas of an image into linking regions.

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Tip When the mouse sits over a region in the map, the cursor turns into a pointing hand, just as it does over any other hyperlink, so take advantage of the alternative text to include useful information about the link

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index

              Creating thumbnail images

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              List ofThere Figures may be times when you want to make large images available to users on your Web site, but want

              give them a preview of the image and the option to view the larger image, rather than forcing them to List oftoTables for the larger image when they first view your page. Thumbnail images use smaller versions of a List ofwait Listings image to link to the larger (both in file size and image size) image, as in this markup: List oflarge Sidebars

              trumpet thumbnail



              This markup links a smaller version of the trumpet image directly to a larger version. Notice that the link 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition is to a JPEG HTML file, not to another HTML page. This is a quick way to make a link to a larger image. ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel anda Natanya Pittspage to hold the larger Another option is to create new HTML image and link to the page John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) brass_large.html instead of the image itself. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

              or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this steptrumpet thumbnail Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Introduction

              approach the flexibility to add Part IThis - Meeting HTMLgives in Itsyou Natural Environment

              text and navigation to the page holding the larger image, but

              of course requires that Need you create and maintain If you only have a couple of such thumbnail Chapter 1 - The Least You to Know about HTMLthe andpage. the Web images youratsite, maintaining them isn't that difficult. More than 10 or so is a different story though. Chapter 2 -on HTML Work on the Web You to decide forFirst yourself much additional information you want to supply with the larger Chapter 3 have - Creating Your HTMLhow Page image. Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter - Finding Usingmaps Images Tricks6of the Tradeand Image have really fallen out of favor among Web designers recently because Chapter 7 to- be Topbulky Off Your with Formatting they tend and Page very difficult to manage. Even so, they're still used on the Web and they may be a Part III - you Taking HTML to the Next Level feature want to include on your pages.

              A common use for image maps, even today, is to turn maps of

              Chapter - HTML Tables cities, neighborhoods, and such) into linkable maps. Webmonkey's image map places 8(states, countries, tutorial 9at http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/96/40/index2a.html provides even more Chapter - HTML Frames

              details 10 on optimizing your image maps and making the most of this HTML feature. Chapter - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Remember- Getting Creating image maps by hand can be a little tricky. You need to use an image editor to identify Stylish with CSS each point in the map and then create the proper markup for it. Most HTML tools from (both shareware and Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting commercial software) include utilities to help you make image maps. If you take advantage of one of these Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic tools, you'll create image maps quickly and with fewer errors. Find out more about HTML tools in Chapter 16. Chapter 11

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Other Interesting Image Tricks by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              As you look around the Web, types interesting image tricks at work. Two of the most popular John Wiley & you Sonssee © 2003 (408of pages) involve creating animated GIFs and transparent images. Neither of these activities is particularly difficult. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site You just need to know how they work and then acquire the right tools. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Tip Images often play an integral role in multimedia presentations you might add to your Web page. Be sure to review Chapter 13 for more information on working with media. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Creating animated GIFs

              Introduction

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              An animated GIF is a collection of graphics files in the GIF format that display in succession, one after the

              Chapter 1 like - The Least in You Need toTo Know about and the other, just scenes a movie. create an HTML animated GIF,Web you bring several images together in Chapter 2 software, - HTML atspecify Work on the Web such as how many times the animation should repeat, how fast animation parameters

              Chapter 3 - Creating Your and FirstifHTML Pageany special effects applied to the transition from image to image. the animation should run, you want Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              To create animated GIF, need animation software such as GifBuilder or GIF Construction Set, both Chapter 4 an - Structuring Youryou HTML Documents of which These tools handle the programming (such as it is - it's not what we'd describe as Chapter 5 are- shareware. Linking to Online Resources heavy lifting) behind and the GIF, help you put the pieces together. Chapter 6 - Finding Usingand Images Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Tip You can visit TUCOWS at www.tucows.com and search for "animated GIF" to access a long list of tool possibilities. You're sure to find one that fits your budget and that works with your computer of choice.

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9 animated - HTML Frames Because GIFs are just GIF files with a little extra information thrown in, you reference them in your HTML likeForms you would any other GIF file; that is, you use the element. Animated GIFs may Chapter 10 -just HTML Part begin IV with - Extending several HTML GIF files, withbut Other they Technologies become a single

              file whose name you can use as the value of the

              src attribute. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Tricks of the Trade Much like image maps, animated GIFs are becoming something of a dinosaur on - Making Multimedia Magic the Web. New technologies such as Macromedia Flash (covered in Chapter 13) allow you to do more Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML advanced animations that are interactive and include links. However, Flash isn't a free product and does Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages have a learning curve. If you want to quickly add a short animation to your page, an animated GIF may be Part V - From Web Page to Web Site just what you're looking for. The Webmonkey tutorial entitled 'My First GIF Animation' at Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/html/97/14/index2a.html walks you through all of Chapter 17 to- creating Setting Up OnlineGIF. Presence the steps an Your animated Chapter 13

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Making -transparent images Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 19 Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Transparent images are simply graphics saved in either the GIF or PNG file format (but not JPEG) where a color in the image is transparent. That is, the background color of whatever page the image is on will Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags show through where that color would have been. Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

              Transparency helps images blend into a page, but creating transparent images does have its drawbacks: Appendix C - Glossary Index

              Although you can set several colors in a PNG image to be transparent, you can only pick one color in a GIF.

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures

              List ofIfTables you set the color on the remote edge of a GIF to transparent, the edge may appear jagged against a List ofdifferent Listings color background. This happens because what the human eye perceives as the edge List ofbetween Sidebars two colors is really a blend of several shades of one color into the next. Black and white isn't

              really just a transition between black and white, but instead requires several shades of gray. When you make a single color transparent, the other shades are still there. Just about any image-editing software, from shareware to commercial, has utilities for creating transparent images. Look in the help or documentation for your tool of choice to find out how to use the transparency feature. Also, because transparent images are just regular image files, you use the image element to reference them in your HTML pages.

              Tricks of the Trade Transparency works best on line art that doesn't have a lot of colors so there is less HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition shading to work with. If you have more complicated graphics that you would like to blend in with your page ISBN:0764519956 by Ed making Tittel and background, consider theNatanya graphicPitts background match that of the page. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Finding Sources for Images by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Of course, if you John want Wiley to use&images in your Sons © 2003 (408 Web pages)pages, you need a source for all of those images. If you aren’t a modern-day Rembrandt (or Picasso even Warhol), that doesn’t Whether your goal is to build or a simple, text-oriented Web sitemean you can’t acquire quality images without spending an arm and a leg to do so. You have several or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, thisoptions step- for reasonably priced by-step book will put you on the right track. (including free) images: Online: There a variety of online image repositories that house free graphics you can use for personal Table of andContents even business Web sites. Search your favorite search engines for “free Web graphics,” and you’ll HTML be 4 For Dummies, 4tha Edition presented with very long list to get you started. However, because everyone can access these Introduction graphics your site may lose some of its uniqueness, or you may have a hard time finding images that Part Ifit - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment your needs.

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Photo clipatart CDs: There are several photo and clip art CD vendors that will sell you entire Chapter 2 -and HTML Work on the Web collections of graphics for a low cost Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page(even as little as $25 a CD). These images are usually high quality andStarted come inwith a variety Part II - Getting HTML of formats so you can use them for both print and Web work. Visit www.profotos.com for a list of companies that specialize in selling images on CD-ROM. In addition, Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents www.iStockphoto.com is a great resource for free stock photography. Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6 - Finding Using Images Warning When youand locate images either for free or for a fee, be sure to double check the licensing Chapter 7 -for Top Off Your PageSome with Formatting agreement those images. images are only free for personal use and require that you pay a fee Part III - Taking HTML to the Level for business use. Some clipNext art and photo

              CDs only allow you to use the images in print or on the Web, but

              Chapter 8 When - HTML Tables ask the person or company providing the art what they will allow you to use the not both. in doubt, Chapter art for. 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Scanners andHTML digital cameras: You can capture Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies

              your own images using a scanner or a digital camera. If you have art, drawings, documents, or other art that you would like to incorporate into your Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS site, just scan them. You can take pictures of products, a company office, people at work and at play, Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting and more with a digital camera to create your own compelling images for your site. Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14 -your Integrating a Database into Your HTML Create own: Even if you haven’t done much drawing before, try your hand at creating your own Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup art. Today’s software packages provide youLanguages with powerful collections of tools for creating original art. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Tricks16 of the Trade an When you pay a graphic artist to create any piece of customized artwork — from a Chapter - Creating HTML Toolbox company to specialized chartsPresence or presentation templates — always be sure to get copies of the Chapter 17 logo - Setting Up Your Online artwork18 in digital format, preferably TIFF format. If you want to use this artwork online (or for any other Chapter - Creating a Great User Interface digital on), Part VI -purpose The Partlater of Tens

              you’ll get a much clearer image if you work from the original digital version instead of scanning a print version. Also, sure that you retain all rights to any version of the artwork — Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Webbe Bugs print, electronic, otherwise — so you don’t have to secure the artist’s permission to use it over and over Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts again. Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A chapter - HTML really 4 Tagsonly scratches the surface of what you can do with Web images and how to use Tip This Appendix B HTML Character Codes them effectively as part of your page and site design. Although you can find out everything you need to Appendix Glossary know to Cget-started using images in your pages, the information in this chapter is really only the tip of the Index iceberg. If you want to delve deeper into the ins and outs of Web graphics, consider reading Web Design Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition For Dummies by Lisa Lopuck. This 4th book can help you transition from a simple user of graphics in Web List pages of Figures to a master of Web images and Web design. List of Tables List of Listings

              Remember Copyright matters

              List of Sidebars

              Whereas you might be tempted to download an image from someone else’s Web site to use on your own, or simply make a link to that image, don’t. Just about everything on the Web is copyrighted these days, and that includes any original work you’ve done. Even if the owner of some text or an image doesn’t apply for a copyright, by the very nature of creating an original work, he or she owns it. Many sites, especially education, science, and museum sites, will allow you to borrow their images, but only if you properly attribute them on your page. The bottom line about copyright is if you violate it, you’re breaking the law — which is bad in so many

              ways. Don’t ever represent someone else’s work as your own, or use someone else’s work without HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition permission, and you’ll be sure to stay on the right side of the copyright law. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408by pages) Much of the Web’s content is protected copy-right, but there are many images paid for with taxpayer money, or whose copyrights have long expired (think works and images owned and Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site loaded with frames,are graphics, and animation, this stepmanaged by or theone federal government) in the public domain and free for your use. Before you by-stepisbook willpublic put you on thehowever, right track. assume something in the domain, look closely on the site for a copyright notice, and be sure to send e-mail to the site’s owners if you are at all in doubt. PDImages.com (www.pdimages.com) is a wonderful resource for beginning the search for copyright-free images Table of Contents available in the public domain. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 7: Top Off Your Page with Formatting ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              Overview

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Using color in HTML Table of Contents

              with page HTML Working 4 For Dummies, 4thcolors Editionand backgrounds Introduction

              Changing font display

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1 -text Thetreatments Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Adding Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web It’s amazing a little color textPage variation can do to liven up a Web page. You can turn a plain page Chapter 3 - what Creating Your Firstand HTML

              intoII a -striking of art withHTML a few Part Gettingwork Started with

              carefully placed text treatments. Color can bring attention to important information on your site, and the right font can emphasize your text’s message. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              HTML includes a healthy collection of elements, which you can use to control the background, colors, - Finding and Using Images fonts, and text sizes on your Web page. In this chapter, you learn how to spruce up your pages a bit by Chapter 7 HTML - Top formatting Off Your Page with Formatting using the elements. Chapter 6

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter Tip Because 8 - HTML HTML Tables is really a language for defining document structure, not a formatting language, its

              built-in 9formatting are basic. After you master HTML formatting you may find you want to do Chapter - HTMLcapabilities Frames even more theForms look and feel of your pages. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) is a style-definition Chapter 10 -with HTML language for HTML designed to let Technologies you do just that Part IV - Extending HTML with Other

              — take your Web page formatting to the next level.

              Chapter you how with to use CSS to set page margins, attach background images to different blocks Chapter 1111-shows Getting Stylish CSS of text, 12 create borders your text, and more. Chapter - HTML and around Scripting Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 Dummies, 4th Edition Defining Color inforHTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              You use differentJohn combinations of HTML elements Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) and attributes depending on where you want to make a color change — in your entire document, in a cell, or to a chunk of site text. Even so, the notation that defines Whether your goal is to build atable simple, text-oriented Web colors in HTML isorthe same, regardless of which elements and attributes you associate with the color. one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              HTML gives you two different ways to specify a color: Table of By Contents name (you choose from a limited list) HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              By number (harder to remember, but you have many more options)

              Introduction

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Color names - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 1 Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web The HTML includes 16 color Chapter 3 -specification Creating Your First HTML Page names you can use to define colors in your pages: Aqua, Black,

              Blue, Green, Lime, Part II Fuchsia, - Getting Gray, Started with HTML

              Maroon, Navy, Olive, Purple, Red, Silver, Teal, White, and Yellow. Because these names are part of the specification, you can be confident that any and every browser can recognize Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents them and apply the correct color to your page display. Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6 Web - Finding Using Images On The If youand want to see how your browser displays these different colors, visit Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting www.htmlhelp.com/reference/html40/values.html#color. If you can, view this page on two or Part IIIdifferent - Takingcomputers HTML to the Levelthe three toNext see how

              browser, operating system, graphics card, and monitor can subtly

              Chapter HTML Tables change8the-display. Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames If you’re10looking forForms burnt umber, chartreuse, or salmon, you’re out of luck. A box of 64 crayons this list is not. Chapter - HTML

              Don’t the HTML artist in youOther won’tTechnologies be quashed. Part IV despair; - Extending with

              The hexadecimal color notation system gives you what you need to use any color (even burnt umber) on your Web page. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Hexadecimal - Making Multimedia color codes Magic

              Chapter 13 Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Every color defined as atomixture of red, green, and blue (RGB). Monitors display colors in RGB, and Chapter 15 -can HowbeHTML Relates Other Markup Languages

              hexadecimal notation youSite a way Part V - From Web Pagegives to Web

              to convey a color’s RGB values to a Web browser. If you know a color’s hexadecimal code (often called a hex code for short), you have all you need to use that color in your HTML Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox page. Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18 - Creating Greatsix User Interface— a combination of numbers and letters — to define the amount of Hexadecimal notationauses characters Part - The and Part blue of Tens red,VI green, in any color.

              Table 7-1 shows the hexadecimal equivalents for each of the 16 color

              Chapter - Ten Ways Exterminate Web Bugs names.19 Every color outtothere has a hex code like these. Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII7-1: - Appendixes Table The 16 Color Names

              with Their Hex Codes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Color B - HTML Hex Character Color Appendix Codes Name

              Hex Code

              Color Name

              Hex Code

              Color Name

              Hex Code

              Name Code Appendix C - Glossary Index Aqua

              Gray

              #808080

              Navy

              #000080

              Silver

              #C0C0C0

              #00FFFF

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Black

              List of Figures List of Tables

              # 000000

              ListBlue of Listings #0000FF List of Sidebars

              Fuchsia

              #FF00FF

              Green

              #008000

              Olive

              #808000

              Teal

              #008080

              Lime

              #00FF00

              Purple

              #800080

              White

              #FFFFFF

              Maroon

              #800000

              Red

              #FF0000

              Yellow

              #FFFF00

              Tip Notice the pound sign (#) before each of the six-digit hex codes. When you use hexadecimal code to define a color, you should always precede it with a pound sign. So, this HTML uses a color name to specify that some text in a paragraph should be blue:

              Some of the text in this paragraph is blue.



              This HTML uses a hex code to do the same thing:

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Some of the text &in this paragraph is blue.

              John Wiley Sons © 2003 (408 pages) goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Remember YouWhether find out your all about which elements and attributes you use to apply color to different parts of or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepyour HTML page by-step later in book the chapter. will put you on the right track.

              Finding out any color’s hex code

              Table of Contents

              HTML 4 For Dummies, Of course, you can’t 4th just Edition wave your magic wand and come up with the hex code for any color. But that doesn’t Introduction mean that you can’t find out through less magical means. Color converters follow a precise formula that Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment changes a color’s standard RGB notation into hexadecimal

              notation. Because you have better things to do with

              Chapter 1 than - The Least You to Know aboutseveral HTML and the Web your time compute hexNeed codes, you have options for finding out the code for your color of choice, Chapter - HTML at Work onuse the aWeb none of2 which require you to calculator: Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              On the Web: Two with goodHTML sources Part II - Getting Started

              for hexadecimal color charts are www. hypersolutions.org/pages/rgbhex.html and www.fastboot.com/color_chart.html. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents You simply find a color you like, and type the hex code listed next to it into your HTML. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

              and Using Images Using -a Finding converter: If you already know the RGB percentages for a particular color, you can plug them Chapter Top Off Your Page Formatting into7 an -online converter at with http://www.univox.com/home/support/rgb2hex.html to get the Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level hexadecimal equivalent. For example, the RGB percentages for nice sky blue are 159, 220, and 223. Plug Chapter 8 into - HTML Tables those the converter, and you get the equivalent hex code #9FDCDF. Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames Using Chapter 10 -image-editing HTML Forms software: Many image-editing applications, such as Adobe Photoshop or Jasc

              Paint Shop Pro, display hexadecimal notation Part IV - Extending HTML withthe Other Technologies

              for any color. Even Microsoft Word’s color picker shows

              you11hex- codes colors in an image. If you have an image you like that you want to use as a color source Chapter Gettingfor Stylish with CSS for12 your- Web open the image in your favorite editor and find out what the colors’ hex codes are. Chapter HTMLpage, and Scripting Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Technical Stuff Unlike the more familiar decimal system that uses base-ten numbers to represent all - Integrating a Database into Your HTML possible numbers, the hexadecimal system uses base 16. If you want to know more about the hexadecimal Chapter 15 - How Relates to numbers Other Markup system or find outHTML how to convert fromLanguages decimal to hexadecimal, visit Part V From Web Page to Web Site http://mathforum.org/library/drmath/view/55830.html . Chapter 14

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML and 4 for Dummies, 4th Editionfor Your Entire Page Setting Colors Backgrounds by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              The element the guts of(408 your Web page, so when you want attributes (namely colors John contains Wiley & Sons © 2003 pages) and backgrounds) to affect your entire Web page, the text-oriented element the element you need to deal Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web is site with. You can useorthe element attributes to do the following: one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Define the text color for your entire Web page. Table of Specify Contents the different colors for links in your Web page. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Set a background color for your Web page.

              Introduction

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Attach a background image to your Web page.

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Changing text color - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Chapter 3

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              By default, most Web browsers display the text on a Web page in black. Some users may change their - Structuring Your HTML Documents browser preferences to display text in another color, but most of the time, you can expect users to see Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources black text against a white background on your page unless you specify otherwise. Chapter 4 Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              You use attribute withwith either a color name or hexadecimal value in the element to set Chapter 7 the- text Top Off Your Page Formatting the color for the text on your Web page. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level The following markup uses one of the 16 color names to set the page text to white: Chapter 8 color - HTML Tables Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              This code the hex code to do the same: Chapter 11 uses - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Remember Many Web browsers allow users to define their own color settings and override yours. You can expect about 90 percent or so of your users to see the colors you’ve defined and be content with Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox them, but the other 10 percent or so will want their color choices to override yours. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18 You - Creating Great User your Interface Warning shoulda coordinate text, link, and background colors so they all work well together. If Part of Tens youVI set- The yourPart background

              text to black but forget to set your text color to a lighter color, your text won’t show

              Chapter 19 page. - TenConversely, Ways to Exterminate Bugscolors can be lost on a white page. up on the light text Web and link Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

              Changing link colors

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes You’ve probably noticed when you visit a Web page, click a link, view the linked document, and return to Appendix C page, - Glossary the linking that the link may be a different color than it was before you clicked it. Index

              The change link 4color is your Web Cheat Sheet - in HTML For Dummies, 4thbrowser’s Edition way of giving you a visual cue of which links you’ve clicked recently. Each browser has default settings for the different colors associated with each link state. For example, both Internet Explorer and Netscape use some shade of bright blue to highlight links you’ve List of Tables haven’t yet visited. You can use the following attributes with the element to control those colors List of Listings for your page. List of Figures

              List of Sidebars

              Links come in three states, and you can modify each of them using an attribute: Link: The user hasn’t clicked the link or recently visited the resource it points to. The link attribute defines this link’s color. Active link: The user just clicked the link, but the browser hasn’t opened the page yet. Links are active for a second or two (maybe a few more on a slower computer and Internet connection) before

              the browser displays the linked document. Define the color of this kind of link with the alink attribute. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition

              ISBN:0764519956 Visited link:by The Eduser Tittelhas andrecently Natanyavisited Pitts this link. The vlink attribute defines this link’s color.

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              The following HTML markup the links on a page silver, all the active links teal, and all Whether yoursnippet goal is makes to build all a simple, text-oriented Web site the visited links blue: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              This next HTML line uses hexadecimal codes to define the same color settings:

              Introduction

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment



              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2 may - HTML Work on thethe Web Tip You haveatnoticed that links on some Web sites don’t seem to be underlined. All browsers Chapter 3 Creating Your First HTML Page and HTML doesn’t provide an attribute or other method for display hyperlinks as underlined by default, Part II - Getting Started withThe HTML turning off link underlining. removal

              of lines under links isn’t magic; style sheets give you more control

              Chapter 4 display - Structuring Your HTML Documents over link and behavior than these HTML attributes do. Turn to Chapter 11 to learn more about style Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources sheets. Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Background colors

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter HTML Tables Just as8you-can control text and link color, you can control the background color on your page. Add the Chapter 9 attribute - HTML Frames bgcolor to the element to set the background color for the page. This HTML sets the Chapter 10 - color HTML to Forms background black: Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting This HTML the Multimedia hexadecimal code to do the same: Chapter 13 -uses Making Magic Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox Bringing all of the colors together - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 17

              Chapter 18 - in Creating Great User Interface The markup Listinga7-1 combines all the color-related attributes to create a page with a black Part VI - The Part of Tens background, white text, silver

              Chapter 19

              links, teal active links, and blue visited links:

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Listing20 7-1:- Ten Using Element Chapter HTML Do’s and Don’ts Attributes to Control a Page’s Colors Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Page Colors Index

              The List of Figures attributes in the document body element define the colors the browser uses to display text on the page.

              List of Tables

              This List of Listings link is silver before it is clicked, teal when it is clicked, and blue after it is clicked.

              List of Sidebars

              Figure 7-1 shows how a browser displays this HTML. You can’t actually see the colors in this figure, but you should get a good idea of the effect these attributes will have.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Figure 7-1: Use the element attributes to define the colors on your Web page. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              at Work on the Web Adding --aHTML background graphic Creating Your First HTML Page

              Chapter 3

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML In addition to setting a simple background

              color for your page, you can also specify a graphic to act as a

              Chapter 4 - image Structuring Yourpage HTML Documents background for your using the background attribute with the element. This HTML Chapter - Linking Resources image for the page: assigns5back. gif to asOnline the background Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter A background 8 - HTML image Tables can be as small or as large as you like. Web browsers automatically repeat (or tile)

              the image down the page to fill in the background. Figure 7-2 shows the background image Chapter 9 across - HTMLand Frames back.gif, a 2-inch-by-2-inch square: Chapter 10 - which HTML is Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Figure 7-2: A back-ground image can be any size; the browser tiles it to fill in the entire page background.

              List of Figures List of Tables

              List of Listings Tip A browser has to download any background image before it can display it behind your page. Keep List of background Sidebars your images small. A 2-inch by 2-inch graphic will load much faster than a 6-inch by 6-inch

              one, and the effect will be the same. When you add the background attribute to the element from Listing 7-1, the complete element with all its attributes is:

              Figure 7-3 showsHTML how the browser tiles the back.gif image to fill the entire page. 4 for Dummies, 4thsmall Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Figure 7-3: A Web page with both colors and a background image defined.

              Chapter Creating First HTML Page Notice 3that -the HTML Your for the element includes the bgcolor attribute even though the Part II - Gettingattribute Started with HTML background defines an

              image background for the page. A background image always displays

              Chapter Structuring Your HTML Documents instead4of a- background color, unless a user has turned off the image display settings in his or her Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources browser. Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Tip If 7a browser can’t display it displays the background color. Be sure to define a background Chapter - Top Off Your Page images, with Formatting color as a fallback to a background image, especially if your text is light and you’re counting on the Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level background to make the text readable. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Warning Just as you have to coordinate text colors and background colors, you have to coordinate text - HTML Forms colors and background images. In Figure 7-4, the background image is light, as are the text and link Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies colors, so the text is unreadable. Chapter 10 Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20 -7-4: TenBe HTML Do’s and Don’ts your text colors and background colors, or your page may be Figure sure to coordinate Part VII - Appendixes unreadable.

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, Edition and Sizes Working with Font Faces, 4th Colors, by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              All the attributes that the © to set color and backgrounds for your page apply to Johnwork Wileywith & Sons 2003 (408element pages) the entire document. Sometimes you may want to apply color and other text formatting to specific parts of Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site your page insteadorofone theloaded entire with thing. Enter the element (both literally frames, graphics, and animation, this step- and figuratively). by-step book will put you on the right track.

              You can use the element and its related attributes to control three different aspects of a section of text on your page: Table of Contents HTML Font 4 Forface Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction

              Font color

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1 size - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Font Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Defining the font face

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents Every browser has built-in settings that specify which font it uses to display various elements such as

              Chapter 5 -and Linking to Online Resources paragraphs headings. Most browsers use some variety of Times, such as Times New Roman, or a Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images similar serif font to display almost all text, but when you combine the element with the face Chapter 7 you - Top Your Page attribute, canOff change that. with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              This HTML specifies that the first paragraph on the page should display in Arial, and the second Chapter 8 -markup HTML Tables paragraph should Chapter 9 - HTML display Framesin Courier: Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part

              IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              This - Getting Stylish with CSStext is displayed in Arial.

              12 Chapter

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              14 Chapter

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15 face="Courier">This - How HTML Relates to Othertext Markup

              V - From Web Page to Web Site Part Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Figure 7-5 shows how a browser renders this HTML.

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List ofFigure Figures7-5: Use the element and the face attribute to change the font face for sections of List oftext Tables on the page. List of Listings

              If you’re wondering about the attribute that changes the font face of a whole HTML page at once, we’ve List of Sidebars got bad news for you. There is no such attribute. HTML doesn’t include one, so if you want to set the font face for the entire page to something other than the browser default, you have to use the element andface attribute on every block element. Tip Refer back to Chapter 4 to find out more about the difference between block and inline elements, and how you use them together. The element is an inline element, so you can’t use a tag at the beginning of the page

              and close it at the end and get predictable results across several browsers. It may be tedious to set the HTML 4 forelement, Dummies, tag on every block but4th yourEdition results will be more consistent across browsers. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Tip A good HTML editor (discussed in Chapter 16) can make the process of applying a font face to each block element much easier, or goal you is can sheet (discussedWeb in Chapter 11) to define a font face Whether your to use buildaastyle simple, text-oriented site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepfor your entire document. by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Applying font color to pieces of text Table of Contents

              You can color to chunk of text in your document using the element and the color HTML 4 Forapply Dummies, 4thany Edition attribute. This HTML changes the font color twice in the same sentence, once to silver and once to white: Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter

              You 1 can - The change Least You font Know about HTML and the Web color in the middle of

              paragraphs if you like.

              Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Figure shows how this Part II - 7-6 Getting Started withaffects HTML

              the text display in a browser.

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Figure 7-6: Use the element and the color attribute to change the font color for sections of - Making Multimedia Magic text on the page.

              Chapter 13 Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15 Notice - How HTML Relates Other Markup Languages Warning that the whiteto text doesn’t show up on the page at all, because the page background is Part - From Web Pagewhite. to Web Site the Vbrowser’s default Use the

              tag with the color attribute carefully, or your page may be

              Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox unreadable. Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              Creating a Great User Interface Setting -the font size

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19attribute - Ten Ways to Exterminate Bugs element to change the appearance of selected text is the The last you can use with theWeb Chapter 20 - TenMost HTML Do’s andsupport Don’ts sizes 1 through 7, with 1 being the smallest and 7 being the largest. size attribute. browsers Part - Appendixes ThisVII HTML applies each

              size to a different line of text in a paragraph.

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

              Appendix C size="1">Font - Glossary
              Index Font size 2
              Cheat Sheet size="3">Font - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th3
              Edition List of Figures Font size 4
              List of Font size 5


              Font size 6
              List of Listings Font size 7 List of Sidebars



              Figure 7-7 shows how a browser displays these different font sizes:

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Figure the and HTML the size attribute Chapter 1 -7-7: TheUse Least You Need toelement Know about and the Web to change the font size for sections of text2 on -the page. Chapter HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              By default, most browsers display text in size 3. In addition to simply setting the font size number that you want to use as the value for the size attribute, you can also use positive and negative numbers to define Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents font sizes relative to the default text size. For example, this HTML sets the size of one paragraph to one Chapter 5 Linking to size Online Resources size above -the default and a second paragraph to one size following the default size. Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              One size smaller than the default
              Chapter 8 - HTML Tables The default font size
              Chapter 9 - HTML Frames One size larger than the default Chapter

              10 - HTML Forms Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter Remember 11 - Getting Font sizes Stylish setwith this CSS way are called relative font sizes. Conversely, font sizes that just use a

              number12to define called absolute font sizes because they specifically define a font size instead of Chapter - HTMLsize andare Scripting using a13 relative measurement. Chapter - Making Multimedia Figure Magic 7-8 shows how a browser displays the relative font sizes. Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Figure 7-8: Relative font sizes use positive and negative numbers to set font size relative to the

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes browser’s default font size. Appendix C - Glossary Index

              Remember Just because you can do something . . .

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              element and its three attributes — face,color, and size, — give you a lot of power List ofThe Figures the way your page displays. However, just because you can do something (for example, use 50 List ofover Tables

              colors, varying font sizes and faces, and add wild backgrounds) doesn’t necessarily mean you should. When you use formatting carefully and in moderation, you can make your content have more impact List of Sidebars and even enhance its meaning. If you use formatting just because you can, you may well drive users from your page before they even read a word of what it says. If you think of colors, backgrounds, font sizes, and other formatting tools as ways to augment your page, you’ll be on the right track. Chapter 18 includes other tips on creating a good experience for your site’s visitors. List of Listings

              If you assume that the browser’s default font size is 3, then a font size of -1 is equal to a size of 2, and a

              font size of +1 is equal to a size of 4. Does the browser display size 2 and -1 as the same thing? What 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition about size 3 and HTML the default size? Or +1 and 4? Here’s some HTML that uses these to define size: by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site One size smaller than the default
              or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepFont size by-step book will put 2
              you on the right track. The default font size
              Font size 3
              TableOne size larger than the default
              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Editionsize 4
              Font Introduction

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Figure 17-9 shows how the interprets these Chapter - The Least You browser Need to Know about HTMLsize andspecifications. the Web Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10 -7-9: HTML Forms Figure You can often get the same results using relative font sizes or absolute font sizes. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter Tip So, 11which - Getting font size Stylish scheme with CSS do you use? Absolute font sizes are easier to use, but relative font sizes

              are more a user increases or decreases his or her browser’s default font size, relative font Chapter 12 flexible. - HTMLWhen and Scripting sizes grow shrink as well. Some Chapter 13 and - Making Multimedia Magic browsers expand and shrink both absolute and relative font sizes as the default size changes, but not allYour of them do. For maximum flexibility, use relative font sizes. You Chapter 14 font - Integrating a Database into HTML can also CSSHTML for even greater control over Languages your font sizes. Turn to Chapter 11 for more information. Chapter 15use - How Relates to Other Markup Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Boldface, Italics, and Other Text Treatments by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Text color and font changes only one(408 waypages) to emphasize bits of text or make them stand out. In addition John Wiley &are Sons © 2003 to the element, HTML has a nice collection oftext-oriented elements you cansite use to apply treatments such as Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web boldface, italics, underlining, and more to the text on your page. These treatments can be broken into two or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. categories: Style elements: Much like the element, these elements simply apply formatting to text on the Table of Contents page but don't describe anything about the text (such as the text is in italics because it is a book title). HTML The 4 Forstyle Dummies, 4th include: Edition elements Introduction

              : HTML boldface text Part I - Meeting in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1 Chapter 2

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              : big text, usually one size larger than the text around it - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3 : - Creating Your italicized textFirst HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              strike-through Chapter 4 : - Structuring Your text HTML Documents Chapter 5 Chapter 6

              - Linking to Online Resources

              : small text, usually one size smaller than the text around it - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7 : - Top Off Your Page with Formatting strike-through text Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              teletype Chapter 8 : - HTML Tablestext like a typewriter might create Chapter 9 Chapter 10

              - HTML Frames

              : underlined text - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Phrase elements: TheseTechnologies elements provide

              more information about some text in your page

              Chapter 11 (such - Getting Stylish with CSS as identifying it as computer code) and the browser formats the text accordingly (text Chapter 12 marked - HTMLas and Scripting code is displayed in a monospaced font). Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              an abbreviation Chapter 14 : - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages : an acronym

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16 : - Creating an HTML Toolbox a citation Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              computer codeInterface Chapter 18 : - Creating a Great User Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              : deleted text

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20 : - Ten HTML Do’s term and Don’ts a defined Part VII - Appendixes

              emphasized text Appendix A : - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

              : inserted text

              Appendix C - Glossary Index

              : text to be input on a keyboard or other device

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              : sample output List of Figures List of Tables

              : strongly emphasized text

              List of Listings

              List of Sidebars : a variable

              The markup in Listing 7-2 shows all these elements in use in an HTML page. Notice that they are all inline elements, which means you need to use them within a block element like a paragraph, heading, or list item: Listing 7-2: Text Treatments at Work

              Style elements



              boldface text
              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition big text
              ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts italicized text
              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) strike-through text
              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site small text
              or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepstrike-through text
              by-step book will put you on the right track. teletype text
              underlined text

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Phrase elements

              Introduction

              an abbreviation
              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment an acronym
              Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web a citation
              - HTML at Work on the Web computer code
              Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page deleted text
              Part II - Getting Started with HTML a defined term
              Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents emphasized text
              Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources inserted text
              Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images text to be input
              Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting sample output
              Part III Taking HTML to the Level strongly Next emphasized text
              Chapter 8 HTML Tables a variable Chapter

              9 - HTML Frames Chapter 2

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Figure 12 7-10- shows howScripting a browser interprets these different elements. Notice that many of them look the Chapter HTML and same, even though the elements are different. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              Figure 7-10: Many of the font style and phrase elements display the same way in a Web browser.

              Dummies, Edition Deciding onHTML the4 for Right Text4th Elements for the Job by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              So why does text John described with Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408look pages)the same as that described with ? Bottom line: You have only so many ways to format text. Your has onlyWeb bold, italics, underline, and Whether your goal is to build browser a simple,really text-oriented site strikethrough to work with. Given that limitation, which elements do you use or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-to apply text treatments to your book putthan you . on the right track. text? After all, it'sby-step easier to typewill If you're practical about it, you have all the elements you need to format your text in the style elements. Table of Contents However, when you use phrase elements, you provide additional information about the text in your HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition document, and that may come in handy one day when browsers have a wider array of formatting Introduction capabilities. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Remember ForLeast example, deleted text currently looks Chapter 1 - The You Need to Know about HTML andthe thesame Web as struck-through text, but eventually you may be2able to toggle a browser's view to show and hide deleted text. HTML purists tend to believe you Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web should 3always be as accurate your Page markup as possible. Chapter - Creating Your FirstinHTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              In the end, the choice is yours. If you take the time to accurately describe your text, it may pay off in the - Structuring Your HTML Documents future. On the flip side, you can use basic formatting elements to create the display you're looking for - and Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources that will serve your needs as well. Chapter 4 Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Part III: Taking HTML to the Next Level ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              In This Part: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Chapter 8: HTML Tables Table of Contents

              9: HTML4th Frames HTML Chapter 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction

              Chapter 10: HTML Forms

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              In this part . . .Your First HTML Page - Creating

              Chapter 3

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Part III is where you move from basic, simple HTML markup to more complex HTML markup concepts - Structuring Your HTML Documents and structures. Discover the wonder and majesty of HTML tables, which you can use to organize and Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources manage all kinds of text and graphical data. This part explains HTML frames, which let you break up Web Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images pages into logical areas and manage display separately for each such area — often for stunning visual Chapter 7 Top Off Your Page with Formatting effects. You- also get a look at using HTML forms to organize, format, solicit, and handle user input on your Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Web pages — techniques that can turn your Web pages into a tool for two-way communications with your Chapter 8 -chapters HTML Tables users. The in this part help you kick your Web pages up a notch! Chapter 4

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 8: HTML Tables by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              Overview

              ISBN:0764519956

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Understanding table benefits Table of Contents

              a table 4th design HTML Mapping 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction

              Building simple tables

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1 - The Least table You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Creating complex structures Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web Table and techniques Chapter 3 tips - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Most Web pages contain at least one table — some even nest tables within tables. Traditionally, tables - Structuring Your HTML Documents display data; HTML tables, however, are more commonly used to control layout. You can arrange Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources everything from text to images on your pages, efficiently and attractively, in HTML tables. Chapter 4 Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Formatting This chapter provides youPage with with step-by-step instructions for creating and using HTML tables. In addition, a Part IIIour - Taking HTML to the Nexttips Level list of favorite tried-and-true and

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              techniques can help make the whole process quicker.

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition What Tables Can Do for You by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Traditionally, tables displayed data ©in2003 a format that's easy to read and understand. HTML changed all that. John Wiley & Sons (408 pages) You may not realize it, but tables are used in a lot of Web sites. Sites such Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web siteas Amazon, eBay, Yahoo!, and Google all use tables to display their content; but you can't see these tables. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- Invisible tables dominate the book will to putarrange you on the right Web. The idea isby-step this: Use tables items on track. your Web page, and then be sure to turn the borders off so the user cannot see the table. Table of Contents Remember By nature, Web pages start out linear; tables allow you to step out of that linear box and put HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition text and images in the most interesting places in your layout. Introduction

              YouI can use tables couple of ways: Part - Meeting HTMLin inaIts Natural Environment Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Traditional (ho-hum) method: You can define table or individual cell widths, producing a table that Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web won't resize when users resize their browser's windows. Some designers prefer to use tables for the Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page traditional purpose - to present data - a straightforward, balanced approach that's easily tackled. Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4 - Structuring Your(wow) HTML Documents Presentation-focused method: You can define table and cell width using percentages, Chapter 5 - allowing Linking to Online thereby the tableResources to resize when users resize their browser windows. Most designers are Chapter doing 6 more - Finding creative, and Using complex Images tricks with their tables. Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Although chapter all aspects Part III - Takingthis HTML to thecovers Next Level

              of HTML tables, it focuses on layout tips and techniques.

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables Using tables for layout can result in rather complex structures, as seen in Figure 8-1. (Some other

              Chapter 9 of - complex HTML Frames examples tables are viewable at www.amazon.com and www.yahoo.com.) Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List ofFigure Tables 8-1: This Web page uses three different tables for layout. Each table is numbered. List of Listings

              Tip After you open these Web pages in your Web browser, take a look at each one's HTML source code List of Sidebars (try ViewÍSource from your menu bar). Observe how complex the markup is, and mark ye well when the markup looks haphazardly arranged (alas, if only they'd asked us . . .). Equally effective are the Web pages that use the less-is-more approach. Some design models keep the interface simple - therefore easy to use. Figure 8-2 illustrates the simple approach.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6 -8-2: Finding Using Figure Thisand Web pageImages uses one simple table with three cells for its layout. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              For III another example of the a Web that Part - Taking HTML to Nextsite Level Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              uses a simple table to arrange navigation, visit www.google.com.

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 forBasics Dummies, 4th Edition IntroducingHTML Table by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              To understand the complexity of HTML you must first understand their basic elements John Wiley & Sons © 2003tables, (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

              Borders:Every basic tablewith must alwaysgraphics, have exactly four borders make up a rectangle. or one loaded frames, and animation, thisthat stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Cells: These are the individual squares within the borders of a table. ForContents example, even though the first table in Figure 8-3 has nine cells, it has four borders. Table of HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Cell span: Within that four-walled structure, you can delete or add cell walls (as shown in the second table in Figure 8-3). When you delete cell walls, you require a cell to span multiple rows or columns Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment — and that’s exactly what makes a table a flexible tool for layout. Introduction Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Figure 8-3: After you delete a few cell walls, an HTML table might not look like much of a table at all, - Integrating a Database into Your HTML but it’s perfect for laying out Web page elements.

              Chapter 14 Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part - From Web Page Web Site are TipV Cell spanning andtocell width

              different things. When you span cells, you add or delete cell walls

              Chapter - Creating an HTML Toolbox the width of a cell, you just adjust the width of that cell. (merge16 cells), and when you increase Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4Table for Dummies, 4th Edition Sketching Your by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Tables can become and they to be carefully planned. Mapping to the nearest pixel can get Johncomplex, Wiley & Sons © 2003need (408 pages) rather tedious, and it could take several attempts, but it’s an essential step Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web sitein designing a well-laid-out page. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Start with a general idea and slowly plan your layout until it becomes more solid and specific. Follow these basic steps: Table of Contents

              1. Grab (believe it or not) a sheet of paper and a pencil so that you can sketch out your ideas.

              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Introduction Make sure that you have a general idea of where you want everything to go on your page. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              2. Evaluate yourabout WebHTML pageand andthe come Chapter 1 - The what Least to Youinclude Need toin Know Webto a firmer decision on the layout. Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              This way, you can begin to determine how many columns and rows you’ll need, the width of the - Creating Your First HTML Page table and cells, and whether to make any cells span rows or columns. Here are some things to - Getting Started with HTML decide:

              Chapter 3 Part II

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5 Chapter 6

              -Whether Linking tothe Online tableResources will be centered, left aligned, or right aligned. - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              you Page want with to include hyperlinks, and where you might want to include them. The -Whether Top Off Your Formatting

              image in the topNext of the table in Part III - Taking HTML to the Level Chapter 8

              Figure 8-2 provides a hyperlink to another Web site, and that image is 294 pixels by 94 pixels. - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames 3. Figure out the pixel dimensions of any images you want to use, for example:

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending with site Other Technologies WhereHTML and how navigation tools

              should appear. In Figure 8-2, to the right of the logo,

              Chapter 11

              -there’s GettingaStylish list of images with CSSused for navigation, and the greatest width value is 190 pixels. Don’t be

              Chapter 12

              with the height of these images; you don’t have to define cell or table height. -concerned HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Where the main logo should go, and what size it should be. For example, in Figure 8-2, the logo is the main focal point. Its dimensions are 400 pixels wide by 302 pixels tall.

              Part V - From Web to Web Site Tip Page The point is to make

              Chapter 16

              sure that the table fills a browser window nicely without forcing the

              Chapter 17

              -user Creating an HTML Toolbox to scroll left and right to see everything. We think it’s best to let the contents of your table -determine Setting Upthe Your Online Presence cell height; image height isn’t as important because users are used to scrolling

              Chapter 18

              -up Creating a Great User Interface and down Web pages but may get frustrated if they have to scroll left and right to read

              Part VI - The Part of Tens content.

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs If you opt a simple each main element (logo, hyperlink image, and navigation) will have its Chapter 20 for - Ten HTMLapproach, Do’s and Don’ts

              ownVII cell. In Figure 8-2, Part - Appendixes

              that means only three cells. If you have only a few cells, you’ll probably have to span the cells so the contents fill the width of your page. Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Appendix B -on HTML Character Codes Depending the complexity of your design, you may need several rows. A simple, clean design, such as Appendix C Figure - Glossary the one in 8-2, requires only two rows. The first row should span two cells; the second row should Index contain two cells. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              See 8-4 for a look at the final sketch. List ofFigure Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents Figure Always start by sketching the table dimensions, even before opening text editor. Chapter 5 -8-4: Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Tip The author of our sample Web site uses images in place of text for the navigational elements; Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting however, for usability reasons, try using text in place of images when possible. Even so, if you want Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level complete control of the font(s) in which your text appears, you may have to use images instead — and Chapter 8 - HTML Tables create an image of the text written in your chosen font. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, Constructing Basic Tables4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              After you complete a sketch gives a pretty solid indication of the page and table layout, open your John Wiley &that Sons © 2003 (408 pages) HTML editor and Whether create the skeleton of your table. Thetext-oriented building blocks that framework are the three your goal is to build a simple, Webfor site basic components of any table: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table: Table row: Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Table (data) cell:, which is always within a


              Introduction

              Part I - MeetingA HTML in Its defines Natural the Environment Remember hierarchy nesting order

              of table elements: A
              is always enclosed within a

              Chapter 1 - The Least enclosed You Need to Know about HTML and the Web
              . Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web With these three elements alone, you're ready to build a simple table; the markup that does the job looks Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page

              something like Started this: Part II - Getting with HTML Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources
              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9 - HTML Frames 3 Chapter Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS
              7 - cell Top Off1Your Page with Formatting cell 2
              10 - cell HTML Forms cell 4
              Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic In our example, we create a table with two rows based on the sketch in Figure 8-4. The first table row

              Chapter 14 cells - Integrating a Database into Your encloses 1 and 2; the second table rowHTML encloses cells 3 and 4. Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Remember Table rows always Part V - From Web Page to Web Siterun

              horizontally and the contents of each cell - in this case, cell 1,

              cell 2, so on - are contained within their own element. Chapter 16 and - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              To create the shell of your table-based Web page (for example, one based on the sketch from the Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface previous section,Figure 8-4), you start with the element: Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part... VII - Appendixes



              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes The element can have a number of optional attributes (for example, border="1" or Appendix C - Glossary - for now, however, keep it simple. Next, decide how many rows you want the table bgcolor="black") Index to have: Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures



              List of Tables ... List of Listings ... List of Sidebars


              Figure 8-5 shows the type of table this markup generates: a simple table with two rows. Each tag pair represents a single row.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web Figure The beginning thePage table structure contains only two rows. Chapter 3 -8-5: Creating Your First og HTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              After you enter the appropriate number of rows, you add cells using the table data cell () element. - Structuring Your HTML Documents The element defines the number of cells - and, therefore, the number of columns.

              Chapter 4 Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6 -inFinding The sketch Figureand 8-4 Using showsImages a two-column table with three cells, the first row contains one cell, and the Chapter Top Off Your Page with second7row- contains two cells. The Formatting markup for this arrangement looks like this: Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter ChapterMagic Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              10 - contents HTML Forms
              12 - contents HTML and Scripting 13 - contents Making Multimedia
              Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Here's 16 where tables can get a Toolbox bit tricky. A simple table with an even number of rows and columns (say two Chapter - Creating an HTML rows and two columns) is a piece of cake - but you'll discover as you get more handy at designing your - Setting Up Your Online Presence own pages that your needs aren't likely to produce such symmetrical tables very often. If your table will Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface span more than one row or column (such as the first cell in the preceding example), you'll have to add an Part VI - The Part of Tens attribute that tells the browser which cell does the spanning. Chapter 17

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s corresponds and Don’ts The number in the attribute with the number of columns or rows you want the cell to span, Part VIImeans - Appendixes which if you're

              creating a table like the one in our example, you have to add the colspan="2"

              Appendix - HTML Tags element. (The first cell in the table spans across two columns.) attributeAto the first 4 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

              See the Csection later in this chapter, 'Adding Spans,' for more information, but for now, assuming that Appendix - Glossary you're creating a table like ours, the markup looks like this: Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings
              contents
              contents contents


              List of Sidebars

              Congratulations, you're done with your first table. Well, sort of. To effectively use tables for layout, you need to know how to control several display issues, such as borders, table widths, and the handling of

              white space within in your table. (For example, without borders, you can't really tell the table is there - it 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition won't show up in HTML your browser. This isn't a bad thing or a good thing, but something that you do have the ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel Natanya Pittsfor more information power to change if you want.)and Keep reading on completing your table and integrating John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) it into your page. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded graphics,and andclosing animation, Warning The , ,with andframes, : Table rows may be grouped into a table body section using the table body () element. A recent addition to the HTML 4 specification, these elements allow table bodies to scroll List of Listings independently of the table head () and table foot (). The table body should List of Sidebars con- tain rows of table data. The element must contain at least one table row (). List of Tables

              : Table rows may be grouped into a table head section using the table head () element. The table head contains information about the table's columns. The element must contain at least one table row. : Much like the element, table rows may be grouped into a table footer section, using the table footer () element. The table foot contains information about the

              table's columns and must contain at least one table row. Be sure to include your footer HTML 4 forthe Dummies, 4th of Edition information before first instance the element; that way, the browser renders that by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts information before taking a stab at all the content dataISBN:0764519956 cells. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              : The element creates an explicit column Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site group. The number of loadedusing with frames, graphics, this stepcolumnsor is one specified the span attributeand or animation, using the element, which is defined by-step will put you onto the right track. shortly. You use book the span attribute specify a uniform width for a group of columns. : The table element is an empty element. You use the element to further define column structure. The element should not be used to group columns - that is the HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thelement's Edition job. The element is used after you define a column group and set Introduction a uniform width to specify a uniform width for a subset of columns.

              Table of Contents

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web The value the border attribute defines the thickness of the border in pixels. For example, border="5" Chapter 3 of - Creating Your First HTML Page

              produces a 5-pixel border. you leave Part II - Getting Started withIfHTML

              this attribute off, most browsers don't display a border. However, if you don't want your border visible, we suggest Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents that you add border="0" to turn off the border for sure. Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Tip It's a good idea to turn on the table border when you're first creating and tweaking your table. This is Finding and Using Images because it's- sometimes difficult to see just what is going on without a border. After you've finished tweaking Chapter 7 - Top Offturn Youroff Page Formatting your table, you can the with border. Chapter 6

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Warning When don't use the border attribute, most browsers don't display a border but there's still Chapter 8 - HTMLyou Tables an invisible Chapter 9 -2-pixel HTML border. Frames Therefore, when you design your table, factor those 2-pixels into your calculations. To avoid the invisible two-pixel border altogether, set the border attribute to equal 0 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms (border="0"). Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Right now, the examples build on the table skeleton created in the previous sections. Figure 8-6 shows Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting how the Web page looks if you add a two-pixel border to the finished product.

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables

              Figure 8-6: Most Web pages that use tables for layout don't use borders; here you can see why.

              List of Listings

              List of Sidebars

              Adjusting height and width Officially, you can only set the width of tables and cells; unofficially, however, some browsers also allow you to set the height of your table. When you use tables to lay out Web pages, width becomes one of the primary variables. But first, let's identify what happens if you don't include the width attribute at all.

              Cell width

              HTML for Dummies, 4th Edition If you don't set table and4 cell width, the user's browser determines the width of every cell according to the by Ed Tittel andno Natanya Pitts width of its contents - no more, less. For example, supposeISBN:0764519956 you want to put a logo in the first cell and Wiley © 2003 (408 don't pages) assign the width to the first cell (containing the logo), the navigational itemsJohn in the cell&toSons its left. If you navigational itemsWhether are placed thealogo, with no or almost no site space between the two. To avoid yourright goal beside is to build simple, text-oriented Web or you one can loaded and animation, this stepthat cramped look, usewith theframes, width graphics, attribute to strategically define an exact number of pixels book will put you on the right track. between the logoby-step and navigational items.

              Tip If you're using tables for layout purposes, we recommend that you set the width for the table and cells. You can do this using either pixels or percentages, keeping in mind that percentages allow your table HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition to be resized depending on the size of the browser window.

              Table of Contents Introduction

              Part Defining I - Meeting width HTML is easyinwhen Its Natural you use Environment the width

              attribute. For example, you can set the width of your table

              Chapter at 630 pixels 1 - The like Least this: You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3 border="1" - Creating Your First HTML Page
              opening tagsthis aresteprequired. If you forget to include by-step bookcorrectly will put you on the right track. one, your table won't display in most browsers.

              Adding borders

              Table of Contents

              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              For an HTML table, border refers not only to outside borders, but also to individual cell borders. You use Introduction theborder attribute to Its turnNatural all these table borders Part I - Meeting HTML in Environment

              on or off. (Keep in mind, however, that if you're using

              tables to the table should probably turned off.) To turn the table (and cell) Chapter 1 lay- out Thecontent, Least You Need to borders Know about HTML and thebe Web

              border on, add the border attribute to the start tag, as shown in the following bold markup: - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 2 Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents colspan="2"> Chapter Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9 - HTML Frames


              contents contents
              Chapter 7

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Other table elements

              Chapter Although 13 - Making tables Multimedia were first created Magic to contain and display tabular data, they are now most commonly

              used Webapage layout. InYour this chapter, we focus on the elements that designer's use to Chapter 14 to-control Integrating Database into HTML control but for thosetoofOther you who might want to create a traditional table, we define the Chapter 15 -layout, How HTML Relates Markup Languages table elements that Part Vremaining - From Web Page to Web Site Chapter 16

              you can use in this sidebar. They are as follows:

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              : The table header element displays text in boldface with a default center alignment. You - Setting Up Your Online Presence can use the element within any row of a table, but you most often find and use it in the first Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface row at the top - or head - of a table. Except for their position and egotism, they act just like table Part VI - The Part of Tens data () tags and should be treated as such. Chapter 17

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20
              : - Ten HTMLThe Do’stable and Don’ts caption () element is designed to exist anywhere inside the Part VII - Appendixes.

              . .
              tags but not inside table rows or cells (because then they wouldn't

              Appendix Abe -captioning HTML 4 Tags anything) - and they can only occur once. Similar to table cells, captions

              any HTML Appendix Baccommodate - HTML Character Codeselements that can appear in the body of a document (in other words, inline elements), but only those. By default, captions are horizontally centered with the table, and Appendix C - Glossary their lines wrap to fit within the table's width. The
              element accepts the align attribute. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Index

              List of Figures

              Part ...II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents
              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources The value the width can be defined in pixels by using a positive integer (say, 630), or in Chapter 6 of - Finding and attribute Using Images

              percentages by using a positive integer followed by a percent sign (as in 95%). This choice also applies - Top Off Your Page with Formatting when set the width individual cells. To add widths to the table built earlier in this chapter (and to set Part IIIyou - Taking HTML toof the Next Level width for its individual cells), add the following markup shown in bold text: Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 7

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              contents Chapter - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site
              - Getting Stylish with CSS
              contents contents
              Chapter 12

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter Setting Up Your Presence Figures17 8-7-and 8-8 show theOnline difference between a site that doesn't define table and cell width and one Chapter that uses 18 the - Creating width attribute. a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              Figure 8-7: This image doesn't define width properties.

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter Figure 4 -8-8: Structuring This image Yourdefines HTML Documents width properties. Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Warning If- you set the pixel width smaller than the content's pixel size, the browser ignores the width Finding and Using Images attribute and defaults to display all the cell contents. So, be sure to check all dimensions. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Chapter 6

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Cell height - HTML Tables

              Chapter 8

              Chapter 9 - bear HTMLclose Frames Two factors attention when you're defining table and cell height: Chapter 10 - HTML Forms

              You have twoHTML ways to define height. It works Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies

              the same way as defining width - by using number of

              pixels percentages. Chapter 11 or - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Height is not nearly as important as width. Cell content determines the height of each cell; - Making Multimedia Magic normally, it's not even necessary to define cell height.

              Chapter 13 Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15 you - How HTML to using Other the Markup Languages That said, may wantRelates to avoid height attribute. Here's why: According to the HTML Part V - From Page to Web Site standard, theWeb height attribute is not

              a attribute. You can use the height attribute because

              Chapter some browsers 16 - Creating support an it, HTML but not Toolbox all of them do yet. Bottom line: Using the height attribute may produce

              unpredictable results. it isPresence used occasionally, so here's how to use the height attribute to Chapter 17 - Setting UpHowever, Your Online further 18 define a table: a Great User Interface Chapter - Creating Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19 border="1" - Ten Ways to width="630"> Exterminate Web Bugs


              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              B - HTML Character Codes Appendix Appendix C width="400" - Glossary Index

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              height="100"> contents
              contents contents
              List of Figures List of Tables

              Warning Although, according to the HTML 4 standard, the height attribute can legally be added to the

              List of Listings table data cell () element, it's now deprecated (considered obsolete and on the way out). The List of Sidebars standard currently favors the use of style sheets; future versions of this standard have or will phase out the

              height attribute. Not because they don't want you to define this property, but rather because they want you to set the height using style sheets instead. If you're interested in learning more about style sheets, see Chapter 11.

              Padding and spacing Determining the white space between cells is essential for proper layout. Thinking back to our sketch, you

              have to determine - to the pixel - how space is going to be used in your table. There are two attributes that HTML 4 for cellpadding Dummies, 4th and Edition help you define white space: cellspacing. These attributes are similar, and can ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts sometimes confuse first-time HTML authors. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Both attributes allow you to putgoal some space however, they do it using two different Whether your is to buildbetween a simple,cells; text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this steptechniques: by-step book will put you on the right track.

              cellspacing increases the border width between cells - increasing the space between cells. Table of Contents cellpadding pads the cell with space - the space is added within the cell walls. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              The value for either attribute is defined in pixels. For example, cellpadding="5" adds five pixels worth Introduction of padding to each Part I - Meeting HTMLcell. in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              To define either attribute, add it to the start tag, as follows:


              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              Structuring Your HTML Documents When using- tables for layout, without visible borders, it doesn't matter much which one you use. However,

              Chapter 5 color - Linking to Online if you add to your tables Resources - or use the border for any reason - you can see a considerable difference. Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images That's because cellpadding increases the space within the border, and cellspacingincreases the Chapter Top Offitself, Your as Page with clearly Formatting width of7 the-border shown in Figures 8-9 and 8-10. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Figure 8-9: Cellpadding increases the space within each cell.

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter Figure 4 -8-10: Structuring Cellspacing Your HTML increases Documents the width of the border. Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Warning -The default value for cellpadding is 1; the default for cellspacing is 2. If you don't define Finding and Using Images cellpadding and cellspacing, your users' browsers assume the defaults. Accounting for those pixels Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting in your sketch is a good idea. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 6

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Shifting- alignment HTML Frames

              Chapter 9

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              In the table alignment notTechnologies well supported Part IV past, - Extending HTML withwas Other

              by browsers; therefore, if you wanted to center your table, you had to find a different method that would work. Many designers used the
              tag pair Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS outside the table, as follows:
              Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML
              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages ... Part V - From Web Page to Web Site
              Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 15

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18 finally - Creating a Great User Interface Browsers caught up; now you can use attributes that are part of the HTML standard to align your Part VI -(horizontally) The Part of Tens tables and

              your table contents (horizontally and vertically). Aligning tables is similar to

              Chapter - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs aligning19images. Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              To align your table horizontally, Part VII - Appendixes

              you use the alignattribute with the element. The align attribute, when used with the
              element has the following possible values: left,right, or Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags center. When you use these values, the table is aligned to the left, right, or center of the document, Appendix B - HTML Character Codes respectively. Appendix C - Glossary Index You can also use the align attribute with the elements. However, when used with these Cheat Sheet the - HTML Dummies, elements, data 4isFor aligned in the4th cellEdition or row. The values that can be used with the align attribute in the List of Figures elements are defined as follows: List of Tables

              Aligns the table or cell contents against the right side. List ofalign="right": Listings List of Sidebars

              align="left": Aligns the table or cell contents against the left side. (This is the default setting.) align="center": Centers the table or cell contents. align="justify": Justifies cell contents in the middle (not widely supported). align="char": Aligns cell contents around a specific character (not widely supported).

              In the following example, we align our table in the center of the page (see Figure 8-11):

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition

              or
              or
              ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step by-step book will put you on the right track. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition
              contents
              contents contents
              Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Figure Ourand simple centered. Chapter 6 -8-11: Finding Usingtable Images Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              You can also vertically align cell contents using the valign attribute. The valign attribute cannot be used for a ; it can only be used with the and , - Setting Up Your Online Presence ,,,.

              Chapter 17 Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The IfPart Tens Warning youofset the alignment

              for a row (), and then set the alignment for a cell within that row

              Chapter Ten Ways Exterminate Bugs the setting for the row. ( tags, it affects the way the cell’s content is List of Figures displayed. Not generally something you want to do. List of Tables List of Listings

              Nesting tables within tables

              List of Sidebars

              Many designers are forced to nest tables within tables to achieve a desired effect. This is not only legal, but quite common — and okay, a few such nestings won’t hurt. Remember, however, that nesting too many tables within tables can lengthen download time. To nest a table, you simply add the
              elements.

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9 - HTML The possible valuesFrames are as follows: Chapter 10 - HTML Forms

              valign="top": Vertically aligns cell contents Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              to the top of the cell.

              valign="bottom": Vertically aligns cell contents to the bottom of the cell.

              Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magiccenters the cell contents. (This is the default.) valign="middle": Vertically Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              valign="baseline": Defines a baseline for all other cells in the same row, so alignment is the Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages forWeb all cells. Part Vsame - From Page to Web Site Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Thealign and valign attributes can also be used with the following other table elements:
              , and
              ),19the-setting you to add to the cellWeb overrides Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Adding Spans by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              One of the main reasons tables are©a2003 flexible alternative for arranging elements in your Web page is John Wiley & Sons (408 pages) because of spanning. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-

              Spanning enables you tobook stretch across multiple cells; you essentially tear down a cell wall. Whether by-step willitems put you on the right track. you need to span rows or columns, you can use the concept of spanning to wrangle your table into almost any arrangement. Keep in mind that row and column spanning takes careful planning, and that planning Table of Contents should occur during the sketching phase. The two attributes you use to span cells are colspan and HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition rowspan. Both attributes are added to the
              element. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Changing column spans - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 1

              Chapter 2 columns - HTMLyou at Work on the Web attribute in the
              element and set the value equal to the To span use the colspan Chapter - Creating Yourto First HTML Page8-12 illustrates a cell that spans two columns. number3 of cells you want span. Figure Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Figure cell Part VI - The 8-12: Part ofThe Tens Chapter 19

              spans two columns.

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              In this example, the first cell spans the two cells in the next row. You use the colspan attribute set to 2, as - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts shown in the following markup, because the cell spans two columns:

              Chapter 20

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags

              Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars
              contents
              contents contents
              Appendix B - HTML Character Codes

              After you add a colspan attribute, verify that you have the appropriate number of
              cells. For example, if you define a cell to span two columns, you should have one less in that row. If you use colspan="3", there should be two fewer cells in that row. You also want to make sure that the other rows have the appropriate number of cells. For example, if you define a cell to span two columns, the other rows in that table should have two cells to fill out the two columns.

              HTMLspans 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Changing row by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Row spans are similar John Wiley to column & Sons spans, © 2003 the (408 only pages)difference is that you span rows instead of columns. Like thecolspan attribute, theyour rowspan added text-oriented to the
              cell. 8-13 illustrates a cell that Whether goal is attribute to build aissimple, Web Figure site spans two rows. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Figure 8-13: We have changed our table design so that the last cell containing our navigational items - Getting Stylish with CSS spans two rows.

              Chapter 11 Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter To span 13rows, - Making you use Multimedia the rowspan Magic attribute in the
              element and set the value equal to the number Chapter of cells14 you-want Integrating to span. a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Remember YouPage should sketch your Part V - From Web to Web Site

              table first, so you know what cells should span what. The example design we've used throughout most of this chapter uses the colspan attribute with the first cell. However, Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox the design could have been just as simple if we used a rowspan with the last cell that contains the Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence navigational items. Either way, the table is efficiently laid out. The modified table comes from the following Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface markup (note the bold rowspan) and is shown in Figure 8-14: Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures
              contents contents
              contents
              Chapter 20

              List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              Figure 8-14: Our simple table with the last rows spanned.

              Tip Always keep in mind that columns are vertical and rows are horizontal. If you want to extend a cell 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition vertically (across HTML multiple rows), use rowspan. If you want to extend a cell horizontally (across multiple ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts columns), use colspan. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition PopulatingHTML Cells by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              After you've sketched your table, defined table properties such as width, cell padding and spacing, and cell John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) spanning, you're Whether ready to your populate the table cells with text-oriented images, hyperlinks, text and almost any other HTML goal is to build a simple, Web site element. This is aorsimple process: You add images, hyperlinks and text to the one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-
              cell, similar to how you by-step book will put you on the right track. add them to the element. The following markup shows a populated table, with data added in bold: Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter
              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment rope-a-dope records Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page
              Chapter 6 rope-a-dope Chapter 7 - Top Offborder= Your Page with Formatting home" Part III Chapter 9


              - HTML Frames Chapter 10 Forms Part IV - Extending
              HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11 Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12 - HTMLsrc="images/q.gif" and Scripting Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic
              Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages src="images/ilovemyself.gif" border="0"> Part V - From Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox
              Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence
              Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Introduction

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags
              Appendix B HTML Character Codes Appendix C Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              List of Figures


              List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars


              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Testing Your Table by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Testing is the final stepWiley before your©table goes live. You must test your tables in all the popular browsers John & Sons 2003 (408 pages) — including Internet Explorer, Netscape, and Opera. you don’t, your users Whether your goal is to build a simple,Iftext-oriented Web site may have to squint at your pages and may see your tables as one big mess. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Tip As you’re creating your table, we suggest that you have your browser window open at the same time. Each time you change the width of a cell or add an item to a cell, save the document, and view it in the Table of Contents browser window. That way, when it’s time to test your table, you probably won’t have too much tweaking to HTML do. 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction

              A challenge forHTML manyindesigners is Environment to create table Part I - Meeting Its Natural

              designs that work in every browser. Thanks to many

              crusaders standards, theNeed newest versions of HTML the most Chapter 1 of - The Least You to Know about and popular the Web browsers, Netscape, Internet Explorer, and Opera, support the HTML If your audience does not consist of technical-savvy Chapter 2 -all HTML at Work on the standard. Web individuals, might Your wantFirst to consider older browsers when designing your tables. Chapter 3 -you Creating HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              You should always test your site in any browser that your users might have. For example, if your table is

              Chapter Structuring Your HTML aligned4with- align="center", butDocuments in an older version of Internet Explorer, the table remains flush with Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources the left side, you might have to add a
              tag pair to your table. As we stated earlier, you won’t Chapter 6 many - Finding and Using Imagesif you stick to the standard. have too problems with tables Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Table Making Tips by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              Before closing this chapter, weSons want to impart some of our favorite table techniques. After years of John Wiley & © 2003 (408 pages) building, maintaining, and troubleshooting tables, the following tips are head start to creating effective Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Webasite tables. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Following the standards Table of Contents

              The first and (we think) most important — tip is to keep with the established standards. The Web HTML 4 For—Dummies, 4th Edition

              Standards Project has been campaigning for full standard support in browsers and HTML authoring applications since 1998. Their hard work should make your life easier. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Introduction

              Chapter 1 - The Least ago, You Need Know the Web be forced to create different versions of Just a couple of years if youtobuilt anabout HTMLHTML table,and you would Chapter 2 page - HTML at Work on the Web your Web (each version containing browser-specific elements and attributes) to define some basic Chapter 3 - Creating Your Firstimagine, HTML Page table properties. As you might creating and maintaining different versions of the same Web page Part - Getting Started with canIIdrive development costsHTML sky-high.

              To get around those costs, many developers would carefully craft

              Chapter 4 -with Structuring Your HTML Documents their tables specific markup that worked in Internet Explorer and Netscape — but what about Opera? Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Well, happily those are problems of the past. The newest versions of Internet Explorer, Netscape, and Chapter Opera all 6 support - Finding HTML, and Using as well Images as CSS and XHTML. To learn more about the fight for Web standards,

              visitwww.webstandards.org. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              - HTML Tables Sanitizing markup

              Chapter 8 Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter Efficiently 10 written - HTMLmarkup Forms is easier to troubleshoot and maintain. Many designers use white space to Part separate IV - Extending elements. HTML For with example, Otherthe Technologies following markup

              Chapter 11

              doesn’t use much white space and is hard to read:

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12 border="1" - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 width="630" - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter HTML

              contents
              - Integrating a Database contents into Your
              Chapter 15 - How HTML contents Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Check 16 out this clean version: Chapter - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18 border="1" - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens colspan="2"> contents Chapter Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes
              contents contents
              Appendix C - Glossary Index Warning

              Notice that the white space we include is between elements; not within elements. If, for

              Cheat Sheetyou - HTML 4 For space Dummies, 4th Edition example, add white between the
              and
              within a Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources
              element as follows:

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web
              contents contents ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts
              one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step by-step book will put you on the right track.
              contents contents
              HTML contents - The contents Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web
              Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page
              contents
              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7 - Top Off Your with Formatting This markup produces thePage tables shown in Figure 8-15. Be sure to remember cell widths — the width of Part - Taking HTMLmatch to the the Next Level the III third cell should width of

              the nested table. Also, create and test the table you intend to nest

              Chapter 8 - HTML Tables — separately, before you add it to your primary table. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A -8-15: HTMLNested 4 Tags tables. Figure Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary

              Using CSS to control table properties

              Index

              Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              Chapter 11 provides an overview of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), a style-sheet language you can use to List of Figures define display properties for HTML documents. Compactly, definitions of a few CSS properties can take List of Tables theofplace of some attributes such as align,cellpadding,cellspacing, and more. Tempting, but List Listings watch out: Older browsers don’t support CSS — although the recent versions of Internet Explorer, List of Sidebars

              Netscape, and Opera do. CSS provides more options for table display and is more flexible than HTML. If you know your audience has appropriate (and recent) equipment, CSS may be the way to go.

              Avoiding dense tables We recommend creativity, but be careful and don’t pack a screen full of dense and impenetrable information — especially numbers. A long, unbroken list of numbers quickly drives away all but the truly

              masochistic — pretty much negating the purpose of the table to begin with. Put those numbers into an HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition attractive table (better yet, several tables interspersed with a few well-chosen images). Watch your page’s byreadability Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts attractiveness and soar; hear visitors sigh with relief.ISBN:0764519956 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Individual table cells can be surprisingly roomy; you can position graphics in them precisely. If you’re Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or oneinloaded with moved to put graphics a table, beframes, sure to:graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Select images that are similar in size and looks. Table of Contents Measure those images to determine their heights and widths in pixels (shareware programs such as HTML Paint 4 For Shop Dummies, 4th Edition Pro and GraphicConverter do this automatically). Introduction

              HTMLHTML markup to Natural positionEnvironment these images Part IUse - Meeting in Its Chapter 1

              within their table cells.

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              A short-and-sweet table keeps the graphics in check and guarantees that the text will always sit nicely to - HTML at Work on the Web its right.

              Chapter 2 Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part - Getting Started with HTML TwoIImore handy graphics-placement

              tips: Size your rows and columns of cells that contain images to

              Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTMLand Documents accommodate the largest graphic center all graphics in each cell (vertically and horizontally). The Chapter result is5 a consistent, - Linking tocoherent Online Resources image layout. Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Top Off Your Page with Formatting Adding -color to cells

              Chapter 7

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter Remember 8 -the HTML bgcolor Tables attribute that goes with the element? bgcolor is the same attribute; it Chapter affects 9the background - HTML Frames of table cells in much the same way it affects the background of your entire HTML

              document. this attribute to any table cell to change its background color: Chapter 10 -Simply HTML add Forms Part - Extending HTML with Other Technologies ...

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Tip You use background Chapter 12 can - HTML and Scriptingcolor instead of using an image that would take longer to download. Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 9: HTML Frames by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              Overview

              ISBN:0764519956

              John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.

              Deciding whether frames are right for your HTML page Table of Contents

              a frame HTML Sketching 4 For Dummies, 4thstructure Edition Introduction

              Defining a frameset skeleton

              Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1 -frame The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Adding elements Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Targeting links in Your frames Chapter 3 - Creating First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              HTML frames delineate, outline, and give structure to HTML documents; by design, information can move - Structuring Your HTML Documents coherently within and among frames. Frames are not as commonly used as they once were, but times still Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources arise when frames work best and are used. For example, if you use any Macromedia products (such as Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Flash or Dreamweaver), you'll notice that the help section on the product (stored locally) is laid out using Chapter - Top Off Your with frames.7 In this chapter, wePage cover theFormatting basics of frames step by step. Chapter 4

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter Because 8 frames - HTML became Tables part of the HTML repertoire with HTML 4.0, older browsers (and browser

              versions thanFrames 3.0) can't handle frames properly. Text-only browsers don't deal well with frames Chapter 9 older - HTML either. To practical, this means that some of your users may not be able to appreciate the beauty and Chapter 10 be - HTML Forms efficacy of your frames. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              As long as you're sure users have frames-compatible browsers - the recent versions of both Netscape Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Navigator and Internet Explorer support frames, as do many of the non-commercial browsers such as Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Mosaic and Amaya - you can safely use frames on your site. However, if your audience uses a wide variety Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML of browsers, you may want to shy away from frames. Another option is to offer a non-framed version of the Chapter 15 - How to Other same materials soHTML usersRelates can pick whichMarkup versionLanguages of your pages they want to explore. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter Warning 16 -Frames Creatinghave an HTML someToolbox significant usability concerns (covered later in this chapter). If frames are

              not strictly recommend opting for tables instead. Chapter 17 necessary, - Setting Upwe Your Online Presence Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, EditionPage When to Use Frames in an4th HTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              So, what are frames why would© you to use them in your Web pages? Frames provide Johnand Wiley & Sons 2003 want (408 pages) advantages as well as disadvantages. As mentioned frames Whether your goal is to build a simple,previously, text-oriented Web are site not as widely used as they used to be. In thisorsection you find out the advantages of frames as well as the disadvantages. one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Why you may want to use frames Table of Contents

              A browser window usually holds a single frame that displays one HTML document. However, browser HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition

              windows can hold several frames (which are defined with the element), and can display several HTML documents at one time. Each frame works like a separate browser screen, but all the Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment frames are displayed together in one window. Imagine having three browser windows open (and tiled) at Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web one time, and you begin to get the picture. Introduction

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter - Creating Yourwith First HTML Page What's3really cool is that frames, the different browser windows work together to display your content. Part - Getting Started with HTML AndIIfor the control freak in all of us

              - depending on the attributes you give it - you can make a frame act

              Chapter - Structuring Yourscreen, HTML Documents just like4a standard browser or freeze it so that it can't be adjusted. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources

              Tip The significant difference between tables and frames is that tables are static, and frames can Chapter 6 most - Finding and Using Images be dynamic. canYour scroll through information in individual frames, and users may find that appealing (or Chapter 7 - You Top Off Page with Formatting possibly annoying). Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables Frames have numerous uses. You might be looking at a page that uses frames if

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter The 10Web - HTML pageForms has a fixed logo at the top and a scrolling bottom section. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              The has a Stylish fixed top logo, Chapter 11page - Getting with CSSa navigation bar and copyright notice at the bottom, and a scrolling middle -section for the page's content. HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 12

              Chapter 13Web - Making Multimedia Magic frames that put a table of contents on the left and a scrolling text The page has side-by-side Chapter 14 Integrating a Database into Your HTML frame on the right. Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              the left side of the page, there's Part VOn - From Web Page to Web Site

              a frame that's filled with icons that link to different parts of a Web

              site; an icon,an and the Toolbox element is displayed in the right frame. Chapter 16click - Creating HTML Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              You find out how to set up these structures later in this chapter. For now, note that frames are flexible. Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Frames allow you to keep constant chunks of information on display while your users can scroll through Part VI - The Part of Tens large amounts of text or dynamic content. Figure 9-1 provides an example of a Web page using two Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs frames. Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)

              ISBN:0764519956

              Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              Linking to Online Resources Figure -9-1: This site uses two frames.

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Frame usability: Is another alternative better? - HTML Tables

              Chapter 8

              Chapter - HTML Frames Early in9their history, frames introduced some ticklish problems that caused many developers to shun Chapter 10 HTML Forms them. Some common usability concerns (even these days) are as follows: Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              The button Chapter 11browser's - GettingBack Stylish with may CSS not work correctly. Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Users can't bookmark a collection of documents in a frameset. Only individual frames can be - Making Multimedia Magic bookmarked.

              Chapter 13 Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15 - How HTML Relatesdifferent to Otherresults Markupwhen Languages A frameset may produce reloaded. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Users become in a frameset. Chapter 16 can - Creating an trapped HTML Toolbox Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Search engines find HTML pages, not framesets; therefore, search results can produce pages without Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface the navigational elements. Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19 - browsers, Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs In older printing Web pages with framed content could be a hassle. Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              In many cases, using Part VII - Appendixes

              tables can produce the same result as using frames. The advantage to using frames is that you can define one document that contains navigational elements, and dynamically change the Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags contents pages. This requires less maintenance since the navigational elements are defined in a separate Appendix B - HTML Character Codes HTML document. However, with many of the modern HTML editors, you can define global templates that Appendix C - Glossary control the maintenance issue. For example, Macromedia's Dreamweaver allows you to define a Web Index page template that contains the navigational elements. Each time you create a new page using the Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition template, the navigational elements are already defined for you. Later you can make changes to the List of Figures global template, and Dreamweaver will update all the documents that were created using that template. List Tables Weofrecommend avoiding frames when you can. But if you must use them, be sure to follow the steps we List of Listings outline in this chapter: List of Sidebars

              Sketch your frame structure on paper. Define your frame structure with and elements only. Add attributes to define behavior. Check your documents in a browser.

              To get a look at some well-designed frames, visit some sites that use them. (Yes, we have an example in 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition mind.) Before youHTML sketch your frame structure, check out the well-designed frames at ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts www.internetgarden.co.uk/frameset_1.htm. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.

              Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Chapter 12

              - HTML and Scripting

              Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Sketching Frame Components by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              The first step in creating frames is to sketch John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408your pages)design on paper. Using a pen or pencil - and a sheet of paper - you define how the browser should render yourtext-oriented pages. At this stage, Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web site you don't need to be precise about the content, just the frame dimensions. For example, if you want to create the Web page in Figure 9or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will putfor you onframes the right 1, you would sketch the dimensions two fortrack. the Web page (see Figure 9-2). The first framed component contains navigational elements, and the second framed component contains the main content for our Web page.

              Table of Contents

              HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment

              Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              Chapter 2

              - HTML at Work on the Web

              Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Part II - Getting Started with HTML

              Chapter 4

              - Structuring Your HTML Documents

              Chapter 5

              - Linking to Online Resources

              Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Chapter 7

              - Top Off Your Page with Formatting

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level

              Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Chapter 10

              - HTML Forms

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11

              - Getting Stylish with CSS

              Figure A sketch of Figure 9-1. Chapter 12 -9-2: HTML and Scripting Chapter 13

              - Making Multimedia Magic

              Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              Chapter 15

              - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16

              - Creating an HTML Toolbox

              Chapter 17

              - Setting Up Your Online Presence

              Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              Part VI - The Part of Tens

              Chapter 19

              - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs

              Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts

              Part VII - Appendixes

              Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars

              HTMLof 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Building a Set Frames by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts

              ISBN:0764519956

              To build a Web page contains two frames, you need to create three documents: John that Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site

              The document thatloaded defines framegraphics, structure, the frameset or one withthe frames, andcalled animation, this step- document. The frameset document is by-step a normal HTML which replace the . . . tags with book will document put you on in the right you track. the . . . tags. The frameset document only defines the frame structure, so it's usually a short document. Table of Contents

              containing the HTML markup used in the two frames. The HTML Two 4 Fordocuments, Dummies, 4theach Edition element is an empty element used in the element to point to the HTML document(s) Introduction for frame Part Iused - Meeting HTMLcontent. in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1

              - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web

              - HTML at Work on the Web Following the frameset document rules

              Chapter 2 Chapter 3

              - Creating Your First HTML Page

              Frameset documents HTML Part II - Getting Startedare with HTMLdocuments,

              so they must always begin with an tag, followed by the element, and we recommend you Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents use the following HTML frameset DOCTYPE declaration before the Chapter 5 - Linking tag: to Online Resources Chapter 6

              - Finding and Using Images

              Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8

              - HTML Tables

              Chapter 9

              - HTML Frames

              Remember With these elements, divide-and-conquer is the best approach. The frameset document only - HTML Forms contains elements that define the frame structure - no content is defined here.

              Chapter 10

              Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies

              Chapter 11 a -few Getting withframeset CSS Here are rules Stylish regarding documents that you should keep in mind: Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting

              The element Magic follows immediately after the closing tag. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Chapter 14

              - Integrating a Database into Your HTML

              If any elements appear before the elements, the elements are - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages ignored.

              Chapter 15

              Part V - From Web Page to Web Site

              Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Between the outermost tags, you can only nest other elements or Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence elements - no other HTML is allowed. Chapter 18

              - Creating a Great User Interface

              TheVIbasic frameset document Part - The Part of Tens

              starts just like any HTML document; notice that the tags are replaced with tags. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20

              - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts


              PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Frameset//EN"

              "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/frameset.dtd"> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags B - HTML Character Codes Appendix Appendix C - Glossary The Mettauer Family Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Index

              List of Figures



              List of Tables

              List of Listings

              List of Sidebars



              The element is the main container in a frameset document just like the element is the main container in regular HTML documents. Tip The elements should also include elements to define content for older browsers that don't support frames or for text-only devices such as PDAs, mobile phones, and more. We encourage you to put some content in this element, even if it's only to inform the readers to visit your no-<br /> <br /> frames site.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Using frameset attributes John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site After you've added the <frameset> element, you need to add attributes that define the basic frame or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepstructure in termsby-step of columns Theonfigures you've seen so far defined frames in terms of columns book or willrows. put you the right track. but rows work just as well for the purpose, as shown in Figure 9-3. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Figure 9-3: Navigational elements are defined as a row on top of the content.<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 either - Integrating Databaseyou intouse Your HTML To define rows or acolumns, one of the following two attributes in the <frameset> element: Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> the number Part Vrows: - FromDetermines Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> of frames that appear vertically (stacked on top of each other) in the<br /> <br /> browser the height of each frame. Chapter 16 - window Creating and an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> cols: Determines the number of frames that appear horizontally (placed side by side) in the browser Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface window and the width of each frame used to define a column structure. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 for - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs or width of the frames using pixels, percentages, or a The value both attributes defines the height Chapter 20 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts wildcard: Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> pixels: can define a fixed number of pixels (such as 50 or 250) for the row's height. This Appendix A - You HTML 4 Tags procedure seems simple,Codes but be careful: The size of the browser window can vary substantially from Appendix B - HTML Character oneCuser to another. If you use fixed pixel values, try using one or more relative values (described later Appendix - Glossary Index in this chapter) with them. Otherwise the user's browser can override your specified pixel value, with<br /> <br /> no way to ensure that the total height and width of all frames equals 100 percent of the user's window. You may not want that to happen; a browser doesn't care about eyestrain. All it knows is to follow List of Figures orders and display all defined frames, even if squashed together and crammed with unreadable text. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Tables<br /> <br /> List ofpercentages: Listings If you define the width or height in percentages, the value should be followed by a % List ofsign Sidebars ("20%"). This value tells the browser, "Size this frame to a percentage of screen area, between 1<br /> <br /> and 100." If the total for all frames is greater than 100 percent, all percentages are reduced to fit the browser window. If the values total less than 100 percent, extra space is added to any relative-sized frames that happen to be hanging around. wildcard: You have a couple of options for the wildcard. First, an asterisk (*) character identifies a relative-sized frame. Browsers give a frame defined with the asterisk all remaining space left over after the other frames defined with pixels and percentages are laid out on the screen. If you have<br /> <br /> several frames that take advantage of this flexible system, the remaining space is divided evenly 4 for Dummies, Edition among them.HTML Second, if you place a4th value in front of the *, the frame gets that much more relative ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts space. For instance, an entry such as 3*,* allocates three times as much space to the first frame (3/4 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) of the total on-screen space) as to the second frame (which gets a measly 1/4). Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or onedefine loadedframes with frames, and Tip Many developers eithergraphics, absolutely oranimation, relatively. this If thestepheight or width of a frame is book willvalue. put you on the right defined in pixels, by-step it's an absolute If the width or track. height of a frame is defined in percentages or by using a wildcard, it's a relative value. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> When you define values for the cols or rows attribute, you define a value for each frame you're creating,<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition The number of elements appearing in the value of the rows or cols separating them with4th commas. Introduction attribute determines the number of frames displayed. For example, if you want to create two frames and Part - Meeting HTML in Its Natural youIwant the first frame column to Environment occupy 20 percent<br /> <br /> of the window and the second frame column to take<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least Need to Know HTML and the Web up the remainder of theYou window, you use about the following markup: Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page <frameset cols="20%,*"><br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 the - Structuring Your HTML Documents Used with rows attribute, the same principle would look yield a markup like this: Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images <frameset rows="20%,*"> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part TipIIIThe - Taking total height HTML to or the width Next of all Level simultaneously displayed<br /> <br /> window. Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> frames must equal the height of the browser<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms Building a two-column frameset<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> To build frameset, you have to add the cols attribute to the <frameset> start tag. You Chapter 11a two-column - Getting Stylish with CSS can use12pixels, percentages, or a wildcard for the value of the cols attribute. To create the scenario Chapter - HTML and Scripting displayed 9-1 and 9-2, you could use the following <frameset> start tag: Chapter 13 in- Figures Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter <frameset 15 - cols="250,500"> How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Figure 16 9-4 illustrates structure. Chapter - Creating this an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 9-4: This Web page consists of two columns. Remember The cols attribute governs how many frames can sit horizontally across the browser's screen, as well as the width of each frame. To add a third frame to the scenario, you add a new value to the comma-separated list:<br /> <br /> <frameset cols="250,500,200"> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Building a two- or three-row frameset Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, and animation, this step-way you use the cols attribute To create a two-row frameset, you use the graphics, rows attribute - much the same by-step section). book will put on the track. as those defined by the cols attribute. The (detailed in the previous Theyou values areright the same only difference is that with the rows attribute, the values define height instead of width: Table of Contents<br /> <br /> <frameset rows="150,*"> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Figure 9-5 illustrates this structure.<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web To add a third frame, add a new value to the comma-separated list:<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <frameset rows="150,400,*"><br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Figure The Web page consists of two rows. Chapter 18 -9-5: Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Figure 9-6 illustrates this structure.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 9-6: The Web page consists of three rows, with the third row taking up the remaining height in<br /> <br /> the browser.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> CombiningWhether rows your andgoalcolumns in the same frameset is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> When you createby-step frames,book you're not restricted to using only rows or only columns. You can mix them up, will put you on the right track. but go easy on that technique; it isn't common (or recommended) because it can make your page harder to use. If you want to try out the frameset mix 'n' match, however, you start by defining the rows and cols Table attributes of Contents one right after another. You can place these attributes just about anywhere in your markup without affecting the 4th placement HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition of the frames. What decides the actual number of frames is how many values you put in each attribute; the example in the previous section, "Building a two- or three-row Introduction frameset," yields six frames because it collectively defines a total of six values - three rows, each with two Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment columns. mindYou thatNeed for each frame, youHTML needand a <frame> Chapter 1 Keep - TheinLeast to Know about the Web element that points to some resource, as in the following example: Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <frameset Part II - Gettingrows="33%,33%,*" Started with HTML<br /> <br /> cols="20%,80%"><br /> <br /> <frame Chapter 4 - src="one.htm"> Structuring Your HTML Documents <frame Chapter 5 - src="two.htm"> Linking to Online Resources <frame Chapter 6 - src="three.htm"> Finding and Using Images <frame Chapter 7 - src="four.htm"> Top Off Your Page with Formatting src="five.htm"> Part<frame III - Taking HTML to the Next Level <frame - src="six.htm"> HTML Tables </frameset><br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 order - HTML Forms Here, the of the frame elements assigns the content. For example, the contents of one.htm will Part IV - Extending HTML with Technologies appear in the first frame. TheOther contents of two.htm<br /> <br /> will appear in the second frame in the first row. The<br /> <br /> Chapter 11of -the Getting Stylish with contents three.htm will CSS appear in the first frame of the second row, and so on. Figure 9-7 Chapter 12 how - HTML and Scripting are assigned. illustrates these documents Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List ofFigure Tables 9-7: This frame structure has three rows and two columns, which results in six separate List offrames. Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Building the Frame Content by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The previous sections have & shown you how define the structure, write the frameset document, and use John Wiley Sons © 2003 (408to pages) attributes to specify exactly how the frames should looktext-oriented and work. But that's Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web site really only part of the work. You haven't created the content that the frames will display. That's what we show or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- you how to do in this section. by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> The<frame> element is empty, meaning it stands alone and does not require a closing tag. The primary purpose of the <frame> element is to point to the resource that you want to populate the frame. In most Table of Contents cases, that resource is an HTML document, although it can also be an image or another resource. The HTML 4 Formarkup Dummies, 4th Edition following shows <frame> elements that point to navigation.htm and content.htm Introduction documents: Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <frameset cols="20%,*"> Chapter 2 - src="navigation.htm"> HTML at Work on the Web <frame Chapter 3 - src="content.htm"> Creating Your First HTML Page <frame Part II - Getting Started with HTML </frameset><br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images Listing the frame rules and regulations Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - all Taking HTML to the Next you Level As with things HTML-related, must<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> obey the rules. Here are the highlights:<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> You to define Chapter 9 have - HTML Framesa frame element for each frame. Yes, folks, it's true - if you want to display four different HTMLForms pages in frames, you have to create four frames; therefore you need (all together, now) Chapter 10 - HTML four <frame> HTML elements. Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Any documents you point to (for example, navigation.htm and content.htm) must exist Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting first.Be careful how you define the addresses of such documents. Chapter Remember 14 - Integrating You can a Database define documents into Your HTML in frames relatively (navigation.htm) or absolutely<br /> <br /> (http://www.domain.com/navigation.htm). Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup LanguagesJust be sure they exist. See Chapter 5 on more Part Vabout - From relative Web Page and to absolute Web Site links.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> The order in which the frame elements are defined is important. The first <frame> element - Setting Up Your Online Presence defines the top or left-most frame area (depending on whether you use the rows or cols attributes, Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface respectively). The second <frame> element defines the frame immediately to the right of the first Part VI - The Part of Tens frame or (if the edge of the browser is reached) the frame in the next row. And so on. Chapter 17<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20can - Ten and Don’ts You use HTML manyDo’s different attributes with the <frame> element to modify a frame's appearance. The Part VII - Appendixes following section<br /> <br /> takes a closer look at them.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Using frame attributes<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Index As with tables, frames have many attributes you can use to alter their appearance within the Web browser. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, You can turn a frame border on or 4th off, Edition define frame margins, or disallow scrolling for a particular frame. List of following Figures sections show you how. The List of Tables<br /> <br /> Borders List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Theframeborder attribute enables you to turn a border on or off. You can individually specify whether you want the frames within your frameset to have borders. Borders help your readers differentiate between frames, but they can also get in the way of a seamless page. The value of the frameborder attribute can be 1, to turn the border on, or 0 to turn the border off. <frameset cols="20%,*"> <frame src="navigation.htm" frameborder="1"><br /> <br /> <frame src="content.htm" frameborder="0"> </frameset> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Warning The default John Wiley value & for Sons the © 2003 frameborder (408 pages) attribute is 1. If you don't want borders around your frames, you haveWhether to use the frameborder turn them off (0).site your goal is to buildattribute a simple,totext-oriented Web or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepbook will you on the turned right track. Figure 9-8 showsby-step the example siteput with borders off; Figure 9-9 shows it with borders turned on.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Figure 9-8: Borders turned off Technologies using frameborder="0". Part IV - Extending HTML with Other<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Borders turned on 4th using frame-border="1". CheatFigure Sheet -9-9: HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Margins<br /> <br /> List of Listings List of can Sidebars You determine the margin height and width for any frame by using the following attributes:<br /> <br /> marginwidth: Accepts a value of 1 or more pixels to determine the exact width of the left and right margins of a frame. marginheight: Accepts a value of one or more pixels to determine the exact height of the controls at the top and bottom margins of a frame. Once defined, the margins show up as white space in a browser's display; therefore, you can use these<br /> <br /> attributes to nicely separate the content in one frame from the content in another. Margins must be one or 4 objects for Dummies, 4th Edition more pixels wide HTML to keep from touching the edges of a frame. The marginwidth and ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya marginheight attributes are optional. IfPitts you omit this attribute, the browser sets its own margin widths John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) (usually one or two pixels, depending on the browser). Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded frames, graphics, andtoanimation, stepTo define the margin height or with width, add the attributes the framethis elements: by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> <frameset cols="20%,*"> src="navigation.htm" frameborder="0" marginwidth="20" Table<frame of Contents HTML 4marginheight="20"> For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <frame src="content.htm" frameborder="0" marginwidth="20" marginheight="20"> Introduction </frameset> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Scrolling Chapter 2 - frames HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Creating Your First HTML Page One helpful- attribute, scrolling, enables you to turn a scroll bar on and off for any given frame. When added to the <frame> element, you must define a value of yes,no, or auto:<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter yes: 5 Forces - Linking theto browsers Online Resources to display a scroll bar for the frame. Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> no: Does not display a scroll bar for the frame. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> auto: Displays a scroll bar only if more content than fits in the window is displayed. This is the default value. - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter For our10 example, - HTMLwe Forms force the first frame to have a scroll bar, and require the browser to not display a scroll Part bar IV for-the Extending secondHTML page,with even Other if theTechnologies content runs over.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <frameset cols="20%,*"> Chapter 13 - src="navigation.htm" Making Multimedia Magic <frame frameborder="0" scrolling="yes"> Chapter <frame 14 - src="content.htm" Integrating a Database into frameborder="0" Your HTML scrolling="no"><br /> <br /> </frameset> Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Figure 16 9-10- illustrates theHTML features described in this example when rendered in a browser. Chapter Creating an Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 9-10: The browser window displays a scroll bar for the first frame, yet leaves it off for the second frame, even though the content is cut off.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 within for Dummies, 4th Edition Targeting Links a Frameset by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Targeting links within frameset is ©where frames John aWiley & Sons 2003 (408 pages)get tricky, and usability can be thrown out the window if you’re not careful. To illustrate the concept of links, consider the example in Figure 9-1 where we Whether your goal is to build atargeting simple, text-oriented Web site define a framesetordocument with two vertical frames: a skinny one on the left one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- that serves as a navigation book you on thethe right track. document, and aby-step wider one onwill theput right where bulk of the content your users see shows up. Say you want to create hyperlinks in the document that lives in the skinny frame on the left that, when Table of Contents clicked, cause new Web documents to load in the wide frame on the right. This is actually a common HTML 4 dilemma, For Dummies, 4th Edition frame because frames are often used to separate navigation from content. Introduction<br /> <br /> If you define theinbehavior correctly and click Part I - don’t Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> a hyperlink in the navigation frame, the contents will<br /> <br /> most likely display in your in place thethe twoWeb frames. You need to make sure you target Chapter 1 - The Least Youbrowser Need to window Know about HTMLofand the link2correctly soatthe linked document replaces only the right frame, not the entire browser window. Chapter - HTML Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Two steps are all you need to define how links behave in a frame structure:<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> 1. Name each frame in the frameset document. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources 2. Point the link at the named frame.<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Naming the frame<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables To name the frame in the frameset document, you add the name attribute to the <frame> element as - HTML Frames follows:<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> <frameset cols="20%,*"> - Getting Stylish with CSS <frame src="navigation.htm" frameborder="0" name="nav"> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <frame src="content.htm" frameborder="0" name="content"> Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic </frameset> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 name - HowofHTML Relates to be Other Markup Languages Tip The the frame can almost anything you can think of, but we think you should keep the Part V - From to WebIn Site names shortWeb and Page descriptive. our<br /> <br /> example, we named the frame that always contains the main content<br /> <br /> of our site, Real creative? Chapter 16 content. - Creating an HTML ToolboxMaybe not. But definitely more useful than calling it spaghetti. Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great Pointing the link toUser theInterface target frame<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter After you 19 name - Tenthe Ways frame, to Exterminate you can use Web theBugs <a> element with the target attribute to create a link that<br /> <br /> opens in named frame. TheDon’ts following example creates a link in the navigation.htm document that Chapter 20that - Ten HTML Do’s and opens Part VIIhistory.htm - Appendixes<br /> <br /> in the content.htm window:<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags <a href="history.htm" target="content" rel="nofollow">History</a> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> BecauseCa -target window name is already defined, the browser opens history.htm in the frame named Appendix Glossary content. Targeting works by giving you control over where the linked page (or other resource) appears Index whenSheet a user- clicks link Dummies, in your documents. Cheat HTML 4a For 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> Normally, when a user clicks a link, the browser displays the new document in the current, entire browser window (not just in a frame). Targeting enables you to change that: You can assign names to specific List of Listings frames — using the name attribute — and require certain documents to appear in the frame that bears the List of Sidebars targeted name. List of Tables<br /> <br /> Tip As with the name attribute, any valid frame name you specify in a target attribute must begin with an alphanumeric character. The target attribute introduces a few predefined exceptions (covered shortly) that begin with an underscore character. Remember, however, that any targeted frame name starting with an underscore or a non-alphanumeric character (provided the name has no special purpose) gets ignored.<br /> <br /> Using predefined values HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Other than naming a specific frame name, you can use four predefined values with the target attribute: Whether goal target is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site to load inside the frame that _self: Specifying theyour _self always causes the linked document or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepcontains the hyperlink. All links act this way by default. by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> _blank: Specifying the _blank target causes the linked document to load inside a new browser window, which is an easy way to force the user’s browser to launch another window. The _blank Table of Contents attribute can be useful if you want to link to someone else’s site. But, make sure that your site is HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition immediately available to users in the first browser window that never went away. Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I -Warning Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment Don’tinoveruse _blank targets.<br /> <br /> Visitors to your site won’t appreciate new browser windows<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - up Theall Least popping the You time.Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web _parent: Specifying target makes the linked document load in the immediate frameset Chapter 3 - Creating Your the First_parent HTML Page<br /> <br /> parent of the document. If the Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> current document in which the _parent target appears has no parent, this attribute behaves like the _self value. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources _top: Specifying the _top target makes the linked document load in the full body of the window. If<br /> <br /> Chapter - Finding and Using Imagesat the top of the document hierarchy, the _top target name behaves the6current document is already Chapter - TopYou Off can Youruse Page with Formatting like7_self. this attribute to escape from a deeply nested frame. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter Tip If 8you -get HTML carried Tables away using frames nested within frames nested within frames, or you link to<br /> <br /> someone framed site only to find their frames loading inside yours, you can use target="_top" Chapter 9 else’s - HTML Frames to cancel your frameset and revert back to a simple HTML page. Chapter 10 out - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Getting with CSS Zeroing- in onStylish targeted-link rules<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting Understanding targeted links may take a bit of wrestling. Keep a few things in mind while you grapple: Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> You must name the frames in the frameset document: For our example, we named our two - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages framesnav and content.<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16must - Creating HTML Toolbox You targetan your links defined in the HTML documents that populate the windows: For our Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence example, we want to target all the links in navigation.htm to point to the content window. Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Check links before Part VI - The all Part of Tens<br /> <br /> the site goes live to verify that links are targeted correctly: This is always a good practice, whether you’re using frames or not. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> If linking to a document outside of your site, you can use target="_blank" to force that document to open in a new, separate browser window: That circumvents some of the Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags unpredictability — always a good thing — of how the document will appear when it opens. Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Nesting Framesets by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Nesting frames introduces to (408 the pages) traditional frame structure, for example: John Wileya&new Sonstwist © 2003 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> <frameset> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. <frame> <frame> </frameset> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> In this example, we define one frameset that contains two frame documents. Remember, for every document included in the frameset, there must be a corresponding <frame> element.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter - Theinto Least You Need to Know about HTML the To split1a frame smaller frame components, you and have to Web nest a <frameset> element within the Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web original2frameset: Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML <frameset><br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <frameset> Chapter<frame> 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter<frame> 6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter </frameset> 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part<frame> III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> </frameset> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Our example uses two sets of <frameset> tags. The outermost set defines the primary structure, and the second set defines the structure for the left frame. A third set is not needed for the right frame because Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS it's only a single frame. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter - the Making Multimedia Magic We can13split navigation frame in the example we have been using throughout this chapter: Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages <frameset cols="250,*" frameborder="1" framespacing="0"> Part<frameset V - From Webrows="85%,*" Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> frameborder="1" framespacing="0"><br /> <br /> Chapter<frame 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox src="navigation.htm" frameborder="1" framespacing="0" Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence scrolling="yes"> Chapter<frame 18 - Creating a Great User Interface src="note.htm" frameborder="1" framespacing="0"> Part</frameset> VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 - src="content.htm" Ten Ways to Exterminate frameborder="1" Web Bugs <frame framespacing="0"> Chapter </frameset> 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> The second functions much like the first set. You can even use the same attributes. In this Appendix A - frameset HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> example, we split the first frame into two rows, and therefore, use the rows attribute. Keep in mind that adding a new frame here calls for three <frame> elements. Figure 9-11 shows the resulting new Appendix C - Glossary frameset. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Index<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 4 -9-11: Structuring The first Your frame, HTML split Documents into two smaller frames that contain navigational elements and a<br /> <br /> note Chapter 5 to -users. Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 10: 4HTML Forms by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Using forms in your Web pages Table of Contents<br /> <br /> forms 4th Edition HTML Creating 4 For Dummies, Introduction<br /> <br /> Working with form data<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need Designing easy-to-use formsto Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Most of3the -HTML youYour writeFirst helps youPage display content and information for your users. Sometimes, Chapter Creating HTML<br /> <br /> however, you want a Web Part II - Getting Started withpage HTMLto<br /> <br /> gather information from users instead of giving info to them. HTML form markup gives you a healthy collection of elements and attributes you can use to create forms for collecting Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents information from visitors to your site. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images This chapter takes a look at the many different uses for forms. It also shows you how to use form markup Chapter 7 just - Top Your Page Formatting to create the Off right form for with soliciting information from your users, reviews your options for working with Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level the data you receive, and gives you some tips for creating easy-to-use forms that really help your users Chapter HTML Tables provide8the -information you’re looking for. Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4for for Dummies, The Many Uses Forms 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Although you canJohn find Wiley literally millions of unique forms on the Web, every form is driven by the same set of & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) markup elements. Handily enough, they all fall into onetext-oriented of two broad categories: Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Search forms: These give users a way search criteria. by-step book will put you on to thesubmit right track.<br /> <br /> Data collection forms: These give your users a way to provide information for many uses such as Table of online Contents shopping, technical support, site preferences, and personalization. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Web forms can be short or long, simple or complex, and they have myriad uses on the Web. Here are just a few examples of how forms are used: Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -an The Leastsearch: You Need to Know and the Web Doing online When youabout use aHTML search engine to search a site or the entire Web, you enter Chapter 2 search - HTML at Work the Web your criteria in aonform. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Logging to a site view Part II - Gettingon Started withtoHTML<br /> <br /> customized content: When you log on to a site, you enter your<br /> <br /> username and password in a form. This type of form is a data-collection form. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Shopping online: When you shop online or reserve travel online, you enter your selections and credit - Finding and Using Images card information in this type of data- collection form.<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Level Providing feedback toNext a site owner:<br /> <br /> When you send feedback to a Web site’s creator or ask for<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables technical support via a Web site, you use this data collection form to provide all the pertinent details. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Technical Chapter 10 -Stuff HTMLBefore Forms you create any form markup, you need to have a good idea of what kind of data youIV need to collect. Yourwith dataOther is what drives the Part - Extending HTML Technologies<br /> <br /> form elements you use — and the way you put them together on a page — so make sure you understand what data you need before you collect it. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Introducing - Makingsearch Multimediaforms Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML You’d be at theRelates many ways forms can help users search a site, or even the Web itself. For Chapter 15 amazed - How HTML to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> example, theWeb IRSPage hometopage Part V - From Web (shown Site<br /> <br /> in Figure 10-1) uses two different single-field forms to help visitors to its site search for general information or to search for tax forms. Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 10-1: The IRS home page uses two short search forms to help users find what they are looking for in minimum time. The Get Refund Status page, however, has a different function: You can use it to search IRS records for the status of your refund. This page is a little more complicated, as shown in Figure 10-2.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents Figure The search form is a little more complex. Chapter 5 -10-2: Linking torefund Online status Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> The difference between the simple search forms on the home page and the slightly longer refund search Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting form is the kind of data the IRS site needs from you to search the site. When you enter keywords into the Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level fields on the home page, you may get dozens of relevant responses, which is okay: You can pick and Chapter - HTML Tablesand find the one that relates to you. choose8from the options Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames This strategy won’t Forms work on the refund status page because refund information is sensitive and the IRS Chapter 10 - HTML<br /> <br /> doesn’t want you trolling through dozens of possible Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> responses to find your information; the engine that<br /> <br /> drives the for Stylish your refund status needs more detailed information to find the exact data you’re Chapter 11 search - Getting with CSS looking12 for.- HTML and Scripting Chapter Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Remember Because searches come in all shapes and sizes, so must the search forms that drive those - Integrating a Database into Your HTML searches. If you plan to add a search form to your Web site, you must carefully consider what kind of data Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages visitors will be searching and what information you’ll need from them to help them search successfully. A Part V - From Web Page to Web Site short keyword search may do the trick, or you may need something more complicated. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Introducing data collection forms Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Data collection is a general category that describes every form on the Web that doesn’t help someone - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs search for something. For example, the Library of Congress (LOC) uses a form to collect the information it Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and needs to subscribe teachers to aDon’ts free electronic newsletter, as shown in Figure 10-3. Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 4 -10-3: Structuring A subscription Your HTML form Documents collects information to help teachers subscribe to an online<br /> <br /> newsletter. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> The LOC doesn’t need much information to set up the subscription, so the form is short and simple. By Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting contrast, RateGenius (a car-loan and refinancing organization) uses a series of long and detailed forms to Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level gather the information it needs to help customers get the best possible loan rate. The form shown in Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Figure 10-4 is just the first of several a visitor must fill out to provide all the necessary information. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Figure An online car loan site uses many long and detailed forms to collect necessary data. Appendix C -10-4: Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Tip When you create a form that collects information from visitors to your site, the information you need to acquire drives the final structure of the form and its complexities. If you need a lot of information, your List of Figures form may be long and you may even use several forms. If you need just a little information, the form may List of Tables be short and (relatively) sweet. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Creating Forms by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The HTML form markup elements and attributes John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)fall into one of two categories: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Elements that the overall form structure the Webthis browser ordefine one loaded with frames, graphics,and and let animation, step- know how to handle the form data. by-step book will put you on the right track. Elements that create input objects: fields, check boxes, drop-down lists, and the like. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Although form 4th hasEdition the same basic structure, the input elements you use differ depending on the data HTML 4 Forevery Dummies, you’re trying to collect.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Basic form - The Least structure You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> All of the input elements associated with a single form are contained with a <form> element and are all - Creating Your First HTML Page processed by the samewith formHTML handler. A form handler is a program on the Web server (or even possibly a Part II - Getting Started simplemailto URL) that manages the data a user sends to you via the form. Chapter 3 Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter - Linking to programmed Online Resources A Web 5browser is only to gather information via forms; it doesn’t know what to do with the Chapter 6 Finding and Images information once it has it.Using You have to provide some other mechanism to actually do something useful with the Chapter 7 collect. - Top A Offlater Yoursection Page with Formatting data you in this chapter (“What Do You Want to Do with Your Form Data”) discusses Part III - Takingin HTML the Next Level form handlers moretodetail.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables The two9 key- attributes you must always use with the <form> element are Chapter HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> action: Uses a URL to specify the location of the form handler.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish method: Specifies howwith you CSS want the form data to be sent to the form handler. The two possible values for Chapter - HTML and Scripting this12attribute are get and post. If you specify get, the form data is sent to the form handler on the URL. Chapter If you 13 specify - Making post, Multimedia the form Magic data is sent in the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) header. Your specific Chapter form 14 handler - Integrating dictates a Database which value intotoYour use.HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> a good theSite difference, Part VFor - From Weboverview Page to of Web<br /> <br /> read the Good Forms article on the Webmonkey site at<br /> <br /> http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/99/30/index4a_page3.html Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> The markup in Listing 10-1 creates a form processed by a form handler (on the Web server named Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface guestbook.cgi) and sent to the handler via the post method. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter - Ten Ways toForm Exterminate Web by Bugs Listing19 10-1: A Simple Processed a Form Handler Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd"><br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> <html> <head> Index <title>Forms</title> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition </head> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables <body> List of Listings <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" method="post"> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> <!-- form input elements go here --> </form> </html><br /> <br /> Remember The value of the action attribute is a URL, so you can use absolute or relative URLs to point to for Dummies, 4th Edition a form handler onHTML your 4site. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Using inputWhether elements your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> The elements you use tobook solicit input your visitors by-step will put from you on thesite right track. make up the bulk of any form. HTML supports a variety of different input options — from text fields to radio buttons to images. There are three HTML elements that you use to create input controls: Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Uses 4th the Edition type attribute to define several different controls, including text and password fields, HTML <input>: 4 For Dummies, check boxes, radio buttons, submit and reset buttons, hidden fields, and images. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> <select> and <option>: Used together to create drop-down lists.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web text-input field. <textarea>: Creates a multiline Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Every control, regardless of Part II -input Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> the type, associates some value with a name. When you create the control, you give it a name and the control back a value based on what the user does in the form. For example, Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTMLsends Documents if you create a text field that collects someone’s first name, you might name the field firstname. When the Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources user types his or her first name in the field and submits the form, the value associated with firstname is Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images whatever name the user typed in the field. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Remember For input elements that require a user to select an option (such as a check box or radio button),<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 -typing HTMLsomething Tables rather than into a field, you define both the name and the value. When the user selects a box Chapter 9 HTML or a button and hitsFrames the submit button, the form returns the name and value assigned to the element. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> TipIVThe whole point of with a form is toTechnologies gather values Part - Extending HTML Other<br /> <br /> associated with input controls, so the way you set the name<br /> <br /> and value each control important. The following sections explain how you should work with names and Chapter 11 for - Getting Stylish iswith CSS values 12 for each of the controls. Chapter - HTML andvarious Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Text fields - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 are - How HTML Relates Other Markup Languages Text fields single-line fields to that users can type information into. You define a text field using the <input> Part V - From Page to Web Site element andWeb the type attribute with<br /> <br /> a value of text. You use the name attribute to give the input field a<br /> <br /> Chapter Creating an HTMLthe Toolbox name, 16 and -the user supplies value when he or she types in the field. This markup creates two text input Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online fields: one for a first name and one Presence for a last name: Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> <p>First Name: <input type="text" name="firstname"></p> Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs <p>Last Name: <input type="text" name="lastname"></p> Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts </form> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix Tricks of A the - HTML Trade 4 Tags Notice that in addition to the input elements, the form includes paragraph (<p>) Appendix elements B and - HTML someCharacter text to label Codes each of the fields. By themselves, most form elements won’t give the user<br /> <br /> many clues what kind of information you want him or her to provide. You also have to use HTML block Appendix C -about Glossary and inline elements to format the display of your form. Figure 10-5 shows how a browser displays this HTML. Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 10-5: Text entry fields in a form.<br /> <br /> Notice that the browser makes both text fields the same length. You can control both the length of the text HTMLof 4 characters for Dummies, 4th Edition fields and the number the user can type into the field by using the size and maxlength by Ed Tittel and Natanya attributes. The following markup creates Pitts a modified version of ISBN:0764519956 the form that sets both fields to a size of 30 and John to Wiley sets the maxlength 25. & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<p>First Name: <input type="text" name="firstname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> by-step book will put you on the right track. <p>Last Name: <input type="text" name="lastname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> </form> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Each4field will be approximately HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition 30 characters wide; even so, a user can only type 25 characters into each field, as shown in Figure 10-6. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> HTML Tables Figure -10-6: You can specify the length and the maximum number of characters for a text field.<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Password fields<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> A password just like a text field, except that when a user types into the field, the text the user Chapter 12 - field HTMLbehaves and Scripting types is obscured by an asterisk, bullet, or other character so someone looking over his or her shoulder can’t Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic see what is being typed. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 -a How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages You create password field using the <input> element with a type attribute set to password, as follows: Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> - Creating an HTML Toolbox <p>First Name: <input type="text" name="firstname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence <p>Last Name: <input type="text" name="lastname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> Chapter 18 - Creating a Greattype="password" User Interface <p>Password: <input name="psswd" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> Part VI The Part of Tens </form> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 20 10-7- shows Ten HTML howDo’s a browser and Don’ts replaces what you type with asterisks. Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 10-7: Password fields are like text fields except that the browser masks the text a user enters.<br /> <br /> Check boxes and radio buttons You can use check boxes and radio buttons to give users a collection of possible options they can choose from. When you use check boxes, users can choose more than one option from a collection, but when you<br /> <br /> use radio buttons they can only choose one option.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 To create radio buttons by Ed Tittel and and check Natanya boxes,Pitts you use the <input> element with the type set to radio or checkbox. Because John users Wiley & are Sons simply © 2003 selecting (408 pages) an option rather than typing text into a field, you use the name attribute to give each option a name the value attribute to specify Whether your goal isand to build a simple, text-oriented Webwhat site value is returned if the user or option. one loaded graphics, and animation, step- that an option should be already selects a particular Youwith can frames, also use the checked attribute this to specify by-step book will putthe youform. on the right selected when the browser displays This is atrack. good way to specify a default selection in a list. Here’s some markup that shows how to format check box and radio button options:<br /> <br /> <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> Table of Contents <p>What are some your favorite foods?</p> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thof Edition <p><input type="checkbox" name="food" value="pizza" checked>Pizza<br> Introduction name="food" Part I<input - Meetingtype="checkbox" HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> value="ice cream">Ice Cream<br><br /> <br /> <input type="checkbox" name="food" Eggs and Ham<br> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML value="eggsham">Green and the Web </p> 2 Chapter<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <p>What is your gender?</p> <p><input type="radio" name="gender" value="male">Male<br> Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <input type="radio" name="gender" value="female" checked>Female Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources </p> Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images </form> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III -that Taking tooptions the Next Level Notice eachHTML set of uses the<br /> <br /> same name for each input control but gives a different value to each<br /> <br /> Chapter HTML Tables option. 8You-give each item in a set of options the same name to let the browser know they are part of a set. Chapter HTML Frames Figure 910-8- shows how a browser displays this markup. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Figure CheckDo’s boxes radio buttons. Chapter 20 -10-8: Ten HTML andand Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Hidden fields<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix - Glossary AhiddenCfield gives you a way to collect name and value information that the user can’t see along with the rest Index of the form data. Hidden fields are useful if you want to keep track of information associated with the form<br /> <br /> (suchSheet as its-version name). Cheat HTML 4or For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> If your ISP provides a generic application for a guest book or feedback form, you may have to supply your name and e-mail address in the form’s hidden fields so the application sends your form data specifically to List of Listings you. To create a hidden field, you use the <input> element with its type attribute set to hidden, and then List of Sidebars supply the name and value pair you want to send to the form handler. Here’s an example: List of Tables<br /> <br /> <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> <input type="hidden" name="e-mail" value="me@mysite.com"> <p>First Name: <input type="text" name="firstname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> <p>Last Name: <input type="text" name="lastname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> <p>Password: <input type="password" name="psswd" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> </form><br /> <br /> File upload fields HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 Ed Tittel and users Natanya Pittsto share documents You can also useby a form to give a way and other files with you. When the user John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) submits the form, the browser grabs a copy of the file and sends it with the other form data. To create this file your goal is to buildwith a simple, text-oriented upload field, you Whether use the <input> element the type attribute Web set tosite file. The file itself is the form field or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepvalue; you use the name attribute to give the control a name.<br /> <br /> by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> <p>Please submit your resume in Microsoft Word or plain text format:</br> Table <input of Contents type="file" name="resume"> HTML </p>4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction </form> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Browsers a file upload field with aabout browse button can use to surf their local hard drive and select Chapter 1 render - The Least You Need to Know HTML andusers the Web a file to2send to you, shown in Figure Chapter - HTML atas Work on the Web 10-9. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending with Other Figure 10-9: AHTML file upload field.Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Warning files from users via a form, you open yourself up to receiving extremely large Chapter 12 -When HTMLyou andaccept Scripting files or files that might be infected by viruses. You should consult with whoever is programming your form Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic handler to discuss options for protecting the system files are saved to. You can put several barriers in place Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML that can help minimize your risks, including virus scanning software, restrictions on file size, and restrictions on Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages file type. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox Drop-down lists<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 of- radio Creating a Great User Interface Long lists buttons or check boxes can take up a lot of screen real estate and make your page look Part VI - The Part of Tens cluttered. Drop-down lists<br /> <br /> give you an alternative method for giving users lots of options to choose from. You<br /> <br /> Chapter use two19elements - Ten Ways to create to Exterminate a drop-down Weblist: Bugs <select> to hold the list and a collection of <option><br /> <br /> elements theDo’s list options. You use a name attribute with the <select> element to give the entire list Chapter 20 to- identify Ten HTML and Don’ts a name, and the value Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> attribute with each <option> element to assign a unique value for each. Here’s an<br /> <br /> example: Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix - HTML Character Codes <form Baction="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> Appendix C is - Glossary <p>What your favorite food?</p> Index <select name="food"><br /> <br /> <option value="pizza">Pizza</option> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <option List of Figures value="ice cream">Ice Cream</option> <option List of Tables value="eggsham">Green Eggs and Ham</option> </select> List of Listings </form> List of Sidebars The browser turns this markup into a drop-down list with three items, as shown in Figure 10-10.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML Figure 4 For Dummies, Edition list. 10-10: A 4th drop-down Introduction<br /> <br /> TipI -As with radio buttons, the default allows a Part Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> user to choose only one option from your list. If you want your<br /> <br /> user to1choose (usually holding down the Alt or Cmd key while clicking options in the Chapter - Themore Leastthan You one Needoption to Know aboutby HTML and the Web list), add the- multiple attribute to the <select> element. HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page Also, by default, the browser displays only one option until the user clicks the drop-down menu’s arrow to size attribute with the <select> element to specify how many of the Chapter 4 options - Structuring Your HTMLare Documents available to show. If there more options than you specify, the browser includes a scroll bar in the Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources drop-down list. Part II - Getting with HTML display the restStarted of the list. Use the<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> You can one of thewith options in the drop-down list is already selected when the browser loads the Chapter 7 specify - Topthat Off Your Page Formatting page, just as you can specify a check box or radio button to be checked. Simply add the selected attribute Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level to the <option> element you want selected. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> This modification to the markup given earlier allows the user to choose more than one option from the list and - HTML Forms sets the number of options to display to two. Also, the third option in the list is selected by default.<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> - Getting Stylish with CSS <p>What are some of your favorite foods?</p> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <select name="food" size="2" multiple> Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic <option value="pizza">Pizza</option> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <option value="ice cream">Ice Cream</option> Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages <option value="eggsham" selected>Green Eggs and Ham</option> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site </select> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox </form> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 18 10-11 - Creating shows how a Great adding Userthese Interface attributes modifies the display of the list in a browser. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List ofFigure Tables 10-11: A drop-down list with modifications. List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Multiline text boxes Often, a single-line text field won’t provide your users with enough room to include large chunks of text in a form. If you want to create a text box instead of a text field, use the <textarea> element to define the box and its parameters. Use the rows and columns attributes to specify the height and width of the box. The text the user types into the box provides the value, so you need only give the box a name with the name attribute: <form action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"><br /> <br /> <textarea rows="10" columns="30" name="comments"> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th here. Edition Please include any comments ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts </textarea> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) </form> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loadedthe with frames, graphics, animation, this stepAny text you include between <textarea> and and </textarea> tags displays in the text box in the by-step book10-12. will put you on the right track. browser, as shown in Figure Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Figure 10-12: A text box. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 9 and - HTML Frames Submit reset buttons Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML Other Technologies Visitors need a way to letwith a browser know they are done with<br /> <br /> a form and are ready to send the contents. They<br /> <br /> Chapter also need 11 a- way Getting to clear Stylish thewith form CSS if they want to start all over again or decide not to fill it out after all. You use<br /> <br /> the<input> element a type of submit to create a button users can click on to submit the form to you. Chapter 12 - HTML andwith Scripting You use element Magic with a type of reset to create a button that clears the form. These buttons Chapter 13the- <input> Making Multimedia help the tell the browser what to doYour withHTML the form, but don’t actually send you any information. This Chapter 14user - Integrating a Database into means15 you -don’t set uptoname valueLanguages labels for them, but you do use the value attribute to specify Chapter How need HTMLto Relates Otherand Markup howVthe browser buttons Part - From Web labels Page tothe Web Site<br /> <br /> for display. Here’s an example:<br /> <br /> <form16action="cgi-bin/guestbook.cgi" action="post"> Chapter - Creating an HTML Toolbox <p>First <input type="text" name="firstname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> Chapter 17 - Name: Setting Up Your Online Presence <p>Last <input Chapter 18 Name: - Creating a Great type="text" User Interface name="lastname" size="30" maxlength="25"></p> <p>Password: Part VI - The Part of<input Tens<br /> <br /> type="password" name="psswd" size="30" maxlength="25"></p><br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs <p>What of your favorite foods?</p> Chapter 20 are - Ten some HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> <p><input type="checkbox" Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> name="food" value="pizza" checked>Pizza<br> <input type="checkbox" name="food" value="ice cream">Ice Cream<br> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags <input type="checkbox" name="food" value="eggsham">Green Eggs and Ham<br> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes </p> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> <p>What is your gender?</p> <p><input type="radio" name="gender" value="male">Male<br> List of<input Figures type="radio" name="gender" value="female" checked>Female List of Tables </p> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> List of Listings List of Sidebars type="submit" value="Send"> <input type="reset" value="Clear"></p> <p><input<br /> <br /> </form><br /> <br /> Figure 10-13 shows how a browser renders these buttons as part of an overall form.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 6 -10-13: Finding Submit and Using and Images reset buttons. Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> If you like HTML the submit reset buttons Part IIIdon’t - Taking to theand Next Level<br /> <br /> that a browser creates, you can substitute your own graphical buttons by using the <input> element with a type of image and an src attribute that specifies the image’s Chapter 8 - HTML Tables location. For an image that submits the form, set value to submit. For an image that clears the form, set Chapter 9 - HTML Frames value to reset. Also, use the alt attribute to provide alternative text for browsers that don’t show images (or Chapter 10 - HTML Forms for users who can’t see them). Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> <p><input type="image" src=" submit_button.gif alt="Submit"> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with value="submit" CSS <input type="image" value="reset" src="reset_button.gif" alt="Clear"></p> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition What Do You Want to Do with Your Form Data? by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Getting form dataJohn is really half©of2003 the(408 form battle. You create form elements to help users give you a Wileyonly & Sons pages) way to provide them with data, but then you need to dotext-oriented something with Whether your goal is to build a simple, Webthat sitedata. Of course, your form and your data will be unique every time, so there is no single, generic form handler or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- that can manage the data by-step book on the right track. for every form. Before you canwill findput (oryou write) a program that handles your form data, you have to know what you want to do with it. Table of Contents For example, if you have a form that gathers information from users to display in a guest book, you want to HTML 4 For Dummies, add the data to a text4th fileEdition or even a small database that holds the entries, and then create a Web page that Introduction displays the guest-book entries. If you want to create a shopping cart, you’ll need programs and a Part I - Meeting HTML in Its inventory, Natural Environment database that can handle customer-order<br /> <br /> information, shipping data, cost calculations, and<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 the - The Least YouifNeed to Know HTMLcomments and the Web more. On other hand, you just wantabout to receive from a Web form via e-mail, you may need only a simple mailto: URL. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> TipII Your WebStarted hostingwith provider Part - Getting HTML—<br /> <br /> whether it’s an internal IT group or an ISP to which you pay a monthly fee — has the final say in what kind of applications you can use on your Web site to handle form data. If Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents you plan to incorporate forms into your site, be sure that your hosting provider supports the applications Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources you need to run on the server in order to process form. Chapter 17 includes more information on finding Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images the right ISP to host your pages. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Using CGI scripts and other programs with form data - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Typically, most form data is processed in some way or another by a CGI script written in some - HTML Forms programming language. This can be Perl, Java, AppleScript, or one of many other languages that run on Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Web servers. These scripts take the data from your form and make it useful by putting it into a database, Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS creating customized HTML based on it, writing it to a flat file, or one of thousands of other things. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 is-much Making Magic Tip CGI tooMultimedia complicated a topic to cover completely in this book, so if you aren’t familiar with Chapter CGI scripts 14 -and Integrating how theya work, Database the “CGI into Your Scripts HTML for Fun and Profit” article on Webmonkey provides an<br /> <br /> excellent Chapter 15 overview: - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/99/26/index4a.html Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 Part also of discusses Part VI - The Tens<br /> <br /> CGI as it relates to creating dynamic Web sites that are integrated with databases. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> But don’t think that just because you need a program to get the most from your form data that you don’t have to become a programmer to make the most of forms. Many ISPs include support for (and access to) Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags standard scripts for processing commonly used forms such as guest books, comment forms, and even Appendix - HTML Character shoppingB carts. Your ISP mayCodes give you all the information you need to get the program up and running, Appendix C - Glossary and will most likely give you some HTML to include in your pages. Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> Warning youDummies, can tweak4th theEdition markup that manages how the form displays in the canned HTML Cheat Sheet -Although HTML 4 For youofget from an ISP, be sure you don’t change the form itself — especially the form element names and List Figures values. The program on the Web server relies on these to make the entire process work. List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> You can find several large script repositories online that provide free scripts you can download and use along with your forms. Many of these also come with some generic HTML you can dress-up and tweak to fit your Web site. You simply drop the program that processes the form into the folder on your site that holds programs (usually called a cgi-bin), add the HTML to your page, and you’re good to go. Some choice places on the Web to find scripts you can download and put to work immediately are<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Matt’s Script archive:www.scriptarchive.com/ The CGI Resource Index: http://cgi.resourceindex.com/<br /> <br /> ScriptSearch:www.scriptsearch.com<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> by EdtoTittel and Natanya However, if you want use programs notPitts provided by your ISPISBN:0764519956 on your Web site, you’ll need complete Johncgi-bin Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) access to your site’s folder. Every ISP’s setup is a little different, so be sure to read your documentation toWhether find out your whether goal you is tohave buildsupport a simple, fortext-oriented CGI scripts Web — and sitewhat languages the ISP one loaded and this stepsupports. (Perl isor usually a safewith bet,frames, but it’s graphics, even safer to animation, make sure.) by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Sending data via e-mail Table of Contents<br /> <br /> You can to receive form data via e-mail instead of using a form to process it. You’ll just get a HTML 4 Foropt Dummies, 4thyour Edition collection of name and value pairs in a text file sent to your e-mail address, but that’s not necessarily a bad Introduction thing. can HTML include short contact form on your Part I - You Meeting in a Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Web site that asks people to send you feedback (a<br /> <br /> feature1that-always looks you canand simply in the action URL, the e-mail address Chapter The Least Youprofessional); Need to Knowthen about HTML the include, Web you want data sent to: on the Web Chapter 2 the - HTML at Work <form3 action="mailto:me@mysite.com" action="post"> Chapter - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Tricks4of the Trade Many Chapter - Structuring Yourspam HTMLcompanies Documents get e-mail addresses by trolling Web sites looking for<br /> <br /> mailto URLs. You might consider setting up a special e-mail account just to receive comments so the e- Linking to Online Resources mail address you use every day won’t have yet another way to get pulled onto spam mailing lists.<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 forThat Dummies, Edition Designing Forms Are4th Easy to Use by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Designinguseful forms is a different from designing easy-to-use forms. Your form may gather John Wiley & Sons ©undertaking 2003 (408 pages) the data that you Whether need, but if it’s hard for visitors to use,text-oriented they may abandon your goal is to build a simple, Web siteit before they’re done. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade Asbook you use the you markup elements you’ve met in this chapter, along with the other by-step will put on the right track. elements that drive page layout, keep the following guidelines in mind: Table of BeContents sure you provide textual cues for all your forms. Be clear about what information you’re<br /> <br /> for in a particular field and what format you need it in. If you want users to enter a date as HTML looking 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition mm/dd/yy, be sure you tell them that. If you’ve limited the number of characters a text field can take Introduction the HTML maxlength attribute), let users Part I(using - Meeting in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> know so they aren’t frustrated trying to enter more<br /> <br /> characters your Chapter 1 - Thethan Least Youform Needallows. to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Use field width and character limits to provide visual clues about the data you need. For - Creating Your First HTML Page example, if you want users to enter a phone number as xxx-xxx-xxxx, consider creating three text Part II - Getting Started with HTML fields: one for each segment of the phone number. Doing so helps users understand what kind of Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents information you want. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter Group 6 -like Finding fields and together. Using Images A logical grouping of fields makes filling out a form easier for users. If you<br /> <br /> ask7 for -someone’s first name, his or her birthday, and then his or her last name, it will be Chapter Top Off Your Page withthen Formatting confusing. name, Part III - Taking First HTMLname, to the last Next Level birthday Chapter 8<br /> <br /> flows more along the lines of the way people think.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Break long forms into easy-to-manage sections. Let’s face it; people don’t like to fill out forms, - HTML Frames even when they’re working on a computer. When you break long forms into shorter chunks, people Chapter 10 - HTML Forms are less intimidated and are more likely to complete the form. Most major online retailers (such as Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Amazon.com) use this method to help customers provide all the detail the company needs to Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS complete an order without making the buying process seem too arduous. Chapter 9<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 required - Making fields Multimedia Magic Mark clearly. If there are certain portions of your form that users must fill out before Chapter they 14can - Integrating submit it successfully, a Database into be sure Yourto HTML mark those fields clearly. You can make them bold, or a<br /> <br /> different color,HTML or put an asterisk beside them. It doesn’t really matter what you do as long as you do Chapter 15 - How Relates to Other Markup Languages toPage pointto out to users Part Vsomething - From Web Web Site Chapter 16<br /> <br /> how you’ve marked required fields.<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Let users know what information they need to complete the form. If users need to have any - Setting Up Your Online Presence information in their hands before they fill out your form, consider adding a form gateway page that Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface details everything users should have in front of them before they proceed on to the form. The Part VI - The Part of Tens RateGenius Apply For a Loan page, shown in Figure 10-14, uses this technique to lay out clearly for Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs visitors about to fill out a long form exactly what information to prepare before starting to fill out the Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts form. Chapter 17<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 Figure - Structuring 10-14: AYour formHTML gateway Documents page helps users prepare to fill out a long form. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Tip The series of forms RateGenius uses to gather information for car loans and loan refinancing are Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting excellent examples of long forms that collect a variety of different kinds of data using all the available form Part III Taking HTML to www.rategenius.com the Next Level markup elements. Visit to review its form techniques.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Part IV: Extending HTML with Other Technologies ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> In This Part: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11: Getting Stylish with CSS Table of Contents<br /> <br /> 12: HTML Scripting HTML Chapter 4 For Dummies, 4thand Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 13: Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Knowinto about HTML and the Web Chapter 14: Integrating a Database Your HTML Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 15: How Your HTML Relates Other Markup Language Chapter 3 - Creating First HTML to Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> - Linking In this part . .to. Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Building7 attractive, user-friendly Web pages often involves more than HTML markup. In this part, we cover Chapter - Top Off Your Page with Formatting some common and useful tools and techniques that help you extend and expand HTML’s capabilities Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level through various add-ons or add-ins. You get a look at Cascading Style Sheets — a markup language Chapter 8 - HTML Tables designed to let you define and manage how HTML documents look and behave simply and systematically. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames You also go behind the scenes of scripting languages such as JavaScript and VBScript to see how they Chapter 10 - HTML Forms can improve not only the way your Web pages interact with your visitors, but also how they can help Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies manage sophisticated display and navigation on your site. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12 review - HTML and Scripting Next, you the features of various multimedia players and add-ins that can bring sound, video, and Chapter 13 to - your Making Multimedia Magic animation Web pages. You get some hints on how to use such tools to best effect. After that, you Chapter Integrating Database into Your HTMLthat Web pages can create between HTML and explore14 the -complex anda interesting relationships Chapter 15 — - How Relates to Other Markup Languages databases and HTML the capabilities you can cultivate through judicious use of such technologies. Finally, you Part From preview Web Page get Va -sneak of to theWeb newSite extended<br /> <br /> markup languages that may someday replace HTML — how<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 and - Creating an might HTML find Toolbox they work, why you them interesting for potential use in your Web sites. Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 11: 4Getting Stylish withISBN:0764519956 CSS by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Understanding style sheets Table of Contents<br /> <br /> CSS4th Edition HTML Introducing 4 For Dummies, Introduction<br /> <br /> Creating style rules<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -style The Least YouWeb Need to Know about HTML and the Web Linking rules to pages Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Introducing CSS properties Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> The goal of style sheets is to prevent users’ whims — as well as misconfigured browsers — from mangling - Structuring Your HTML Documents the display of style-dependent Web documents. Style sheets allow authors to specify layout and design Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources elements, such as fonts, colors, and text indentation. Style sheets give you precise control over how Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images elements appear on a Web page. What’s even better is that you can create a single style sheet for an Chapter 7 -site ToptoOff Your Page withlayout Formatting entire Web ensure that the and display of your content is consistent from page to page. And Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level for the last bit of icing on the cake, Web style sheets are easy to build and even easier to integrate into Chapter 8 pages. - HTML Tables your Web Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames Remember As HTML has evolved and XHTML looms on the horizon for the future, the goal of the Chapter 10 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> markup powers that be is to eventually remove all Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> formatting markup (such as the <font> element) from<br /> <br /> HTML’s11collection ofStylish elements lieu of style sheets. Chapter - Getting withinCSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Generally, style sheets give you more flexibility than markup ever will, and the HTML element collection - Making Multimedia Magic won’t grow to include more display-oriented tags. When you want tight control over the display of your Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Web pages, style sheets are the way to go. Chapter 13 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part - From Web Page Websupported Site TipV Style sheets aren’ttowell<br /> <br /> in 3.0 and earlier browsers, and aren’t even 100 percent supported<br /> <br /> Chapter in even16 the -latest Creating browsers, an HTML so Toolbox you should carefully test your style sheets in a variety of browsers to be<br /> <br /> sure they mangle your page. Chapter 17 don’t - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4the for Dummies, 4th Edition Understanding Problems Style Sheets Solve by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> HTML was neverJohn designed be a © formatting language, and as a result, its formatting capabilities are Wiley to & Sons 2003 (408 pages) limited, to say theWhether least. When you try to design a pagetext-oriented layout in HTML, limited to tables, font your goal is to build a simple, Web you’re site controls, and a few other inline styles such as bold and italics. Style sheets give you the tools you need to or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you the sheets right track. take your Web page to the next level. Withonstyle you can Carefully control every aspect of the display of your page: Specify the amount of space between Table of Contents lines, character spacing, page margins, image placement, and more. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Apply changes globally: You can guarantee consistent design across an entire Web site by applying Introduction same style every Environment Web page. Part Ithe - Meeting HTMLsheet in Itsto Natural Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Tip Quickly and easily modify the look and feel of your entire site by changing a single document Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web (the style sheet) instead of the markup on every page. Part II - Getting Started with HTML Instruct browsers to control<br /> <br /> appearance: Provide Web browsers with more information about how<br /> <br /> Chapter - Structuring HTML Documents you4 want your pagesYour to appear than you can communicate with HTML. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Create pages: JavaScript or another scripting language along with style sheets to Chapter 6 -dynamic Finding and UsingUse Images create text and content that moves, displays, and hides in response to user actions. Chapter 7 - Top Offother Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4ththe Edition Using StyleHTML Sheets to Drive Display of Your HTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The gist of how style the Web this: You define rules in a style sheet that specify how you want Johnworks Wiley on & Sons © 2003is(408 pages) content describedWhether by a particular set of markup to display. For example, you could specify that every firstyour goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site level heading be or displayed in purple, Garamond, 24-point type with a yellow one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-background (not that you by-step book putrules you on right track. would, but you could). You linkwill style to the markup, and the browser does the rest. CSS (for Cascading Style Sheets) is the official name for the HTML style-sheet tool, now in its second Table of Contents version (CSS2). CSS1 was a good, solid shot at building a style-sheet mechanism for the Web. But it was HTML For Dummies, 4th the Edition only 4a preliminary shot; improvements built into CSS2 make CSS more robust. Currently, however, Introduction most Web browsers actually offer better support for the first version of CSS (CSS1), which defines some Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment must-have Web features:<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Specifying fontattype, size, color, and effects Chapter 2 - HTML Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Setting background colors and images<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Controlling many aspects of text layout, including alignment and spacing Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Setting and Using borders Chapter 6 -margins Finding and Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Controlling list display<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML CSS2 improves theTables implementation of many CSS1 components and expands on CSS1 with some new Chapter 9 - HTML Frames definitions: Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Defining auralHTML style with sheets for text-to-speech Part IV - Extending Other Technologies Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> browsers<br /> <br /> Defining table layout and display<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 - Making Multimediacontent Magic for counters, footers, and other standard page elements Automatically generating Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Controlling cursor Chapter 15 - How HTMLdisplay Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> The next generation of CSS — CSS3 — is a collection of modules that address different aspects of Web- Creating an HTML Toolbox page formatting (such as fonts, background colors, lists, text colors, and so on). The first of these modules Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence should become standards (officially called Candidate Recommendations) in late 2002, with additional Chapter 18becoming - Creating a Great User Interface modules final in 2003. Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> The W3C devoted anExterminate entire section of Bugs its Web site to this topic at www.w3.org/style/css. You can Chapter 19 has - Ten Ways to Web find general information there, as well as keep up with the status of CSS3. The site links to a number Chapter 20 - CSS Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts of good references Part VII - CSS Appendixes<br /> <br /> and tutorials, and includes information on software packages that can make your<br /> <br /> style sheet easier. Appendix A -endeavors HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML Do 4 forwith Dummies, 4th Edition What You Can CSS by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> You have a healthy collection of properties topages) work with as you write your style rules. You can control just John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 about every aspect of a page’s display — from borderstext-oriented to font sizesWeb and site everything in between. The Whether your goal is to build a simple, properties fall intoorseveral categories: one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Background properties: These control the background colors associated with blocks of text and with images. You can also use these properties to attach background colors to your page or to individual Table of Contents elements. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Border properties: These control borders associated with the page, lists, tables, images, and block Introduction paragraphs). You can specify border Part Ielements - Meeting (such HTML as in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> width, color, style, distance from the<br /> <br /> element’s content, andNeed so on. Chapter 1 - The Least You to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Classification properties: These control how elements such as images flow on the page relative to - Creating Your First HTML Page other elements. You can use these properties to integrate images and tables with the text on your Part II - Getting Started with HTML page. Chapter 3 Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 properties: - Linking to These Online control Resources Font all aspects of the font(s) you use — including font size, family, and height. properties you more control over your text with style sheets than the font element Chapter 6 -These Finding and Usinggive Images<br /> <br /> ever Chapter 7 will. - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> List properties: These control the way lists appear on your page. You can manage list markers, use - HTML Tables images in lieu of bullets, and so on.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 - properties: HTML Forms These control the margins of the page, block elements, tables, and images. Margin Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies These properties extend the ultimate control<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> over the white space on your page.<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Padding properties: These control the amount of white space around any block element on the Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting page. used with margin and border properties, you can create some complex layouts. Chapter 13 When - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Positioning properties: These control where elements sit on the page. These properties give you the - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages ability to specifically place elements on the page much as you would in a page layout tool.<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 properties: - Creating an HTMLcontrol Toolbox Size These how much space (in height and width) that your elements (both text Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence and images) take up on your page. They’re especially handy for limiting the size of text boxes and Chapter images. 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Table These control Web the layout Chapter 19 properties: - Ten Ways to Exterminate Bugs of tables. You can use them to control cell spacing and other table-layout specifics. - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Text properties: These control how text displays on the page. You can set text color, letter and line<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tagswhite space, and so on. spacing, alignment, Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> On the CWeb A complete description of CSS properties is beyond the scope of this book, but if you’d like Appendix - Glossary to see more about how each property works, there are entire books and Web sites devoted to the fine Index details of using each andDummies, every property in these various categories. If you’d like a print reference, we Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For 4th Edition suggest Cascading Style Sheets For Dummies by Damon A. Dean and published by Wiley Publishing. If List of Figures you’d like a Webified reference, we suggest you visit DevGuru’s CSS2 reference at List of Tables www.devguru.com/Technologies/css/quickref/css_index.html .<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars Although CSS syntax is straightforward, combining CSS styles with markup to fine-tune your Remember<br /> <br /> page layout can be a little complicated. Fortunately, all you really need do to become a CSS guru is to learn the details of how the different properties work — and then experiment to see how different browsers handle them. As with HTML, practice will give you insight into the right way to use CSS to help convey your message on the Web.<br /> <br /> 4 forCSS Dummies, 4th Edition IntroducingHTML Basic Syntax by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> A style sheet is made of style rules; each style rule has two distinct parts: John up Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Selector: Specifies the markup element to whichand you want the this stylesteprules to apply. or one loaded with frames, graphics, animation, by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Declaration: Specifies how you want the content described by the markup to look. You of useContents a particular set of punctuation and special characters to define a style rule. The syntax for a style Table rule always follows this HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thpattern: Edition selector {declaration} Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> A declaration breaks down further into a property and a value. Properties are different aspects of how the - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web computer is to display text and graphics (for example, font size or background color). You combine a value Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web with a property to specify exactly how you want text and images to look on your page (for example, a 24Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page point font size or a yellow background). You separate the property from the value in a declaration with a Part II - Getting Started with HTML colon, like this: Chapter 1<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> selector - {property: value} Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images For example, these three style rules set the colors for first-, second-, and third-level headings respectively:<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> h1 {color: teal} h2 {color: maroon} Chapter 8 - HTML Tables h3 {color: black}<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 specification - HTML Forms The CSS lists exactly which properties you can work with in your style rules and the different Part IV -that Extending HTML with Other Technologies values they take. Most are pretty self-explanatory (color<br /> <br /> and border, for example). See "What You<br /> <br /> Chapter Gettingearlier Stylishinwith Can Do11with- CSS" this CSS chapter for a quick rundown of what properties the CSS2 specification Chapter 12and - HTML and Scripting includes what values they can take. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic Style sheets a browser’s internal display Chapter 14 - override Integrating a Database into Your HTMLrules; thus your formatting specifications affect the final<br /> <br /> display of the page in the user’s browser. This means you can better control how your content looks, and - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages create a more consistent and appropriate experience for visitors to your site. For example, the following Part V - From Web Page to Web Site style rules specify the font sizes for first-, second-, and third-level headings: Chapter 15 Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> h1 {font-size: 16pt} Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence h2 {font-size: Chapter 18 - Creating14pt} a Great User Interface h3 VI {font-size: 12pt} Part - The Part of Tens Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Figure 11-1- shows a simple HTML page with all three heading levels without the style sheet applied. The browser uses its default settings to display the headings in different font sizes.<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 11-1: An HTML page without style specifications. Figure 11-2, however, shows the Web page with a style sheet applied. Notice that the headings are significantly smaller than in the previous figure. That’s because the style-sheet rules override the browser’s<br /> <br /> settings.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Figure page Chapter 2 -11-2: HTMLAn at HTML Work on the with Webstyle specifications in effect. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Warning Users can change their Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> preferences so their browsers ignore your style sheets. Most users don’t do so, but some will. It’s always a good idea to test your Web page with style sheets turned off to be Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents sure it still looks good (or acceptable, anyway) to those without the benefit of style.<br /> <br /> Combining selectors and declarations Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chances are you’ll want a style rule to affect the display of more than one property for any given selector. - HTML Tables You could create several style rules for a single selector, each with one declaration, like this:<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> h1 {color: teal} Chapter 10 - HTML Forms h1 IV {font-family: Part - Extending HTML Arial} with Other Technologies h1 {font-size: 36pt}with CSS Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> After a while, however, such a large collection of style rules becomes difficult to manage. CSS enables - Making Multimedia Magic you to combine several declarations in a single style rule that affects the display characteristics of a single Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML selector, like this: Chapter 13 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> h1 {color: teal; font-family: Arial; Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox font-size: 36pt;} Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter a Great User Notice 18 that -allCreating the declarations for Interface the h1 selector are contained within the same set of brackets ({}) and Part VI - Theby Part of Tens separated a semicolon<br /> <br /> (;). You can put as many declarations as you want in a style rule; just be sure to<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 declaration - Ten Wayswith to Exterminate Web Bugs end each a semicolon. Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Tricks the Trade Part VII -of Appendixes<br /> <br /> From a purely technical standpoint, white space is irrelevant in style sheets (just as it is in HTML), but you should Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags consider some consistent spacing scheme so you can easily read and edit your style sheets. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C -the Glossary If you want same set of declarations to apply to a collection of selectors, you can do that, too: Just Index separate the selectors with commas. The following style rule (for example) applies the declarations for text Cheat - HTMLand 4 For Dummies, 4thh1, Edition color,Sheet font family, font size to the h2, and h3 selectors: List of Figures<br /> <br /> h1, h2, h3 {color: teal; font-family: Arial; List of Listings font-size: 36pt;} List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Remember As you can see from the sample style rules included in this section, style sheet syntax relies heavily on punctuation. When you have a style rule that doesn’t seem to be working exactly as you anticipated, double-check your syntax to be sure you haven’t inadvertently used a semicolon where you should have used a colon, or a parenthesis where you needed a bracket. The W3C’s validation service at http://jigsaw.w3.org/css-validator/ can also help you zero in on any problems with your style sheets.<br /> <br /> Working with style classes4th Edition HTML 4 for Dummies, by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Sometimes you may want to create style rules that apply only to particular instances of an HTML markup John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) element. For example, if you want to create a style rule that applies only to paragraphs that hold copyright Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site information, you need a way to let the browser know that the rule has a limited scope. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> To target a style rule more carefully, you can use the class attribute with a markup element. This bit of HTML has two kinds of paragraphs: a regular paragraph (without a class attribute) and a class attribute with of theContents value of copyright: Table HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting in Its Natural Environment <p>This is HTML a regular paragraph.</p><br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and Web copyright.</p> <p class="copyright">This is paragraph of the class Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> To create rule Your that only to the copyright paragraph, add a period (.) and the value of the Chapter 3 a-style Creating First applies HTML Page class after Part II attribute - Getting(copyright) Started with HTML<br /> <br /> the paragraph selector in the style rule. The resulting rule looks like this:<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images p.copyright {font-family: Arial; Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting font-size: 10pt;<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the white; Next Level color:<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTMLbackground: Tables black;} - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> This style specifies that all paragraphs of class copyright display white text on a black background Chapter 10 rule - HTML Forms in 10-point Arial font. Figure how a browser Part IV - Extending HTML with11-3 Othershows Technologies<br /> <br /> applies the style rule only to a paragraph that has<br /> <br /> the proper attribute defined. Chapter 11 class - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Figure 11-3: Use classes to target your style rules more precisely.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML Character You canBalso create style-ruleCodes classes that aren’t associated with any element, as in the following Appendix C - Glossary example: Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> .warning {font-family: Arial; font-size: 14pt; List of Listings background: white; List of Sidebars color: white;} List of Tables<br /> <br /> You can use this style class with any element by adding class="warning" to the element. Figure 11-4 shows how a browser applies the warning style to both the paragraph and heading, but not to the block quote in this HTML:<br /> <br /> <p class="warning">This is a paragraph of class warning.</p> HTML 4 4th Edition <blockquote>This isforaDummies, block quote without a defined class.</blockquote> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts <p class="warning">This is a paragraph of class warning.</p> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Figure YouYour can create stylePage rules that work with any element by using classes. Chapter 3 -11-4: Creating First HTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4How for Dummies, Edition Understanding Styles4th Are Inherited by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> One of the fundamental concepts (and markup in general) is nesting tags. Your entire HTML John Wiley & Sonsin © HTML 2003 (408 pages) document is nested within <html> and </html> tags,text-oriented and everything browser displays in a window is Whether your goal is to build a simple, Webasite nested within <body> and <body> tags. (And that’s just the beginning, really.) The CSS specification or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book nest will put on the inside right track. recognizes that you will often oneyou element another and want to be sure the styles associated with the parent element find their way to the child element. Table of you Contents When assign a style to an element, all the elements nested inside it have that style applied to them as HTML Forexample, Dummies,a 4th well. 4For styleEdition rule for the body element that sets the page background, text color, font size, Introduction font family, and margins looks like this: Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> body {background: black; - Creating Your First HTML Page color: white; Part II - Getting Started with HTML font-size: 14pt; Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents font-family: Garamond; Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources margin-left: .75in; Chapter 6 margin-right: - Finding and Using Images .75in; Chapter 7 margin-top: - Top Off Your1in;} Page with Formatting Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Tip If 8you -want to Tables set style rules for the entire document, be sure to set them in the body element. Chapter HTML Changing font for the entire page (for example) is much easier to do that way; it beats changing every Chapter 9 the - HTML Frames single element oneForms at a time. Chapter 10 - HTML Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS Tip<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Paying attention to inheritance<br /> <br /> As you begin to build complex style sheets that guide the display of every aspect of a page, you must - Making Multimedia Magic keep inheritance in mind. For instance, if you set the margins for the page in a body style rule, the Chapter 14 Integrating a Database Your HTML margins- you set for every other into element on the page will build off of the ones you set for the body. As Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup long as you pay close attention to how your Languages style rules work together, you can use inheritance to your Part Vadvantage - From Web to Web Site to Page minimize style rule repetition and create a cohesive display for your page. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox This covers basicOnline CSS Presence syntax, but if you want to fine-tune your style rules with some advanced Chapter 17chapter - Setting Up Your<br /> <br /> techniques, you can get aUser complete overview of CSS syntax rules in the “CSS Structure and Rules” Chapter 18 - Creating a Great Interface tutorial Part VI - The put Parttogether of Tens<br /> <br /> by the Web Design Group at www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/structure.html . Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Even though the style rule is set only for the body element, it applies to all elements in the following HTML Appendix B HTML Character (as shown in Figure 11-5): Codes Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> <body> <p>This paragraph inherits the page styles.</p> Cheat Sheet - does HTML 4this For Dummies, 4th Edition <h1>As heading</h1> List of Figures <ul> List of Tables <li>As do the items in this list</li> List of Listings <li>Item</li> List of Sidebars <li>Item</li> </ul> </body> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Figure 11-5: Inheritance means style rules apply to nested elements.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML for Dummies, 4th Edition Adding Style to4Your HTML Page by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> When you finish creating your style©rules, thepages) next step is to connect them to your HTML page. You have John Wiley & Sons 2003 (408 three options: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Build a style by-step sheet directly intoput a Web page called an internal style sheet — by using the <style> book will you on the — right track. element. Table of Link Contents a style sheet stored outside the Web page — called an external style sheet — by using the<br /> <br /> tag. HTML <link> 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Add style information directly to a tag by using the style attribute.<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Internal Chapter 2 - style HTML at sheets Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> An internal style sheet lives within your HTML page. You simply add style rules in a <style> element in the document’s header and you’re done. You can include as many (or as few) style rules as you want in Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents an internal style sheet. (See Listing 11-1.) Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter - Finding andan Using Images Listing611-1: Adding Internal Style Sheet to an HTML Document Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> <html> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> <head> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Style Sheet Example</title> Part<title>Internal IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies <style> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS body - {background: black; HTML and Scripting color: white; Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic font-size: 14pt; Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML font-family: Garamond; Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages margin-left: .75in; Part V - From Web Page to Web Site margin-right: .75in; Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox margin-top: 1in;} Chapter 12<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapterh1, 18 h2, - Creating a Great User Interface h3 {color: teal; Part VI - The Part of Tens font-family:<br /> <br /> Arial;<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Waysfont-size: to Exterminate 36pt;} Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes p.copyright<br /> <br /> {font-family: Arial;<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags font-size: 10pt; Appendix B - HTML Character font-color: Codes white;<br /> <br /> background: black;} warning {font-family: Arial; Index font-size: 14pt; Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition font-color: red;} List of Figures </style> List of Tables </head> List of Listings <body> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> <!-- Document content goes here --> </body> </html><br /> <br /> Tip The main benefit of an internal style sheet is convenience: Your style rules are right there in the page for Dummies, 4th Edition with your markupHTML so you4 can tweak both quickly. However, if you want to use the same style sheet to ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and one Natanya Pitts control the display of more than HTML page, make the styles easy to find: Move them out of the John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) individual Web page and into an external style sheet. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> External style sheets<br /> <br /> An external style sheet holds all your style rules in a separate text document that you can reference from Table of Contents any HTML file on your site. Although you have to maintain a separate style sheet file, the benefits an HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition external style sheet offers for overall site maintenance are significant. If you have 50 pages on your site Introduction and they all use the same style sheet, you can change colors, fonts, or any other formatting characteristic Part I - your Meeting HTML inaIts Natural Environment on all pages with quick change to the style<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> sheet.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> To reference an external style sheet, you use the link element in the Web page header — like this: - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 <html><br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 <head><br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter <title>External 6 - Finding and Using Style Images Sheet Example</title><br /> <br /> <link rel="stylesheet" href="styles.css"> Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page withtype="text/css" Formatting <head> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level <body> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames <!-- Document content goes here --> Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> </body> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS </html> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 attribute - Integrating Databaseelement into Your HTML Thehref in thea<link> can take an absolute or relative link. This means you can Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup choose to link to a style sheet that doesn’t even Languages reside on your site! Generally, however, it’s best not to do Part V -after Fromall, Web Site your so — youPage wanttotoWeb control<br /> <br /> site’s look and feel yourself. However, if you want to quickly add<br /> <br /> Chapter Creating an(or HTML Toolbox to see how browsers handle different styles), you might use an style to16 your- Web page experiment Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online absolute URL to point to one of the Presence W3C’s Core style sheets — predefined style sheets you can use by Chapter simply 18 linking - Creating to a URL. a Great ReadUser more Interface about them at www.w3.org/StyleSheets/Core/. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Tip When to atostyle sheet that resides Chapter 19 -you Tenlink Ways Exterminate Web Bugs on your own site, you create a relative link. When you link to one on else’s as the W3C’s core styles), you create an absolute link. Chapter 5 Chapter 20 someone - Ten HTML Do’ssite and(such Don’ts discusses the difference Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> between the two types of links.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Element-level style rules: Use them with caution<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Just so you know, you can attach individual style rules to individual elements in an HTML document. A Index style rule attached to an element looks like this:<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> List <pofstyle="color: Listings green">The paragraph is green.</p> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Adding style rules to an element is quick and dirty, but isn’t really the best approach. We generally recommend that you choose either internal or external style sheets for your rules instead of attaching the rules to individual elements in your document. Here are a few reasons why: Your style rules get mixed up in the page and are difficult to find. You have to place the entire rule in the value of the style attribute, which makes complex rules difficult to write and edit.<br /> <br /> You lose all the benefits come with HTML 4 for that Dummies, 4th grouping Edition selectors and reusing style rules in external style sheets. ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 12: 4HTML and ScriptingISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Looking behind the scenes with scripts Table of Contents<br /> <br /> scripts to4th your Web pages HTML Adding 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Understanding client-side and server-side scripts<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Dissecting three sample scripts Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web HTML is You use it toFirst describe your content and a browser displays that content on the Web. That’s Chapter 3 static. - Creating Your HTML Page<br /> <br /> it. HTML can’t help youwith create images Part II - Getting Started HTML<br /> <br /> that magically change when users move mouse pointers over them, cause additional browser windows to pop up when a page loads, or create any of the many other Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents interactive and dynamic effects you see at work regularly on the Web. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Finding and Using Images So, if HTML- can’t make this happen, what does? The answer is scripting. When used in conjunction with Chapter 7 -markup, Top Off Your Page with Formatting your HTML content scripts — small programs that you add to your Web page — can help your Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level Web pages respond to user actions. Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables Because areFrames programs, they’re written in a programming language and use programming Chapter 9 scripts - HTML<br /> <br /> techniques. yes, you have to know something about programming if you want to create scripts Chapter 10 -Therefore, HTML Forms from However, you can easily integrate Part IVscratch. - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> scripts that others have written into your HTML pages<br /> <br /> without11 knowing much about programming at all. This chapter focuses on laying out the least you need to Chapter - Getting Stylish with CSS know about toScripting integrate pre-written scripts into your Web pages. Chapter 12 - scripting HTML and Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Tip If you want to learn the ins and outs of creating scripts yourself, pick up JavaScript For Dummies, by - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Emily A. Vander Veer (Wiley Publishing). This book walks you through the least you need to know about Chapter 15 - How to Other Markup Languages creating scripts forHTML your Relates pages from scratch. Also, many good HTML editors (such as Macromedia Part V From Web Page to Web Site Dreamweaver and Adobe GoLive) have built-in toolsets to help you create scripts — even if you don’t Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox know anything about programming. This is the route that some developers choose because it’s the Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online easiest.Chapter 16 discusses HTMLPresence editors like these in more detail. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 forDo Dummies, 4th Edition What Scripts Can for Your HTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> In a nutshell, scripts help Johncan Wiley & you Sonstransform © 2003 (408 static pages) HTML that just sits on the page (an important but dull job) into dynamicWhether HTML that responds to user and makes visible or audible changes in the user’s your goal is to build a activities simple, text-oriented Web site experience. For example, if you visit Dummies.com (www.dummies.com) and click the red button next to or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will on the right track. the search box without entering a put termyou to search on, the browser displays a nice warning box that reminds you to enter a search term before you actually search, as shown in Figure 12-1. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 -12-1: HTML. .and Figure . a Scripting script makes a dialog box appear to tell you what you did wrong. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Scripts 14 add-programmatic functionality your Web pages and allow them to respond dynamically to what Chapter Integrating a Database intoto Your HTML users do —Relates for example, filling out Languages a form or moving their mouse pointers over an image Chapter 15on- the Howpage HTML to Other Markup (called a mouseover covered Part V - From Web Pageand to Web Site later).<br /> <br /> When you add scripts to your page, the page interacts with users<br /> <br /> and changes its display its behavior Chapter 16 - Creating an or HTML Toolbox in response to what users do. Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> A short script verifies whether you’ve entered a search term before the engine runs the query:<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part aofsearch Tens If you enter<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> term, you don’t see the warning.<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> If you search the script built into the page prompts the warning dialog box to Chapter 20 don’t - Tenenter HTMLa Do’s andterm, Don’ts appear. Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> This bit of scripting makes the page dynamic, which means it responds in different ways to how a user interacts with its elements. In effect, the script helps the page respond to what you do with the elements on Appendix C - Glossary the page. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Index<br /> <br /> Remember Notice4 that the page URL doesn’t change and another browser window doesn’t open when Cheat Sheet - HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition youoftry to search on nothing. The page responds to what you do without sending a request back to the List Figures Web server to request a new page. This is why the page is considered dynamic. List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> If you wanted to try this trick without using a script (that is, without the dynamic functionality), the browser would send the empty search string back to the Web browser. Then the server would return a separate warning page reminding the user to enter a search term. All the work would be done on the Web server instead of in the Web browser.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4What for Dummies, 4thScripts Edition Understanding Makes Tick by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Ascript is a set ofJohn programming instructions activate when an event that you define occurs. An event Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408that pages) is most often a user activity, such as moving a mouse over an image, Whether your goal is to build a simple, pointer text-oriented Web site clicking a link, or selecting a drop-down menu.or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> In your HTML, you specify that a particular script fires off when a particular event occurs on a particular element. For example, the event could be that a user rolls his or her mouse over an image on the page. Table of Contents Of course, you have to specify which element, which event, and which script. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Here’s exactly what happens when you activate an image rollover (a change in the image triggered when Introduction youImove the mouse over Environment it): Part - Meeting HTML inpointer Its Natural Chapter 1 - The Least You Know about the Webpage that includes some HTML for an 1. You’re browsing the Need Web to and arrive at aHTML reallyand cool Web Chapter image. 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> towith you,HTML attached Part II - Unbeknownst Getting Started<br /> <br /> to that image are instructions to call a script named rollover that activates both when you move your mouse over and also when you move your mouse off the Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents image. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6 -move Finding and Using over Images 2. You your mouse the image. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> browser for the Level rollover Part III -The Taking HTMLlooks to the Next<br /> <br /> script and executes the instructions in the script that specify do when Chapter what 8 - to HTML Tablesa mouse pointer moves over the image. Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> 3. Therollover script instructs the browser to replace the original image with a new image.<br /> <br /> Part 4. IV -The Extending HTML with Other browser downloads the Technologies new image and<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> displays it in place of the original image.<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> 5. You off the image. Chapter 12 -move HTMLyour and mouse Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> The browser looks back at the rollover script and executes the instructions in the script that - Integrating a Database into Your HTML specify what to do when you move your mouse off the image.<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part 6. V - From Web Page script to Web Site Therollover instructs<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> the browser to display the original graphic again.<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> 7. The the new image with the original image and you’re back to where you started. Chapter 17 -browser Setting replaces Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> In this example, the only time the browser has to contact the Web server is to get the new image. If you want images to be ready to show if a user event triggers a script, you can have your script instruct the Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs browser to preload and hold onto specific images referenced in the script. They are what the user sees Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts when he or she triggers an event. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Specifying event attributes<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Although you write the actual instructions for the script in a scripting language, you still use HTML attributes to specify what script to call for each specific element. The attributes correlate to common user Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition events (such as clicking or moving a mouse) and include the following: Index<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> List ofonload: Tables Browser loads an HTML page. List of Listings<br /> <br /> onabort: User cancels a page load.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> onunload:Browser stops displaying one Web page because it’s about to load another. onerror:Browser encounters an error in the scripts or other instructions on the page. onmousemove:User moves the mouse pointer anywhere on the page. onmouseover:User moves the cursor over an element.<br /> <br /> onmouseout:User moves the mouse pointer off of an element. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 onmousedown: by Ed User Tittel moves and Natanya the mouse Pittspointer over an element, presses the mouse button down, John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) and holds it down.<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> onmouseup:or User a held mouse button.and animation, this steponereleases loaded with frames, graphics, by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> onclick:User clicks an element with the mouse pointer. ondblclick: Table of Contents User double-clicks an element with the mouse. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> onkeypress:User presses and immediately releases a key on the keyboard.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part Ionkeydown: - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment User presses and holds a key<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> on the keyboard.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> onkeyup: Useratreleases depressed key. Chapter 2 - HTML Work onathe Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> onfocus:An element becomes the focus of the user’s attention, as a form field might when you begin to type in it.<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources onblur: An element loses focus because the user chooses to focus on a different element. Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> onchange: changes of a form element or selects a different check box, radio Chapter 7 - TopUser Off Your Page the withcontents Formatting button, or menu Part III - Taking HTML item. to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> onselect:User selects a check box, radio button, or menu item from a form.<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 - HTML Forms onsubmit: User clicks a form’s Submit button. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> onreset: User Stylish clicks awith form’s Chapter 11 - Getting CSSReset button. Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Tip Not every element supports every event attribute. For example, onsubmit and onreset work with - Making Multimedia Magic the<input> element in a form because you use that element to create submit and reset buttons. The Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML two attributes don’t work with the <p> element because you can’t submit or reset a form with a paragraph. Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Appendix A lists which event attributes work with which elements. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Including scripts inOnline your HTML page - Setting Up Your Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Linking a script to an HTML element that you plan for a user to interact with is simple. You place the script code in the <script> element in the document header. Then you attach the script name to an event Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs attribute in an HTML element. Listing 12-1, for example, specifies that when the user clicks the submit Chapter Ten HTML Do’s verify and Don’ts button, 20 the -browser should that the user filled out both fields in the form. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags the User Fills Out Both Form Fields Listing 12-1: Verifying Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> <html><br /> <br /> Appendix <head>C - Glossary Index <title>Linking scripts to HTML pages</title> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <script language="javascript"> List of Figures function checkSubmit ( thisForm ) { List of Tables if ( thisForm.FirstName.value == ‘’ ) { List of Listings alert(‘Please enter your First Name.’); List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> return false;<br /> <br /> } if ( thisForm.LastName.value == ‘’ ) { alert(‘Please enter your Last Name.’); return false; }<br /> <br /> return true; HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition } by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts </script> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) </head><br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> <body> <form method="POST" action="http://www.someURL.com/" onsubmit="return checkSubmit(this);"> Table<p> of Contents Name:4th <input HTML 4First For Dummies, Edition type="text" name="FirstName"><br> Last Name: <input type="text" name="LastName"><br> Introduction type="submit"> Part I -<input Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment </p> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web </form> Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web </body> Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page </html> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter Linking Resourcesattribute, return checkSubmit(this);, includes the name Notice 5that -the valuetoofOnline the onsubmit Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images element, checkSubmit. This tells the browser to run the following function in the <script> Chapter 7 - Topfunction Off YourinPage with Formatting checkSubmit the script on this form. You may want to have several different sets of Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level instructions for the browser to run, depending<br /> <br /> on what a user does with the page. In that case, store each<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTMLas Tables set of instructions its own function, and link the function to the event attribute. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Tip If 10 this script looks like Greek to you, don’t worry. The “Form validation” section later in the chapter Chapter - HTML Forms walks throughHTML everything goingTechnologies on in this script. Part IV you - Extending with Other Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Technical Stuff The double parentheses following the name (in both the script and the attribute values) Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting are part of the scripting syntax. You can pass parameters to the script within the parentheses so you can Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic reuse a single script for several elements. When you use someone else’s script in your Web page, Chapter 14read - Integrating a Database into Your carefully any instructions that come withHTML the script. Verify whether you have to put any information in Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages the parentheses or can leave them empty. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> You can put scripts into the value of an event attribute (instead of storing them in the Chapter 16also - Creating an directly HTML Toolbox document technique best for short scripts like the one in the “Image rollover” section Chapter 17 header). - Setting This Up Your Online works Presence later in 18 the chapter. Chapter - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Going with HTML a Client-Side Script by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> As you might expect, to skin the scripting cat. Because a script is a set of Johnthere’s Wiley &more Sons than © 2003one (408way pages) programming instructions, you must have an application that can understand Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site and respond to those instructions. Yourortwo options are the Web browser or the Web server. one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this Scripts step- that Web browsers read by-step will put you on the right track. and respond to are calledbook client-side scripts. Conversely, scripts that Web servers read and respond to are server-sidescripts. (All the scripts we discuss in this chapter are client-side scripts.) Table Contents scripts are commonly used with data that users submit through HTML forms. They also Tip ofServer-side HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition help databases and other applications connected to a Web page. You can learn more about the role these Introduction scripts — often called CGI scripts — play in a Web site in Chapters 10 and 14. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> When you client-side scripts in your Web pages, handles all script processing after a Chapter 1 include - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the the browser Web visitor to site downloads Chapter 2 your - HTML at Work onthe thepage. Web When you use a client-side script, you rely on the browser to interpret run the script. ThatHTML reduces Chapter 3 and - Creating Your First Pagethe amount of processing your Web server has to do; it also limits manyStarted times with the browser Part II how - Getting HTML<br /> <br /> must contact your Web server to change the way a page looks or behaves. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 different - Linkingbrowsers to Onlinesupport Resources However, scripting in slightly different ways; you may have to do a little extra Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images work to make sure your script runs successfully on all browsers. Older versions of the popular browsers Chapter 7 earlier), - Top Off Your Page scripting with Formatting (3.0 and don’t handle well — and text-only browsers can’t handle it at all — so if you Part III - scripts, Taking HTML to thethat Next Level include remember their benefit<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> is lost on users who run those older browsers.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Tricks9of the Trade When you download a script from the Web or have someone write a script for you, Chapter - HTML Frames be sure10 to identify Chapter - HTML which Formsbrowsers the script works with. You want scripts that work with as many browsers as possible so youHTML can support as many different Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> users’ browser configurations as possible. A good programmer can create scripts that work well in different browsers, and will provide documentation for the Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS script that specifies which browsers it works with. You should also state whether your script encounters any Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting known problems when it runs in particular browsers. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition May We Suggest Some Nice JavaScript? by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> You probably won’t beWiley surprised to ©find that there’s more than one language for writing Web page John & Sons 2003out (408 pages) scripts. JavaScript was created by Netscape to work with the Navigator and VBScript was created Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Webbrowser site by Microsoft to work with Internet Explorer. For quite a while, the two scripting languages competed heavily or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step you on the right track. for developer favor, but inbook the will end,put JavaScript won and actually became a standard known as ECMAscript (even though everyone calls it JavaScript). Table of Contents Remember Older browsers (versions 3.0 and earlier) don’t work well with scripts written in rival HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thscripts Edition languages. JavaScript don’t work nearly as well in Internet Explorer 3.0 as they do in Navigator 3.0. Introduction VBScript is even more restrictive; scripts written in it won’t run at all on anything but Windows machines Part I - Internet MeetingExplorer HTML in Its Natural Environment using as the browser.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> More recent haveon allthe standardized on JavaScript — thus most of the scripts you’ll find are written Chapter 2 - browsers HTML at Work Web in JavaScript. (So are the ones you’ll see later in the chapter.) If you choose to learn a scripting language, Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page choose JavaScript. Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents You don’t need to know much about programming to use scripts in your Web page. All you really have to<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 -isLinking Online Resources understand how totouse event attributes to link scripts to common user activities (such as clicking a Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images submit button or changing some text). You can download canned scripts from several different repositories Chapter 7 - (look Top Off with on the Web forYour a listPage at the endFormatting of the chapter) and then slap them into your page. That’s really all Part IIIis- to Taking there it. HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables Remember You can use scripting to create some advanced user interfaces that respond to just about Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> everything Chapter 10 a- user HTMLdoes. FormsHowever, such scripts will be particular to your site; you’ll have a harder time finding scripts that meet your needs. For Part IV - canned Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> standard dynamic features (such as form validation and image rollovers), you can find what you need on the Web. For more complicated features (or those Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS specific to your site), you’ll need to work with a programmer (or become one yourself) to create the Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting necessary scripts. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Tip Finding Scripts Online<br /> <br /> Part VHere - From Page to Web Site areWeb some good online sources of<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> free scripts to add to your Web pages:<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> JavaScript Source: Chapter 17The - Setting Up Your Onlinehttp:// Presence javascript.internet.com/ Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface JavaScript Kit:www.javascriptkit.com/<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19Java-Scripts.Net: - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs www.javascripts.net/ Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - JavaScript Appendixes<br /> <br /> City: www.javascriptcity.com/<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary The following three sections look at the kinds of JavaScript scripts you can easily add to your Web pages, Index even if you don’t know much about programming. They illustrate various approaches that programmers Cheat HTML 4—For Dummies, Edition use toSheet write-scripts and introduce4th basic concepts you’ll need to work with scripts in your own pages. List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Image rollover<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars Listing 12-2 shows an image rollover — short and sweet, it stores all scripting commands for the browser<br /> <br /> in the event attributes for the <img> element. Listing 12-2: Image Rollover<br /> <br /> <html><br /> <br /> <head> HTML 4 image for Dummies, 4th Edition <title>A simple rollover</title> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts </head><br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site <body> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<p> by-step book will put you on the right track. <img src="image_one.gif" alt="button" border="0" onmouseover="this.src = ‘image_two.gif’;" onmouseout="this.src = ‘image_one.gif’;"> Table of Contents </p> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition </body> Introduction </html> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> The<img> element initially references image_one.gif, as shown in Figure 12-2.<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Otherloads, Technologies Figure 12-2: When the page it displays<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> the image referenced in the image src attribute.<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> The instructions in the attribute tell the browser to change the source of this element (the Chapter 12 - HTML and onmouseover Scripting image element) to image_two.gif Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic when a user moves his or her mouse pointer over the image. This effectively the <img> element it reads Chapter 14 rewrites - Integrating a Database into so Your HTML <img src="image_two.gif">. Figure 12-3 shows that the15 browser a different graphic when the mouse pointer moves over the image. Chapter - Howdoes HTMLindeed Relatesdisplay to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Figure 12-3: When a mouse pointer moves over the image, the browser displays a different graphic.<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Index The instructions in the onmouseout attribute tell the browser to change the source of the <img> element<br /> <br /> back Sheet to its original (image_one.gif) Cheat - HTML value 4 For Dummies, 4th Editionwhen the mouse pointer moves off the image. List of Figures<br /> <br /> Tip The URLs in this example are relative, which means the images must reside in the same folder as the HTML for this markup and scripting to work. If you want to store your images in a separate directory, List of Listings you can — just reference the image in the script accordingly. For instance, if all images lived off the main List of Sidebars Web server root directory in a directory called images, the <img> element would change to something like this: List of Tables<br /> <br /> <img src="/images/image_one.gif" alt="button" border="0" onmouseover="this.src = ‘/images/image_two.gif’;" onmouseout="this.src = ‘/images/image_one.gif’;"> You can read more about relative URLs in Chapter 3.<br /> <br /> Remember There are about as many ways to create image rollovers as there are images. (Okay, maybe 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition notthat many, butHTML you get the point.) The rollover shown here is just one example; as you search for ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel andmay Natanya Pitts scripts to use in your page, you find others. Be sure to read any notes or documentation included with John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) the script you choose; find out where to put image names to make the script work. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site one loaded graphics, and animation, thistostepTechnical Stuff orRollovers arewith an frames, easy way to add some nice effects your site, but don’t overuse them. by-step changing book will put theusers right may track.be distracted from the important content. If images are constantly on you youron site, Choose a few places to use rollovers — say, your main navigation — and use them consistently across yourof site. You’ll get the benefit of the effect without making your visitors seasick. Table Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Pop-up windows<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> A common scripting is to to open new linksHTML in separate and manage the size and Chapter 1 -use Thefor Least You Need Know about and the windows Web appearance the at browser window. Listing 12-3 attaches scripting instructions to a link that forces the Chapter 2 - of HTML Work on the Web<br /> <br /> linked document to open in a new 300 x 200 window that doesn’t have a status bar, menu bar, or scroll - Creating Your First HTML Page bars, and that isn’t resizable, as shown in Figure 12-4. Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 3 Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents Listing 12-3: Pop-Up Window<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> <html> - Finding and Using Images <head> Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting <title>A pop-up window</title> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level </head> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> <body> - HTML Forms <a href="javascript:void(0);" Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies onclick="window.open(‘http://www.dummies.com’, ‘popupWin’, Chapter 11 - Gettinglocation=0, Stylish with CSSstatus=0, menubar=0, scrollbars=0, resizable=0, ‘toolbar=0, Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting width=300, height=200, left=20,top=20’)" rel="nofollow">Dummies.com</a> Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic </body> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML </html> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Figure 12-4: You can use JavaScript to open a Web page in a new window and carefully control the display of the window.<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of ListingsThe <a> element in the preceding code sample is listed across several lines for display Warning List of Sidebars purposes; however, you’ll need to remove the line breaks if you add this code to your HTML pages and put<br /> <br /> the entire anchor tag on a single line. Random line breaks in JavaScript can cause errors on the page. Notice that the value of href is javascript:void(0); rather than the actual URL the link points to (http://www.dummies.com). The link is part of the JavaScript, but you include the javascript:void(0); so the browser knows to move past the href attribute value and look to the scripting code to find the URL.<br /> <br /> Theonclick event attribute holds all the instructions the browser needs to open the link in a new HTML 4 for Dummies, Edition window, starting with window.open that4th instructs the browser to pop open a new window. The specifics ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts for the window follow in the parentheses: John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> http://www.dummies.com: The URL atosimple, displaytext-oriented in the window. Whether your goal is to build Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> popupWin:Aby-step name for book thewill window. put you on the right track. toolbar=0:Don’t display the toolbar. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Don’t display the location bar. HTML location=0: 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> status=0:Don’t display the status bar.<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least Needthe to menu Know about menubar=0: Don’t You display bar. HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web scrollbars=0: display thePage scroll bars. Chapter 3 - Creating Don’t Your First HTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> resizable=0:Don’t allow the window to be resized.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to the Online Resources width=300: Sets window width to 300 pixels. Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> height=200: Sets the window height to 200 pixels. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> left=20:Positions the new window 20 pixels from the left of the parent window.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 - HTML Frames top=20: Positions the new windows 20 pixels from the top of the parent window. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> ThisIVcode turns offHTML all the menus other window Part - Extending with Otherand Technologies<br /> <br /> features by setting their values to zero (0). You can<br /> <br /> turn any on by changing the zeros to ones (1). Also note that the values for toolbar, location, and Chapter 11of them - Getting Stylish with CSS other window specifics aren’t included in quotation marks. JavaScript doesn’t require that you use them. Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Remember thatMultimedia even though this code is in an <a> element, all these parameters are part of the Chapter 13 -also Making Magic JavaScript not theaHTML code; therefore, they must abide by JavaScript rules. Chapter 14 code, - Integrating Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Tricks of the Trade Pop-up windows are helpful if you want to call someone’s attention to some special content immediately, but they can backfire on you if you use them too much. Many Web sites use pop-up Chapter 16to -deliver Creating anso HTML Toolbox windows ads, users are becoming desensitized (or hostile) to them and simply ignore them Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence (or install software that prevents them). Before you add a pop-up window to your site, be sure it’s Chapter 18 necessary; - Creating aconsider Great User Interface absolutely how it affects the user experience if it’s angrily slammed shut. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Form validation - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> A common use for JavaScript is to verify that users have filled out all the required fields in a form before<br /> <br /> Appendix A - actually HTML 4 submits Tags the browser the form to the form-processing program on the Web server. Listing 12-4 Appendix B HTML Character Codes stores a form checking function, checkSubmit, in the <script> element of the HTML page, and Appendix C -it Glossary references in the form’s onsubmit attribute. Index<br /> <br /> Listing 12-4: Form Validation Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures <html> List of Tables <head> List of <title>Linking Listings scripts to HTML pages</title><br /> <br /> <script List of Sidebars language="javascript"> function checkSubmit ( thisForm ) { if ( thisForm.FirstName.value == ‘’ ) { alert(‘Please enter your First Name.’); return false; } if ( thisForm.LastName.value == ‘’ ) {<br /> <br /> alert(‘Please enter your Last Name.’); HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition return false; by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> }<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> return Whether true; your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site } </script> </head><br /> <br /> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> <body> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <form method="POST" action="/cgi-bin/form_processor.cgi" Introduction onsubmit="return checkSubmit(this);"> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment <p>1 Chapter<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> First Name: <input type="text" name="FirstName"><br> Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Last Name: <input type="text" name="LastName"><br> Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page <input type="submit"> Part II - Getting Started with HTML </p> Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents </form> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources </body> Chapter 6 </html> - Finding and Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 performs - HTML Tables This script one of two operations if either form field isn’t filled in when the user clicks the submit Chapter button:9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> It instructs theHTML browser display a warning (the Part IV - Extending withtoOther Technologies<br /> <br /> text is specified in the alert) to let the user know he<br /> <br /> or she to fill in a field. Chapter 11 forgot - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting It returns a value of false to the browser, which prevents the browser from actually submitting the Making Multimedia Magic form to-the form processing application.<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML If the fields filled in correctly, browser doesn’t display alerts and returns a value of true, which Chapter 15 -are How HTML Relates tothe Other Markup Languages Part tellsVthe - From browser Web that Pagethe to form Web Site is ready<br /> <br /> to pass on to the Web server. Figure 12-5 shows how the browser<br /> <br /> displays16the- alert if theanfirst name field is empty. Chapter Creating HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 12-5: A good use of JavaScript is to validate form data. Tip Although this example only verifies whether users filled out the form fields, you can create more advanced scripts that check for particular data formats (such as @ signs in e-mail addresses and only numbers in phone number fields). JavaScript is a robust Web programming language, so your form<br /> <br /> validation can be as simple (or as complex) as you need it to be. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 by EdWhen Tittel and Pitts that include required Tricks of the Trade you Natanya create forms fields, always include client-side John Wiley missing & Sons ©data 2003 before (408 pages) scripting validation to catch the script can even find its way back to the program that processes it on the server.your Users get frustrated when they take the time Whether goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web to sitefill out a form only to be told to or one with frames, graphics, and animation, thisWhen step- you use client-side scripts, the click the Back button in loaded their browsers to provide missing information. book will put you on the script catches anyby-step missing information before theright formtrack. page disappears so users can quickly make changes and try to submit again.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 13: 4Making Multimedia ISBN:0764519956 Magic by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Understanding your multimedia options Table of Contents<br /> <br /> media wisely HTML Using 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Linking to audio and video<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - Themedia Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Embedding Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web More and Web sites As a developer, you can now integrate different media Chapter 3 more - Creating Your are Firstusing HTMLmultimedia. Page<br /> <br /> types, as audio, and/or Part II -such Getting Startedvideo, with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> animation clips, in a Web page to make your pages come alive.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Technical Stuff Multimedia has had an interesting evolution. In the beginning, user bandwidth didn’t - Linking to Online Resources allow multimedia elements to be incorporated; more recently, user bandwidth has increased, and Chapter 6 and Using Images multimedia -isFinding being used everywhere. However, in an effort to improve usability and design methodology, Chapter 7 are - Top Off more Your Page with Formatting designers being conservative with their use of multimedia elements. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter Many concerns 8 - HTML must Tables be addressed before you add media components to your page. For example, will the<br /> <br /> media type properly on different platforms, or will the user have to use a plug-in application to see Chapter 9 -function HTML Frames and hear media? These are only two of the questions this chapter answers. Chapter 10 the - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Warning Although most Web technology has begun to embrace the concept of standards, multimedia is - Getting Stylish with CSS one area that has yet to follow suit. In this chapter, you get a look at some of the diverse audio and video Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting formats, as well as several different players required for users to use these formats. There aren’t any Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic consistent standards for embedding these functions (although the W3C uses the <object> element); Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML therefore, browsers use different methods for embedding these functions. Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Siteby developers Remember Most methods used<br /> <br /> (and mentioned in this chapter), do not follow the HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter standard. 16 We - Creating rarely break an HTML fromToolbox our dedication to the standard; however, if you’re going to work with<br /> <br /> multimedia, need be aware the most effective use of media — and for now, that means Chapter 17 - you Setting UptoYour Online of Presence sometimes non-standard methods. Chapter 18 -using Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Using Media Wisely by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> If you’re considering multimedia a Web Johnadding Wiley & Sons © 2003to(408 pages)page, you should be able to identify its function. For example, a band Whether would most likely want to allow userstext-oriented to downloadWeb an MP3; your goal is to build a simple, site however, there is little reason for yahoo.com toorallow you to play some background music while you search one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- the Web. by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> If you adhere to a few basic dos and don’ts as you work with multimedia, your Web page will benefit vastly: Table of Understand Contents the role and function of your media — don’t just include audio or video for the fun of it. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Compress your files — audio and video files can be quite large.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part IProvide - Meeting in Its Natural Environment anHTML off function for users if a media<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> program starts automatically.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter Flash 2 intros - HTML should at Work allow on users the Web to skip them — add a Skip Intro button. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Provide a link to allwith necessary Part II - Getting Started HTML media<br /> <br /> players.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Structuring Your HTML Documents Identify-key information about your media, such as file sizes and types — users need to know what<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 -inLinking they’re for. to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Before 7getting started, youPage maywith want to check out some sites to see how other developers are using Chapter - Top Off Your Formatting multimedia elements. The following three are excellent: Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> www.egomedia.com<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 - HTML Forms www.cnn.com/ Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> www.spoontheband.com Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Your Web Multimedia Options by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> As you select andJohn addWiley multimedia topages) your Web page, you have to decide & Sons features © 2003 (408 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Which file format best suitswith yourframes, needs,graphics, as well as which are the most compressed. or one loaded and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Whether to use a separate plug-in media player. Remember, not all browsers automatically support every media format. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> integrate4th media files into the Web page. You have three basic ways to integrate media files: HTML How 4 FortoDummies, Edition Link to the external media file, embed and present the clip as an internal file, or stream the media.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Audio formats - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web You’ve 3probably heardYour of the more common formats in the following list, but several other types are also Chapter - Creating First HTML Page<br /> <br /> worth Just remember Part II -looking Gettingat. Started with HTMLthat<br /> <br /> when you select the audio format, you should also identify three other crucial factors: your target audience, the players or plug-ins required, and the way you want to Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents present audio on your page. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter - Finding Using Images Check 6out this list of and format options: Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> AU- (or Sun/NeXT ALevel compressed Part III Taking HTML toaudio): the Next Chapter 8<br /> <br /> audio format defined for Unix.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format): A common audio format used for the Mac OS. The format - HTML Frames does not support any kind of compression, so it tends to produce large files.<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with MP3 (MPEG-1, Layer III):Other OneTechnologies of the most popular<br /> <br /> audio formats used on the Web. This format uses<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Gettingratio Stylish a compression thatwith canCSS reduce file sizes to about a megabyte per minute — a drastic reduction in Chapter HTML and Scripting file12 size- — by removing the part of the audio spectrum that is largely beyond the range of human Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic hearing. Because an MP3 file preserves nearly all file contents that the human ear can hear, it retains Chapter near-CD 14 - Integrating quality. a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> (Musical Instrument Digital Part VMIDI - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Interface): The MIDI file format is actually not an audio format, but rather a digital representation of a sound. It was originally created to allow sounds created on one Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox keyboard to be played on another without losing any quality. MIDI is now used to enable electronic Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence instruments and sound cards to communicate with each other. Instead of representations of sounds, a Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface MIDI file contains instructions that tell the computer or instrument how to produce the music (which Part VI - The Part of Tens makes the file size remarkably small). The user’s sound card reads these instructions and then Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs produces the notes. Part VII Appendixes QT-(QuickTime)<br /> <br /> and RA (RealAudio): The QT format works only with the QuickTime player. Same<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML 4 Tags thingA for RA (RealAudio) files. You can find out more about these formats in the section, “Media Appendix Players B - for HTML Audio Character and Video,” Codeslater in this chapter. Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> RMF (Rich Music Format): An audio format, defined by Beatnik, that encrypts data and can contain both recorded audio and MIDI sequences. RMF file sizes are typically small enough that audio for a Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Web site’s interface can be downloaded in one file. This file type requires Beatnik’s Player and List of Figures JavaScript Music Object to play the files, so it’s not used as often as the other types listed here. Check List of Tables outwww.beatnik.com for more information. Index<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List ofSWA Sidebars (Shockwave Audio): A compressed audio format, similar to MP3, that produces small files and<br /> <br /> retains most of the audio integrity. As the author, you can decide the compression ratio: the higher the ratio, the smaller the file. Keep in mind, however, that a smaller audio file also sacrifices some sound quality. SWF (Flash): Animation format with built-in sound capabilities that can also stream files. SWF stands for Shockwave File Extension. Sound can loop in the background of a SWF animation or be triggered by a particular frame or event. As a binary vector format, Flash creates small files that stay small even<br /> <br /> when they contain sound.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts WAV (RIFF WAVE): Developed by Microsoft and IBM, thisISBN:0764519956 is the common audio file format used for John Wileycompressed, & Sons © 2003WAV (408 pages) Windows. Even when files are still comparatively large. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> WMA (Windows Media Audio): Microsoft format foranimation, its new Windows Media Technologies — a suite or one loaded with frames, graphics, and this stepbook will put the right track. multimedia (including high-quality audio). of utilities for by-step creating, serving up,you andonviewing streamed<br /> <br /> Video formats<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Video publishing on the Web has seen a jump in the last few years. In the past, online video projects cost a lot of money to produce — and even more money to publish. These days, however, anyone with a digital Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment video (DV) camcorder can capture images and publish them on the Web. Video is not yet where Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web developers would like it to be — almost everyone has seen a fuzzy image or two — but if visual quality is Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web not as important (for your purposes) as access, publishing your video on the Web can be relatively easy. Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part - Getting HTMLon TheIIfirst step inStarted getting with a handle<br /> <br /> video is to recognize video formats. The most common are .mov,<br /> <br /> Chapter .avi, and 4 - Structuring .rv. As the designer, Your HTML it’sDocuments your job to include a pointer to the appropriate player; most of the file Chapter types in5 the-following Linking tolist Online require Resources a specific player to be viewed: Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> .avi:AVI (audio/video interleaved), video format for Windows. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> .dcr:Movies created with Macromedia Director.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter .mov: 9 Format - HTML for Frames QuickTime movies. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> .mpg: CreatedHTML by the Motion Picture Experts Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Group. This format is a widely used standard for digital<br /> <br /> compression of moving images. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML and Scripting .qt:12 A QuickTime movie file type from Apple. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> .qt3: 3 provides an advanced compression format for video, audio, MIDI, animation, 3D, Chapter 14QuickTime - Integrating a Database into Your HTML and Chapter 15so -on. How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> .rv:Real Video, a format for streaming video on the Web, optimized for low-to-medium-speed - Creating an HTML Toolbox connections.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18VIVO - Creating Great User Interfaceof streaming video, particularly over low bandwidth. .viv: format afor the compression Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Animation - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> For animation, there’s only one superstar. Flash has taken over Web design (no cheap jokes about the<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Planet Mongo, please). Flash provides movement and images that are sleeker and easier to use than ever Appendix B HTML Character Codes before. Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> For a look at what Flash can do, visit www.flash99good.com/. Unlike plain HTML pages, however, Index Flash-enabled Web4 pages require 4th a Flash plug-in before visitors can view them. When they’ve Cheat Sheet - HTML For Dummies, Edition downloaded List of Figures the player, users don’t have to worry about it again until a new version of Flash is unveiled (about every one to two years).<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings Don’t underestimate the amount of time it takes to learn Macromedia’s Flash application. Remember List of other Sidebars Like graphics applications (such as Photoshop or Dreamweaver), the program can be rather<br /> <br /> daunting to master and requires dedication. Most users like Flash animation because the images in Flash movies — which don’t look like movies at all, but more like moving Web pages — are clean and smooth. All in all, we like Flash and recommend using it, if you have the time to learn how to use it properly. Tip Flash is a topic worthy of an entire book. If you would like to explore it more fully, we recommend<br /> <br /> visiting Macromedia’s site at www.macromedia.com. If you feel like you need an entire book, we suggest HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition theFlash MX Bible by Robert Reinhardt and Snow Dowd Macromedia Flash MX For Dummies by Gurdy ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel (both and Natanya Pittsby Wiley Publishing, Leete and Ellen Finkelstein published Inc.). John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTMLfor 4 forAudio Dummies, 4th Edition Media Players and Video by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Media can be stored any number formats these days; our need to store and transmit information in JohninWiley & Sons ©of 2003 (408 pages) this form has resulted in numerous media-rich players that handle all audio, Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site video, and other media formats. RealOneorPlayer tries to be the player of choice — but with the advent one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- of new compression by-step and bookso willon), putdevelopers you on the right track. alike have to upgrade constantly. formats (MP3, MPEG-4, and users Plug-in applications are programs that users can download, install, and use as a part of their Web Table of Contents browsers. This type of application initially began with Netscape, when users could download, install, and HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition for audio or video. However, these applications were called “helper define supplementary programs Introduction applications.” This system is still used when you link to a media file. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Now, users the browser recognizes automatically — these Chapter 1 -can Thedownload Least You plug-in Need toapplications Know about that HTML and the Web applications the browser. Once recognized, the plug-in allows all functions to be integrated into Chapter 2 - plug HTMLinattoWork on the Web the rendered Web page (for example, when a media file is embedded in a Web page). Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Tip Users can download any number of possible plug-ins. Most users, however, wait until they need a - Structuring Your HTML Documents particular plug-in before they download it.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> RealNetworks Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> RealNetworks (then Progressive Networks) started the streaming audio craze in the mid-1990s — and - HTML Tables soon independent players were popping up everywhere. RealNetworks went through a stage of production Chapter 9 - HTML Frames where versions of its software didn’t support older versions of its own media formats — in short, the whole Chapter 10 HTML Forms thing was a mess. Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Now, however, RealNetworks has released RealOne Player, which provides an all-in-one player — it does Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS streaming and video, constructs MP3 libraries, and can be used to burn CDs. You must have the Chapter 12 audio - HTML and Scripting RealOne to listen to .raMagic or .rv files. Chapter 13 Player - Making Multimedia Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade Manyexperienced multimedia users prefer MP3 players (such as WinAmp or - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Sonique— or iTunes for the Mac), and streaming services such as Shoutcast. However, most lessPart V - From Web Page to Web Site experienced users out there are familiar with the RealOne Player. If you want to reach them where their Chapter 16 - Creating anyou HTML audio preference lives, canToolbox download the RealOne Player at www.real.com. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> QuickTime<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> We like QuickTime, created by Apple, although it doesn’t have the wide range support that the other - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts players have. QuickTime supports most media formats, and supports about the same functionality as the Part VII - Appendixes other players mentioned in this section. Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix The onlyBthing - HTML QuickTime Character can’t Codes do is rip MP3s or burn CDs. (That sort of thing is left up to iTunes, another<br /> <br /> Apple product.) QuickTime is also compatible with Flash, Cakewalk, Premiere, and other multimedia Appendix C - Glossary tools. Download a copy of this player at www.apple.com/quicktime. Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Windows Media Player<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> The Windows answer to an all-in-one player has many of the same advantages as the List of proprietary Listings RealOne Player. It supports streaming audio and video, DVD playback, encoding and burning audio files, List of Sidebars as well as other multimedia-related functions. You must have the Windows Media Player to listen to .wmp files. Download the Windows Media Player at www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/players.asp.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, Linking to Audio and Video4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> One method of getting users&to access your content is by adding a hyperlink that leads to the John Wiley Sons © 2003 (408 multimedia pages) audio or video file. This method is bar-none the easiest delivery method Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web you site can choose. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> You can link to most audio andwill video file types for streaming formats). Here’s how it works: by-step book put you on the(except right track. 1. You use the <a> element to provide a link to the media file, like this: Table2.of When Contents the user clicks the hyperlink, the media file opens in a separate media-player window. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade We recommend providing your users with information about what they will be Introduction downloading. For you could provide Part I - Meeting HTML in Itsexample, Natural Environment<br /> <br /> the file format, size, and URL location. You should<br /> <br /> a link the appropriate media player in case Chapter also 1 -provide The Least YoutoNeed to Know about HTML and the Web your users have to download it first. 13-1 at shows link toWeb an MP3 file to download. Chapter Figure 2 - HTML Workaon the Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> 13-1: This User site shows a link for downloading an MP3 file. Chapter 18 Figure - Creating a Great Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Warning You cannot link to streaming formats. If linked, a streaming format down- loads like any - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs other media file, and will not play until completely downloaded — that is, it won’t stream.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VIIyou’ve - Appendixes When created<br /> <br /> a media file, using one of the file types defined in the previous sections, you point to<br /> <br /> Appendix the file by A using - HTML the4href Tags attribute, like so: Appendix B - HTML Character CodesHere to listen to a song.</a> <a href="song.wav" rel="nofollow">Click Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Because relative address4th for Edition this audio file, the file must be located in the same directory as the Cheat Sheetwe - use HTMLa 4 For Dummies, Web page. If you wanted to link to a song not stored on your sever, you could point to the resource by List of Figures using an absolute address, like this: List of Tables <aofhref="http://www.domain.com/song.wav" rel="nofollow">Click Here to listen to a song.</a> List Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> When the user selects the link, the appropriate media player opens, and the audio file plays. The following is a complete example of the markup used to link to an audio file: <html> <head> <title>Anthropos Arts</title> </head> <body><br /> <br /> <p>One popular form of music in Colombia is the CUMBIA (koom-bee-ya). HTML 4 in for 4/4 Dummies, 4th Edition It is typically time.</p> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya <p>Example song: "La Piragua" Pitts / "The Little Boat"</p> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) <p>Download "La Piragua" on mp3 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site <a href="http://www.anthropos.org/media/mp3/laPiragua.mp3" rel="nofollow">here</a></p> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step</body> by-step book will put you on the right track. </html> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Tip When the user selects the hyperlink to play an audio file, the browser looks for an appropriate player. If the user doesn’t have an audio player installed (oops), the browser prompts the user to save the file. A Introduction dialog box may also appear, mentioning that the file is being saved to the user’s hard drive. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -If The Least You Need to Knowelse’s aboutaudio HTML or and the Web Warning you’re linking to someone video file, make sure you have his or her Chapter 2 -toHTML at(Look Work on the Web permission do so. before you link.) Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 forand Dummies, 4th Edition EmbeddingHTML Audio Video Files into Your Page by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Embedding media components enables to actually make media an integral part of how your Web John Wiley & Sons © 2003 you (408 pages) page works. When the user activates the media file, it’stext-oriented played as part the Web page — a separate Whether your goal is to build a simple, Webofsite window is not needed. Here’s how it works: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> 1. You define controls that allow the user to activate the file. 2. The user clicks (for example) a Play button to play file is activated.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Edition13-2, clicking Play activates a song, which plays from within the Web page For Dummies, example, 4th in Figure Introduction — no separate window needed. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML 13-2: Frames Figure A console (defined as a control) is visible in the Web page.<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Tip Although embedding a Flash animation file into your Web page has its own quirks, the concepts - Getting Stylish with CSS remain the same. Once embedded, a Flash movie begins the moment the user accesses its browser Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting window. In this case, the user need not even activate a control. Chapter 11 Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter You can 14use - Integrating the <embed> a Database or <object> into Your element HTML to embed a media file. Originally, developers used the<br /> <br /> <embed> to embed a media file — notLanguages so today. Why? Well, the HTML standard doesn’t support Chapter 15 element - How HTML Relates to Other Markup the<embed> element that). This Part V - From Web Page (oh, to Web Site<br /> <br /> state of affairs is difficult for developers because Netscape<br /> <br /> traditionally <embed> element, whereas Internet Explorer supports the <object> element Chapter 16 -supports Creating the an HTML Toolbox (which 17 is officially part the Online HTML Presence standard). Thus the browser wars continue. Chapter - Setting UpofYour Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Tip To embed a video, you can use either the <embed> or the <object> element. As with media files, however, neither of these techniques will work in all browsers (namely, Netscape, Internet Explorer, and Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Opera). Such differences in support mean that if you want to reach the widest possible audience, you Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts should provide a link and let the user download (or stream) the video file. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - of HTML Tags Okay, some you4will have an irresistible craving to embed a media file. Just remember: There are Appendix B HTML Character already several different waysCodes to embed media, and we don’t have the space to cover each option. To Appendix keep from C spoiling - Glossary your fun, however, we can provide you with a few examples. Index<br /> <br /> Using the <embed> element<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> One the most common ways to embed media is to use the <embed> element. Here’s an example: List of of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> <html> <head> <title>Anthropos Arts</title> </head> <body> <p>One popular form of music in Colombia is the CUMBIA (koom-bee-ya). It is typically in 4/4 time.</p><br /> <br /> <p>Example song: "La Piragua" / "The Little Boat"</p> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition <p>Play "La Piragua": ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts <embed src="http://www.anthropos.org/media/mp3/laPiragua.mp3" John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) autostart="false" width="150" height="15" Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site controls="smallconsole">here</a></p> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step</body> by-step book will put you on the right track. </html> In this Table ofexample, Contentswe used several attributes to define media properties. In addition to the attributes used in this example, you can add a few more:<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction src="filename":Identifies the source file. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> autostart="false | true": Use this attribute require Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML andtothe Web sound to play automatically when the document renders, or to users to activate the control. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work onrequire the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> controls="console | smallconsole | playbutton | pausebutton | stopbutton | volumelever ":Thecontrols attribute defines the type of control that will be displayed and Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents serves as the interactive trigger for the user. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images width="pixel": The width attribute defines the width for the control being used. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> height="pixel": TheNext height Part III - Taking HTML to the Levelattribute Chapter 8<br /> <br /> defines the height for the control being used.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> loop="n" or ="true | false":Theloop attribute enables you to specify the number of times - HTML Frames an audio file should loop. The default is 1.<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies align="left | right | center | justify":Thealign<br /> <br /> attribute functions the same as it<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 when - Getting with CSS element. The default is left. does usedStylish with the <img> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic Embedding the Windows Media Player<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 the - How HTML Relates to Internet Other Markup Languages If you use <embed> element, Explorer users may not be able to access the media file. Part V - Fromif Web Page to Web Site Therefore, you’re trying to reach<br /> <br /> a large audience, another recommended method is to embed the<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Media - Creating anas HTML Toolbox Windows Player a part of Internet Explorer and Netscape. Although doing so won’t reach all users, it17will-reach more thanOnline you’d Presence reach by using the <embed> element. Chapter Setting Up Your Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> TipVIProviding link to the Part - The Parta of Tens<br /> <br /> necessary media player helps users access your media.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs The Windows Media Player is normally embedded into a page for Internet Explorer as an ActiveX Control<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 <object> - Ten HTMLelement Do’s and Don’ts using the (this does not work on Macs). For Netscape, the player is incorporated by Part VIIa-plug-in Appendixes using defined<br /> <br /> by the <embed> element. If you use this technique, you can define the <embed><br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML 4 Tags elementAwithin the <object> element (is that slick, or what?) — allowing this method to work for both Appendix B HTML Character Codes Internet Explorer and Netscape — like this: Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <object id="mediaplayer" width=320 height=310 classid="clsid:22d6f312-b0f6-11d0-94ab-0080c74c7e95" List of Tables codebase="http://activex.microsoft.com/activex/controls/mplayer/ List of Listings en/nsmp2inf.cab#version=5,1,52,701" List of Sidebars "loading media player" type="application/x-oleobject"> standby= <param name="filename" value="movie.avi"> <param name="autostart" value="true"> <param name="showcontrols" value="true"> <param name="showstatusbar" value="true"> <embed type="application/x-mplayer2" pluginspage="http://www.microsoft.com/windows/mediaplayer/" src="video/movie.avi"width="320" height="310" name="mediaplayer" List of Figures<br /> <br /> autostart="true" showstatusbar="1" showcontrols="1"> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition </embed> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts </object> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one with graphics, and animation, this step-yourself. The rest you can All the items shown hereloaded in bold areframes, variables that you would want to define by-step bookthat willyou put may you on theto right track.a few variables such as autostart. leave alone. Note, however, want change<br /> <br /> Defining background audio<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Internet Explorer supports a function that allows background music. First, define the Internet Explorer Introduction version: Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 <html><br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML <head><br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - StructuringArts</title> Your HTML Documents <title>Anthropos Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources </head> Chapter <body> 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> <bgsound Chapter 7 - src="http://www.anthropos.org/media/mp3/laPiragua.mp3"> Top Off Your Page with Formatting <p>One popular Part III - Taking HTML form to the of Nextmusic Level in Colombia is the CUMBIA (koom-bee-ya). It is typically in 4/4 time.</p> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables <p>Example song: "La Piragua" / "The Little Boat"</p> Chapter 9 - HTML Frames </body> Chapter 10 - HTML Forms </html> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> The<bgsound> element is not officially part of the HTML standard, so we don’t recommend using it. If Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting you do, you have to use the src attribute to define the audio file’s location. (The only audio formats Chapter 13 -with Making Magic recognized this Multimedia tag are .wav, .au, and .mid.) You can also use a loop attribute to define how many Chapter 14 Integrating a Database Yourfor HTML times the audio file should loop. Theinto values the loop attribute can be a number (loop="5") or Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages infinite (loop="infinite") to loop the audio file until the user leaves the Web page or goes into a Part V -trance From Web to Web Site deep (just Page kidding). Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox You can indirectly background music for Netscape by using an <embed> attribute. For your Chapter 17also - Setting Up define Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> users to18enjoy some background you use the <embed> element and set the autostart attribute Chapter - Creating a Great Usermusic, Interface to true autostart="true">). Part VI -(<embed The Part of Tens Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Tip Keep in mind that these attributes are not a part of the HTML standard. In the future, as Internet - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Explorer and Netscape provide stable support for the <object> element, you may want to make the Part VII - Appendixes switch and use it. Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Streaming Audio and Video by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> To master streaming (audio or2003 video), you must first understand how a Web server, HTTP, and your Johnmedia Wiley & Sons © (408 pages) browser work together. A Web page is stored the Web server. When you open your browser and Whether your goal is to build aon simple, text-oriented Web site request a Web page, that request is sent to a Web server that then sends the information to the browser. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepbook quickly, will put you thethe right track. The transaction isby-step completed andon then Web server disconnects and goes on to handle other requests from other users. Table of Contents On the other end of this transaction, your browser accepts the information from the Web server, renders it HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th ignores Edition the Web server until you select a link. on the screen, and then Introduction<br /> <br /> On Iboth ends, HTML the server the browser open Part - Meeting in Itsand Natural Environment<br /> <br /> and then close the transaction quickly. This scenario<br /> <br /> makes 1sense when you’re HTML orWeb image files, which have no need for a Chapter - The Least You dealing Need to with Knowbasic about HTMLpages and the continuous Chapter 2 -connection. HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Audio and video file types, on the other hand, contain an additional variable that affects how they behave: time. Audio and video files are considerably larger than images or HTML files, and take longer to Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents download, so the open-and-shut scenario we just described doesn’t work well at all for audio or video; Chapter 5 - Linking Online Resources users end up waitingtoimpatiently for the download to complete. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Streaming technology that divides an audio or video file into packets sent continuously to Chapter 7 uses - Topnew Off Internet Your Page with Formatting the user. The streaming software on the other end receives these packets and reconstructs the audio file; Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level the streaming player plays the packets as they’re received. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Remember One disadvantage to streaming media is that users with dialup connections might have - HTML Forms problems with streaming media; the better (faster) the connection, the better the quality.<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 many - Getting Stylish with However, developers pointCSS out that the streaming media option is used more to improve access Chapter 12 the - HTML andbe Scripting (because file can viewed before the entire file has been downloaded) than to improve delivery Chapter Making Multimedia Magic quality.13 The- trade-off — in effect, chancy quality for worldwide access — produces a video file that may be Chapter fuzzy at14times, - Integrating or an audio a Database file that may into Your occasionally HTML pop or hiss at the user. Of course, streaming<br /> <br /> technologies are still relatively asMarkup their popularity grows, the technology will improve. Chapter 15 - How HTML Relatesyoung; to Other Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Streaming video behaves much like streaming audio; however, video has two main types of streaming: - Creating an HTML Toolbox progressive streaming and real-time streaming. Progressive streaming, done on demand, uses HTTP to Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence download a compressed video file from the Internet. Realtime streaming uses Real Time Streaming Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Protocol (RTSP) to broadcast video to your browser; your browser must access a video-streaming server. Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Setting19 up a- streaming media file is similar to linking or embedding it — except the linked or embedded Chapter 20 is- actually Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts media file a meta file that contains the URL locations of the media files to be streamed. If a Part VII - Appendixes developer wants to set<br /> <br /> up a system that allows multiple streaming audio files (think online radio), server<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML 4 Tags softwareAmust be used. If just want to stream a few audio files, you can use a Web server instead. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> When you’re creating streaming audio, you need to create three files: Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Media file: As with all other methods, you need the audio file; if you’re using RealNetworks, the audio<br /> <br /> Cheatfile Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition and have a .rm extension. should be created with RealProducer List of Figures<br /> <br /> file: This text document points to where the audio file can be found on the server; if you’re using List ofMeta Tables the meta file should be created with a text editor and have a .ram or .rpm extension. List ofRealNetworks, Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML document: The HTML document should reference the meta file by using the <a> element.<br /> <br /> Tip Check with your Internet service provider to see whether it has a streaming-media server in place. If it does, you won’t have to use the Web server. Tip You can also embed a RealMedia file by using the <embed> element. Just remember that the <embed> element is not well supported.<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 14: 4Integrating a Database into Your HTML ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Understanding what a database can add to your HTML Table of Contents<br /> <br /> a database with your Web pages HTML Integrating 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Finding a host for your database-enabled Web pages<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -can Thestore Leastvast Youamounts Need to Know about HTML and the Webrecords to baseball statistics and more — Databases of information — from sales Chapter - HTML onavailable the Web to visitors to your Web site. Although you could hand-code that you2 might wantattoWork make Chapter 3 of- Web Creating Your First hundreds pages with theHTML dataPage in the database, it would take nearly forever to put the site up — and Part II - Gettingwould Started HTML maintenance bewith a nightmare.<br /> <br /> Instead, it makes much more sense to connect your Web site to the<br /> <br /> Chapter database 4 and - Structuring let them work Yourtogether HTML Documents to serve information. And that is exactly how thousands of Web<br /> <br /> developers andto manage complex data on the Web. Chapter 5 -post Linking Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Remember Before you actually wrestle your HTML into a working relationship with a database, you need Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting to have some major items already in place. In particular, you need to have a Web server running a Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level program (often a custom-coded CGI script) that tells the database exactly what to do. (CGI stands for Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Common Gateway Interface; when a Web page needs to connect to a database, the CGI script passes on Chapter 9 - HTML Frames the instructions to the database.) Even with the most sophisticated techniques, you face a considerable Chapter 10 - HTML Forms investment of time and work. That’s why this chapter gives you an overview of the process, what it can do Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies for you, and what to watch out for — so you can decide for yourself whether the payoff is worth the effort.<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4the for Dummies, 4th Edition Understanding Advantages of Using Database Technology on ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts the Web John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) your is toofbuild simple, Webinsite First things first. AWhether database is agoal bunch dataa that hastext-oriented been organized a way that makes it easy for or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepusers to find individual pieces of information. You can organize, manage, delete, and add data to the by-step book will put you on the right track. database, and depending on the database’s capabilities, you can access data using a variety of methods. You can also store a lot of different kinds of data; pretty much anything that can be categorized can be put into aofdatabase. Table Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Tip Oracle, MySQL, Sybase, and SQL Server are just a few of the databases out there, and chances are you’ve heard of at least one of them. Later in the chapter, we take a look at the different kinds of Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment databases so you can begin to sort through your options and choose the database that is right for you (or Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web know what you’re working with if your database has already been chosen for you). Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page The benefits of integrating a database with your HTML are striking: Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Databases hold and organize a great deal of information. In particular, databases maintain the Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents relationships between different pieces of data (for example, a link between an address and the person Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources who there).and YouUsing can manage Chapter 6 lives - Finding Images and keep track of data in a database more effectively than you can in just about any other format. - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Advanced query languages such as SQL extract data from a database according to detailed<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables criteria. You can build these criteria into your Web page so that the page gets and displays only Chapter 9 HTML Frames certain pieces of data (such as all in-stock products immediately available for shipment, or all users Chapter 10have - HTML Forms who ordered a product in the last 15 days). Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Tip stands for Structured Chapter 11 SQL - Getting Stylish with CSS Query Language, and it’s a language for working with databases to make stored data more accessible. Chapter 12 the - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Your Web site can interact with the data in the database. For example, it can help people provide - Integrating a Database into Your HTML you with information to plug into your database, such as product orders or contact information. They Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages don’t have to tell you over the phone or have a special application to access your database; all they Part V - From Web Page to Web Site need is a Web browser and a URL to get to your site. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter Your 17 Web - Setting site can Up Your update Online itself Presence automatically as the data in the database changes. In effect,<br /> <br /> you18won’t have toaupdate yourInterface Web page at all. Each time the page loads, it gets the latest batch of Chapter - Creating Great User data from the Part VI - The Part of database. Tens<br /> <br /> All you need do is keep the database up to date.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, Edition Linking Databases to Your4th Web Page: The Basics by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Imagine this scenario: You already database that catalogs products, prices, availability, and John Wiley & Sons ©have 2003 a (408 pages) customer data. (Maybe you’re using Microsoft Access, SQL Server, Web Oracle, Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site or FileMakerPro.) You typically use the information in the database to create print catalogs and to manage or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-customer orders you receive in by-step book willyou put want you on right the mail and on the phone. Now to the move thetrack. whole operation to the Web. You have a couple of options: Table of Contents Create a static online catalog. You could use the information in your catalog to create a collection of HTML standard 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition HTML pages with all product information hard-coded into the page. You could create a Introduction separate order form that users would fill out and either snail-mail or fax to you. Every time information Part Ichanges - MeetinginHTML Its Natural Environment your in actual database, you have<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> to change the data on the Web pages.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Build interactive on-the-fly. You could connect the database to your Web site Chapter 2 an - HTML at Workonline on thecatalog Web and your catalog on-the-fly by using information pulled from the database in real time (rather Chapter 3 create - Creating Your First HTML Page than hard-coded theHTML HTML). Part II - Getting Startedinto with<br /> <br /> Users could place orders online and skip the mailbox, fax, or phone all together. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources These two approaches illustrate a tradeoff of know-how versus hassle factor. The first approach requires Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images the least technical know-how but will be (at best) clunky and difficult to maintain. The second takes Chapter 7 - Top Off and Yourprogramming Page with Formatting advantage of HTML techniques to create a Web site that interfaces directly with your Part III - Taking HTML to tomaintain the Next — Level database. It’s easier but<br /> <br /> it requires more technical know-how.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Technical Stuff A bit about SQL<br /> <br /> Structured Query Language, orTechnologies SQL, is the syntax Part IV - Extending HTML with Other<br /> <br /> you use to work with data in a database. You phrase your communications with a database as queries. Queries can be simple (say, searching the Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS database for allproducts without applying any other criteria) or they can bristle with complexity — as Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting when (for example) you search a product database for all products from a particular manufacturer that Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic arein stock and then do an inventory of at least ten items that weren’t recently purchased by a Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML particular customer. Part VThe - From Web Web your Site rules youPage use to to bind<br /> <br /> search are called criteria. You also use SQL queries to write data into<br /> <br /> Chapter - Creating an HTML the16 database, modify data Toolbox that’s already in there, and (of course) delete data when it’s outlived its Chapter usefulness. 17 - Setting If you Upuse Your a form Onlineon Presence a Web page to collect a user’s contact information, you have to<br /> <br /> convert information user provides into an SQL query and then feed it into the database (more Chapter 18 -the Creating a Greatthe User Interface about how works Part VI - The Partthis of Tens Chapter 19<br /> <br /> in the next section of the chapter).<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> If you’re going to build a Web site that integrates a database with your HTML, it’s wise to study up a bit - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts on SQL so you can properly phrase your communications with the database. Every database has its Part VII - Appendixes own particular version of SQL, but they’re all just slight variations on a theme; SQL itself follows some Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags consistent general rules. Therefore, if you’re already familiar with one database’s SQL, you can easily Appendix B - HTML Character Codes pick up another’s. If you aren’t at all familiar with SQL, no problem — the final section in this chapter Appendix C - Glossary points you to some good references. Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> Remember List of Tables When you connect a database to your Web site, you essentially link a source of data (the fields in the database) to your markup. When users request Web pages, the final results are a List of Listings combination List of Sidebarsof the HTML you’ve created and the data in the database. (We go into more detail on how this all works in the next section,“What You Need to Add a Database to Your HTML.”)<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade As you might imagine, integrating a database with your Web pages takes a serious commitment, a substantial amount of work, and above-average technical know-how. But that’s not an excuse to ignore the possibilities. Change can be good, after all, and as better tools emerge, the possibility that you can link a database to your Web page without having to morph into a complete propeller-head increases. In the long run, if you plan to make a lot of information available to users through your Web site, linking a database to your site is a necessity. If you’re not ready to make the leap just yet, the main<br /> <br /> challenge is to get a strong sense of exactly how the pieces of a database-driven Web site fit together. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Then you can scope out not whetherto link database to your HTML, but how you want your site to interact ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts with your database. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 to for Add Dummies, 4th Edition to Your HTML What You Need a Database by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> If you want to integrate a database with John Wiley & Sons © 2003your (408 HTML pages) to give your Web pages access to the data in the database, you need the following basics: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> A database program (running on you a database server) by-step book will put on the right track.<br /> <br /> Instructions embedded in your HTML pages that request information from the database Table of Contents<br /> <br /> programming tools that enables you to communicate with both the database and your Web HTML A 4 set For of Dummies, 4th Edition server<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> UseFigure 14-1 to see how everything fits together to create a complete, data-driven Web solution.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 Figure - Finding Using Images of a data-driven Web solution may exist on separate systems. 14-1:and The components Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Remember Your Web server, database, and the Web application that interfaces between the Web server - HTML Tables and the database can all peacefully coexist on the same system as long as there’s enough memory to run Chapter 9 - HTML Frames all the applications without problems. However, Figure 14-1 shows the Web server on a system that runs Chapter 10 - HTML Forms an intermediary Web application, and a separate system that houses the database. Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11several - Getting Stylishofwith The next sections this CSS chapter delve into the particulars of each element. Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic A database<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 before - How HTML Relates to a Other Markup Languages Of course, you can create data-driven solution that integrates a database with your HTML, you Part V -aFrom Web Page to Web Site need database. Database programs<br /> <br /> come in all shapes and sizes, with a wide array of features, and to<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox fit all budgets. If you already have a database that you want to connect to a Web site, chances are you Chapter won’t need 17 -toSetting chooseUpa Your new Online one. There’s Presence no need to reinvent your database just to fit your Web site. In<br /> <br /> fact, attaching a Web asite to an existing database that you already use for (say) taking customer orders or Chapter 18 - Creating Great User Interface tracking assets, you Part VI - The Part gives of Tens Chapter 19<br /> <br /> another creative way to work with that data.<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> If, however, you need to create a database from scratch, you’ll need to investigate some of your options to - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts find the database that is right for you. The following sections give you a peek at some of the most popular Part VII - Appendixes databases so you can get an idea of where to start looking. Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes isn’t exhaustive. There are many other databases you can choose Remember This list of databases Appendix C if-the Glossary from, and database your data is currently housed in isn’t on this list, don’t panic. The goal of the list is Index to introduce you to some examples of the types of databases you can choose from. Your Internet Service Cheat Provider Sheet (ISP) - HTML or your 4 For company’s Dummies,IT 4th group Edition are good resources to help you get a handle on what<br /> <br /> databases your Web server can manage and to help you choose the best database for your needs. List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Free and powerful: List of Listings<br /> <br /> MySQL<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> MySQL is a free, open-source database that runs on most flavors of Unix (including Linux and Solaris), as well as all versions of Windows from 98 to XP. Best of all, MySQL is available free of charge — and is a robust database for the money (or lack thereof). Did we mention it’s free? If you need to get a database up and running inexpensively (or you’re just learning to work with databases), MySQL is a good choice. It runs very well on Unix and Linux — the most popular platforms for serving up Web pages — so it plays well with other major Web applications.<br /> <br /> However, MySQL does have its limitations. If your MySQL database crashes (as every database eventually 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition will), you have to HTML put more work into recovering backed up data than you would if you were using a ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel Natanya heavier-duty database (suchand as those wePitts discuss shortly). John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Remember Because of its sketchiness in thea simple, area of text-oriented retrieving lostWeb data, this isn’t the ideal database for Whether your goal is to build site or one loaded frames,criteria: graphics, and animation, this stepyou if your site meets any of thewith following by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> The site has to handle thousands of immediate transactions (as shopping sites or banks might). Table of Contents The site requires continuous updating. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> The site must recover from crashes quickly with minimal interruption of service. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> In the real world, MySQL is great for lightweight to medium-weight Web sites. You can definitely run a - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web product catalog with it, or a museum-exhibit tracking site, or a school-attendance and grade-book system.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 only - Creating Your First seriously HTML Page Tip The time you should avoid MySQL is when you manage large numbers of financial Part II - Getting Started with transactions. Otherwise you HTML can count<br /> <br /> on MySQL to provide a solid database that will meet just about any<br /> <br /> Chapter Web site 4 need - Structuring — and doYour it forHTML free. Documents To learn more about MySQL, visit www.mysql.com. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Windowsand user-friendly: Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Microsoft Chapter 7<br /> <br /> Access<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Microsoft Access has been around for a long time — it’s a popular database for storing key business information (such as contact lists, inventory catalogs, and time-tracking systems). Access is a WindowsChapter 8 - HTML Tables only application, popular because it offers an easy-to-use system for creating the forms used to access the Chapter 9 - HTML Frames database. You can run a Microsoft Access database on your company’s internal network, create a set of Chapter 10 - HTML Forms custom forms, and install them on any Windows machine in the company — just as you would any Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Windows application. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML Scripting Tip If 12 you’ve neverand used a database before, have access to Microsoft Office, and are looking for a good Chapter learning 13tool, - Making AccessMultimedia might be aMagic good candidate. Unlike the databases developed with database experts in<br /> <br /> mind, Access is designed to be helpful it plays nicely with other Office products. Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into and Youruser-friendly; HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Chances are you’ll eventually build a Web site database using MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, or another (more powerful) database product. Because Access is so user-friendly, it tends to be slower than other Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox databases and not as robust. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter - Creating User aInterface Tricks18 of the Trade aIfGreat you have legacy Access database and you want to give others access to it via Part - The Part Tens the VI Web, you canofuse Microsoft’s<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Active Server Pages (ASP) to do so, as discussed later in this chapter.<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> To learn about Microsoft Chapter 20more - Ten HTML Do’s andAccess, Don’ts visit www.microsoft.com/office/ access/. Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> The big Oracle, Appendix A boys: - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Sybase, and Microsoft SQL Server<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Beyond MySQL and Access (and others in the small- to medium-size application world) are the big boys: Oracle, Sybase, and Microsoft SQL Server — to name three of the most popular and well known. These Index are the most powerful and versatile databases money can buy, and it usually takes quite a bit of money to Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition buy them. Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade The importance of good database design<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> you’ve never worked with databases before and you’re ready to try your hand at Access, MySQL, or List ofIfSidebars<br /> <br /> another lighter-duty database, be sure to spend some time getting a handle on good database design. Although you must (obviously) learn how to create and manage databases, you’ll find that the actual database design is at least as important as whether you can get the thing up and running in the first place. Database design refers to the way in which you organize that data in the database. You want your organization to make sense from a data perspective, which isn’t always the same as from a human perspective. For instance, if you think of a person’s name, you most likely think of first name, middle<br /> <br /> name, and last name as a whole entity. However, when you put together a database, you want to keep 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition each of thoseHTML names in its own, separate field — doing so gives you more flexibility for searching. by Ed Tittel Natanya Pitts(which may returnISBN:0764519956 Instead of searching for and a generic name more names than you want to sift through), John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) you can search by first name, last name, middle name, or by some combination of the three. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with graphics,design and animation, stepSeveral general principles of a frames, good database are worththis remembering. A good database by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Makes data as useful and accessible as possible to computer systems — not necessarily to people, unless they know how to use those systems to best advantage.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For 4th Edition Is Dummies, generic enough to accommodate new types of data. Introduction<br /> <br /> Is specific enough to manage the details Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> of your data efficiently.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Should be extensible so it can grow and change with your data needs. If you know (for example) - HTML at Work on the Web that presently you need only track products from one manufacturer — but may one day need to Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page track products from several — it makes sense to prepare the database now to manage multiple Part II - Getting Started with HTML manufacturers later. Chapter 2<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter The 5 resources - Linkingattothe Online end Resources of this chapter include books and Web sites that can give you a good look at<br /> <br /> database-design techniques. Keep in mind, however, that no matter how much you read about good Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images database design, eventually youFormatting have to start creating and working with actual databases; there’s no Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with substitute real-world experience. Part III - Takingfor HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms These databases feature the following:<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Complete security Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting Immediate recovery from crashes Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic using transaction rollback (a feature that restores a database to the<br /> <br /> way it was right before the crash) - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 suites - How of HTML Relates Other Markup Languages Entire plug-ins andtoapplications that integrate seamlessly Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter All16 the tools - Creating you need an HTML to create Toolbox and manage huge databases Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Remember If you’re just starting out with databases, remember that these products are not designed as Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface learning tools. Their complexity and industrial-strength features are more appropriate to invest in when you Part VI - The Part of Tens need to build a large, robust database. Even then, the best advice we can give you is not to fork over the Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs big bucks until you’ve consulted with database- and Web- development experts to determine the best Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts collection of technology to meet your needs. If you’re even thinking about buying Oracle (for example) or Part VII - Appendixes integrating a Web site with an Oracle database, professional help is indispensable. Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML Character Codes To learnBmore about Oracle databases, visit www.oracle.com. Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> To learn more about Sybase databases, visit www.sybase.com. Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> To learn more about Microsoft SQL Server, visit www.microsoft.com/sql/default.asp.<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Instructions embedded in your HTML pages<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Yes, it’s true — HTML doesn’t include a single element or attribute for querying a database. (Skim Appendix A, the complete listing of elements and attributes in HTML 4.01, if you don’t believe us.) There’s no mention of the word database anywhere in there. Zip. Zilch. Zero. Nada. Even so, you have to get those instructions for working with a database into your HTML somehow. The typical way is to manage all database interaction through a programming or scripting language in conjunction with the HTML in your Web pages. The scripting sits right in your HTML page, and some of it may sit in other scripts that run on your Web server.<br /> <br /> The good news isHTML that you don’t have to 4th create these scripts yourself. Instead, you can choose from a 4 for Dummies, Edition variety of Web-development or Web-application languages — or is that solutions? — the buzz-words for ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts these languages John seemWiley to change almost daily. Regardless of nomenclature, all such languages have one & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) thing in common: They help you extend the functionality of your Web page way beyond what HTML can Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site provide. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Tip If you suspect that these languages — and some others covered in the book, such as JavaScript (Chapter 12) and CGI (covered in this chapter) — might just all work together, provided you can guide the Table of Contents display with HTML markup, you’re right! This approach can create feature-rich Web sites that border on HTML software 4 Forapplications. Dummies, 4th Imagine Edition a complicated Web site that manages customers, takes orders, directs shipping, and uses all these technologies, along with database connectivity, to take Web sites far beyond Introduction simple text-and-image-driven pages. (But will it make coffee . . . ?) Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter PHP 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Remember The next three sections provide an overview of the most popular Web- application Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web development languages. They are intended to give you an overview of what your options are, not present Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page an exhaustive list. The list of resources at the end of the chapter will point you toward Web sites and books Part II - Getting Started with HTML that cover other Web development options and solutions.<br /> <br /> Chapter PHP (sort 7 of - a Top redundant Off Your Page acronym with that Formatting stands for PHP: Hypertext Preprocessor) uses a set of custom<br /> <br /> tagsIII that begin with end with ?> Part - Taking HTML<? toand the Next Level<br /> <br /> that you embed into your HTML. When a user requests a Web page, a8PHP processor Chapter - HTML Tableson the Web server interprets the tags, does things like connects to a database or checks9the -date and time, and then replaces the PHP tags with the results of the instructions. If the Chapter HTML Frames instructions that the PHP processor query the database for all users named John Doe, the Chapter 10 -request HTML Forms processor does that, andwith thenOther replaces the request in the HTML with the actual results of the request. Part IV - Extending HTML Technologies Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> For example, this HTML uses the PHP echo() function and the HTTP_USER_AGENT variable, along with Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting some HTML, to print the name of the browser (formally called a user agent) that the person viewing the Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic PHP-enabled page is using: <html> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages <head> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site <title>A simple PHP example</title> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox </head> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface <body> Part VI<p>Hello. - The Part of Tens You<br /> <br /> are viewing this page with<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 <?php - Ten Ways Exterminate Web Bugs echoto $_SERVER["HTTP_USER_AGENT"]; ?>. Chapter</p> 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part</body> VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags </html> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Technical Stuff And now for some superfluous, geeky information<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Message to the geekiest readers of this book (that is, those with a little background in programming): You can integrate ASP.NET with Visual Basic or other Windows applications, and you can integrate List of Tables JSP with Java applications. This means you can create faster, more powerful applications optimized List of Listings for a particular operating system in Visual Basic, C++, or Java and use either ASP.NET or JSP to take List of Sidebars the information from those applications and feed it to your Web page. (If you have no idea what you have just read, you obviously go out and have fun on Saturday nights.) List of Figures<br /> <br /> When the Web server receives a request for the HTML page, it passes it off to the PHP application that evaluates <?php echo $_SERVER["HTTP_USER_AGENT"]; ?><br /> <br /> to get the name of the Web and4th then replaces the function with the actual name of the browser. HTML 4 forbrowser Dummies, Edition The PHP application passes the HTML page back to the Web ISBN:0764519956 server, which in turn, sends it to the Web by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts browser. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Remember Some JavaScript commands embedded in animation, HTML pages especially designed for the or one loaded with frames, graphics, and this are stepbrowser to interpret and use the you page downloaded. by-step bookafter will put onisthe right track. PHP tags, on the other hand, are intended to be evaluated and be replaced by the PHP application long before the HTML page even makes its way to the Web browser. Browsers don’t understand PHP elements; therefore, the server must process those Table of Contents elements first. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> If the user who requested this page were using Netscape Navigator 4.5 on a Macintosh, the results of this Introduction HTML/PHP combination be:Environment Part I - Meeting HTML in Itswould Natural Chapter 1 You - The Least You Needthis to Know aboutwith HTML Mozilla/4.5 and the Web Hello. are viewing page (Macintosh; I; PPC). Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Tip Obviously, this example is HTML very simplistic and doesn’t include any database calls. However, PHP uses Chapter 3 - Creating Your First Page this II exact sameStarted methodology to query Part - Getting with HTML gravy. 4 Chapter<br /> <br /> databases. After you know PHP syntax and some SQL, the rest is<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources PHP is an open-source Web-development application that runs on just about any operating system. You<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 it -used Finding Using but Images often find withand MySQL, you can use it with just about any database. Of course, having some Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting programming experience is a definite plus if you’re going to use PHP, but it’s a good option if you’re just Part III - Taking HTML to the beginning to experiment withNext WebLevel applications.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> You can get the goods on PHP at www.php.net.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 - and HTML JSP Frames ASP.NET Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> ASP.NET is Microsoft’s language; Part IV - Extending HTML Web-application with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> JSP is Sun’s Web- application language (based, of<br /> <br /> course,11 on Java). Both workwith much like PHP; their proprietary tag structures are different, but everything Chapter - Getting Stylish CSS else is the a user requests an ASP or JSP page from the server, the server hands the page Chapter 12 same. - HTMLWhen and Scripting<br /> <br /> to the ASP -orMaking JSP processor. Then the processor interprets the custom codes, makes any calls to Multimedia Magic databases and other applications, replaces the custom codes with text and markup, and sends the page to Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML the Web server to pass along to the Web browser. (Busy, busy, busy.) Chapter 13 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part - From Web Page to Web Site TheVASP.NET processor isn’t free<br /> <br /> (as you might imagine); however, JSP processors from Sun and other<br /> <br /> Chapter Creating for an HTML Toolbox runs best on Microsoft servers (no surprise there), but can run on vendors16 are-available free. ASP.NET Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Unix and its variations. JSP runs on Presence both Windows and Unix servers with nearly equal ease. Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Tip Do it yourself or hire an expert?<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> By now-you might have noticed that integrating a database with your HTML pages can be a little Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts complex. As we mentioned at the beginning of the chapter, you’ll need to acquire some expertise to Part VII - Appendixes make databases play well with your HTML. So the question becomes, when should you hire an expert Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags to do your Web development for you? There is no straightforward answer, but in general, you should Appendix B - HTML Character Codes consider hiring an expert if you don’t know much about programming or databases and need to build a Appendix C - Glossary mission-critical Web site. Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> CheatItSheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th short Edition may seem less expensive in the term to invest some time and master all the related List oftechnologies Figures yourself — but the inevitable beginner’s mistakes can prevent your site from working the<br /> <br /> you’d like it to, and may not keep it from crashing frequently. However, if you’re looking to build a List ofway Tables List ofstandard Listings application — such as an online store or other e-commerce endeavor — many hosting List ofproviders Sidebars provide access to applications they have already built for the purpose, and are running for a<br /> <br /> monthly fee. That option means that maybe you can have your site up and running quickly, without learning the details of the technologies yourself, and without having to pay up front for a developer (or team of developers) to build it. Check it out. The downside to this approach is that you have to live with the functionality that the application comes with; you can’t customize it. So, before you make your decision, carefully evaluate what the application offers; be sure it meets your needs adequately. If it doesn’t, struggling to make do with the application may make you wish you had built one from scratch to begin with.<br /> <br /> forputting Dummies, 4th a Edition If, of course, HTML you’re4just together small Web site for fun (or have some time to dig into new ISBN:0764519956 bythen Ed Tittel Natanya technologies), by alland means takePitts the time to acquire these skills for yourself. They will be useful John Wiley Sons © 2003 pages) in the long run, and you &can build an (408 application that fits you to a tee. You might consider having a professional Whether help you your with goal the design, butaonce youtext-oriented have a goodWeb design, is to build simple, site you may have the time and or one with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepenergy to finish the loaded implementation yourself. by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents To learn more about ASP.NET, visit www.microsoft.com/net/. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> To learn more about JSP, visit http://java.sun.com/products/jsp/. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web A connection between your Web server and the database<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter - Creating First HTML A Web 3server handlesYour all requests forPage Web pages and other resources from outside users and from your Part II -pages Gettingthemselves. Started withIf HTML HTML an HTML page asks<br /> <br /> for an image, the server serves it up. If an HTML page<br /> <br /> Chapter asks for4 an -audio Structuring file, theYour server HTML serves Documents it up. If an HTML page asks for data from a database, however,<br /> <br /> the server some guidance. Serving images and media are part of what a Web server is designed to Chapter 5 needs - Linking to Online Resources do. Serving connections is a whole other kettle of fish. Chapter 6 -database Finding and Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> To help your Web server (and consequently your HTML) make a connection to the database and fetch data from it, you must have an application that runs on the Web server that can process requests from the Chapter 8 - HTML Tables PHP, ASP, JSP, or other custom tags you write into your Web pages. As we mention in the previous Chapter 9 - HTML Frames section, PHP, ASP, and JSP processors interpret the custom tags you use to add commands to HTML. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms For those processors to interact with the database, you need a database connection, usually an Open Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Database Connection (ODBC). Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter Every database 12 - HTML hasand small Scripting programs called drivers that act as connectors, working with the various Web-<br /> <br /> application so the main processor can connect to the database. When you’re choosing a WebChapter 13 -processors Making Multimedia Magic application beasure it hasinto a driver for your database of choice. Chances are you’ll find Chapter 14 -language, Integrating Database Your available HTML what you but it doesn’t hurt double-check. Chapter 15 need, - How HTML Relates to to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 forSupport Dummies, 4th Edition Finding Database from Your ISP or IT Department by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> As you get ready John to integrate database intopages) your HTML with PHP, ASP, JSP, or some other WebWiley & aSons © 2003 (408 application language, take the time to find out your ISP (or Web department) actually supports the Whether your goal is to build a whether simple, text-oriented site database and language you plan to use. (Details, details . . . ) or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Remember You need to have a processor and a database driver available on your Web server to add database commands to your HTML — and to have those commands translated in the queries that go to Table of Contents the database. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Although most ISPs let you put just about any collection of text, images, and other media files on your Introduction Web manyHTML haveinstrict rules about what applications Part I -site, Meeting Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> and databases you can use. Databases require<br /> <br /> maintenance, andLeast applications up memory and and processor speed. Chances are you won’t have Chapter 1 - The You Needsuck to Know about HTML the Web access2to your Webatserver if an manages your application and database; you’ll need to rely on the Chapter - HTML Work on theISP Web tech support staff of the ISP to do it. Make Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page sure they can and will. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Tip Many ISPs now offer MySQL and PHP support; some even offer JSP and other database support. If Structuring Your HTML Documents you want to-use a database in tandem with a Web- application language, check with the folks at your ISP Chapter 5 Linkingthey’ll to Online Resources first to see whether let you use the ones you have in mind. If your ISP doesn’t have the support you Chapter 6 Finding and Using need, you may have to changeImages ISPs. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> If you’re workingHTML on ato Web hosted Part III - Taking the server Next Level<br /> <br /> by your company’s internal IT department, work with them to find out what databases and languages they’re willing to support. It won’t do you any good to choose a Chapter 8 - HTML Tables JSP/MySQL solution if your entire IT department runs on Microsoft and wants you to use an ASP/SQL Chapter 9 - HTML Frames server solution instead. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Find Out More by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> This chapter outlines basic options and issues Johnthe Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) associated with connecting a database to your HTML pages. The moreWhether ambitious your vision for an pairing, more you’ll need to know about your goal is to build aHTML-database simple, text-oriented Webthe site what you’re getting yourself into before you, uh, get yourself into it. To find out or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- more about databases and book will put on the Web right track. Web applications,by-step you can consult theyou following sites and books (all books published by Wiley Publishing, Inc.): Table of Contents resources on databases: Builder.com’s HTML http://builder.com.com/builder/sub_area.jhtml?id=w108 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> programming scripting resources: Part IBuilder.com’s - Meeting HTML in Its Naturaland Environment http://builder.cnet.com/webbuilding/0-3882.html Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Webmonkey’s ASP resources: - Creating Your First HTML Page http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/programming/asp/<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring HTML Documents Webmonkey’s PHP Your resources: Chapter http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/programming/php/ 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Webmonkey’s Chapter 7 - Top OffDatabase Your Pageresources: with Formatting http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/backend/databases/ Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables ASP.NET For Dummies by Bill Hatfield<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter JavaServer 10 - HTML Pages Forms For Dummies by Mac Rinehart Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> SQL Dummies by Allen G. Taylor Chapter 11 For - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting MySQL/PHP Database Applications, 2nd Edition, by Jay Greenspan and Brad Bulger<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter FileMaker 14 - Integrating Pro 6 Bible a Database by Steveninto A. Your Schwartz HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> YourPage Visual Blueprint Part VMySQL: - From Web to Web Site<br /> <br /> for Creating Open Source Databases by Michael Moncur<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox PHP Bible, 2nd Edition, by Tim Converse and Joyce Park<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter MySQL 18 - Bible Creating by Steve a Great Suehring User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> SQL Crash Course by Allen G. Taylor Chapter 19 Weekend - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts MySQL- Weekend Crash Course by Jay Greenspan<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML 4 Tags PHPA and MySQL For Dummies by Janet Valade Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 15: 4How HTML Relates ISBN:0764519956 to Other Markup by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Languages<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> In This Chapter Table of Contents<br /> <br /> the descendants of HTML HTML Tracing 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Telling XML apart from XHTML<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Contemplating a change to XHTML Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Getting from the HTML Tidy utility Chapter 3 -XHTML Creatingautomatically Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> HTML is a great and wonderful thing — after all, it’s the cornerstone of Web pages and has been - Structuring Your HTML Documents instrumental in making the Web a prime communications medium. However, HTML does have its Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources limitations (as you’ve no doubt begun to notice as you create and maintain your own Web pages). Chapter 4 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 - of Top Off Your Page with Formatting At the heart these limitations is the finite collection of elements and attributes included in the HTML Part III - Taking HTML to theHTML Next Level specification. Even though has evolved<br /> <br /> over time, and additional elements and attributes have been<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML Tables for style sheets, no way can HTML possibly provide every element or attribute added,8along with support Chapter 9 it -toHTML you’d like have.Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> HTML designed to describe text-based documents Part IV -was Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> built primarily of paragraphs, headings, lists, and similar elements, and it does that very well. But there’s lots of other kinds of data, such as manufacturer ID Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS numbers, course titles, car parts, recipe ingredients and instructions, and financial data. The idea of using Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting text-based markup to describe that type of data (and a million other kinds) for the Web sure does make Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic sense, so it’s not surprising that in the past several years, the need for something different, more extensive, Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML more flexible, and more robust became clear. Enter XML. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Defining Extensibility by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The Extensible Markup Language is the descendent of the mother of all markup languages John Wiley & Sons(XML) © 2003 (408 pages) (literally), Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). SGML Web is a metalanguage, a language for Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site creating other markup languages. XHTML is a child of XML that recasts HTML in XML format. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Remember The HTML DTDs are written in SGML, which technically makes HTML an SGML vocabulary, but because HTML is a defined vocabulary with a limited set of elements, it doesn't contain any of SGML's Table of Contents extensibility features. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Here are the differences among HTML, XML, and XHTML, in a nutshell: Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> HTML: Designed for describing a specific kind of data (text-based), HTML defines the appearance of - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web text and embedded objects, such as images, ensuring a consistency in data description that browsers Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web can predict and work with. In plain-vanilla HTML markup, a heading is always a heading, and that Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page heading generally looks a certain way in most browsers. The problem is that HTML handles a finite Part II - Getting Started with HTML number of elements and attributes, yet there are infinite kinds of data people want to include on Web Chapter 4 pages. - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 1<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter XML: 6 The - Finding best way andtoUsing thinkImages of XML is as a set of rules for defining data. What makes XML extensible<br /> <br /> is the that, long as you the rules, you can write markup to define data of any type for any Chapter 7 fact - Top Offas Your Page withfollow Formatting kind of output. (Display on the Web Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> is one of a million kinds of output to choose from.) You're in the driver's seat, defining elements and attributes as determined by the needs of your particular project, Chapter 8 - HTML Tables and you can link your markup to just about any program imaginable. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> XHTML: A reworked version of HTML 4 in XML syntax, XHTML is HTML, The Next Generation. With XHTML, you can use XML rules to define new elements and attributes for display. Theoretically, Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS XHTML is God's gift to the control freak: You can define any kind of data (you're only limited by your Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting imagination), and you can also control its visual display. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter Warning 14 Web - Integrating browsers a Database know andinto loveYour HTML, HTML so as long as you create Web pages that use good ol'<br /> <br /> HTML, 15 browsers know whattotoOther do with them.Languages Because XML, and by extension XHTML, allow you to Chapter - How will HTML Relates Markup create your own there's no Part V - From Webmarkup, Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> way a Web browser can be prepared to display your custom elements<br /> <br /> without16 a little help. If an youHTML wantToolbox to use XHTML to create your own markup, you'll need to use a style sheet Chapter - Creating to give 17 browsers the Up help they needPresence to display your own kind of markup. Chapter - Setting Your Online Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition XML: Extending Your Markup by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> XML is a pared-down SGML with percent of the complexity and 90 percent of its extensibility. John version Wiley & of Sons © 2003 (40810 pages) XML enables authors to create their own customized — andWeb thatsite means extensibility (which HTML, Whether your goal is to build a simple,markup text-oriented with its predefinedorelement set, can’t offer). Whereas HTML took some inspiration from SGML (and maybe one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepwill put you onis the right track. even gobbled up by-step some ofbook its aspects), XML a direct descendent of SGML — which means you can create any set of markup you like with XML — the sky’s the limit. Table Contents On of The Web The end-all, be-all resource for information related to XML is the W3C’s XML pages, at HTML 4 For Dummies, Another 4th Edition www.w3.org/XML. great site is O’Reilly and Seybold’s XML.com at www.xml.com. This chapter Introduction can scratch the surface of what XML is and why you should care — but these sites are chock-full of Part I - Meeting in Its Natural information andHTML resources to help Environment you get up to<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> speed quickly with XML.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Understanding how XML works<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - a Getting Started with XML HTMLcan To get good idea of what<br /> <br /> do that HTML can’t, think about the different items that might be<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 in -the Structuring Your Documents included description of aHTML product in a catalog. For each product you might have a name, a short and Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources long description, a picture, a vendor, a price, and more. HTML doesn’t really have elements that help you Chapter define a6 product’s - Finding price andany Using differently Images from the way you define its name. You can, however, use list items,<br /> <br /> even paragraphs, to Your define a product in HTML, like this: Chapter 7 - Top Off Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames <h2>Widget 2345</h2><br /> <br /> Chapter 10 widget - HTML Forms <p>This makes your business run more smoothly.</p> Part - Extending HTML with Other Technologies <a IV href="widget_2345_large.gif" rel="nofollow"><img<br /> <br /> Chapter <ol> 11<br /> <br /> src="widget_2345_small.gif"></a><br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <li><b>Product Number:</b> 11098</li> Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic <li><b>Price:</b> $129.95</li> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <li><b>Vendor:</b> Widgets International</li> Chapter <li><b>Available:</b> 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Ships Markup in 24 Languages hours</li> Part </ol> V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox Although HTML is to help post information about this widget on a Web page, it doesn’t tell much Chapter 17 this - Setting Upenough Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> else about the widget. If you tried to send this information to a business partner and use it to share data about - Creating a Great User Interface your widget stock, the markup wouldn’t tell him or her much about the data in the page. However, see how Part VI - The Part of Tens XML can make a difference in how the markup describes information: Chapter 18 Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix <product A - id="11098" HTML 4 Tags available="24"><br /> <br /> <name>Widget 2345</name> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes <description>This widget makes your business run more smoothly.</description> Appendix C - Glossary <image type="thumbnail" src="widget_2345_small.gif" /> Index <image src="widget_2345_large.gif /> Cheat Sheet - type="large" HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <price List of Figures currency="US">129.95</price> <vendor>WI</vendor> </product><br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars Notice how this XML tells you so much more about the product than the HTML did. That’s the beauty of XML<br /> <br /> — you create markup that perfectly describes your content. Remember Of course, a Web browser wouldn’t be able to make much of this XML because browsers can’t possibly know how to display every element anyone might come up with. Which leads us to an important bit of information about XML. XML’s primary focus is to define content, not display. When you work with XML, you’re working to carefully describe your content, without any regard for how it’s<br /> <br /> displayed. In fact, display of content isn’t even XML’s most significant use. XML has become the de facto HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition method for describing content so computers can share it. Web sites and other computer systems pass XMLISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya described data back and forth around thePitts Web because the XML tells those systems all they need to know to John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) work with the data after they’ve received it. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site orexpect, one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepTip As you might however, XML can be used with style sheets that help browsers and other clients by-step bookisn’t will everything put you on in thetoday’s right track. display your content. Display world, but it’s still something you often have to attend to. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> On the Web The XML FAQ at www.ucc.ie/xml/ is a great place to get more information about what XML is and what you can use it for.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Introducing DTDs - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> The beginnings of your XML endeavor must begin with the XML document. You have to carefully construct - Creating Your First HTML Page the elements to follow the markup syntax rules outlined by the XML specification. Then, you have to create a Part II - Getting Started with HTML Document Type Definition (DTD) that defines how these elements interact. Chapter 3 Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter All of the 5 XML - Linking behavioral to Online rules Resources are created in a DTD. With HTML, the DTD was created for you, which<br /> <br /> explains you have a Using limitedImages number of predefined elements to work with. With XML, however, you can Chapter 6 why - Finding and create your therefore, you create your own element set and the rules that govern that element set. Chapter 7 -own Top DTD; Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Tip This is where the extensibility comes in: You can create your own DTD — and therefore, your own - HTML Tables element set, which you can extend whenever you want.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 -get HTML Forms We cannot to the details of XML because that’s a whole other book — no, really, it is! (Check out XML Part - Extending with Otherby Technologies For IV Dummies, 3rd HTML Edition, written Ed Tittel and<br /> <br /> Natanya Pitts and published by Wiley Publishing, Inc.)<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition IntroducingHTML XHTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> XHTML is really just to adhere to the rules of the XML specification — the syntax rules for JohnHTML Wiley reworked & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) creating XML markup — and associated with the XHTML DTD (which is site nothing more than a list of what Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web elements and attributes you’ll find in XHTML). or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Tip The X in XHTML means that not only can you work with the predetermined element set defined in the XHTML DTD (the same elements found in HTML 4.0), but you can also add any other markup you want Table of Contents into the fray — as long as the markup follows XML rules. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> If XML is the markup of the future, and XHTML is HTML in XML syntax, then is there any good reason not Introduction to start using XHTML Well, probably Part I - Meeting HTML inimmediately? Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> yes — just as good reasons exist for seriously<br /> <br /> considering asYou yourNeed markup of choice Web pages (those are coming up shortly). Although, if Chapter 1 -XHTML The Least to Know about for HTML and the Web you decide switch, you’ll on findthe it’sWeb really not all that hard; however, jumping right into XHTML may not be Chapter 2 -toHTML at Work the best to accomplish yourHTML purposes. Chapter 3 way - Creating Your First Page It’s worth pausing a minute to consider. . . . Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Warning Avoiding mutant markup<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking Online Resources Although XHTMLto(and XML in general) enables you to extend the element set with your own markup, Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images always remember that some application somewhere (usually a Web browser when you talk about Chapter 7 or - Top Off Your with with Formatting HTML XHTML) hasPage to work your markup. Most Web browsers don’t know what to do with the Part III - Taking HTML to theattributes Next Level custom elements and that<br /> <br /> you might throw into the middle of an XHTML document.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Browsers may Tables read XHTML, but don’t expect them to read Joe’s Wildly Customized Mutant Markup Chapter Language. 9 - HTML Before Frames you start creating your own markup for fun and profit, you should take some time to<br /> <br /> get10 firmly grounded Chapter - HTML Formsin the purpose and rules of XML so you understand exactly how to get results. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Deciding whether toMagic switch to XHTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML XHTML151.0-and nextRelates versiontoofOther HTML are one and the same, and there’s been a lot of discussion Chapter Howthe HTML Markup Languages<br /> <br /> among WebWeb developers Part V - From Page torecently Web Siteabout<br /> <br /> the prudence of making an early switch from HTML to XHTML. In<br /> <br /> the end, you’ll be better served if you have some information to mull over while Chapter 16the- decision Creating is anyours, HTML but Toolbox you make decisions. Chapter 17 your - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface Tricks of the Trade Here’s a sketch of why switching to XHTML may make good sense:<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 - is Ten to of Exterminate Bugs so you might as well get used to it now. XHTML theWays future Web pageWeb markup, Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> If you’re using Web Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> pages as part of a larger XML solution (such as an online catalog, financialservices site, or content-management solution), you’ll want all your markup to adhere to the XML Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags specification. If it does, you can include other XML markup in your documents. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - leads Glossary XHTML to cleaner, better-structured Web pages than HTML does simply because the rules of Index XML demand well-structured documents. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Onofthe other hand, here are some reasons why you might want to hold off on switching to XHTML: List Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> Older Web browsers have some problems with documents that adhere to XHTML syntax. For example, in XHTML empty elements like the image element must have a slash (/) before the greater List of Sidebars than sign (>), and some old browsers (2.0 versions, mostly) have problems interpreting this markup. List of Listings<br /> <br /> You don’t really need to make the switch for your pages to work on the Web. If you have hundreds of Web pages already written in functioning HTML, there’s no reason to retrofit them with XHTML if your only goal is to present content on the Web. A good recommendation (going forward, at least) is to get comfortable using HTML — and to keep in mind that yet another level exists, beyond that known to ordinary HTML. When you’ve mastered HTML, you can<br /> <br /> begin experimenting with XHTML. The elements and attributes are the same, but the syntax of XHTML is a 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition bit more rigorousHTML (and less forgiving of markup errors). by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Tips for switching to XHTML Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> If you do decide to make book the switch XHTML, section by-step will puttoyou on thethis right track. includes a few practical rules to follow, each one basic to creating markup in XML. Remember All XML documents (and that means XHTML documents) must be well-formed — which Table of Contents means they adhere to allEdition the basic rules outlined here. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Introduction<br /> <br /> Rule 1: Always nest correctly<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Overlapping your elements is illegal in XML (and, hence, verboten in XHTML); you must nest your tags Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web correctly. Repeat the following mantra over and over again: What you open first, you close last. Part II - Getting with and HTML If you’re shakingStarted your head saying,<br /> <br /> Chapter one: 4<br /> <br /> “Huh?” here’s an example to clear things up — in fact, an incorrect<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources <p>What you open <em>first</em>, you must close <em>last</p></em> Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> SeeIII that offender in bold? don’t Part - Taking HTML to thePlease Next Level<br /> <br /> do that. The following is correct:<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables <p>What you open <em>first</em>, you must close <em>last</em></p> Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Take look HTML at both examples to make sure Part IVa- close Extending with Other Technologies Chapter 11<br /> <br /> you’re clear.<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Rule 2: Always include so-called “optional” ending tags - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 you - Making Magic to omit that ending </p> tag, such a deed is a no-no according to Although may beMultimedia sorely tempted Chapter 14 Integrating a Database Your the XML Commandments. This ruleinto does notHTML include empty elements (which are forbidden to have a Chapter How HTML Relates closing15 tag,-as decreed in Rule to 6).Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> The current goesan something like this: If an element has a closing tag, whether optional or required in Chapter 16 - rule Creating HTML Toolbox HTML, 17 you -must include it in Online your XHTML markup. Chapter Setting Up Your Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> This is incorrect:<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> <ul> 19 Chapter<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs <li>list one and Don’ts Chapter 20 - Ten item HTML Do’s<br /> <br /> <li>list item Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> two </ul> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> This is correct:<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> <ul> <li>list item one</li> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <li>list item two</li> List of Figures </ul> Index<br /> <br /> List of Tables List of Listings Rule 3: Attribute<br /> <br /> values must always be quoted<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> This rule requires a little effort: Attribute values must always be quoted. You can use both single (‘) or double (“) quotation marks. It doesn’t matter which ones you choose, as long as you include them. (And, so you don’t confuse people who view your source code, be consistent and use one or the other.) This is incorrect: <colgroup span=40 width=15> ...<br /> <br /> </colgroup> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) <colgroup span="40" width="15"> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site ... </colgroup> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> This is correct:<br /> <br /> Rule 4: All element and attribute names must be lowercase Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Unlike HTML, XML and HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th XHTML Edition are case-sensitive. For this reason, you must always use lowercase when naming elements and attributes. This rule doesn’t apply to attribute values — only attribute names and element names. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web This is 1incorrect: Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <INPUT TYPE="CHECKBOX" NAME="PET" VALUE="CAT"><br /> <br /> Part Getting Started with HTML ThisIIis- correct:<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> <input type="CHECKBOX" name="PET" value="CAT"><br /> <br /> Chapter 6 Rule 5: Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images pairs cannot stand alone Attribute name-value - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part In HTML, III - Taking you find HTML a couple to the Next of instances Level<br /> <br /> of attributes as standalone text strings, such as compact or<br /> <br /> checked. strings are not allowed in XML. You can work around this problem by setting Chapter 8 These - HTMLstandalone Tables standalone as equal to themselves. Silly? Sure, but it’s an XHTML rule — and it works. Chapter 9 -attributes HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> This is incorrect:<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> <input value="CAT" checked> Chapter 11 type="CHECKBOX" - Getting Stylish with name="PET" CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> This is correct:<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic <input name="PET" value="CAT" checked="checked"> Chapter 14 type="CHECKBOX" - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Rule 6: Empty elements must end their start tag with /><br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 - way Creating an HTML The easiest to comply withToolbox this rule is to include a /> at the end of all your empty elements. To Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presencethis construct, include a space before the trailing / and >. ensure that older browsers can understand Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part TipVIYou - The also Part want of Tens to avoid<br /> <br /> simply adding an end tag (which is legal but not always understood by older<br /> <br /> browsers). Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> This is incorrect:<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> <img src="graphic.gif"> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> This is correct:<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> <img src="graphic.gif" /> Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Note the space after the filename and before the trailing />.<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> List of Tables Rule 7: You<br /> <br /> must include a DOCTYPE declaration<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> The List ofDOCTYPE Sidebars declaration is what references the DTD. This is not required by browsers, but because you’re following XML rules in your XHTML markup, and because you want your page to validate against a DTD, you can’t leave it out. The declaration looks like this: <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> The DTD must appear before the root element — that is, the <html> tag — and must follow the previous syntax. Here’s the declaration broken down:<br /> <br /> Declaration keyword:<!DOCTYPE<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts Type of document: html<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Identifier keyword: WhetherPUBLIC your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Public identifier: "-//W3C//DTD XHTML Strict//EN" by-step book will put you on the 1.0 right track. DTD filename: "DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> The previous example one of the three DTDs you may choose from; here are the two other options: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thisEdition Introduction <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" Part"DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML Frameset//EN" Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and 1.0 the Web "DTD/xhtml1-frameset.dtd"> Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> The only difference between these other DTDs is the public identifier and filename. To read more about your DTD options, visit the XHTML specification at www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/#normative.<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources Rule 8: You must include an XHTML namespace<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 to - Top Off Your Page the withroot Formatting According the specification, element — <html> — must include the XML namespace that uses Part III - Taking HTML the Next Level an xmlns attribute. A to namespace is a collection<br /> <br /> of names used in XML documents as element types and<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 names. - HTML Tables is using the XHTML collection of names and therefore needs a namespace, attribute XHTML Chapter which looks 9 - like HTML this: Frames Chapter - HTML Forms <html10xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"></html> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS Tip Keeping markup clean with HTML Tidy - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> David early developer Chapter 13 Raggett, - Makingan Multimedia Magic of HTML (and an active contributor to the development of XHTML), wants help you out. Chapter 14 to - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages We all make mistakes when creating and editing HTML. With this in mind, Raggett created a simple tool to fix these mistakes automatically and tidy up sloppy editing into nicely laid-out markup. His tool is Chapter 16 HTML - Creating called Tidyan —HTML a freeToolbox utility offered on the W3C Web site. Luckily for us, Raggett added some Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online XHTML features to HTML Tidy;Presence now this tool takes a look at your HTML page, cleans it up, and then Chapter 18 -itCreating a Great User Interface outputs as XHTML. HTML Tidy can even help you identify where you need to pay further attention to Part VI - The Part Tens more accessible to people with disabilities. making your of pages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> To 20 read- more about Tidy, visit www.w3.org/People/Raggett/tidy. Chapter Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> The program is not currently a Windows program, unless you download the entire HTML kit for editing. If you’re familiar with DOS programs, feel free to download just HTML Tidy and get to work. If you’re Appendix B - HTML Character Codes like most of us who are spoiled by the Microsoft Windows interface, you may want to visit a Web front Appendix C - Glossary end created by Peter Wiggin. Visit the URL listed here Index(http://webreview.com/1999/07/16/feature/xhtml.cgi), enter your URL, and then see Cheatyour Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition page magically convert before your very eyes. Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Part V: From Web Page to Web ISBN:0764519956 Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> In This Part: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16: Creating an HTML Toolbox Table of Contents<br /> <br /> 17: Setting Your Online Presence HTML Chapter 4 For Dummies, 4th Up Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 18: Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> In this part . . .Your First HTML Page - Creating<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Part V is where we change focus from individual HTML documents (or Web pages) to the collections of - Structuring Your HTML Documents interlinked, interrelated HTML documents known as Web sites. Here we inspect the contents of a typical Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Web professional's HTML toolbox, and point out why you might find such tools useful. We also provide Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images some examples of how the toolbox functions in the real world. Next, we tackle the practical topics involved Chapter 7 Top Off Your Page with Formatting in creating a- Web presence online - what it takes to host, maintain, and update a Web site of your very Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level own. Whether your Web site serves as a personal hobbyhorse, a greeting to the world, or a managed, Chapter 8 - resource HTML Tables professional on the job, you'll find this information absolutely invaluable. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 16: 4Creating an HTML Toolbox ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Identifying what you need in your toolbox Table of Contents<br /> <br /> your4th favorite HTML editor HTML Discovering 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Authoring systems for the Web<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -aThe Least You Need to to Know HTML and the Web Adding graphics application yourabout toolbox Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Understanding essential utilities Web publishing Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTMLfor Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> HTML documents are made up of plain old text. To create one all you really need is a simple text editor, - Structuring Your HTML Documents such as Notepad - and in the beginning that was all a Web author had available to use. However, as the Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Web evolved, so did the tools used to create Web pages. Now there's so much more to Web authoring Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images that it's difficult to just use a simple text editor unless you don't care about graphics and HTML validation. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - passes Taking HTML to the Next Level As time and you become more<br /> <br /> comfortable with HTML, you'll build an HTML toolbox. This chapter<br /> <br /> Chapter is dedicated 8 - to HTML helping Tables you build that toolbox. From HTML authoring applications to FTP programs, this<br /> <br /> chapter9 arms you with what you need to know to make educated decisions about the tools you need. Chapter - HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> In addition to an HTML editor, you need an FTP tool to upload files to a Web server, and specific software tools for validation and maintenance so you can check your pages twice and keep them shipshape. This Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS chapter reviews and recommends the latest HTML authoring tools - as well as other tools you'll find in any Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting professional Webmaster's well-stocked toolbox. Some of these tools may already be on your system Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic quietly waiting to help you create stupendous Web pages. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition What You Need by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The first step to building your& toolbox is identifying John Wiley Sons © 2003 (408 pages) the essential components. Although an HTML editor may make your Web pages easier to create, it'ssimple, not necessarily the Web only site tool you need to publish and Whether your goal is to build a text-oriented maintain your Web site. You need an entire tool collection a Webmaster's or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-toolbox. by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> This chapter goes into detail about the types of tools you need, and we even go a little further by recommending our favorites. Here's the short version: Table of Contents<br /> <br /> editor: Keep in mind that two different kinds of HTML editors exist: helpers and WYSIWYG HTML HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition editors, which we describe in the following section. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Graphics applications: If you plan to use graphics in your Web pages, you need an application to - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web create and edit them.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 - Creating Your First Pageof comparing a document to a set of document rules, in this Validators: Validation is theHTML process Part II - Getting Started with HTML context a DTD. Typically, a document<br /> <br /> author creates an HTML document, submits it for validation,<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 uses - Structuring Your HTMLerrors, Documents and the report to identify correct those errors, and resubmit the document for validation. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Remember There are some occasions when breaking HTML rules is the only way to get your page Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images to render in older Web browsers. Although many browsers will render erroneous HTML, there are Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting reasons forHTML document and be Part III - Taking to the rules, Next Level<br /> <br /> warned that poorly defined HTML might produce unpredictable<br /> <br /> results.- HTML Tables Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 checkers: - HTML Frames Link The Web is based on the concept of linking; therefore, a broken link on your site can Chapter 10 HTML Forms be quite- embarrassing. Use a link checker before you publish your site (and routinely for Part IV - Extending HTML with Other maintenance) to verify that yourTechnologies users never<br /> <br /> get the dreaded 404 Object Not Found error<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS message. Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting FTP After your Web pages are created, validated, and checked in all applicable browsers, Chapter 13utilities: - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> you're to upload them to your WebHTML server. Until your pages are uploaded to a Web server, only Chapter 14 ready - Integrating a Database into Your you15can- see Chapter Howthem. HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> To find out more about ISPs that provide Web hosting, see Chapter 17.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Using Text HTML Editors in the Real World by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Text editors comeJohn in two flavors: helper The helper puts you in the driver’s seat; it has Wiley & Sons © 2003and (408 WYSIWYG. pages) fewer capabilities,Whether but it does the job. The WYSIWYG editor does everything your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site but your laundry. In reality, if you get serious about creating Web pages, you really won’t make a choice between the two flavors. You or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step bookit,will you on the right can have your cake and eat too.put Here’s some moretrack. information: The helper editor: An HTML helper does exactly what it sounds like: It helps you create HTML; it Table of Contents doesn’t do all the work for you. Usually, a helper application displays “raw” HTML — tags and all HTML (shocking 4 For Dummies, Edition though4th this may seem) — and such tools often color tags to help you differentiate them Introduction from your content. Helpers usually include an HTML-aware spell checker that knows your tags aren’t Part Ijust - Meeting HTMLwords, in Its Natural Environment misspelled and helpers also incorporate<br /> <br /> other functionality to make HTML development<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - Themore Leastfun. YouInNeed to Know no about HTML and the Web is complete without a good HTML easier and our opinion, Webmaster’s toolbox Chapter helper. 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> The WYSIWYG editor: A WYSIWYG Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> editor creates HTML for you, shielding your delicate eyes from naked markup along the way. These tools look much like word processors or page-layout programs; Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents they’re designed to do quite a bit of the work for you. Chapter 6 - of Finding and Using Images editors can make your work easier and save hours of endless Tricks the Trade WYSIWYG Chapter 7 -—Top Offall, Your Page with Formatting coding after you do have a life, right? — but we recommend that you limit your use of a Part III - Taking HTML WYSIWYG editortotothe theNext initialLevel design<br /> <br /> stage. For example, you can use one to create a complex table<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables in under a minute, and use a helper to refine and tweak your HTML markup directly. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Finding an HTML HTML Editor by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Although this book explains how to ©create and maintain HTML pages with nothing more complicated than John Wiley & Sons 2003 (408 pages) a pocketknife andWhether a ball ofyour string, we don't think you should snub allWeb HTML goal is to build a simple, text-oriented siteeditors. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> As mentioned in the previous youon have editors, and WYSIWYG editors can be divided into by-step book section, will put you the helper right track. two categories. Personally, we think that editors are just tools, and not substitutes for knowledge. Don't be fooled by editors with a lot of bells and whistles. Here are a few tips on how to locate and choose a good Table of Contents editor. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> At the very least, an HTML editor needs to Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Be easy to understand and use.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 - with HTMLHTML at Work Comply 4. on the Web Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Upgrade HTMLwith changes. Part II - Gettingas Started HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Support image map creation.<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 -local Finding Images Check linksand forUsing accuracy. Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Support HTML validation andLevel spell Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> checking.<br /> <br /> Enable you to see and tweak your HTML code directly.<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 - HTML Forms An exceptional HTML editor also Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Provides site map information. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Provides pixel-level control over object and text placement.<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 - Integrating Database into Your HTML Supports style-sheeta creation. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Extensible Language Part VSupports - From Web Page to Markup Web Site Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> (XML).<br /> <br /> Accommodates Common Gateway Interface (CGI) scripts, Java applets, and scripting.<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 -the Creating a Great User Interface Tip Often best, most popular, and least expensive HTML editor for a particular platform is neither a Part VI -nor TheaPart of Tens helper WYSIWYG<br /> <br /> editor - it may be a combination of the two. Keep an eye out as you review the<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 for - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs selections each platform in this category; editors and combination editor/helpers may be listed. Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Warning Not all WYSIWYG Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> editors can serve as good learning tools. Be warned: If you're using a<br /> <br /> product Asuch as FrontPage Appendix - HTML 4 Tags that doesn't create the cleanest code, don't emulate its example. Messy markup Bis a- bad habit that leads only to confusion, frustration, and (pardon the expression) awful Appendix HTML Character Codes language. Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Dreamweaver<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> In our opinion, Dreamweaver is the best WYSIWYG Web development tool for both Macintosh and PC List of Tables<br /> <br /> systems - and most job postings support this assertion. As an all-in-one product, supporting Web site creation, maintenance, and content management, Dreamweaver is an impressive product used by most List of Sidebars Web developers. Dreamweaver has continued to evolve since Macromedia first introduced the product in 1997. Since then, Macromedia has been committed to continued development of this product. The most recent version of the product is called Dreamweaver MX. List of Listings<br /> <br /> Tip Where to go for more information Although the different tools listed here are of high quality and have a place in many Web- masters' toolboxes, your opinions and experience may differ - no, as hard as we try, we can't read your mind<br /> <br /> (yet). If you find yourself still looking for bliss, many Web sites offer more information on the latest HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Web-page-development tools. For example, try TUCOWS - The Ultimate Collection of Winsock ISBN:0764519956 Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts Software - atby www.tucows.com. The developers of the TUCOWS site review all the tools they list, John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) and if a tool isn't up to snuff, it doesn't get listed; it's as simple as that. TUCOWS has been around for your goal to build simple, text-oriented Web site a long time - Whether in Web years - andis it's nevera led us astray. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade The one-two punch of using a WYSIWYG editor with a helper editor Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> After you start an HTML document, you can open it in both Dreamweaver and HomeSite (or BBEdit), and the changes you make to your page in one program are automatically registered in the other. This Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment two-in-one combination is a direct reflection of what the pros have figured out: You don't need just one Chapter 1 The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web kind of -HTML editor - you need both. Finally, Dreamweaver and HomeSite (or BBEdit) create solid Chapter 2 that - HTML at by Work the Web HTML plays theon official HTML 4 rules so you don't have to worry about the quality of your Chapter 3 Creating Your First Page HTML. If you create code byHTML hand, Dreamweaver warns you that you made a mistake and corrects it Part II Getting Started with HTML for you if you choose. Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Dreamweaver MXOff marks turning because it belongs to a suite of products, Macromedia's Studio Chapter 7 - Top Your a Page with point Formatting MX, that work together to provide a full spectrum of Internet solutions. Studio MX includes Fireworks MX, Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Dreamweaver MX, Flash MX, ColdFusion MX, and Freehand 10. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9 Dreamweaver - HTML Frames Although is a WYSIWYG tool, it comes with a helper editor. If you're a PC user, you get Chapter 10 - HTML Forms helper editor that we discuss in detail later in the chapter. For Macintosh users, HomeSite, a feature-rich Part IV - Extending HTML Other Technologies Dreamweaver uses the with well-known and well-respected<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> BBEdit as its helper HTML editor.<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> We like12 Dreamweaver a handful of reasons, one of which is that it has an easy-to-follow-and-learn Chapter - HTML and for Scripting dialog box allows authors toMagic style Web pages using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) without knowing Chapter 13 that - Making Multimedia what a 14 style- rule is! Manya of the benefits of Dreamweaver stem from its sleek user interface and respect Chapter Integrating Database into Your HTML for clean Chapter 15 HTML. - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Creating an HTML document with Dreamweaver:<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> 1. Select FileÍNew. - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> Chapter The 18 -New Creating a Greatdialog User Interface Document box appears (as in Figure 16-1). Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 16-1: The New Document dialog box. 2.<br /> <br /> 2. Select Basic Page from the Category list and HTML from the Basic Page list and click Create. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John document Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) A basic HTML appears, ready for changes. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> 3. Add elements Dreamweaver's panelsand or animation, drop-down menus. or oneusing loaded with frames, graphics, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> For example, you can add a title by entering text in the Title text box in the Document toolbar (see Figure 16-2). Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Figure 16-2: Adding a title to your HTML document. - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic With all14 this-functionality, assured doesn't come cheap. Dreamweaver is priced in the Chapter Integrating arest Database intoDreamweaver Your HTML<br /> <br /> $300 range, price includes a HomeSite license, quality documentation, tutorials, and an all-around Chapter 15 - but Howthat HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages toolVthat you Web can use aspects Part - From Pagefor tomany Web Site<br /> <br /> of Web development. Also, Macromedia is loyal to its customers. After you buy a copy of Dreamweaver, upgrades are available at lower cost. In addition, you have all the Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox power of an established multimedia company behind the product. What more can you ask for? Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter Creating a Great User Interface To find18 out -more about Dreamweaver, visit the Macromedia Web site at Part VI - The Part of Tens www.macromedia.com/software/dreamweaver.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> FrontPage<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> FrontPage 2002 is the newest version of the Microsoft commercial Web-authoring system for Windows<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML 95/98/2000/XP andCharacter WindowsCodes NT/2000 or later. Since Microsoft bought FrontPage from Vermeer Appendix C - Glossary Technologies Inc. in January 1996, FrontPage has become a premier personal Web-authoring,<br /> <br /> Index publishing, and maintenance tool for Windows users. As we predicted, this product has become the most Cheat Sheet HTML Dummies, 4th Edition widely used- tool of 4itsFor kind on the Internet. List of Figures<br /> <br /> FrontPage List of Tablesorganizes each Web site in its own project folder so you can develop and manage multiple sites. Enhanced drag-and-drop features let you drag Microsoft Office files into the FrontPage Explorer or List of Listings<br /> <br /> move hyperlinks, tables, and images within the FrontPage Editor. The Verify All Links feature automatically verifies that all hyperlinks are valid - within and outside your Web site. This feature even corrects all link errors within your site for you.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Tip FrontPage 2002 also supports database connectivity, ActiveX controls, Java applets, VBScript and JavaScript creation and insertion, tables, frames, and HTML 4.0, plus the Microsoft version of Dynamic HTML. Breathe! As if all this wasn't enough, the FrontPage Bonus Pack includes an application for creating and editing<br /> <br /> graphics for your Web documents. The Bonus Pack includes more than 500 tools and effects, and works HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition with PhotoShop-compatible plug-in products, such as Kai's Power Tools from MetaTools, Inc. Image ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and600 Natanya Pitts Web-ready images. Composer includes more than royalty-free You may also download the free John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Microsoft GIF Animator to animate your own Image Composer images and make your Web site really Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site jump on the screen. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> by-step book will put you The FrontPage interface also enables youontothe useright any track. document created with Microsoft Office 97 or 2000 because it works like other Office applications. FrontPage uses the shared spell checker, global Find and Replace, and the Microsoft thesaurus. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Now, you can't quite say 'FrontPage, create my Web site' into your PC's microphone, walk off, have an<br /> <br /> Introduction espresso, and come back to view the finished work. But, if you apply the knowledge of planning and Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural in Environment preparation from earlier chapters this book, you<br /> <br /> should be able to have a decent Web site created,<br /> <br /> Chapter The Least Knowserver aboutinHTML tested, 1and -running on You yourNeed ISP'stoWeb little and timethe by Web using FrontPage. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> There are disadvantages to using FrontPage, however. To begin with, the HTML markup left in the Chapter 3 a- few Creating Your First HTML Page wake a FrontPage Part II of - Getting Startedexperience with HTML can<br /> <br /> leave even the savviest of Web gurus scratching their heads. If you're a developer who likes to tweak a few points by hand using your favorite text editor before your Web Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents page goes live, you might be disappointed with FrontPage. However, if you don't mind messy HTML, you'll Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources be fine using FrontPage! Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Another notable disadvantage also deals with its output. FrontPage, being a Microsoft product, can be viewed using any version of Internet Explorer; however, it's not as friendly to non-Microsoft browsers. If you Chapter - HTML Tables be sure to check your work in multiple browsers before uploading your choose8to use FrontPage, Chapter 9 HTML Frames documents. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> FrontPage is not quite pricey as Technologies Dreamweaver, Part IV - Extending HTMLas with Other<br /> <br /> but you can expect to pay just under $200 for a single<br /> <br /> user license. With that price,with comes Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish CSS all the goodies and functionality you would expect of a Microsoft product. be warned that you will want to validate your pages before you upload them for all the world Chapter 12Just - HTML and Scripting to see. 13 Chapter<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> For more information about FrontPage 2002 and to take an interactive tour of the interface, check out the<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 Web - How Relates to Other Markup Languages Microsoft siteHTML at www.microsoft.com/frontpage. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> HomeSite - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> HomeSite 5 is the newest version of this software and the first non-WYSIWYG editor for us to look at. It has quickly become the text editor of choice for Windows users. This editor does not have full WYSIWYG Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs capabilities and it does require HTML knowledge. However, it provides assistance at every step. If you Chapter 20 is - the Ten editor HTML used Do’s and Don’ts recall, this for the Windows version of Dreamweaver. So, if you have Dreamweaver, you Part VII - Appendixes also have HomeSite. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> We like B the-easy-to-use interface, Appendix HTML Character Codesshown in Figure 16-3. Even with a simple interface, HomeSite is an extremely Appendix C feature-rich - Glossary HTML editor for the beginner and professional. Some of our favorite HomeSite features show why: Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> You can instantly get a browser view by clicking a tab.<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> List ofThe Tables HTML is color-coded to help you with your editing. List of Listings<br /> <br /> can drag-and-drop and access context menus with a simple right-click of the mouse. List ofYou Sidebars You have access to an integrated spell checker, as well as global search and replace tools that check your spelling and update entire projects, folders, and files simultaneously. You can use the image and thumbnail viewers to browse image libraries directly in your editor. You can customize the toolbars and menus to suit your individual needs.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 -16-3: Structuring Your HTML Documents Figure HomeSite's interface displaying a blank HTML document. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> As a further extensive online help with accessing documentation on HTML and Chapter 6 - bonus, FindingHomeSite and Using offers Images other popular scripting languages. result is one impressive system. But there's even more. HomeSite Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with The Formatting helps with your Part IIIyou - Taking HTMLproject to the management, Next Level<br /> <br /> provides for link verification, internally validates your HTML, and opens and uploads your files to your remote Web server. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9 - HTML Framesyou can purchase HomeSite for about $100. But remember, if you have As a standalone product, Chapter 10 HTML Forms Dreamweaver, you already have HomeSite. If you're a Windows user, we highly recommend this editor. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> To learn aboutStylish HomeSite, visit the Macromedia Web site at Chapter 11more - Getting with CSS www.macromedia.com/software/homesite. Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> BBEdit - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> BBEdit is for Web the Mac users don't Part V - From Page(PC to Web Site<br /> <br /> have to listen! ), and like HomeSite, it's a favorite of Web developers.<br /> <br /> The only that these Web developers use a Macintosh computer. There are two versions of Chapter 16difference - Creatingis an HTML Toolbox BBEdit 17 to choose from: BBEdit and Presence BBEdit Lite. As its name suggests, BBEdit Lite is a limited version of Chapter - Setting Up Your Online the BBEdit comes in Interface the Macintosh version of the Dreamweaver MX suite, which we rave Chapter 18 package - Creatingthat a Great User about in this chapter. Part VI earlier - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> From the folks at Bare Bones Software, BBEdit Lite is a Macintosh text editor that comes complete with a set of HTML to make Web page development easier. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Webextensions Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts These HTML extensions for BBEdit Lite are quite extensive and provide a well-rounded HTML-authoring system. Tools of this kind can (for example) use an editor to open a standard text file and automatically Appendix HTML 4 Tags save theAfile- with HTML elements. The two sets of extensions for BBEdit Lite - BBEdit HTML Extensions by Appendix B HTML Character Codes Tools by Lindsay Davies - come with the editor so you don't have to do Charles Bellver and BBEdit HTML Appendix - Glossaryalong the way. any extraC installation Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> Although Lite doesn't include the functionality that its big brother BBEdit does, you find that using Cheat SheetBBEdit - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thallEdition BBEdit Lite gives you access to most, if not all, HTML authoring functions you're ever likely to need - even List of Figures for of the most complex Web pages. BBEdit Lite also addicts you to the BBEdit way of life, and we predict List Tables<br /> <br /> that soon you'll be using the full-blown version of BBEdit. It's all a conspiracy, didn't you know? Seriously though, to download a copy of BBEdit Lite, simply point your Web browser at www.barebones.com.<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> If you opt for the full version of BBEdit, you won't be disappointed. Although you aren't hidden from the markup - remember, BBEdit is not a WYSIWYG editor - BBEdit still makes it easy for you. BBEdit is another one of those all-in-one programs that enables you to create, validate, and upload a Web page using just a few clicks. Creating an HTML document is easy. By selecting FileÍNewÍHTML document, you're already on your way. When you've created a document shell, you can start adding elements by hand, or you can use BBEdit's<br /> <br /> Markup drop-down menu to add HTML elements such as lists, tables, and forms. If you're a Mac user, HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition dare we say this application is a must! by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Both BBEdit and John BBEdit Wiley Lite&can Sons be©found 2003 (408 at pages) www.barebones.com. Remember, if you have Dreamweaver forWhether the Mac,your yougoal already BBEdit. is to have build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the rightprocessors track. Warning Word and HTML<br /> <br /> If you're joined at the hip to Microsoft Word or Corel WordPerfect, you can try their built-in HTMLediting and site-management features. These features provide adequate HTML assistance but aren't HTML really 4 For in Dummies, 4th Edition with better standalone WYSIWYG Web development and HTML editing the same ballpark Introduction systems. If you already own one of these word-processing programs, however, their Web functionality Part Iis- free. Meeting Itsmay Natural ForHTML now, in you wantEnvironment to use your favorite one for text and for Web development. For Chapter 1 The Least You Need abouthas HTML and the Web example, Word 97/2000/XP to forKnow Windows a WYSIWYG editing window with a good number of Chapter 2 - HTML Work on the Web functions in its at toolbar. This program is adequate for a word processor turned Web document editor. Chapter 3 - Creating Your what First Microsoft HTML Pagewill do in the long-term with both Word 97/2000 and FrontPage However, who knows Part II - Getting Started HTML contending for the with role of Web document development systems.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents Why abouttothat now? If you own one, try it out for Web development. Just keep in mind that if Chapter 5 worry - Linking Online Resources<br /> <br /> you create HTML in a word processor, the HTML you get will not be 100-percent standard - resulting - Finding and Using Images in an erratic, clumsy Web page at best. If you have long documents that have been developed in a Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting particular word processor that need to be converted to HTML, doing a first-stage conversion in the Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level processor itself may be easier, but you will have to do any final clean-up and tweaking in a full-fledged Chapter 8 - HTML Tables HTML editor, and most likely you will have to tackle it by hand as well. Dreamweaver supports the Chapter 9 - HTML Frames importing of Word documents; however, even using Dreamweaver's cleanup tools, you will have to Chapter 10 - HTML Forms edit the document by hand before it's ready for the Web. Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11the- following Getting Stylish withfurther CSS information on Microsoft Word 97/2000 for Windows, and Corel See sites for Chapter WordPerfect 12 - HTML8.0 and forScripting Windows, respectively: Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML www.microsoft.com/office Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages www.corel.com/Office2000/index.htm Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> GoLive<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter Recently, 20 Adobe - Ten HTML has been Do’sgiving and Don’ts Macromedia a run for its money in the Web development department, Part andVII GoLive - Appendixes is a part<br /> <br /> of that game. GoLive doesn't have the popularity among seasoned developers;<br /> <br /> however,A it's- gaining Appendix HTML 4 popularity. Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> If you're thinking about delving into the world of WYSIWYG editors, give some consideration to GoLive 6. Although we prefer BBEdit or HomeSite, this is a reputable WYSIWYG editor. So here's the skinny on Index GoLive. Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> List of Figures GoLive, like Dreamweaver, attempts to do it all. It not only creates dazzling pages, but it can also handle List of Tables multiple display options (for example, handheld devices), site management, maintenance, and even List multimedia. of ListingsOne of the features we like about GoLive is its easy site-creation wizard. Using Adobe's<br /> <br /> trademark floating windows, the site organization is always accessible as the main floater. You can use the List of Sidebars GoLive Site wizard to define basic characteristics about HTML documents (whether a single document or a collection), and then create a blueprint for your site structure. This functionality is similar to the storyboard used to design a Web site. The idea is to get a feel for how the site goes together and spot potential weaknesses in the design - on paper - before you have to wrestle with markup. This functionality serves a similar function, so you can get a good working sense of what you need before you start building the pages. (It makes sense; an architect wouldn't start on a house without a<br /> <br /> blueprint, right?)<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> byGoLive Ed Tittel Natanya You can purchase 6 and for just underPitts $400 for new users ISBN:0764519956 and just under $100 for an upgrade. It Johnfor Wiley Sons (408 features full support Mac&OS X,©as2003 well aspages) Windows XP, 2000, and 98. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> To read more about GoLive and see the interface in and action, visit the this Adobe Web site at or one loaded with frames, graphics, animation, stepwww.adobe.com/products/golive/overview.html. by-step book will put you on the right track. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Graphics Tools by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Graphics applications are beasts. marvelous things, but learning how to use them can be a John Wiley & SonsThey © 2003can (408do pages) bit overwhelmingWhether at first. We wish that we had the space to provide detailed your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site instructions for each product, but that would take an entire book for each product. However, we would like to introduce you to three or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. favorite tools. Tip We recommend that you also create text-only versions of your site to allow for complete accessibility. Table of Contents To read more about accessibility concerns, see Chapter 18. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Remember You might want to outsource your graphics work because graphics applications can be Introduction pricey and complicated; however, it's always good Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> to have a graphics program that you can use to tweak<br /> <br /> images1if need be. Chapter - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page Photoshop<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Photoshop a cross-platform Adobe product that can do just about anything you can think of. It's not Chapter 4 -isStructuring Your HTML Documents cheap; 5with-aLinking price tag reaching $600, you hope it could rebuild the earth if it had to. Well, it comes close Chapter to Online Resources to it. Photoshop has something for everyone. It can create simple Web graphics, complex slicing for Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images images7pulled together byPage tables, photography, and any other traditional graphic work that it was Chapter - Top Off Your withdigital Formatting firstIII designed Of course, thatLevel doesn't Part - Takingfor. HTML to the Next<br /> <br /> even begin to cover just what Photoshop can do.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> HTML Tables First things -first, Photoshop is for the pros. However, if you plan to get involved in serious Web graphics, it<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 be - HTML just might worthFrames the price tag because it's the best-respected graphics application on the market. Chapter 10 HTML Forms Employers expect their graphic artists to know Photoshop from top to bottom, and if you think you might be Part IV - Extending HTML with Technologies heading in that direction, you Other may want to give it<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> a whirl.<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Tip Because of the hefty price tag, we recommend downloading a 30-day trial version before you make Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting an actual It couldn't hurt and will make you an educated consumer. If you're ready to join the big Chapter 13 purchase. - Making Multimedia Magic leagues, out the Photoshop Desk Reference For Dummies , by Barbara Obermeier, with Chapter 14check - Integrating a Database All-in-One into Your HTML David Busch, and HTML published by to Wiley Publishing, Inc. This desk reference is packed with information on Chapter 15 - How Relates Other Markup Languages justVabout every tool known Part - From WebPhotoshop Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> to man.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16more - Creating an HTML Toolbox To learn about Photoshop, visit the Adobe Web site at www.adobe.com. Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> PaintShop Pro<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> We like PaintShop Pro because (at right around $100) it's a less expensive, PC-based alternative to Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Photoshop -that provides similar features. (There's no version for Mac users.) If you're just learning HTML, Part VII - Appendixes and want to add some graphics, PaintShop Pro is a more reasonable approach. You can do almost Appendix - HTML 4 TagsPro that would be needed for beginning or intermediate-level graphics editing. We anythingAwith PaintShop Appendix B HTML Character Codes highly recommend this product for Web authors who want to add images to their sites but have no desire Appendix - Glossary to makeCgraphic art their full-time living (or their fulltime hobby). Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> To learn more about PaintShop Pro, www.jasc.com. Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thvisit Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> Fireworks<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> Fireworks is a fairly young graphics program from Macromedia. It was designed specifically for Web List of Sidebars graphics, and should only be used to create and edit images for the Web. (Photoshop and PaintShop Pro handle every kind of image you can think of, but aren't dedicated, as Fireworks is, to Web graphics.) Because it's used only for the Web, its interface is less daunting and easier to use. Fireworks is designed to work hand in hand with Dreamweaver - and it does just that. With the new suite of products that make up Macromedia's Studio MX, Fireworks is one of the many products that work seamlessly together to develop complex Web sites with dazzling images. This is a mid-range product, great for smaller graphic projects destined for the Web.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 product, for Dummies, 4th Edition To learn more about this visit www.macromedia.com. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Link Checkers by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> If you think spelling errors embarrassing, here's something that's even worse: broken hyperlinks. John Wileyare & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Hyperlinks make Whether the Webyour whatgoal it is;isifto you have brokentext-oriented links on yourWeb site,site that's borderline blasphemous. build a simple, Seriously, if your or text promises a link to a great resource or page but produces one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- the dreaded 404 Object book will putit,you onend the up right track. Not Found errorby-step when users click you'll with disappointed visitors - who may never surf to your Web address again. Table of Contents Warning The worst broken link is one that points to a resource in your own pages. You can't be held HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition responsible for what 4th others do to their sites, but you are 100-percent accountable for your own site. Don't Introduction let broken links happen to you! Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> As with1the -other checks, editors built-in local link checkers, and some editors even Chapter The Least Youmany NeedHTML to Know aboutinclude HTML and the Web scour the for you to check external Chapter 2 Web - HTML at Work on the Web links. In addition, the majority of Web servers also offer this feature.3 Chapter<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Remember Checking external links isn't as simple as it sounds because a program must work over an - Structuring Your HTML Documents active Internet connection to query each link. This checking can be processor intensive, and you should Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources check external links only during off-peak hours, such as early morning, to avoid tying up other Web Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images servers as well. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> A number of scripts utilities available Part III - Taking HTMLand to the Nextare Level<br /> <br /> on the Web to help you test your links. Two personal favorites are the W3C Link Checker and MOMSpider. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms W3C Link Checker<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> First created to check validity of CSS W3C technical reports, the W3C Link Checker utility was written by Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with Renaud12Bruyeron reworked by Hugo Haas. The same W3C Link Checker utility is available Chapter - HTML and and then Scripting online, 13 for download, or (if you're a savvy programmer), as source code that you can tweak to suit. Chapter - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> The way the Link Checker utility works is it reads the HTML document and grabs all links - this includes - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages named anchors. It first verifies that anchors are not duplicated, and then verifies that all links are pointing Part V - From Web Page to Web Site to an actual reference. Like all validators, the utility produces a report that warns against HTTP redirects Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox and any duplicated anchors. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> To use18 the -online validator, http://validator.w3.org/checklink, and then enter the URL of Chapter Creating a Greatvisit User Interface Part the VI document - The Part you of want Tens to check (see Figure 16-4). This does mean that you can only check documents already19 on the Web. Totocheck documents before they go live, you'll have to use a standalone product. Chapter - Ten Ways Exterminate Web Bugs However, products Chapter 20 many - TenWYSIWYG HTML Do’s and Don’tsprovide this functionality already, so check your product before downloading a standalone. Part VII - Appendixes Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 4 -16-4: Structuring Using the YourW3C HTML Link Documents Checker we can verify that all links found at www.lanw.com/staff are<br /> <br /> not5broken. Chapter - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> MOMSpider<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables MOMSpider one of the first link checkers available to Web developers. This link checker is written in Chapter 9 - was HTML Frames<br /> <br /> the Perl10programming language and runs on virtually any Unix machine. MOMSpider needn't even reside Chapter - HTML Forms on the computer theOther site itTechnologies checks - so even Part IV -same Extending HTMLas with<br /> <br /> if you don't serve your Web site from a Unix machine, you can still check links from MOMSpider on a remote system. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter HTMLsome and Scripting Anyone12who- has knowledge of Perl can easily configure MOMSpider to create custom output and to Chapter 13 -internal Makingand Multimedia check both externalMagic links on a site. Don't fret: If you don't know Perl, you can easily find a Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into YourinHTML programmer who can adjust a MOMSpider his or her sleep for a nominal fee. Many ISPs run a Chapter 15 - on How HTML to Other Markup Languages MOMSpider your siteRelates for a low monthly fee and cheerfully handle the configuration and implementation Part V - From Web Page to Web Site for you.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox To find17 out -more about visit the official site at Chapter Setting Up MOMSpider, Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> http://ftp.ics.uci.edu/pub/websoft/MOMspider/. - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition HTML Validators by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The majority of browsers are& forgiving of (408 markup John Wiley Sons © 2003 pages)errors. Most don't even require an <html> element to identify an HTMLWhether page, and instead simply search for recognizable HTML elements to identify a document your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site as readable. Justorbecause the real world is that way, doesn't make inconsistency a good thing. You may one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book put you onso theforgiving, right track. see a day when browsers can'twill afford to be and that day is drawing closer as HTML, Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML), and other extensible markup languages become more complicated and precise. Get the markup right from the beginning and save yourself a bunch of trouble Table of Contents later on. HTML validation is built into many HTML editors. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Introducing the W3C's standalone validator<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Although not many standalone HTML-validation applications exist, the W3C has put together a free, WebChapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web based validation system available at http://validator.w3.org. Part - Getting Started with HTML you TheIIW3C validation tool enables<br /> <br /> to choose which HTML or XHTML DTD (version) you want to use<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 check - Structuring Your HTML Documents when you your document - and you get a variety of different outputs to match your preference. You Chapter 5 - aLinking to Online can choose terse output thatResources lists only the line numbers in your document, the boo-boos, and a brief Chapter description 6 -ofFinding each - and or aUsing verbose Images output that goes into great detail about why each and every error is an<br /> <br /> error and includes the Formatting relevant information in the HTML specification. Chapter 7 even - Top Off Yourlinks Pagetowith Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables online validator Using the W3C's<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter Even if 10 you -have HTML a Forms validation application in your current text editor, we strongly recommend that you never, Part everIV- -What, Extending never? HTML No,with never! Other - post Technologies a page on<br /> <br /> the Web without running it through this validator first. If<br /> <br /> your HTML correct,Stylish your pages will look better on a variety of Web browsers. Your users will also be Chapter 11 -isGetting with CSS happier12 (even if they don't know exactly why). Chapter - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Warning When you use the online validator, if you're on a network that has a firewall, it may prevent you - Integrating a Database into Your HTML from uploading your HTML files. This is because the firewall considers online validation applications to be Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages a risk to your computer's security. Although there's certainly nothing wrong with online tools (especially the Part V - From Web Page to Web Site one supplied by the W3C), there's not much you can do to work around the problem. You have no choice Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox but to use a local tool that you download, such as HTML Kit (also offered by the W3C) or a validator Chapter 17with - Setting Upeditor, Your Online Presence bundled your text such as HomeSite or BBEdit. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part If you're VI - The ready Part toofuse Tens the<br /> <br /> W3C's online validator, here's how to get started:<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 - Ten Exterminate Web Bugs 1. Verify thatWays you to included the correct DOCTYPE declaration. Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> use the W3C Part VII To - Appendixes<br /> <br /> validator, you must include a DOCTYPE declaration, or select one from a drop-<br /> <br /> you don't, the validator doesn't know which DTD your document conforms to, and Appendixdown A - menu. HTML 4IfTags know which set of rules to check. So first things first: Be sure to add a DOCTYPE Appendixtherefore, B - HTMLdoesn't Character Codes such as the HTML 4.0 transitional declaration: Appendixdeclaration, C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"<br /> <br /> "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd"> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> Warning If you're validating a frameset document, you must use the frameset DOCTYPE declaration:<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Frameset//EN" List of Sidebars "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/frameset.dtd"> 2. Visit http://validator.w3.org. 3. Enter the URL of your page in the URI Address text box (as in Figure 16-5).<br /> <br /> 3.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Figure - Structuring 16-5: Your The W3C HTML Validator Documents Web page is simple and easy to use.<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> 4. Choose from these other options as needed:<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML toEncoding: the Next Level Character For<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> beginners, we recommend leaving the default setting (detect<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> -automatically). HTML Tables If you're not a beginner, choose the appropriate character encoding for your -document. HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> -Options: Making Multimedia Magic the format and type of information defined by the report. You don't You can select -have Integrating a Database Your HTML to select any of theinto options; the default produces error and warning messages with line<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> -numbers How HTML Relates to Other Languages that tell you whereMarkup the error is in the original HTML document.<br /> <br /> Document Beginners should Part IV - Extending HTML Type: with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> probably leave the default setting (detect automatically) in place. If you know the version of HTML (or other markup language) you used when you wrote Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS your document, pick it from the list.<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> 5. Press Enter oranclick the Validate this page button. Chapter 16 - Creating HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> You either receive a Web page that states No Errors Found or you receive a Web page listing Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface any warnings or errors. If errors are found, you may have to take some time to get used to Part VI - The Part of Tens deciphering the murkier error messages. Figure 16-6 shows a sample.<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 16-6: Error message that found a missing closing </title> tag. 6.<br /> <br /> HTMLand 4 for Dummies, Edition Keep doing this until it returns a No Errors 6. Fix the errors validate your4th document. ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts Found message. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> This process may not tons after one page full of errors, Whether yourbegoal is of to fun, buildbut a simple, text-oriented Web site you'll be a real stickler about validating or theone next HTML document. loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Remember Just because your page returns the greatly anticipated No Errors Found message doesn't mean you're done. Be sure to check all your Web pages in any browser that your users might use. Table of Contents Netscape and Internet Explorer are known to render pages differently (no big deal in the newest versions, HTML 4 For Dummies, but you can't be sure4th thatEdition all your users update their software every few months). Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> FTP ClientsHTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> After you’ve created your&pages ready for the world to take notice, you might find yourself Johnall Wiley Sons ©and 2003you’re (408 pages) scratching your head and wondering what the heck to do next. This Web is a common phenomenon known as Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site Web fright. Manyor first-time Web authors get to this point and then stare blankly at their screens. one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> There is only one cure for Web fright. It’s all about the File Transfer Protocol (FTP). FTP is a protocol you can use to transfer a file from one machine to another. With FTP, it doesn’t matter what platform a Table of Contents machine is running, all will understand, provided each machine has FTP software installed. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Okay, maybe there are two cures. Not only do you need a means for transferring your Web page online, Introduction but Iyou also need a destination forEnvironment your Web page. Part - Meeting HTML in Its Natural<br /> <br /> A Web server is used to house the collections of<br /> <br /> pages for Web site.You YouNeed maytohave your ownHTML Weband server machine. If you don’t know whether you have Chapter 1 the - The Least Know about the Web a Web 2server, thenatyou don’t one. Don’t go run out and buy one, either! Chapter - HTML Work on have the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> A Web server runs special software that’s dedicated to presenting and maintaining Web files (among several other Web-related tasks). If you don’t have one of these supercomputers, your local ISP (such as Chapter 4 Structuring Your HTML Documents EarthLink or- MSN) can host your pages for a fee. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter After you’ve 6 - selected Finding and theUsing host, Images and know how to access the Web server (your host will provide you with this<br /> <br /> information), you Off upload to the host’s server using FTP — for which (yep) you need an FTP Chapter 7 - Top Your your Pagepages with Formatting program. All such programs are similar, Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> and easy to operate. Two of our personal favorites are WS_FTP Pro for Windows, and Fetch for the Macintosh: Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> WS_FTP Pro can be located at www.ipswitch.com.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies Fetch can be HTML located at http://fetchsoftworks.com.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> The basic for Scripting an FTP program consists of dual windows (shown in Figure 16-7). One window Chapter 12 interface - HTML and provides access to your own hard drive; after you log on to the Web server, the other window provides Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic access to that server. Two arrows show up between these two windows: one pointing left and one Chapter 14 - Integrating a Databaseusually into Your HTML pointing right. To upload a file from your hard drive to the Web server, you highlight the file in one window Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages and select the appropriate arrow. Using FTP, you can upload or download files to and from the Web Part V - From Web Page to Web Site server. Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 16-7: The basic WS_FTP Pro interface. Tip For more information on Web servers, Web hosting, and transferring your files, see Chapter 17.<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 17: 4Setting Up Your Online Presence ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Locating a place to host your Web pages Table of Contents<br /> <br /> a domain HTML Acquiring 4 For Dummies, 4th name Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Moving files to your Web server<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - Theyour Leastsite You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Maintaining Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Promoting your site Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> You’ve built a great Web page, or two, or even a whole Web site, and it’s time to get it on the Web for the - Structuring Your HTML Documents whole world to see. The actual act of moving your files from one place to another is pretty easy (as you Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources find out a bit later in this chapter), but you have some decisions to make about where to keep those files Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images and if you need your own Web site domain. Also, you should formulate a plan for maintaining your site and Chapter 7 it. - Top Offchapter, Your Page with promoting In this you findFormatting out how to do all these things so you can establish an online Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level presence fit for the excellent HTML you’ve created. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Hosting Your HTML by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The first and most important pages online is finding someplace on the Web to put John Wiley &step Sonsin©putting 2003 (408your pages) them on display -Whether a host. In general, you have two choices for hosting your your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web sitepages: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Host them yourself. by-step book will put you on the right track. Pay someone else to host them. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Tip 4The host is used throughout the Web industry to mean a Web server set up to hold Web pages HTML For word Dummies, 4th Edition (and related files) so they can be accessed by the rest of the world. In this chapter, we use host as a noun and as a verb - when you host a Web page, you're running Web-server software on a computer. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter - The Leastsetting You Need to Know about HTML andserver the Web As you 1might expect, up and maintaining a Web has pros and cons, whether you're hosting Chapter 2 pages - HTML Work someone on the Web your own or at paying else a fee to host them for you. The next few sections of this chapter Chapter Creating Your HTML Pagegive you the skinny on what's involved with each. You can decide look at 3both- approaches toFirst hosting - and Part II -option Getting Started with which works best for HTML you.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents Remember Just because you choose one hosting option over the other now doesn't mean you're stuck Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> with it for If you find your own pages a little overwhelming, after a while, you can easily move Chapter 6 life. - Finding andhosting Using Images your files service provider, or vice versa. When you think about which hosting option is best for you, Chapter 7 to-aTop Off Your Page with Formatting concentrate on HTML your needs theLevel next Part III - Taking to the for Next months. Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> six months to a year; plan to reevaluate your decision in a few<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Hosting Your Pages Yourself by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> In this section, weJohn talk Wiley about&hosting an average-size site (1 to 100 pages or so) that doesn't include more Sons © 2003 (408 pages) than a couple of multimedia files, and doesn't have any special security electronic commerce (eWhether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web or site commerce) applications. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Remember If you need to run a large corporate site, an online store, or any other complex site, you'll need more expertise, equipment, and software than what's listed in this section. Books such as ETable of Contents Commerce For Dummies and Webmastering For Dummies, 2nd Edition (both from Wiley Publishing, Inc.) HTML 4 Foryou Dummies, 4th Edition can help get started working with more complex sites. We also recommend that you talk with a Web Introduction professional who has practical experience in setting up and maintaining complex Web sites. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> You can own server andabout host your pages Chapter 1 set- up Theyour Least YouWeb Need to Know HTMLWeb and the Webyourself. To do this, you'll need: Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> A computer designated as your Web server: Web servers are often dedicatedto a single task, - Creating Your First HTML Page leaving word-processing and other activities to a different computer.<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring YourCommon HTML Documents Web-server software: Web-server software packages include Apache and Microsoft's Chapter 5 - Information Linking to Online Resources Internet Server (IIS), called Internet Information Services in Windows 2000 and later. Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Remember In Your this chapter, in the rest of the Web world, you may see the term Web server used Chapter 7 - Top Off Page withasFormatting to refer to a dedicated computer Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level(that is, the actual hardware) as well as to refer to Web-server software. That's because you can't have one without the other. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9 - HTMLInternet Frames connection: Your Web server isn't very useful or reliable if it's only connected A dedicated Chapter 10 HTML Forms to the Internet when you fire up a dialup connection. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Introducing Web servers Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 be - Making Multimedia Magic You might surprised to find out that the first two items in this list (Web server and Web-server software) Chapter 14 Integrating a Database into are Yourcheap HTML these days, and a Web server doesn't have to be all that are the easiest to come by. Computers Chapter - How HTML Relates to it's Other Markup to Languages beefy to15work efficiently. After all, dedicated performing a single set of functions: accepting and Part V - Fromto Web Page to Site responding requests forWeb Web pages,<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> and of course holding your Web files.<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Unless17 you're servingUpmultimedia that can take up gigabytes of space, you'll find that all the files Chapter - Setting Your Onlinefiles Presence associated any average only total a few megabytes at best. In fact, an average home Chapter 18 -with Creating a Great Web User site Interface desktop computer Part VI - The Part of purchased Tens Chapter 19<br /> <br /> in the last two or three years will make an acceptable Web server.<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> There is no shortage of Web-server software for you to choose from, and several very good, free Web Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts servers give- you access to programs you can download and install in a matter of minutes. Both Windows Part VII - Appendixes and the Apple OS come with Web servers built into them that are designed for personal use - that is, fairly Appendix A - HTML 4 sites. Tags small potatoes Web Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Tip If you something meatier because you're hosting even a medium-size Web site, we recommend Appendix C -want Glossary that you choose one of the free Web-server software downloads, such as Apache. These applications are Index designed server activity than personal Web-server software is. Cheat Sheetto- handle HTML 4more For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> On the Web TUCOWS at www.tucows.com is an excellent source for freeware and shareware Webserver software downloads. In addition to links to software downloads, you'll find reviews of different WebList of Listings server software so you can gather information and find the right program to meet your needs. List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Getting a dedicated Internet connection The most expensive piece of the host-it-yourself approach is a dedicated Internet connection. Each page on your Web site has a unique Uniform Resource Locator (URL) that is an exact and specific Web address, so your Web server needs to have an Internet connection that never goes down and whose Internet address never changes.<br /> <br /> The fact that your connection must be dedicated, or constant, puts dialup phone connections and even 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition standard InternetHTML access cable and Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections out of the running because ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya their Internet addresses change regularly.Pitts Also, most ISPs prohibit you from hosting a Web site on your John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) standard dialup, cable, or DSL connection. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded regarding with frames, graphics, andconnection: animation, this stepHere's a list of considerations your dedicated by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> It's gonna cost you: To get a dedicated Internet connection, you'll need to arrange for one from an ISP and pay a special fee (at least $50 a month if not more) to have that dedicated line. If you already Table of Contents have an ISP, you can find out what the ISP offers, as well as how much it charges. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction Faster is better: Your dedicated connection needs to have a decent speed. Of course, you can host a Part IWeb - Meeting HTML in Its Natural site over a dialup phone Environment connection, but<br /> <br /> what would be the point? Your pages would trickle out<br /> <br /> Chapter from 1 your - The siteLeast to your Youusers' Need to browsers Know about so slowly HTML most and the users Websimply wouldn't stick around or come back<br /> <br /> for2a second Chapter - HTMLtime. at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> At a minimum, you need a dedicated cable or DSL line, and even with those, you shouldn't try to host multimedia files simply because they are so large.<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Remember If you already have a cable or DSL line, you're not in the clear. Your computer's IP Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images address (its unique address on the Web) changes regularly because your ISP has a bank of Chapter 7 - Top Your with Formatting addresses it Off uses for Page all connected subscribers. Because your address changes regularly, it's Part III - TakingYour HTML to the Next Level dynamic. Web server's IP address<br /> <br /> must be static, which means it never changes. This<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables consistency allows other computers to find the server on the Web and request Web pages from it. Chapter Your 9 ISP - HTML has more Frames flexibility with dynamic addresses, so they cost less than static addresses. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> If you're getting theHTML idea with that Other hosting a Web site Part IV - Extending Technologies<br /> <br /> yourself is a little complicated and expensive, you're right. Not only do you have to pay for the equipment and dedicated Internet connection, but you also have to Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS learn how to set up and administer a Web server and keep all the pieces working 24/7. This is all well and Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting good if you have the time, knowledge, and resources to devote to managing a Web server, but if you don't, Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic consider the more practical option we discuss in the following section, 'Using a Hosting Provider.' Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Using a Hosting Provider by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> A hosting providerJohn manages the©technical aspects of Web hosting, from hardware to software to Wiley &all Sons 2003 (408 pages) Internet connections. All you have to do is manage your HTML pages. Back Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site when the Web was young, hosting provider options were scarce, and what was available was expensive. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- The times have changed, by-step so book will put you on the right track. and needs have grown, reasonably priced hosting providers are abundant these days. If you decide to let someone else host your pages, you have two choices for how much you pay: Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Some services actually host your pages for free. That's it; you pay zip, zero, nada to get HTML Nothing: 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition your pages on the Web. What's the catch? You have to pay in other ways, usually with advertising Introduction your in page. Part Iattached - Meetingto HTML Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Something: Most Web-hosting services, however, charge you a fee, from a few dollars a month to Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web triple digits a month. The trick to making the most of your hosting funds is to find just the right hosting Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page service to meet your Web site needs. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Web hosting for free - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> The old saying There's no such thing as a free lunch is particularly true in Web-land. A handful of hosting Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting providers offer to house your Web pages for free, but they have to make their money somehow Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level generally, from advertisements they attach to your Web site. Chapter 9 usually - HTMLhave Frames You don't any control over which ads are attached to your site, and it may look to your visitors Chapter like you're 10 promoting - HTML Forms a particular product when you really aren't. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> So why11 use-aGetting free hosting if you have to deal with the ads the service attaches? If you're just Chapter Stylishservice with CSS<br /> <br /> putting a page up for fun, you're early in the learning process and want to practice with a page or two - HTML and Scripting online, or are willing to live with the ads if it means you don't have to spend money, then free Web hosting Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic may be right for you. Chapter 12 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 - How Other Markup Remember FreeHTML Web Relates hosting,tohowever, is notLanguages right for any business Web site - small or large - simply Part V - From Web Page to Web Site because all those ads don't look professional.<br /> <br /> Visitors to your site will know you're taking the cheap route,<br /> <br /> Chapter 16make - Creating HTML Toolbox and may some an inferences (usually incorrect) about your business. Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Also most Web-hosting won't let you attach a domain name to your site (covered a little later Chapter 18 free - Creating a Greatservices User Interface in the you plan Part VI chapter). - The PartIfof Tens<br /> <br /> on procuring your own domain, or you already have one, free hosting isn't the right option for you. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts On the Web If you want to investigate your free Web-hosting options, start with these providers:<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix www.netfirms.com/ A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> http://geocities.yahoo.com/home<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Index www.freeservers.com/flash/index_flash.html Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List ofhttp://angelfire.lycos.com/ Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> For a longer list of free hosting providers, search for 'free Web hosting' in your favorite search engine.<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Web hosting for a fee If you want complete control over your Web site, you may want to pay a service provider a fee to host your pages. The service provider handles all the infrastructure pieces - such as storage space, software, Internet connections, backups, and such - and you simply manage your files. When you pay someone to host your Web pages, you want to get all the services you need for your site without paying too much. In addition to hosting your Web pages, most providers offer additional services,<br /> <br /> including (but not limited to):<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts E-mail accounts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Mailing lists Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Common Gateway and server-side by-stepInterface book will (CGI) put you onother the right track. scripting support (so you can add guest books and other neat widgets to your site - see Chapters 10 and 12 for more information) Database support Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> E-commerce support<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part - Meeting HTML in also Its Natural Environment AnyI good provider will host your pages under<br /> <br /> your domain name if you have one or want one, and<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 even - The Least Need toaKnow about most will help youYou purchase domain andHTML get itand up the andWeb running. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Creating Your First HTML Page Finding- the right provider<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Structuring Your Documents Before 4you -start looking for a HTML hosting provider, think carefully about what you'd like to include in your Web Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources site (other than plain HTML pages). Some things you might want to include are Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> E-mail Chapter 7 -capabilities Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> A shopping-cart function<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 counters, - HTML Frames Page search engines, HTML forms, or other interactivity capabilities Chapter 10 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> After have a good whatTechnologies services you Part IVyou - Extending HTMLidea withofOther<br /> <br /> need, you can start shopping for hosting providers. Each<br /> <br /> hosting11 provider's costs will with be different, but it shouldn't cost you more than $10 to $20 per month for a Chapter - Getting Stylish CSS basic Web thatand includes a megabyte or two of data storage, one or two e-mail addresses, domainChapter 12 site - HTML Scripting name hosting, and support for scripts Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic and programs. When you think about it, that's all you really need to get a solid up and running. Chapter 14 site - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages If you plan to include more advanced features on your site (such as a shopping cart or a database), you can expect to pay $30 or $40 a month. Even that's not a huge expense for an online store.<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter Tip When 17 -you Setting look Up forYour a provider Online that Presence has a variety of packages available, be sure it's easy to upgrade<br /> <br /> from one package to User the next as your site's needs grow. Chapter 18 hosting - Creating a Great Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> The best answer to the question of who you'll choose to host your site may be right under your nose. If - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs you're happy with your current ISP, why not check to see if it offers Web-hosting services. You may find out Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts that your ISP services has a Web-hosting option already included with it, which means you won't have to Part VII - Appendixes fork over extra money (over and above what you're already paying) for an Internet connection. If your Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags connectivity plan doesn't include hosting, you may be able to add it for a small fee, instead of starting all Appendix B - HTML Character Codes over again with a new provider. Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Index If you haven't chosen a hosting provider yet, you might find out if potential providers have a Web interface Cheat you can Sheet use- to HTML manage 4 For your Dummies, Web site. 4th Edition Is there a demo of the interface available? Does it look easy to<br /> <br /> use? Although the availability of such an interface shouldn't be your only criteria for a good hosting List of Figures provider, it might sway you in favor of one provider over another. List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> On the Web The Web Hosting Ratings site (www.webhostingratings.com/) is a good place to start if your own ISP doesn't pan out as a good hosting provider for your needs. This site includes a search engine you can use to search for hosting plans, and a reviews section where you can read what others have to say about potential hosting providers.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Domain Dummies, 4th Edition Getting Your Own by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> As detailed in Chapter 1, a domain is the high-level address for any given Web site. Some examples John Wiley & Sons ©name 2003 (408 pages) of domain namesWhether are microsoft.com, apple.com, and dummies.com. your goal is to build a simple, w3c.org, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> You may want your own domain (hence that reflects your business name (or even your by-step book willname put you on thedomain) right track. personality). If you don’t get a domain name of your own, your pages will be part of someone else’s domain name — usually your hosting provider’s domain name. For example, a personal Web site hosted Table of Contents without a domain name at io.com has a top-level URL of HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> http://www.io.com/~natanya - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web the same Web site would be hosted at With a 2domain name of natanya.com, Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> http://www.natanya.com Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> One is, of course, easier to remember than the other, but is that a good enough reason to have your own domain? Maybe — but then again, maybe not.<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Deciding whether you need a domain name - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Domain names are cool to have, but they aren’t free. To get a domain name, you have to register it and - Getting Stylish with CSS pay to use it (more about the exact process in the following section, “Getting a domain name”), and some Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting hosting providers charge you extra to attach your domain name to your Web site. So how do you know Chapter Making Magic whether13you- need a Multimedia domain name? Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Although simple answer to this question, it’s safe to say that a business should invest in a Chapter 15 there’s - Howno HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> domain name because WebSite site Part V - From Web Page toa Web<br /> <br /> is part of a business image. A business that has a unique domain just<br /> <br /> looks more than one that doesn’t. Imagine if Microsoft’s domain name was Chapter 16 -professional Creating an HTML Toolbox http://www.io.com/~microsoft? How seriously would you take them? Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> However, for a personal site or even for a small consulting site, a domain name is really optional. You don’t need one to run your site, so it’s really up to you if you choose to spend the money. Many individuals Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs have their own sites, as do many families, and you can decide if it’s a worthwhile expenditure for you. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII -of Appendixes Tricks the Trade<br /> <br /> One benefit of having your own domain name is that you can change hosting<br /> <br /> Appendix A without - HTMLaffecting 4 Tags the domain for your Web site. When you pay for a domain name, it’s yours; you providers Appendix can move B it-from HTMLone Character hostingCodes provider to another at will. Without the domain name, you can’t change<br /> <br /> hosting providers without changing your site’s URL. Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Getting a domain name<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> If you decide that you want to get a domain name, you have to do two things: List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> Find a domain name that you like that isn’t taken. To find out whether a domain name is taken, visit VeriSign at www.netsol.com (the keeper of domain names in the United States) and search for the name.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Tip Domain names can be harder to come by than you might imagine, especially ones that include common words in their names (for example, www.computer.com or www.car.com). You might need to get creative as you look for a domain name. The VeriSign search engine helps you out a bit by suggesting some alternatives to your original choice.<br /> <br /> Register that domain name. After you find a domain name that you like, you have to register it as 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition belonging to HTML you. Most domain names are registered for two years, and after those two years are up, ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts you can re-register the name. In effect, after you’ve registered a domain name, it’s yours to keep for John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) as long as you’re willing to pay for it. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site one loaded withdomain frames,right graphics, animation, You can register or and pay for your on theand VeriSign site,this but stepbefore you do so, check with your by-step bookwhether will put you on the right track. site’s hosting provider to see a better registration deal is available. For example, VeriSign usually charges $70 for a two-year registration, whereas the hosting provider World Wide Mart (www.worldwidemart.com) only charges you $17 a year for the same service (saving you $36). Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Warning If you don’t have a hosting provider already set up, you have to pay VeriSign for the domain<br /> <br /> Introduction name so you don’t run the risk of losing the domain. The cost difference between what VeriSign charges Part - Meeting HTMLget in Its Environment andI any deal you’ll withNatural your hosting provider<br /> <br /> isn’t so significant that you may want to lose a domain<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -it.The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web name over Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web If you’re3 thinking you can a domain Chapter - Creating Yourregister First HTML Page name long before you have a Web site to hook it to, you’re<br /> <br /> correct. In fact, Started many people have Part II - Getting with HTML<br /> <br /> domain names registered that they never put Web sites up for. Some people have great plans for Web sites that never come to fruition, whereas others register domains just to Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents keep competitors from registering them. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources When you register a domain, VeriSign simply keeps the site in your name you’re ready use it. Chapter 6 -until Finding and UsingtoImages Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Linking your domain to your Web site<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables Attaching domain name to your Web site after you have a hosting provider (or have your own Web Chapter 9 your - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> server up running, for that matter) is pretty easy. If you’ve registered your domain through your hosting Chapter 10 and - HTML Forms provider, you don’tHTML actually to Technologies do anything; Part IV - Extending withhave Other<br /> <br /> the hosting provider takes care of everything for you — except the actual care and feeding of your individual pages. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 -a HTML and Scripting If you have domain that VeriSign is holding for you, you simply log in to VeriSign with the account you set Chapter 13you - Making Multimedia Magicname, and provide the new nameserver information you received up when purchased the domain Chapter 14 hosting - Integrating a Database into Your HTML from your provider. Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Nameservers arePage computers the Part V - From Web to Webon Site<br /> <br /> Internet that translate domain names into the actual Internet location<br /> <br /> for your16computer. Your Chapter - Creating an Web-hosting HTML Toolboxprovider’s nameservers know that your domain name matches a specific17 site-listed onUp their Web servers. That means you need to let VeriSign know the names of those Chapter Setting Your Online Presence nameservers at your hosting It’s really that simple. Chapter 18 - Creating a Great provider. User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Tip Any good hosting provider can give you detailed instructions on how to register a domain name in the - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs provider’s system or attach your domain name to your Web site on its computers. If you’re changing from Chapter 20 Ten HTML and Don’ts one hosting- provider to Do’s another, your new provider should help you transfer your domain. Most providers Part VII - Appendixes give you this information up front or have online help that will walk you through it. If it’s not immediately Appendix A to - get HTML 4 Tags clear how your domain set up, be sure to ask for help. If you don’t get it, change providers. Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 forto Dummies, Edition Transferring Files Your 4th Web Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> After you've secured Web &site host, or decided JohnaWiley Sons © 2003 (408 pages)to put up your own Web server, you'll need a way to move the HTML pages you created on your computer to the Web This isn't a one-time activity Whether your goal is to buildlocal a simple, text-oriented Webserver. site either. As you maintain your Web site, you'll need to move files you've built on your local computer to the or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. Web server to refresh your site. The way you move files to your Web server depends entirely on how your Web server is set up. Normally Table of Contents you have a couple of transfer options: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> A Web interface for moving and managing files provided by your hosting provider<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Via FTP- Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Of these two options, FTP is almost, without exception, always a possibility. FTP is the standard for - Structuring Your HTML Documents transferring files on the Internet, and any hosting provider should give you FTP access to your Web server. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources When you set up your Web site with your hosting provider, the provider usually gives you written Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images documentation (either in print or on the Web) that tells you exactly how to transfer files to your Web server. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Included in that information is an FTP URL that usually takes the form ftp://ftp.domain.com. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 use - HTML Tables You can an FTP client such as WS_FTP (www.ipswitch.com/Products/WS_FTP/) or CuteFTP Chapter 9 - HTML Frames (www.globalscape.com/products/cuteftp/index.asp ) to open a connection to this URL. Your Chapter 10will- give HTML Forms provider you a username and password to use to access your Web-server directory on the FTP Part - Extending Technologies site.IVThen you canHTML movewith filesOther to your Web site using<br /> <br /> the client's interface. It's really that easy. If you want<br /> <br /> Chapter to grab11 a copy - Getting of a file Stylish fromwith yourCSS Web site and modify it, you simply download a copy, make your<br /> <br /> modification, and re-upload it - all through the FTP client's interface. Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Tip Each FTP client's interface is different, but they're all pretty straightforward. Chapter 16 includes - Integrating a Database into Your HTML more information on finding a good FTP client, so when you find one, spend a few minutes reading its Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages documentation. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 not - Creating an HTML FTP Toolbox You may need a separate client to move your files to your Web server. Most newer Web browsers Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence (such as Internet Explorer 5.5 and higher and Netscape 6 and higher) have limited FTP capabilities built in. Chapter 18easily - Creating Great User Interface You can uploada and download files, but you may not be able to make or delete directories. Also, Part VI Web - The utilities Part of (such Tens many<br /> <br /> as Dreamweaver) have file-management capabilities. Find out more in Chapter<br /> <br /> Chapter 16. 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Via your hosting provider's Web site<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character In the interest of usability andCodes reducing technical support calls, many Web hosting providers have built Appendix Web pages C -that Glossary help you upload and manage your Web site files without using a separate FTP utility or<br /> <br /> even the FTP tools inside HTML editors. The majority of these tools enable you to manage your site, such Index as uploading and downloading files,4th creating Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition and deleting directories, moving files around, and deleting files. you already have a hosting provider, find out if it has a set of Web-based tools for managing your List of If Figures site. List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> Every provider's interface is different, so be sure to read the provider's documentation before you start to transfer your files. Also remember that most providers who have these Web interfaces won't stop you from managing your site via FTP as well. If you find the interface too cumbersome, or you like the way FTP works better, by all means use it.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th Edition MaintainingHTML and4 for Updating Your Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> In many ways, putting a Web& site up© is only the battle. Maintaining your site after it’s up is as important John Wiley Sons 2003 (408half pages) as getting it up in Whether the first place. Think about your own text-oriented Web surfing experiences for a moment. How happy your goal is to build a simple, Web site are you to come across a site that is obviously outdated and full of stale information? Don’t you expect the or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepbook will information put you on the right track. Web to have the by-step most up-to-date available? After all, updating a page is as easy as copying a file to your Web server. It’s not like you’re publishing a book. Table Contents Howof often you update your site information depends entirely on the kind of site you’re running and the HTML 4 For 4th in Edition informationDummies, you include it. A news site needs updating every few minutes (as news breaks), but a Introduction consulting site might only need updating every few weeks or even every few months (as projects are Part I - Meeting in Itschange). Natural Environment completed andHTML résumés<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> You may find that some Chapter 2 also - HTML at Work onportions the Webof your site need updating more frequently than others. Thinking back to the news site, the world and national news sections might update many times a day, but living or Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page health sections may need attention every one or two days. Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Structuring Your HTML Documents Tip As you- begin to move from building phase to maintenance phase for your site, start to think about<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking Online Resources how frequently each to piece of your site will need to be updated or changed. You’ll then get an idea of what Chapter 6 Finding and Using kind of maintenance schedule Images and process you’re looking at. Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Creating a site that is easy to maintain - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 way - HTML Frames The best to help make your maintenance process easier is to build a site that is easy to maintain in Chapter 10 HTML Forms the first place. You can put a variety of measures in place to make this happen: Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Organize your HTML images, and multimedia into folders on your site. Put all your images Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish files, with CSS in one in another, and then divide your pages into folders that reflect the Chapter 12 folder, - HTMLyour and multimedia Scripting different sectionsMultimedia in your site. When you organize your pages and collateral well, you can quickly find Chapter 13 - Making Magic files you update or change them. Chapter 14when - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Use templates for site navigation and other chunks of commonly used data on your site. You can save these templates as snippets of HTML in a text file somewhere, and when you create a new Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox page, you can just drop the text into that template. If you use the same HTML for certain elements of Chapter 17site - Setting Up YouraOnline Presence your (for example, copyright statement) and you make a change to that element (change the Chapter 18 - Creating Great User you Interface copyright date, fora example), can do a search and replace on all the files on your site to make the Part VI - The Part of Tens change quickly. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Keep updated visual map of your site in electronic or print form. You can go so far as to use Chapter 20 an - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Visio or some other Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> charting tool, or simply sketch the map on a piece of paper. If you have a map you<br /> <br /> can Aturn to when you make a change, you can easily see the relationships between the different Appendix - HTML 4 Tags pages your Character site and quickly Appendix B on - HTML Codes create links and references on the relevant pages. Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Tip Some HTML software, such as Dreamweaver, has mapping features built into the interface and can generate site maps for you at the click of a button.<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> List ofCreate Figuresa mini-style guide that lists the basic design elements you use in all your pages. Include<br /> <br /> background, text, and linking colors you always use, the fonts for each kind of content (headings, List ofthe Tables lists, and so on), graphics you use in particular places, and any other design-related information List ofbody, Listings it’s always at your fingertips. List ofso Sidebars<br /> <br /> Getting (and staying) organized One of the keys to making site maintenance as hassle-free as possible is to get — and stay — organized. The sad truth is that you need to get a handle on your files and information so you always know where everything is. Or you could stay sloppy and disorganized. The choice is yours, but we guarantee that your updates will be more painful if you organize your files the way you organize your junk drawer. Regardless<br /> <br /> of your organizational style, the following tips can help you get and stay organized as you prepare to HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition maintain your site: by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 pages) Keep everything in one place: Put (408 all of your Web site files and collateral, both electronic and otherwise, in Whether one place so goal you is can find thetext-oriented information related your to always build a simple, Web siteto your site. Set aside a folder or one loaded with to frames, graphics, thisthen stepon your computer’s hard drive store all things and Webanimation, related and further subdivide the folder into by-step images, book willthe putactual you onHTML the right working directories, filestrack. that drive your current site, and so on.<br /> <br /> Decide on a maintenance schedule: Analyze the data on your site and make a plan for how often each piece of your site needs to be updated. You might consider making a chart and actually HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition scheduling tasks in your calendar so you’re sure you have time set aside to update your site.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents Introduction<br /> <br /> Part IKeep - Meeting HTMLfile: in Its Natural a tickler Create anEnvironment electronic or<br /> <br /> paper folder to hold pending Web site information, so you<br /> <br /> Chapter can1 quickly - Thelay Least yourYou hands Needon to the Know data about necessary HTML and forthe updating Web your site when the time comes. As you<br /> <br /> go 2about your daily work find something that you know needs to go into the site, simply throw a Chapter - HTML at Work onand the Web copy into yourYour Web siteHTML folder. For example, if you put press releases on your site once a month, Chapter 3 of- itCreating First Page but issue them several Part II - Getting Started with times HTML a<br /> <br /> month, toss an electronic copy of new press releases into a “Web pending” folder as they are released. That way you know right away which ones to add to your site Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents when the time comes. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Maintain a separate to-do list: Keep a running list of things to do to your site, with a deadline for Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting each one. As you get closer to a scheduled site maintenance day, you can look at your list and have a Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level good idea of how much work you’ll need to do to make the update and how long it will take you. Chapter Get 9 others - HTML involved Frames — and keep them on task: If you rely on others to provide you with information<br /> <br /> for10 your- Web work with them in the early stages of the site to set up a process for scheduling Chapter HTMLsite, Forms updates and communicating Find Part IV - Extending HTML with Otherinformation. Technologies<br /> <br /> easy and efficient ways for those people to deliver<br /> <br /> information to you, and with set expectations for how long it will take for you to update the site. Keep in Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish CSS mind the process you set up will evolve over time, but you’ve got to start somewhere. Chapter 12 that - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Do a post mortem: After your site has been up for six months or so, step back and evaluate your - Integrating a Database into Your HTML organization and update schedule to see how well it’s working for you. You’ll have some experience Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages with the site and its information, and you may find a different or better way to organize your data or Part V - From Web Page to Web Site schedule your updates. Periodic checks like this can help you adjust to your site’s needs and adjust Chapter 16site - Creating an HTML Toolbox your to your needs. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Running regular checks<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs In addition to updating your site regularly with new and changed information, it’s a good idea to check two<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts key elements of information on your site at least once a month: Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix Links A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Content not scheduled for an update<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Looking for broken links<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of links Figures The you make to the pages within your site shouldn’t break unless you move or delete a page from List of Tables your site. The links you make to other people’s sites, on the other hand, are beyond your control and can List of Listings change or break any time. If there’s one thing users hate to find on a site it’s a broken link, so take the time List at least of Sidebars once a month to scan your site for broken links and either remove or fix them.<br /> <br /> You have a variety of options for running link checks. Many higher-end Web development tools include link checkersthat walk your site and report any broken links. Check out Chapter 16 for more information, or visit TUCOWS (www.tucows.com) to download freeware and shareware versions of standalone link checkers. You can also use the W3C’s online link checker (http://validator.w3.org/checklink) for a free, Web-based link check.<br /> <br /> Checking content HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 Ed as Tittel and Natanya Pitts Checking contentbyisn’t straightforward as link checking because you won’t find software that will troll John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) your Web site and tell you if your content is stale or otherwise broken. Instead, it’s up to you to make a Whether your is to that builddidn’t a simple, Web site monthly quick pass over all thegoal content showtext-oriented up on your radar when you did updates to other or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepparts of the site. You’re basically just checking to make sure that the content’s still good. For example, if by-step book will put you on the right track. your site includes bios of key staff, information about them might change over time, but you won’t necessarily update individual bios when you add new ones or remove old ones. A regular check of all bios (regardless of staff additions or attrition) will help you be sure all of the information is up to date. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> If this task seems daunting, consider dividing your site into sections, filtering out the content you know you’ll update regularly, and scheduling each section for a quick review every week. If you use this approach, you Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment never have to review your entire site at once (which can make you tired and cause you to miss errors Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web anyway), and maintenance becomes a manageable activity that you attend to for a few minutes once a Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web week. It’s good to get into the habit of regularly reviewing your site anyway, and this is a good way to form Chapter 3 that habit. - Creating Your First HTML Page Introduction<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML or Documents Tip Obviously, if your site is large you have several different content contributors, the weekly content Chapter checks5can-get Linking out of tohand. OnlineHowever, Resourcesif people contribute content to your site, they should also contribute<br /> <br /> time to 6keeping that content relevant Chapter - Finding and Using Imagesand fresh. Work with your content contributors to set up a regular schedule reviewing content that Formatting isn’t slated for a regular update. You can expect them to find things Chapter 7 for - Top Off Your Page with thatIII need to change, such is the reality Part - Taking HTML but to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> of running a Web site.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th Edition Expanding HTML Your4 for Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The day may come when you want©to2003 expand your Web site. Maybe you’ve added a new department to John Wiley & Sons (408 pages) your business, you want to post some of your favorite on Web your site consulting site, or there’s been a Whether your goal is to build a simple,resources text-oriented new addition to your family. Whatever the reason, you should carefully plan or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-the expansion before you by-step book will up putfront you on right track. actually do the work. A little work canthe save you from many headaches once you get started. The first thing to do is decide on the scope of your expansion. Typically, you’ll find that expansion work that Table of Contents you need to do to your site falls into one of these three categories: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Adding a new page or two: As you might imagine, adding a new page or two to your site is the Introduction work you’ll do Natural becauseEnvironment you can model Part Ieasiest - Meeting HTML in Its<br /> <br /> the new page or pages on pages that already exist on<br /> <br /> your Chapter 1 site. - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> When you add a new page, just be sure that it fits into the general flow of your site, and don’t forget to - Creating Your First HTML Page link to it from another page on your site — especially the home page and the site map, if you have Part II - Getting Started with HTML one. You might also put a note on your site’s home page to let visitors know about the new information Chapter 4 Structuring Your HTML Documents on the -site. This helps those who are familiar with your site find the new pages, and shows everyone Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources that you’re keeping your site fresh. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Adding new ofPage pages (orFormatting section): When you add a new section to your site, things get a little Chapter 7 - aTop Offset Your with more complicated because your Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Levelsite’s navigation system can be greatly (and negatively) impacted by the8change. If you want every page of the site to refer to the new section, you’ll need to change the Chapter - HTML Tables navigation for the entire Chapter 9 - HTML Frames site after the new section is complete. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Tip Before you begin the addition, be sure to think through very carefully how the map of your site will change and make a list of all the pages on your site that will need an updated reference to the Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS new section. If you have a checklist laid out before you begin the update, your chances of missing any Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting pages decrease considerably. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter Completely 14 - Integrating reconfiguring a Database theinto site: Your We’re HTML going to level with you right off the bat: When you<br /> <br /> redesign yourHTML entireRelates Web site (as everyone does at least once during the lifetime of a site), it’s like Chapter 15 - How to Other Markup Languages over again fromSite scratch. Part Vstarting - From all Web Page to Web<br /> <br /> Of course, you do have existing information, images, and even<br /> <br /> some to work with. You also know more about how your site needs to function and whether you Chapter 16 HTML - Creating an HTML Toolbox need your methods since first creating the site. Even so, take the time to make a plan for Chapter 17 to- improve Setting Up Your Online Presence redesign that includes: Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> A revised site map that lists all the sections and pages you plan to include in your new site. - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 A -list Ten Do’s and Don’ts of HTML the information you can reuse, and which pages you plan to reuse it on. Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> of new information that you need and where you plan to get it. Appendix A A -list HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> A design plan that outlines the general look and feel for each of your pages.<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> A checklist of everything to do to get the site up and running.<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Tricks Figures of the Trade Whether you add a section or substantially change the navigation of the site, it’s<br /> <br /> good idea to run a link checker on your site to find any stray links that you forgot to update during the List ofaTables expansion. You’ll be much happier if you find and fix broken links than if a visitor finds the problem and reports it to you.<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Along the same lines, if you drastically change the organization of your site, links from other sites (like the all-important search engines) to yours may no longer work. For a while, you might keep your old pages in place and include referrer links (discussed in Chapter 5) that help visitors to your old pages find the new pages. This list may seem a little involved, but if your site has more than ten pages or so, building Web pages without a plan is going off half-cocked. Such folly results in a disconnected mishmash of pages<br /> <br /> instead of a cohesive Web site.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 forNoticed Dummies, 4th Edition Getting Your Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> After you have your site up and running John Wiley & Sons © 2003and (408have pages)a maintenance plan in place, you need to make sure that the rest of the world knows about it. After whattext-oriented good is a siteWeb if nosite one visits it? If you build it they Whether your goal is to build aall, simple, will come is a nice idea, but don't expect it to apply on the Web. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> A search engine is a crawler, which is simply a piece of software that wanders the Web collecting information about pages. Each engine works differently and collects different information about a given Table Contents Webof page, but in general, each gathers the URL, the page title (from the <title> element), and often HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thpage. Edition the entire text from the If you give the engine your top-level URL, the engine crawls from that URL to Introduction every page on the site that you link to, and every page those pages link to, and on and on until your entire Part Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment site Iis- in the engine's database of URLs. Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> When someone searches Chapter 2 - HTML at Work for on keywords the Web in a page, the engine compares his or her search request with the information in all the pages in the database, Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page and lists the most relevant links first in the results. This means the best way you can help people find you is to make sure the guts of your page are included in text Part II - Getting Started with HTML (minus the graphics because the engines can't read the text in graphics) and that the information on your Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents page is as clear and concise as possible. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 back - Finding and Using Tip Step and think aboutImages what terms you would use to search for your page, and be sure those Chapter 7 on - Top Your page. Page with Formattingif you sell widgets at a discount, be sure to include the words words are yourOff home For example, Part III - Taking HTML to Level widgets and discount in the the Next text of your<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> home page.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames Registering with search engines - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part - Extending with Other Technologies TheIVfirst thing you HTML can do to help get your site noticed<br /> <br /> is to register with search engines. Although some<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish CSSfor you, you're better off spending a little time doing it yourself for free. online services say they willwith do this Chapter 12 - the HTML and Scripting Just provide search engine with the top-level URL for your site, and the engine will do the rest. There's Chapter 13to -pay Making Multimedia Magic no need to register all 100 pages of your site. Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> The easiest register withto a Other searchMarkup engineLanguages is to visit that search engine and look for its 'register' or Chapter 15 - way HowtoHTML Relates 'addVURL' link. Each engine has a Part - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> form you can fill out to submit your URL to the engine.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Creating an HTML Toolbox Before you -start registering, take some time to write up a short description of your site. Some engines ask<br /> <br /> Chapter - Setting and Up Your OnlinetoPresence for this 17 information, it's better provide a prepared (and spell-checked) description that you've Chapter - Creating a Greatthan UseritInterface thought18 through completely is to add one that you created off the top of your head. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Tip Not engines use the keywords Chapter 19 all- search Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugsstored in a page's metadata as part of the search, but some do, which it never hurts include keyword <meta> elements in your document headers. Read Chapter 20 means - Ten HTML Do’s andto Don’ts more metadata Part VIIabout - Appendixes<br /> <br /> in Chapter 4.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Crafting useful page titles<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Have you ever noticed that the first thing you see about a page in a search engine's results listing is its Index title? Sheet The title of your page often makes the first impression, so you want it to be a good one. When you Cheat - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition craft for your pages, be sure that they remain meaningful and intriguing when viewed outside the List of titles Figures context of your Web site. List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> For example, the title 'My Home Page' is not a very helpful title because it doesn't say who you are and<br /> <br /> List ofpotential Sidebars visitors should care. However, the title 'John Doe, MCSE and Network Guru for Hire' tells why<br /> <br /> people a lot more about you and may generate more visits to your page. You want the titles of your pages to be descriptive but concise, which can be tricky, but you get the hang of it after a while. Consider including the same basic information at the start of each title, followed by a short descriptor of the page. The résumé page on a consulting site might be titled 'John Doe, Networking Guru Résumé and Curriculum Vita' while the recent projects page might be 'John Doe, Networking Guru Recent Projects.'<br /> <br /> for Dummies, Promoting HTML your4 site offline4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> & Sons © 2003 pages) your site online, you should be sure to promote it As important as itJohn is forWiley you to register and(408 promote offline as well. Print the URL your other marketing materials. Include it on your Whether youron goal is business to build a cards simple,and text-oriented Web site one with frames, graphics, animation, this stepcorrespondence or and in loaded your e-mail signature (okay, and so that's technically online) and any other place that willthink put you on the right you think people by-step will see book it. Just of your Web sitetrack. as an extension of your identity (corporate or otherwise) and promote it as such. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 18: 4Creating a Great User Interface ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Understanding why your UI matters Table of Contents<br /> <br /> site maps 4th during site development and on your site HTML Using 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Practicing good linking<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Leastwell You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Choosing media Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Creating an accessible site HTML Page Chapter 3 - Creating Your First Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Reviewing some excellent user interfaces<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 -design Linkingoftoyour Online The overall siteResources is called the user interface (or UI) - and when you design a good UI, you Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images give users the tools they need to move about your site with minimum fuss. This chapter outlines some Chapter 7 Web-site - Top Offdesign Your Page with Formatting standard principles to follow as you create your HTML; they can ensure a usable and Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level effective UI.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables As its name a UI is the mechanism provided to give a user access to the information on your Web Chapter 9 - implies, HTML Frames<br /> <br /> site. Although each UI is unique, they're all made up of the same components: text, graphics, and media - HTML Forms files, all held together with HTML. If your site is difficult to navigate, cluttered with flashing text and rampant Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies colors - and generally doesn't help people find what they're looking for - then your visitors probably won't Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS find their way to your site more than once. Why should they bother? Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 if -your Making Multimedia Magic However, site's navigation is intuitive, you use images and media to accent your design without Chapter 14 - Integrating Database into Your HTML overpowering it, and youado all you can to help people locate the information they're looking for, you've Chapter - How Relates to Other Markup Languages created15a solid UIHTML and can expect visitors to return time and again. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Defining the Scope and Goals for Your Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> An important firstJohn stepWiley in creating an effective UI for your site doesn't have anything to do with markup, but & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) instead has everything to do with planning. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Before your site grows too large by-step book will(or putbefore you onyou theeven rightbuild track.your site if you haven't started yet), carefully identify the exact purpose of your site and the goals you want it to meet. When you have a good understanding of your site's scope and goals, you can better create an interface that accomplishes them. Table of Contents For example, an online store might have goals like these: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Allow visitors to browse an online catalog and put items in a shopping cart. Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Provide visitors with a way to purchase the items in their cart online.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 users - HTML at Work the Web decisions. Help make smartonpurchasing Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Facilitate Part II - Gettingmerchandise Started with returns HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> and exchanges.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Solicit feedback from users about products they want to see in the catalog or ways to make the site - Linking to Online Resources better.<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 list - Top Off Your Pagean with Formatting This short of goals is also indicator of the areas your site may include - and the kinds of activities it Part - Taking HTML Instead to the Next Level just will III need to support. of having<br /> <br /> a single area (such as a product catalog), the site needs some<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 -areas HTMLlike Tables specialized these: Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames Online and shopping cart Chapter 10 -catalog HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Buying guides or other information that can help users make better purchasing decisions<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting A help-and-feedback section Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic A set to expedite returnsinto and exchanges Chapter 14 of- tools Integrating a Database Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> When you've established the goals for your site, you can identify the elements best suited for the site:<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox the major areas of the site helps users quickly identify what part A navigation system that identifies Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online they're in, and helps them movePresence from one part of the site to others without getting lost. Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> A -set ofPart standard design Part VI The of Tens<br /> <br /> elements (such as buttons, page-title styles, and color specifications) to keep the users oriented as they move from Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web page Bugs to page in the same site. Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts A standard display for items in the catalog, including product-related information such as product images and descriptions, prices, and availability.<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix Well-designed B - HTML Character forms to help Codes users search for products in the catalog, purchase the items in their<br /> <br /> shopping carts, request a refund or help returning an item, and submit comments to the site. Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Long text pages that offer extensive information on purchasing options, product returns, and other helpful information - but are still easy to read and navigate.<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade Design matters<br /> <br /> List ofYou'll Sidebars notice that this chapter doesn't lay down the law about exactly what makes a Web page pretty or<br /> <br /> ugly. We include discussions of good design principles, but it's up to you to choose color schemes and the overall look-and-feel for the site. Always remember that what looks great to one person may be ugly to someone else. That said; keep in mind that design does matter when you're building your Web site. If you're building a site for your business, that site may provide the first impression for potential customers or clients. The site should reflect your business style. If you run an architecture firm, for<br /> <br /> example, strong lines and a clean look may be the best way to present your company image. If you HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition run a flower shop, your site may be a bit more organic and decorated (well, okay, flowery) to remind ISBN:0764519956 by they Ed Tittel and Natanya Pittswalked into your store. visitors of what might expect if they John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> If you're new Whether to Web design or is graphics you need a site that marks your goal to buildand a simple, text-oriented Web site your business presence on the or getting one loaded graphics,professional and animation, this stepWeb, consider helpwith fromframes, a Web-design to create a general look-and-feel for the will put you onand the navigational right track. aids they create to build and manage the site site, and thenby-step use thebook images, layouts, yourself. Once established, a distinctive and consistent look-and-feel of your site is relatively easy to Table maintain. of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Regardless of who designs your site, be sure you take the time to get a critique of it from peers,<br /> <br /> Introduction friends, family members, and anyone else who is willing to be brutally honest with you about how good Part I(or - Meeting HTML in Its looks. Natural even bad) it really A Environment negative-but-constructive<br /> <br /> critique from someone who knows and<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Needthat's to Know about and the Web business you are trying to acquire. respects you Least beatsYou a 'Gee, ugly' fromHTML someone whose Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Remember The final section of thisDocuments chapter, 'Some Excellent User Interfaces,' takes a look at how Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Amazon.com's UI matches the online store's goals. Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Finding and Using Images Bottom line:- The final UI elements you include in your site - and how you design and organize them Chapter - Top Off the Yoursite's Pagegoals. with Formatting should 7all flow from Even when you add to an existing site, you should start by considering Part III Taking HTML to the Next Level the goals of the new section of the site, and then identifying the UI elements you need to meet those goals. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Of course, by that time you'll have an existing UI to use as a guide, so the UI for the new section should Chapter 9 HTML facilitate the originalFrames goals of the section and fit your site's overall design. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTMLSite 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Mapping Your by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> It’s often easier toJohn get Wiley to where you’re going you know how to get there. Mapping your Web site can be a & Sons © 2003 (408ifpages) vital step in planning — and later running — the site. This process involves Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web sitetwo creative phases: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Creating a visual guide onwill paper or electronically that you can use to guide the development of your by-step book put you on the right track. site. Table of Creating Contents a visual guide on your Web site to help visitors find their way around. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Both have their place in good UI design, so each gets its own section.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Using a- map The Least for Yousite Need development to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web When you a site map the development of a Web site — even one that includes a few pages — Chapter 3 use - Creating Your during First HTML Page<br /> <br /> youII know what Started pages you to Part - Getting withneed HTML<br /> <br /> build and how they relate to each other. The map can help you identify the navigation elements you’ll need to include — and as a bonus, it provides you with a checklist of pages. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents These are two ways a site map can help ensure that you’ve built everything your site needs before you put Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources it on the Web for the world to see. Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 - Top Your Page Formatting For example, the Off visual map ofwith the XML Dummies, 3rd Edition Web site Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level (www.lanw.com/books/xmlfd3e/default.htm)<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> is shown in Figure 18-1.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> This map us that the site has four main sections, and three of those sections — chapter contents, Chapter 9 tells - HTML Frames chapter10URLs, andForms chapter examples — are each further divided by chapter. Each chapter page then lists Chapter - HTML the IV contents, URLs, or examples a particular Part - Extending HTML with Otherfor Technologies<br /> <br /> chapter in the book.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Figure The site map for the XML For Dummies, 3rd Edition Web site. Appendix C -18-1: Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Building the site one piece at a time<br /> <br /> List of Figures List of Tables<br /> <br /> If you plan to build your Web site a page or section at a time, you can create a map of the final site and List of Listings<br /> <br /> then decide which pages it makes the most sense to build first. When you have a good working idea of how your site is going to expand, you can plan for it during each stage. For example, suppose you have created a site map for the XML For Dummies, 3rd Edition Web site — and the site needs a Book Examples section. If that section isn’t quite finished when the site launches, disaster need not ensue — provided the designer planned ahead to accommodate new sections, and built that capability into the site. You simply leave out any links to that section of the site (as shown in Figure 18-2) when you launch.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 4 -18-2: Structuring TheXML Your ForHTML Dummies Documents site without the book examples. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources When the examples section is ready, you simply add it to the site and add a link to the main Chapter 6 book - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> navigation elements, as shown in Figure 18-3. - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Figure 18-3: The Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> XML For Dummies site with the book examples.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> As long as you know the resources are coming, you can create a navigation scheme that easily accommodates the book examples section when it’s ready to add. Without a site map and a complete Appendix C - Glossary plan for the site, however, integrating new sections can suck up way too much time and effort. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Index<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet Although - HTML 4 you For Dummies, 4thtoEdition Warning want visitors your site to know that you plan on expanding it over time, it’s not a List of Figures good idea to create “under construction” sections that don’t include much of anything except the hint that List they of will Tables contain something someday. Instead, consider having a small section of your home page<br /> <br /> highlight some things coming soon so visitors know new information will be available later. Users are List of Listings disappointed List of Sidebarsif your site design merely hints at information it doesn’t really have yet.<br /> <br /> Using a map as a visual guide for your users Site maps aren’t just for site developers. Even when you devise a solid navigation scheme that leads people to the exact information they need to find, a site map can be a supplemental navigational tool that gives them a different way to find what they’re looking for.<br /> <br /> Unlike a series of navigation menus or links, a site map lays out all contents of your site so visitors can see all their options atHTML once.4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons ©finding 2003 (408 pages) Remember Everyone approaches information in a different way. It’s up to you to give visitors as many options as Whether you can (realistically) navigating site. Some people your goal is tofor build a simple,your text-oriented Web site like to be led; others like to orstill oneothers loadedlike withtoframes, graphics, andoption animation, this steprummage around; see every possible and choose the one they like best. by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> The downside to site maps is that they grow as your site grows. Depending on the size and complexity of your site, your map may take several screens to display. When you surf the Web, you’ll notice that Table of Contents massive sites such as Microsoft.com,HP.com, and Amazon.com don’t offer site maps because maps HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition of their sites would be huge and unwieldy. However, medium and large sites (such as Symantec.com) Introduction use them effectively. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter Tricks1of the - The Trade Least In You theNeed end,toonly Know youabout can decide HTML and whether the Web a site map is a good navigation tool for your<br /> <br /> site. If you have few pages, a site map might be overkill. However, if your site has several sections Chapter 2 only - HTML at aWork on the Web and you3 can- think of different ways to Page access your content, a site map might be the best choice. Chapter Creating Your First HTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Tip You can design your site map however you’d like and use any combination of text, graphics, and - Structuring Your HTML Documents links. Many maps are just a simple collection of links. Remember that you don’t want the map to take too Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources long to download or to be too hard to read. The map is a navigational tool; it should be simple and easy to Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images use. Chapter 5 includes information on how to create and manage hyperlinks. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Establishing Solid Navigation by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The navigation you use on your site©can or break it. If visitors can’t find what they’re looking for on John Wiley & Sons 2003make (408 pages) your site, chances are they will leave and never come back. The type of site navigation you use on your site Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web depends on how or many pages you put on it — and on how you organize them. one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- If you only have a few by-stepmay book put youcollection on the right track.on the home page that help users jump to each pages, your navigation bewill a simple of links page. However, if your site has many pages organized into different sections, your home page may only link to those sections and not to each page.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition site houses a large collection of pages organized as a variety of sections; For example, the Dummies.com Introduction it would be impractical to link to all the pages in any navigation scheme. Also, the site includes articles on Part I - Meeting HTML in Its a wide variety of topics, as Natural well as Environment book information.<br /> <br /> The site could be organized into books and articles,<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -are The Leastto You to Know about HTML the Web subject, so the site is organized by topic. but visitors likelier beNeed looking for information onand a particular Chapter The home 2 page, - HTMLshown at Work in Figure on the Web 18-4, prominently displays these different topic areas on the left. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 -18-4: Creating HTML Toolboxsite is organized by topic. Figure Thean Dummies.com Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> When you into one of these areas, the remaining topic areas are available in a navigation bar Chapter 18 click - Creating a Great Usertopic Interface across ofofthe page Part VI - the Thetop Part Tens<br /> <br /> (as shown in Figure 18-5). You don’t have to return to the home page to jump from topic to topic. Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 18-5: The main topic areas on the Dummies.com site are accessible from the top navigation<br /> <br /> bar.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 area (at left, echoing the by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pittstopic has its own sub-navigation As you can also see from Figure 18-5, each John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)the topic. Although the links are different, the general layout the home page) that lists sub-topics within navigation scheme Whether is consistent your goal throughout is to buildthe a simple, site. Thus text-oriented visitors know Webwhat site to expect as they navigate around the site. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Finally, the topmost navigation area of each page includes a regular collection of links that appear on every page of the site to help visitors quickly access important areas from anywhere: a site search, help, Table of Contents account information, and a shopping cart. Every page has the same set of links to information about HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Dummies, the form to register for eTips, how to contact Dummies, the site copyright statement, and the Introduction site privacy policy. Like the shopping cart and help links, these links have to be on every page, but need Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment not be displayed as prominently. Adding them to a consistent site footer keeps them accessible to visitors Chapter - The Least You Need Know about HTML and the Web without1obscuring key content fortoany given topic or sub-topic. Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web If you create a map toYour aid site Chapter 3 - Creating Firstdevelopment, HTML Page you can also use it as a guide for the kind of navigational tools<br /> <br /> youII need to create for your Part - Getting Started with site. HTMLConsider<br /> <br /> each page on the map in turn; list the links that each page must<br /> <br /> include.4 A pattern normally emerges that can help you identify the main navigation tools your site needs Chapter - Structuring Your HTML Documents (such as to all main topicResources areas and copyright information, as on the Dummies site), as well as subChapter 5 links - Linking to Online navigation (such asUsing links Images to sub-topics on the topic pages). Chapter 6 tools - Finding and Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> After you know what tools you need, you can begin to design the visual scheme for your UI. Do you want to use buttons across the top, buttons down the side, or both? Do you need a footer that links to copyright or Chapter 8 - HTML Tables privacy information? If you have sections within sections within sections, how can you best help people Chapter 9 - HTMLthem? Frames navigate through Answering questions like these is the route to a solid navigation system that helps Chapter 10 their - HTML users find wayForms around your site — letting them focus on what they came for rather than on how to get Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies there. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Tip Whatever navigation scheme you finally devise, always give your visitors a way to get back to your Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting home page from wherever theyMagic are on the site. Your site’s home page is the gateway to the rest of the site, Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia and if visitors get lost or want to start again, Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Yourmake HTMLsure they can get back to Square One with no trouble. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade After you design your site navigation scheme and put together a few pages, ask someone who isn’t familiar with your site to review it and try to use it. To help them with their testing, give Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox them a list of three or four tasks you’d like them to complete — pages to visit or a form to fill out, for Chapter 17 If -your Setting Yourgets Online example. test Up visitor lostPresence or has lots of questions about how to navigate the site, you may need Chapter 18your - Creating Greatreviewer User Interface to revisit scheme.a Your may also have suggestions on ways to make the navigation features Part VI - and The Part of to Tens clearer easier use. Remember, you know your site and its content like the back of your hand — in Chapter 19 know - Ten too Ways to Exterminate Websee Bugs effect, you much. You may not gaps in the navigation system that a first-time user will Chapter 20turn - Ten HTMLaway. Do’s and Don’ts to find those gaps during site development than to be pelted with probably up right It’s better Part VII - Appendixes complaints after the site goes live. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Good Linking Practices by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The Web wouldn't be the Web without hyperlinks John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)- after all, they can connect your site to the rest of the Web and turn a collection of pages into a cohesive site.text-oriented But overusing orsite misusing links can detract from Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web your site and even lose you some business. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Choose your off-site links wisely Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Internal linking is almost a walk in the park compared to external linking - after all, when you link to pages HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> on your own site, the pages those links point to are under your control. You know what's on them today and what will be on them tomorrow, and even whether they will exist tomorrow. When you link to Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment resources on someone else's site, however, all bets are off. You don't maintain those pages, you can't Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web modify their content , and you certainly won't know when they disappear. Neither will your visitors - till they Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web slam into a 404 Page not found message (the usual sign of a broken link that now goes nowhere). Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II to - Getting Started Links other sites are with moreHTML useful<br /> <br /> when they're relatively stable and have less chance of breaking.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 these - Structuring Your HTML Documents Consider suggestions: Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Link particular of a site rather than a specific page on the site. Pages come and go on Chapter 6 to -a Finding andsection Using Images sites, ones, butFormatting the general organization typically stays the same, making sections a Chapter 7 especially - Top Off large Your Page with better linking bet.to the Next Level Part III - Taking HTML Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables Carefully choose what sites you link to. Sites maintained by companies don't usually go away, but<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 maintained - HTML Frames those by individuals do so more often. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV Rather - Extending than linking HTML directly with Other to PDFs Technologies or images<br /> <br /> or other media files on a site, link to the pages on the<br /> <br /> site11that- link to those resources. Chapter Getting Stylish with CSS Sites often update the resources and give them new names. The page linksand to the resource will almost always be updated to reflect new names, so the page is a Chapter 12 that - HTML Scripting safer bet.Multimedia Magic Chapter 13 linking - Making Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Remember Good linking practices are not a substitute for regular site maintenance. You should regularly - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages check (once a week if possible, once a month at least) all links from your site to external sites to be sure Part V - From Web Page to Web Site they're still working. A good Web editor will do the checking for you, as will other site utilities as described Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox inChapter 16. Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter Warning 18 -Even Creating though a Great you don't User Interface control the content on the Web sites you link to, providing links to them Part implies VI - your The Part support of Tens or endorsement<br /> <br /> of those sites. When a visitor follows a link from your site to someone<br /> <br /> else's site, or she thinks you approve ofBugs the content on that new site. That human quirk makes a couple Chapter 19 he - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web of guidelines necessary: Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> If you don't want to be associated with content on a particular external site, don't link to the site. Seems obvious, doesn't it? But the only way to find out whether you approve of a seemingly Appendix B - HTML Character Codes relevant site is to visit it and check it out before you link. Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Index Periodically review your links to be sure the sites' owners are still the same - and that the Cheatcontent Sheet - HTML For Dummies,When 4th Edition is still4 appropriate. domain names expire, new owners may take them over and List ofcreate Figuresnew content that's completely irrelevant - or, worse, damaging to your image (think List ofpornography). Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> Craft useful link text<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> The text you associate with links is just as important as the links you choose to use on your site. The text gives users a hint about where the link is taking them so they can decide whether to go along for the ride. For example, Visit Dummies.com to read more about this book is much more helpful than Read more about this book. The first bit of text tells visitors they're going to leave the current site to visit Dummies.com and read more<br /> <br /> about a book there. The second just tells them they're going to read more about the book - and they might HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition be surprised to find themselves flung off one site and onto another. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Generally, when John you create link text, let users know the following: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Whether they're leaving your or one loaded withsite. frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> What kind of information the page they're linking to contains. How the linked site relates to the current content or page on your site Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> The goal of your link text should be to inform users and build their trust. If your link text doesn't give them solid clues about what to expect from your links, they simply won't trust your links - and won't follow them.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter - The Least Always You Need to Know about HTMLhere' and the Weblink you create. If you link text is well Tricks1of the Trade avoid the use of 'click in any Chapter HTMLneed at Work thewords Web to prompt the user to click on a link. The link text should speak for crafted,2 you- don't the on extra Chapter itself. 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Choosing the Right Bells and Whistles by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Media can offer aJohn huge boon& for your Web site, adding interactivity and some pizzazz to text and static Wiley Sons © 2003 (408 pages) graphics. However, you should only use media that make your site work better (and/or support the Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site information on it).orAsone a general rule, gratuitously slathering a site with media loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- is bad media. When you book will put youthe on following the right track. choose media forby-step your site, ask yourself questions: Why are you adding these particular media to your site? For example, an audio clip of an Table of Contents interview may be less effective than a transcript. An interactive Flash presentation can demonstrate HTML how 4 ForaDummies, 4th Edition product works or teach someone how to do something - but Flash-enabled content can take Introduction longer to download. If a medium doesn't have a clear purpose, you may want to rethink its integration Part Iinto - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment your site.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> What some to the chosen media? Not everyone is equipped to view (or listen to) all Chapter 2 are - HTML at alternatives Work on the Web media formats. Therefore make Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML sure Page the information offered in your media is also available in an alternative format. For example, if visitors to your site don't have Flash and can't interact with your Part II - Getting Started with HTML Flash navigation, how do they get around your site? Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 large - Linking tomedia Online file? Resources How is the Large files may take a long time to download, so make sure the Chapter 6 Finding and Using download is well worth theImages wait for users. When you do choose to include large files, be sure to let Chapter 7 know - Tophow Off Your withcan Formatting users largePage so they choose whether to download. Also see whether you can split large Part III - Taking HTML files to the Next Levelcan files into smaller that visitors<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> access one at a time.<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Will a special plug-in or application to access the media file? If users aren't set up Chapter 9 visitors - HTMLneed Frames to play particular media format, they may skip using the media (or drum their fingers while the Chapter 10 -a HTML Forms application downloads). sure you let visitors Part IV - Extending HTML with Be Other Technologies<br /> <br /> know exactly what formats your media files are saved in and the tools needed to view those files so they can decide whether they want to download the Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS media. (The wise Web-site designer also includes a way for users to bypass the media, which helps to Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting ensure the widest possible audience for the content. More about that in a moment.) Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 - Integrating Database into HTML topic in itself. The Resources section at the end of this Tip Working with mediaa on the Web is Your a significant Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages chapter includes information on Web sites and books that cover media in more detail. Chapter 13 is a Part V -starting From Web Page to Web Site good point for using media<br /> <br /> in your Web pages.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Making Your Site Accessible to Everyone by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> If you optimize your Web site& for users with Internet connections, large monitors, the latest browsers, John Wiley Sons © 2003 (408fast pages) and every plug-inWhether known to humanity, you'll be severely limiting the audience your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site for your site. Instead, you should design your site to accommodate as many users as possible withstepthe widest variety of equipment. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> The short list of things you can do to make your site accessible includes: Table of Providing Contents alternative text for all images and alternative content formats for all media. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Using Cascading Style Sheets where possible for styling (instead of <font> and other markup) when you apply formatting to your documents. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You in Need to Know about HTML and the Web Reviewing your pages as many browsers as possible, including a text-only browser so you can get Chapter HTML Work on the Web an 2idea- of howatthe various browsers handle your combination of text and markup. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Following Accessibility Part II - GettingWeb Started with HTMLGuidelines<br /> <br /> wherever possible, as outlined by the W3C's Web Content<br /> <br /> Accessibility Guidelines www.w3.org/TR/WCAG. Chapter 4 - Structuring YouratHTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Tip Bobby is a Web-based tool that evaluates your Web page and lets you know exactly how accessible - Finding and Using Images it really is. We strongly suggest that you check all your pages with Bobby to find any accessibility problems Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting you might have overlooked. To run a Bobby scan, visit Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> http://bobby.watchfire.com/<br /> <br /> Part - Extending Technologies andIV type the URL HTML of the with pageOther you want to check<br /> <br /> in the URL: box.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 User for Dummies, 4th Edition Some Excellent Interfaces by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Spend a few minutes the ©Web you’ll be bombarded with excellent (and not-so-excellent) John browsing Wiley & Sons 2003 and (408 pages) examples of userWhether interfaces. How do you know whethertext-oriented an interfaceWeb is excellent? Simple: If you can find your goal is to build a simple, site what you need onoraone siteloaded with relatively little trouble, and you come away feeling like you had a good with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book willinterface. put you on theexamples right track. experience, you’ve used a good Two of excellent user interfaces are the Amazon.com site and (believe it or not) the IRS site. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Amazon.com<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Earlier on, the chapter looked at how a site’s goals directly affect its user interface, with an online store as the prime example of defining a site’s goals and then designing an appropriate UI. Well, behold a sterling Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web example: Everything about Amazon.com is designed to facilitate the buying experience. This site is divided Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web into sections, each represented by a different color tab across the top. Visit www.amazon.com to see what Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page we’re referring to. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 -of Structuring Regardless where youYour are HTML in the Documents site, you can get to any other section — you can always search, Chapter Linking to cart Online access5your- shopping andResources account, get help, and (of course) check out to buy. The site’s system for Chapter checking 6 out - Finding is broken andinto Using easy-to-manage Images screens, so purchasing isn’t intimidating. Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Every the same Part IIIproduct - Takingpage HTMLfollows to the Next Levelbasic<br /> <br /> format, whether you’re shopping for a book or for a garden hose, large amounts of help and FAQ text are well divided and easy to navigate. Simply click on the HELP Chapter 8 - HTML Tables link in the upper-right corner. Chapter 10 anything - HTML Forms There isn’t on the Amazon.com site that doesn’t have to do with selling products online. You Part IV find - Extending HTML with Other won’t any gratuitous media, butTechnologies you will find<br /> <br /> a special feature that enables you to preview book<br /> <br /> Chapter 11right - Getting with goals CSS of the site are well reflected in its organization and design. contents on the Stylish page. The Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting Chapter 13<br /> <br /> Multimedia Magic The IRS-- Making Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 15Web - How Relates to Other Languages The IRS site HTML contains a great deal Markup of important information relevant to everyone in the United States. Part V means - From Web Page toto Web That the site has be Site easily navigable<br /> <br /> and well organized so users can find what they’re looking<br /> <br /> Chapter Creating HTML Toolbox for. The16site- is dividedan into sections, each of which is linked from a persistent navigation bar at the top of Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online the UI, as shown in Figure 18-6. Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 18-6: Main areas on the IRS site are accessible from a persistent navigation bar. Each main area of the site uses the same layout, including a left column of fields for searching both the site in general and specific IRS forms. Then there’s a list of contents for the site, links to relevant<br /> <br /> resources, and access to topics of discussion. Although the actual content, resources, and topics change HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition from section to section, they are accessible on all pages from the same spot, as shown in Figure 18-7. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Figure 18-7: Each area of the site uses the same general layout.<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables The inclusion of a persistent link enables a visitor to search for a publication from any page. Such features Chapter 9 significantly - HTML Frames contribute to one of the site’s primary goals: making publications easily available. If you’re Chapter 10 - HTML Forms doing research on a particular tax topic and realize you need a particular publication, you can search for it Part - Extending Other Technologies rightIVfrom the pageHTML that with let you know you needed<br /> <br /> it in the first place. You don’t have to jump to a search<br /> <br /> Chapter page first, 11 which - Getting saves Stylish steps with andCSS makes publications that much more accessible. Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> In general, -the IRS site is a great example of making information that users will need most (like Making Multimedia Magic publications) immediately accessible. The information on the site is well organized — and it’s obvious the Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML site designers work diligently to create a UI that supports users in their search for tax information. Chapter 13 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for 4th Edition More Resources onDummies, UI Design by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> We've barely scratched the & surface Web UI design in this chapter, but we're confident it's enough to get you John Wiley Sons ©of 2003 (408and pages) started. We also Whether recommend the following Web sites and books onWeb site and your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site interface design if you want to dig deeper into creating great UIs: or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> For a crash course on Web design basics read Design Basics from Webmonkey at Table of Contents<br /> <br /> http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/html/97/05/index2a.html<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction In addition, its Site Redesign Tutorial offers an interesting perspective on what it takes to rework a site's design. Part IRead - Meeting it at HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/design/site_building/tutorials/ tutorial4.html<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 - Findingisand Using Images Jakob Nielsen committed to creating accessible Web content. His Web site, http://useit.com, is chockChapter - Top Off Your Page with full7of resources and articles onFormatting creating accessible sites. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Hey, are useful too. Web Pages That Suck helps you learn about good design by evaluating Chapter 8 negative - HTML examples Tables bad BeFrames sure your site doesn't look like any of those featured at www.webpagesthatsuck.com/. Chapter 9 design. - HTML Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Web Design For Dummies by Lisa Lopuck (Wiley Publishing, Inc.) is another step in the direction of a sophisticated Web site with a knockout look.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 Usability - HTML For and Dummies Scripting by Richard Mander and Bud Smith (Wiley Publishing, Inc.) can help you fine-tune Web Chapter your 13site - Making to makeMultimedia it amazingly Magic easy to use (which is a great help in keeping your visitors coming back for more). Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Part VI: The Part of Tens by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> In This Part: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19: Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Table of Contents<br /> <br /> 20: Ten4th HTML Do’s and Don’ts HTML Chapter 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> - The Least In this part . . . You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Here we you catch potential bugsPage and errors in your Web pages, cover top do’s and don’ts for HTML Chapter 3 help - Creating Your First HTML<br /> <br /> markup, and point out key Part II - Getting Started withHTML HTML resources<br /> <br /> you can use to extend your knowledge, skills, and sources of inspiration. Enjoy! Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 19: 4Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Avoiding markup and spelling faux pas Table of Contents<br /> <br /> links hot4th and fresh HTML Keeping 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Gathering beta testers to check, double-check, and triple-check your site<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The You Need to Know Applying userLeast feedback to your site about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web After you the finishing on Page a set of pages (but before you post them on the Web for the world to Chapter 3 put - Creating Yourtouches First HTML<br /> <br /> see)IIis- the timeStarted to put them through Part Getting with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> their paces. Testing is the best way to control your site's quality.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Thorough testing mustinclude content review, analysis of HTML syntax and semantics, link checks, and - Linking to Online Resources various sanity checks to make doubly sure that what you built is what you really wanted. Read this chapter Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images for some gems of testing wisdom (learned from a lifetime of Web adventures) - as we seek to rid your Chapter 7 -of Top Off Your Page with Formatting Web pages bugs, errors, gaucheries, and lurking infelicities. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, Edition Make a ListHTML and4 Check It - 4th Twice by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Your design should include a road called a site map) that tells you what's where in every John Wiley & Sons map © 2003(often (408 pages) individual HTML document in your site, and the relationships amongWeb these Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented sitepages. If you're really smart, you've kept this map up-to-date as you moved from design to implementation. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- (In our experience, things by-step will put on the right track. always change when youbook go down thisyou path.) If you're merely as smart as the rest of us, don't berate yourself - update that map now. Be sure to include all intra- and inter-document links. Table ofmap Contents A site provides the foundation for a test plan. Yep, that's right - effective testing isn't random. Use the HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition map to Introduction<br /> <br /> and check every page and every Part IInvestigate - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1<br /> <br /> link systematically.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Make sure everything works as you think it should - and that what you built has some relationship - HTML at Work on the Web (however surprising) to your design.<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting with to HTML Define the Started list of things check<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> as you go through the testing process.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Check least) twice. (Red suit and reindeer harness optional.) Chapter 5 -everything Linking to(at Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Master TextHTML Mechanics by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> By the time any collection comes together, you're looking at thousands of words, if not John Wileyof&Web Sonspages © 2003 (408 pages) more. Yet many Web pages get published without even a cursory spell which is why we suggest Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Webcheck, site no, demand - thatoryou include a spell check as a step when testing and checking your materials. (Okay, one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put the right we don't have a gun to your head, butyou youon know it's fortrack. your own good.) Many HTML tools, such as FrontPage, HomeSite, and Dreamweaver, include built-in spell checkers and that's the first spell-check method you should use. These HTML tools also know how to ignore the HTML markup and just check Table of Contents your text. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction Even if you only use HTML tools occasionally and hack out the majority of your HTML by hand, perform a Part I -check Meeting HTMLposting in Its Natural Environment spell before your documents to the<br /> <br /> Web. (For a handy illustration of why this step matters,<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -a The You Need Know about HTML Webyour Web travels. Be sure to include a try keeping log Least of spelling and to grammar errors you and findthe during Chapter note on2how- those HTML at gaffes Workreflect on theon Web the people who created the pages involved. Get the message?) Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade use Part II - Getting StartedYou withcan HTML<br /> <br /> your favorite word processor to spell check your pages. Before you check them, add HTML markup to your custom dictionary, and pretty soon, the spell checker runs more Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents smoothly - getting stuck only on URLs and other strange strings that occur from time to time in HTML files. Chapter - Finding and Using Images If you'd6prefer a different approach, try any of the many HTML-based spell-checking services now Chapter 7 on- the TopWeb. Off Your withone Formatting available WePage like the at the Doctor HTML site, which you can find online at Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level www2.imagiware.com/RxHTML/.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables If Doctor checker doesn't float your boat, visit a search engine, such as www.yahoo.com, Chapter 9 HTML's - HTMLspell Frames<br /> <br /> and use10web pageForms spell check as a search string. Doing so can help you produce a list of spellChapter - HTML check made HTML specifically for Web pages. Poke around Part IV -tools Extending with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> www.webreference.com for more pointed<br /> <br /> pointers, feel so inclined! Chapter 11if you - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> HTML and Scripting One way or-another, persist until you root out all typos and misspellings. Your users may not know to thank<br /> <br /> Chapter Making Multimedia you for13 your- impeccable use of Magic language - but if they don't trip over any errors while exploring your work, Chapter 14 Integrating a Database Your HTML they'll have a higher opinion of your into pages (and of their creator). Even if they don't know why. Call it stealth Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages diplomacy. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for — Dummies, 4th Edition Legacy Lack of Live Links A Loathsome by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> We performed anJohn unscientific, random sample to double-check our own suspicions; users told us that Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) positive impressions of a particular site are proportional to how many working Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site links they find there. The moral of this survey: Always check your links. This step is as true after you publish your pages as it is or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will putirritates you on users the right track. before they’re made public. Nothing more than a link that produces the dreaded 404 Server not found error instead of the good stuff they seek! Remember, too, that link checks are as indispensable to page maintenance as they are to testing.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Editionlong on twenty-first-century street smarts, hire a robot to do the job for you: Tricks of Dummies, the Trade4th If you’re Introduction They work really long hours (no coffee breaks), don’t charge much, and faithfully check every last link in Part Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment yourI -site (or beyond, if you let them). The best thing about<br /> <br /> robots is that you can schedule them to do their<br /> <br /> Chapter - The Least You Need to Know about HTML andalways the Web jobs at 1regular intervals: They always show up on time, do a good job, and never complain (though Chapter we haven’t 2 -yet HTML found at one Workthat on the brings Web homemade cookies or remembers birthdays). All you have to do is<br /> <br /> search 3online for words such asHTML link check Chapter - Creating Your First Page or robot. You’ll find lots to choose from! Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> We’re rather fond of a robot named MOMspider, created by Roy Fielding of the W3C. Visit the MOMspider - Structuring Your HTML Documents site at http://ftp.ics.uci.edu/pub/websoft/MOMspider/. This spider takes some work to use, Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources but you can set it to check only local links, and it does a bang-up job of catching stale links before users Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images do. (Note that some HTML software, such as HomeSite, comes with a built-in link checker so you can Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting check your links before you post your pages.) Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML Tables Tip If 8a URL points to one page that immediately points to another (a pointer), you’re not entitled to just Chapter 9 link - HTML Frames leave the alone. Sure, it technically works, but for how long? And how annoying! So if your link Chapter checking 10 shows - HTML a pointer Forms that points to a pointer (yikes), do yourself (and your users) a favor by updating Part the IV URL - Extending to point directly HTML with to the Other content’s Technologies real location.<br /> <br /> You save users time, reduce bogus traffic on the<br /> <br /> Internet, generate goodwith cyberkarma. Chapter 11and - Getting Stylish CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> If you must leave a URL active even after it has become passé to give your users time to bookmark your - Making Multimedia Magic new location, you can instruct newer browsers to jump straight from the old page to the new one by Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML including the following HTML command in the old document’s <head> section: Chapter 13 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> <meta http-equiv="refresh" Part V - From Web Page to Web Site Chapter 16<br /> <br /> content="0"; url="newurlhere"><br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> This nifty line of code tells a browser (if sufficiently new) that it should refresh the page. The delay before Setting Up Your Online Presence switching to- the new page is specified by the value of the content attribute, and the destination URL by Chapter 18 of- the Creating a Great User Interface the value url attribute. If you must build such a page, be sure to include a plain-vanilla link in its Part VI The Part of Tens <body> section, too, so users with older browsers can follow the link manually, instead of automatically. Chapter 19 also - Ten Ways to Exterminate Webtells Bugs You may want to add some text that the visitors to update their bookmarks with the new URL. Chapter 20 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Getting there may not be half the fun, but it’s the whole objective. Chapter 17<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Edition Look for Trouble inDummies, All the4th Right Places by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> You and a limitedJohn group of users should your site well before you share it with the rest of the world Wiley & Sons © 2003 test (408 pages) and more than once. This process is called beta testing, and it's a bona Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web fide, site five-star must for a well-built Web site, especially if you intend it for business use. When the time comes or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-to beta-test a site, bring in as by-step book as willyou put can you find. on the righthave track. rowdy and refractory a crowd If you picky customers (or colleagues who are pushy, opinionated, or argumentative), be comforted to know that you have found a higher calling for them: Such people make ideal beta-testers - if you can get them to cooperate.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML For Dummies, Edition Tip 4Don't wait till the4th very last minute to test your Web site. Sometimes the glitches found during the betaIntroduction test phase can take weeks to fix. Take heed: Test early and test often, and you'll thank us in the long run! Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Beta-testers in ways you about never HTML imagined possible. Chapter 1 - use The your Leastpages You Need to Know and the Web They interpret your content to mean things you intended million Chapter 2 never - HTML at Workin ona the Webyears. They drive you crazy and crawl all over your cherished beliefs and principles. And they doFirst all this before Chapter 3 - Creating Your HTML Page your users do! Trust us, it's a blessing in disguise. Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> These colleagues also find gotchas, big and small, that you never knew existed. They catch typos that - Structuring Your HTML Documents word processors couldn't. They tell you things you left out and things that you should have omitted. They Chapter 5 - Linking to Onlineon Resources give you a fresh perspective your Web pages, and they help you to see them from extreme points of Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images view. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Remember The results of Next all this suffering, Part III - Taking HTML to the Level<br /> <br /> believe it or not, are positive. Your pages emerge clearer, more direct, and more correct than they would have if you tried to test them by yourself. (If you don't Chapter 8 - HTML Tables believe us, of course, you could try skipping this step. And when real users start banging on your site, Chapter 9 - HTML Frames forgive us if we don't watch.) Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Cover All the Bases with Peer Reviews by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> If you’re a user with a simple or apages) collection of facts and figures about your private obsession, John Wiley &home Sons ©page 2003 (408 this particular tip Whether may not apply to you. But feel free to text-oriented read along anyway — it just might come in handy your goal is to build a simple, Web site down the road. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> If your pages express views and content that represent an organization, chances are oh, about 100 percent that you should subject your pages to some kind of peer-and-management review before Table of Contents publishing them to the world. In fact, we recommend that you build reviews into each step along the way HTML 4 For Dummies, as you build your site4th — Edition starting by getting knowledgeable feedback on such basic aspects as the overall Introduction design, writing copy for each page, and the final assembly of your pages into a functioning site. These Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment reviews help you avoid potential stumbling blocks, such as unintentional off-color humor or unintended Chapter 1 The Least You Need to about HTML and thematters, Web political statements. If you have anyKnow doubts about copyright references, logo usage, or other Chapter important 2 details, - HTMLget at Work the legal on the department Web involved (if you don’t have one, you may want to consider a little consulting help for thisFirst purpose). Chapter 3 - Creating Your HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade Building a sign-off process into reviews so you can prove that responsible parties - Structuring Your HTML Documents reviewed and approved your materials may be a good idea. We hope you don’t have to be that formal Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources about publishing your Web pages, but it’s far, far better to be safe than sorry. (So is this process best Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images calledcovering the bases, or covering, ah, something else? You decide.) Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Trade Use the Best Tools of the Testing by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> When you grind through your Webpages) pages, checking your links and your HTML, remember that John Wiley & completed Sons © 2003 (408 automated help isWhether available. If you visit the W3C HTMLtext-oriented validator at http://validator.w3.org, you'll your goal is to build a simple, Web site be well on your way to finding computerized assistance to make your HTML pure as air, clean as the or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepbook will put you rightwell-written track. driven snow, andby-step standards-compliant as,on ah,the really HTML. (Do we know how to mix a metaphor, or what?) Table of Contents Likewise, investigating the Web spiders discussed earlier in the chapter is a good idea; use them regularly HTML 4 Forlinks Dummies, 4th Edition to check on your pages. These faithful creatures tell you if something isn't current, so you know Introduction where to start looking for links that need fixing. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Foster Feedback by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Even after you publish your & site, testing ends. (Are you having flashbacks to high school or college John Wiley Sons © 2003never (408 pages) yet? We know weWhether are.) You may not think of user feedback as a form (orsite consequence) of testing, but it your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web represents the best reality-check that your Web pages are ever likely to get, or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-which is why doing everything by-step bookprizes will putoryou on tangible the right inducements track. you can — including offering other — to get users to fill out HTML forms on your Web site is a good idea. Table Contents is also why reading all the feedback you get is even better. Go out and solicit as much This of reality-check HTML 4 For 4th Edition as you canDummies, handle (don’t worry; you’ll soon have more). But the best idea of all is to carefully consider the Introduction feedback that you read and then implement the ideas that actually bid fair to improve your Web offerings. Part - Meeting HTMLgood in Itsidea Natural Environment Oh,Iand it’s a really to respond to feedback<br /> <br /> with personal e-mail, to make sure your users know<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know HTML time and the Web you’re reading what they’re saying. If you about don’t have to do so, make some! Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Remember Even theYour most finicky and picky of users can be an incredible asset: Who better to pick over Chapter 3 - Creating First HTML Page yourIInewest pages andwith to point out Part - Getting Started HTML<br /> <br /> those small, subtle errors or flaws that they revel in finding? Your pages will have contributed mightily to the advance of human society by actually finding a legitimate use Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents for the universal human delight in nitpicking. And your users develop a real stake in boosting the success Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources of your site. Working with your users can mean that some become more involved in your work, helping Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images guide the content of your Web pages (if not the rest of your professional or obsessional life). Who could Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting ask for more? Put it this way: You may yet find out, and it could be remarkably helpful. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4thGive Edition If You GiveHTML to Them, They'll to You! by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Sometimes, simply asking feedback providing John Wileyfor & Sons © 2003or (408 pages) surveys for users to fill out won't produce the results you might be seeking either in quality or in volume. Remember theWeb old site days when you'd occasionally get Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented a dollar bill in theor mail, to encourage you to fill out a survey? It's hard to deliver one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- cold, hard cash via the by-step book will put you on theshould right track. Internet, but a little creative action on your part make it easy for you to offer your users something of value in exchange for their time and input. It could be an extra month on a subscription, discounts on products or services, or some kind of freebie by mail. (Maybe now you can finally unload those stuffed Gila Table of Contents Monsters you bought for that trade show last year. . . .) HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction But there's another way you can give back to your users that might not even cost you too much. An offer to Part I -participants Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment send theinresults of your survey, or to<br /> <br /> otherwise share what you learn, may be all the incentive<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -need The Least You Need about HTML the or Web participants to take the timetotoKnow tell you what theyand think, to answer your questions. Just remember Chapter that you're 2 asking - HTMLyour at Work users onto the give Web of their time and energy, so it's only polite to offer something in return. Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTMLReviews 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Schedule Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Okay, you probably understand that© every time you change or update your Web site, you should test its John Wiley & Sons 2003 (408 pages) functionality, run Whether a spell check, perform a beta test, and otherwise jump through important hoops to put your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site your best foot forward online. But sometimes, you’ll make just a small change or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- — a new phone number or willaput you on rightortrack. address, a singleby-step productbook listing, change ofthe name title to reflect a promotion and so on — and you won’t go through the whole formal testing process for “just one little thing.” Table of perfectly Contentsunderstandable, but one thing inevitably leads to another, and so on. Plus, if you solicit That’s HTML 4 For 4thare Edition feedback, Dummies, the chances good that you’ll get something back that points out a problem you’d never Introduction noticed or considered before. It’s essential to schedule periodic Web site reviews, even if you’ve made no Part - Meeting in Its Natural big Ichanges orHTML updates since yourEnvironment last review. Information<br /> <br /> grows stale, things change, and tiny errors have<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 creeping - The Least tochange Know about HTML another. and the Web a way of in asYou oneNeed small succeeds Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Just as3you-take your Your car inFirst for an oil change, or swap out your air-conditioning filter, you should plan to Chapter Creating HTML Page check your Started Web site regularly. Part II -out Getting with HTML<br /> <br /> Most big organizations we talk to do this every three months or so; others do it more often. Even when you think you have no bugs to catch, errors to fix, or outdated Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents information to refresh, you’ll often be surprised by what a review turns up. Make this part of your routine, Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources and your surprises will be less painful — and require less work to remedy! Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> for Dummies, 4th Edition Chapter HTML 20: 4Ten HTML Do's andISBN:0764519956 Don'ts by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Chapter by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Concentrating on content Table of Contents<br /> <br /> easy on the HTML Going 4 For Dummies, 4thgraphics, Edition bells, whistles, and hungry T. Rexes Introduction<br /> <br /> Creating well-formulated HTML and then testing, testing, testing<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The to Know is about Finishing the Least work You afterNeed the building doneHTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web By itself, is neither complex nor overwhelmingly difficult. As some high-tech wags Chapter 3 HTML - Creating Yourexcessively First HTML Page<br /> <br /> (including a fewStarted rocket with scientists) Part II - Getting HTML<br /> <br /> have put it, HTML ain't rocket science! Nevertheless, a few important do's and don'ts can make or break Web pages you build with HTML. Consider these humble Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML the Documents admonishments as guidelines to help you Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources make the most of HTML without losing touch with your users or watching your page blow up on its launch pad. Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter - Top Off Your Page If some7fundamental points thatwith we Formatting made throughout this book seem to crop up here too (especially Part III - Taking HTML the Nextuse Level regarding proper andto improper of HTML),<br /> <br /> it's no accident. Heed ye well the prescriptions and avoid ye<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTMLBut Tables the maledictions. hey, we know they're your pages and you can do what you want with them. Your Chapter 9 HTML Frames users will decide the ultimate outcome. (We'd never say, 'We told you so!' Nope. Not us.) Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 forof Dummies, 4th Edition Never LoseHTML Sight Your Content by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> So we return to the crucial payload: the content of your page. Why? Well, as Darrell Royal John Wileyquestion & Sons ©of 2003 (408 pages) (legendary football coach of the University of Texas Longhorns in the ‘60s and ‘70s) is rumored to have Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site said to his players, “Dance with who brung ya.” In normal English (as opposed or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- to Texan), we think this by-stepstick bookwith willthe put people you on who’ve the rightsupported track. means that you should you all along and give your loyalty to those who’ve given it to you. Table of not Contents We’re sure what this means for football, but for Web pages it means keeping faith with your users and HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition keeping content paramount. If you don’t have strong, solid, informative content, users quickly get that Introduction empty feeling that starts to gnaw when a Web page is content-free. Then they’ll be off to richer hunting Part I - Meeting Its Natural Environment grounds on theHTML Web,inlooking for content.<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Tip To2 satisfy theirathunger, your most important content on your site’s major pages. Save the frills Chapter - HTML Work onplace the Web and supplementary materials for secondary Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page pages. The short statement of this principle for HTML is, “Tags are important, but what’s between the tags — the content — is what really counts.” For a refresher Part II - Getting Started with HTML course on making your content the best it can possibly be, take a spin through Chapter 2. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Structure Your Documents and Your Site by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Providing users with clear &road map and guiding Johna Wiley Sons © 2003 (408 pages) them through your content is as important for a single home page as it is for an online encyclopedia. or moreWeb complex Whether your goal is to build a When simple,longer text-oriented site documents grow into a fullfledged Web site,ora one roadloaded map becomes even more important. This map ideally takes the form of (yep, you with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepbookshows will put youorganization on the right track. guessed it) a flowby-step chart that page and links. If you like pictures with a purpose, the chart could appear in graphic form in an explicitly labeled 'site map.' Table of strong Contents We're advocates of top-down page design: Don't start writing content or placing tags until you HTML 4 For Edition understandDummies, what you4th want to say and how you want to organize your material. Then start building your Introduction HTML document or collection of documents with paper and pencil (or whatever modeling tool you like Part I - Sketch Meetingout HTML in Its Natural Environment best). relationships within the content<br /> <br /> and among your pages. Know where you're building<br /> <br /> Chapter The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web before 1you -roll out the heavy equipment. Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Remember Good content flows fromPage good organization. It helps you stay on track during page design, Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML<br /> <br /> testing, delivery,Started and maintenance. Part II - Getting with HTML<br /> <br /> And organization helps your users find their way through your site. Need we say more? Well, yes: Don't forget that organization changes with time. Revisit and critique your Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents organization and structure on a regular basis, and don't be afraid to change either one to keep up with Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources changes in your content or focus. Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, Keep TrackHTML of Those Tags4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Although you’re building documents, it’s often easy to forget to use closing tags, even when they’re John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) required (for example, the </a> that closes the opening anchor tagWeb <a>). Even when you’re testing your Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site pages, some browsers can be a little too forgiving; they compensate for your or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step- errors, leaving you with a by-step book will put you on the right track. false sense of security. Remember The Web is no place to depend on the kindness of strangers; scrutinize your tags to head off Table of Contents possible problems from other browsers that may not be quite so understanding (or lax, as the case may HTML be). 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> As for the claims thatinsome vendors of HTML authoring tools Part I - Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> make (“You don’t even have to know any<br /> <br /> HTML!”), sayYou is, Need Uh-huh, surrre. HTML itself isthe stillWeb a big part of what makes Web pages work; if Chapter 1 all- we Thecan Least to Know about HTML and you understand it, you can troubleshoot Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web with minimum fuss. Also, ensuring that your page’s inner workings are correct complete something only you can do for your documents, whether you build them Chapter 3 -and Creating YourisFirst HTML Page yourself or a program them Part II - Getting Startedbuilds with HTML<br /> <br /> for you.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents We could go on ad infinitum about this, but we’ll exercise some mercy and confine our remarks to the<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources most pertinent: Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Keep you write or edit HTML by hand. If you open a tag — be it an Chapter 7 track - Top of Offtags Youryourself Page withwhile Formatting anchor, a text area, or whatever — create the closing tag for it right then and there, even if you have Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level content to add. Most HTML editors do this for you. Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Use a syntax checker to validate your work during the testing process. Syntax checkers are - HTML Forms automatic tools that find missing tags — and other ways to drive you crazy! Use these whether you Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies build pages by hand or with software assistance. Here’s the URL for the W3C’s HTML validator: Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS http://validator.w3.org/. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 -and Making Magic Obtain useMultimedia as many browsers as you can when testing pages. This not only alerts you to Chapter missing 14 - tags; Integrating it can also a Database point out into potential Your HTML design flaws or browser dependencies (covered in a<br /> <br /> section this chapter). exercise emphasizes the importance of alternate text Chapter 15 -later Howin HTML Relates to This Other Markupalso Languages why weSite always Part Vinformation. - From WebThat’s Page to Web Chapter 16<br /> <br /> check our pages with Lynx (a character-only browser).<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Always follow HTML document syntax and layout rules. Just because most browsers don’t require - Setting Up Your Online Presence elements such as <html>,<head>, and <body> doesn’t mean you can omit them; it just means that Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface browsers don’t give a hoot if you do. But browsers per se are not your audience. Your users (and, for Part VI - The Part of Tens that matter, future browsers) may indeed care. Chapter 17<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Remember Although HTML isn’t exactly a programming language, it still makes sense to treat it like one. Part VII - Appendixes Following formats and<br /> <br /> syntax helps you avoid trouble, and careful testing and rechecking of your work<br /> <br /> Appendix - HTML 4 Tags ensures Aa high degree of quality, compliance with standards, and a relatively trouble-free Web site. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML from 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Make the Most the Least by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> More is not always better, when(408 it comes John Wileyespecially & Sons © 2003 pages) to Web pages. Try to design and build your pages using minimal ornaments and simple layouts. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Don't overload pages with graphics; levels of headings as you can fit, and make sure your by-step book will putadd youas onmany the right track. content is easy to read and follow. Make sure any hyperlinks you include add real value to your site. Table Tip ofGratuitous Contentslinks to useless information are nobody's friend; if you're tempted to link to a Web cam<br /> <br /> that shows a dripping4th faucet, resist, resist, resist! HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Remember Structure and images exist to highlight content. The more bells, whistles, and dinosaur growls dominate a page, the more distracted from your content visitors will be. Use structure and graphics Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web sparingly, wisely, and as carefully as possible. Anything more can be an obstacle to content delivery. Go Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web easy on the animations, links, and layout tags, or risk having your message (even your page) devoured by Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page a hungry T. Rex. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 Pages for Dummies, 4th Edition Build Attractive by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> When users visit John Web Wiley pages&with framework that focuses on content, they’re likely to feel Sonsa©consistent 2003 (408 pages) welcome. The important thing is to supplement contenttext-oriented with graphicsWeb andsite links — not to trample users with Whether your goal is to build a simple, an onslaught of pictures and links. Making Web pages pretty and easy to navigate only adds to a site’s or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepput you on the righthappier. track. basic appeal, andby-step makesbook yourwill cyber-campers even Tip If you need inspiration, cruise the Web and look for layouts and graphics that work for you. If you take Table of Contents the time to analyze what you like, you can work from other people’s design principles without having to HTML For Dummies, 4thlayouts Editionor looks (which isn’t a good idea anyway). steal4details from their Introduction<br /> <br /> As you design HTML your Web start with Part I - Meeting in Itsdocuments, Natural Environment<br /> <br /> a basic, standard page layout. Pick a small but interesting<br /> <br /> set of graphical orNeed iconstoand adopt a consistent Chapter 1 - Thesymbols Least You Know about HTML and navigation the Web style. Use graphics sparingly (yes, you’ve 2heard this before); Chapter - HTML at Workmake on thethem Webas small as possible — limit size, number of colors, shading, and so on, while eyeYour appeal. you build simple, consistent navigation tools for your site, label them Chapter 3 retaining - Creating First When HTML Page clearly useStarted them everywhere. Part II - and Getting with HTML<br /> <br /> You can make your pages appealing, informative, and inviting if you invest the time and effort. Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Avoid Browser Dependencies by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> When you're building temptation John Web Wiley pages, & Sons the © 2003 (408 pages)to view the Web in terms of your favorite browser is hard to avoid. That's why you should always remember thattext-oriented users view the Web Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web sitein general (and your pages in particular) from many perspectives through many different browsers. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> During the design and writing phases, you'll probably ping-pong between HTML and a browser's-eye view of your work. At this point in the process, we recommend switching from one browser to another, testing Table Contents yourof pages among a group of browsers (including at least one character-mode browser). This helps HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition balance how you imagine your pages and helps keep you focused on content. Introduction<br /> <br /> TipI -There areHTML publicintelnet servers with Lynx (a Part Meeting Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> character-mode browser) installed that you can use for<br /> <br /> free and require VisitHTML www.trill-home.com/lynx/public_lynx.html for Chapter 1 don't - The Leastsoftware You Needinstallation. to Know about and the Web a good2list of telnetatservers featuring Lynx. Chapter - HTML Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> During testing and maintenance, you must browse your pages from many different points of view. Work from multiple platforms; try both graphical and character-mode browsers on each page. Such testing Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents takes time but repays that investment with pages that are easy for everyone to read and follow. It also Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources helps viewers who come at your materials from platforms other than your own, and helps your pages Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images achieve true independence from any single viewpoint. Why limit your options? Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> TipIIIIf -several onthe your siteLevel use the Part Taking pages HTML to Next<br /> <br /> same basic HTML, create a single template for those pages. Test the template with as many browsers as you can find. When you're sure the template is browserChapter 8 - HTML Tables independent, use it to create other pages. This helps you ensure that every page looks good, regardless of Chapter 9 - HTML Frames which browser a visitor might be using, and puts you on your way to real HTML enlightenment. Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Think Evolution, Not Revolution by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Over time, Web pages change and©grow. Keep a fresh eye on your work, and keep recruiting fresh eyes John Wiley & Sons 2003 (408 pages) from the ranks ofWhether those who haven’t seen your work before, to avoidWeb what we call “organic acceptance.” your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> This concept is best explained by put the you analogy of right your track. face and the mirror: You see it every day; you know it by-step book will on the intimately, so you aren’t as sensitive as someone else to the impact of changes over time. Then you see yourself on video, or in a photograph, or through the eyes of an old friend. At that point, changes obvious Table ofworld Contents to the reveal themselves to you as you exclaim, “I’ve gone completely gray!” or “My spare tire could HTML 4 For Edition mount on aDummies, semi!” or4th “Who the heck is that?” Introduction<br /> <br /> As with the restHTML of life, to Environment Web pages are Part I - Meeting in changes Its Natural<br /> <br /> usually evolutionary, not revolutionary. They proceed<br /> <br /> with small rare. Nevertheless, you must stay sensitive to the supporting Chapter 1 daily - Thesteps; Least big Youradical Need toleaps Knoware about HTML and the Web infrastructure and readability your content as pages evolve. Maybe the lack of on-screen links to each Chapter 2 - HTML at Work onof the Web section3of your Product Catalog didn’tPage matter when you had only three products — but now that you offer Chapter - Creating Your First HTML 25, II it’s- aGetting different story.with You’ve heard Part Started HTML<br /> <br /> that form follows function; in Web terms, the structure of your site needs to follow changes in its content. If you regularly reevaluate your site’s effectiveness at Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents communicating its contents, you’ll know when it’s time to make changes, whether large or small. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter Finding and Using Images This is 6why -user feedback is crucial. If you don’t get feedback through forms or other means, go out and Chapter 7 - Top Offinfo Your Page withusers. Formatting aggressively solicit from your If you’re not sure how you’re doing, then consider: If you don’t ask Part III - Taking HTML the tell? Next Level for feedback, how cantoyou<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th EditionWeb Navigating HTML Your4 for Wild and Woolly by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Users who view the splendor your site (408 don't want to be told you can't get there from here. Aids to John Wiley & of Sons © 2003 pages) navigation are vital amenities on a quality Web site. In Chapter 9, forWeb example, we introduce the concept of Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented site anavigation bar -or a consistent graphical place to put buttons that help users get from A to B. By judicious one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-stepobservation book will putofyou on constitutes the right track. use of links and careful what a complete screen (or screenful) of text, you can help your users minimize (or even avoid) scrolling. Text anchors make it easy to move to the previous and or next screens, as well as to the top, index, and bottom in any document. Just that easy, just that simple, Table of Contents or so it appears to the user. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction Tip We believe pretty strongly in the low scroll rule: That is, users should have to scroll no more than one Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural screenful in either direction from aEnvironment point of focus<br /> <br /> or entry without finding a navigation aid to let them jump<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 -toThe You Need to Know about HTML and the Web (not scroll) the Least next point of interest. Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web We don't that navigation bars Page are required, or that the names for controls should always be the Chapter 3 believe - Creating Your First HTML<br /> <br /> same. do believe the more Part II - We Getting Startedthat with HTML<br /> <br /> control you give users over their reading, the better they like it. The longer a document gets, the more important such controls become; they work best if they occur about Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents every 30 lines in longer documents (or in a separate, always-visible frame if you use HTML frames). Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Beating theHTML Two-Dimensional Text Trap by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Conditioned by centuries of & printed the linear nature of books, our mindsets can use an John Wiley Sons ©material 2003 (408and pages) adjustment. The Whether nonlinearyour potentials of hypermedia give the Web aWeb newsite definition for the term document. goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Of course, it’s tempting to pack your pages full of hyper-capabilities until it resembles a Pony Express or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will ondirections the right track. dynamite shipment and gallops offput in you many at once. To avoid this, judge your hypermedia according to whether it (1) adds interest, (2) expands on your content, or (3) makes a serious — and relevant — impact on the user.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Within these constraints, such material can vastly improve any user’s experience of your site. Introduction<br /> <br /> Stepping intelligently outside old-fashioned linear Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> thinking can improve your users’ experience of your site<br /> <br /> and make moretoaccessible to HTML your audience. That’s why we encourage careful use of Chapter 1 your - Theinformation Least You Need Know about and the Web document cross-references, Chapter 2 indexes, - HTML at Work on the Weblinks to related documents, and other tools to help users navigate within your Keep Your thinking impact of links as you look at other people’s Web materials; it’s Chapter 3 -site. Creating Firstabout HTMLthe Page the II quickest way to shake of the Part - Getting Started withfree HTML<br /> <br /> linear-text trap. (The printing press was high-tech for its day, but that was 500 years ago! ) If you’re looking for a model for your site’s behavior, don’t think about your new trifold Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents four-color brochure, however eye-popping; think about how your customer-service people interact with Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources new customers on the telephone. (What can I do to help you today?) Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 forthrough Dummies, 4th Edition Overcome Inertia Constant Vigilance by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> When you're dealing your Web©materials post-publication, remember that it's only human to goof off Johnwith Wiley & Sons 2003 (408 pages) after finishing a big job. Maintenance may not be nearlytext-oriented as heroic, inspiring, Whether your goal is to build a simple, Web site or remarkable as creation, yet it represents mostorofone theloaded activitywith that's needed to keep any document alive and well. Sites that aren't frames, graphics, and animation, this stepwillsites; put you on stop the right track. maintained often by-step becomebook ghost users visiting sites when developers stop working on them. Never fear - a little work and attention to detail keeps your pages fresh. If you start with something valuable and keep adding value, a site's value appreciates over time - just like any other artistic masterpiece. Start Table of Contents with something valuable and leave it alone, and it soon becomes stale and loses value. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction Tip Consider your site from the viewpoint of a master aircraft mechanic: Correct maintenance is a real, Part I -and Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment vital, ongoing accomplishment, without which<br /> <br /> you risk a crash. A Web site, as a vehicle for important<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - deserves The Least regular You Need to Knowmaintaining about HTMLaand thesite Web information, attention; Web requires discipline and respect. See www.disobey.com/ghostsites/index.shtml for a humorous look at ghost sites. Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Remember with constant Part II - GettingKeeping Started up with HTML<br /> <br /> change translates into creating (and adhering to) a regular maintenance schedule. Make it somebody's job to spend time on a site regularly; check to make sure the Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents job's getting done. If someone is set to handle regular site updates, changes, and improvements, normally Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources they start flogging other participants to give them things to do when scheduled site maintenance rolls Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images around. Next thing you know, everybody's involved in keeping information fresh - just as they should be. Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting This keeps your visitors coming back for more! Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Part VII: Appendixes by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> In This Part: Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Appendix A: HTML 4 Tags Table of Contents<br /> <br /> B: HTML Codes HTML Appendix 4 For Dummies, 4thCharacter Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Appendix C: Glossary<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> In this part . . .Your First HTML Page - Creating<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> This part of the book supplements the main text with useful resources and summary information. It - Structuring Your HTML Documents includes a complete list of HTML elements, with syntax and brief explanations, a reasonably complete Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources listing of common HTML character codes, a glossary of technical terms found elsewhere in the book, and Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images an index you can use to find your way around the text. We hope you’ll not only get to know these Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting supporting members of our cast, but that you’ll also use them often and well! Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th Edition AppendixHTML A:4 for HTML 4 Tags by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> In This Appendix John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepTracking HTML elements by-step book will put you on the right track. Getting a heads up on deprecated and empty tags Table of Contents Tracking tag attributes HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Keeping track of the bountiful bevy of HTML elements can often be tricky, even for experienced Introduction Webmasters. make your HTMLEnvironment life a bit easier, Part I - MeetingTo HTML in Its Natural<br /> <br /> we created this appendix, which includes a table that<br /> <br /> lists the1following information for to each element: Chapter - The Least You Need Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Name:The name of the element.<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with Chapter number: The HTML chapter(s)<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> in which you can find information about the element.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Remember Some of theResources more complicated, less frequently used, or deprecated elements are not Chapter 5 - Linking to Online discussed in detail this book. Please visit the W3C site at Chapter 6 - Finding andinUsing Images<br /> <br /> www.w3.org/TR/html4/index/elements.html for more information on these elements.<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Empty: If the tag is listed with the letter E, the tag is an empty tag and is forbidden to have an end tag.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter Deprecated: 9 - HTMLIf Frames the tag is listed with a D, then the tag is deprecated, and you should consider using a<br /> <br /> style ruleForms in its place. Chapter 10 sheet - HTML Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Description: A description of the tag. - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 - HTML Attributes: Thisand listScripting includes the attributes that can be used with the element. When the element Chapter 13 the - Making Multimedia Magic takes common attributes, also called core attributes, we simply say “All core attributes.” (As a Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML reminder, those attributes are id, class, style, and title.) Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> are also language Part VThere - From Web Page to Web and Site event<br /> <br /> attributes that can be used with most elements. Likewise, when<br /> <br /> these to elements, Chapter 16 attributes - Creatingapply an HTML Toolbox we simply say “language attributes” and/or “event attributes,” respectively. TheUplanguage attributes are dir and lang. The event attributes are onclick, Chapter 17 - Setting Your Online Presence ondblclick, onmousedown,onmouseup,onmouseover,onmousemove,onmouseout, - Creating a Great User Interface onkeypress, onkeydown, and onkeyup. See Chapter 12 for more information on what these Part VI - The Part of Tens attributes do. If an element can only use some of these event attributes, we list them individually. If we Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs just say "event attributes," the element uses all of them. Chapter 18<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Table A-1: HTML Tags<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix Codes Name B - HTML Ch Character # Empty? Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> 5, 13<br /> <br /> Deprecated<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Description<br /> <br /> Attributes<br /> <br /> Anchor<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, accesskey, charset, coords, href, hreflang, name, onblur, onfocus, rel, rev, shape, tabindex, type<br /> <br /> Abbreviated form (for WWW, HTTP)<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> abbr<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> acronym<br /> <br /> 7 HTML 4 for N Dummies, 4th Edition Indicates an All core attributes, acronym ISBN:0764519956 language attributes, by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts event attributes John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> address<br /> <br /> Whether your text-oriented N/A N goal is to build a simple,Information onWeb site All core attributes, or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-language attributes, author by-step book will put you on the right track. event attributes<br /> <br /> applet<br /> <br /> N/A<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> D<br /> <br /> Java applet<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> area<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Y<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Client-side image map area<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, accesskey, alt, coords, href, nohref, onblur, onfocus, shape, tabindex<br /> <br /> Bold text style<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Document base URI<br /> <br /> href, target<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> b<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> base 13 Chapter<br /> <br /> N/A Multimedia Y - Making Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other basefont N/A Y D Markup Languages Base font size Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> bdo<br /> <br /> N/A<br /> <br /> Part bigVI - The Part7of Tens<br /> <br /> N N<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> blockquote<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> All core attributes, align, alt, archive, class, code, codebase, height, hspace, id, name, object, style, title, vspace, width<br /> <br /> color, face, id, size<br /> <br /> I18N BiDi override<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes<br /> <br /> Large text style<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Long quotation<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, cite<br /> <br /> Document body<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, alink, background, link, onload, onunload, text, vlink<br /> <br /> Forced line break<br /> <br /> All core attributes<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> body Index<br /> <br /> 4, 7<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> br<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Y<br /> <br /> button<br /> <br /> N/A N Dummies, 4th Edition Push button HTML 4 for<br /> <br /> All core attributes, ISBN:0764519956 language attributes, by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts event attributes, John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) accesskey, Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-disabled, name, onblur, onfocus, by-step book will put you on the right track. tabindex, type, value<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> caption N/A 4th Edition N HTML 4 For Dummies,<br /> <br /> Table caption<br /> <br /> Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter center1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - The Web Usethe div 8 Least YouNNeed to Know D about HTML and - HTML at Work on the Web align="center"<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> cite<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> instead Citation<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Computer code fragment<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Table column<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, align, char, charoff, span, valign, width<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML colgroup 8 N Table column Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages group<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, align, char, charoff, span, valign, width<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> code 7 Chapter<br /> <br /> 7 Off Your Page N with Formatting - Top<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter col 9<br /> <br /> - HTML 8 Frames Y<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> dd<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Definition description<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Deleted text<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, cite, datetime<br /> <br /> Instance definition<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Directory list<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, compact<br /> <br /> Generic language/ style container<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> del 7 4 Tags N Appendix A - HTML Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat 4th Edition dfn Sheet - HTML 7 4 For Dummies, N List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> dir<br /> <br /> N/A<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> div<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> D<br /> <br /> dl<br /> <br /> 4 HTML 4 for N Dummies, 4th Edition Definition list<br /> <br /> All core attributes, ISBN:0764519956 language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> dt<br /> <br /> text-oriented 4 Whether your N goal is to build a simple,Definition termWeb site All core attributes, or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-language attributes, by-step book will put you on the right track. event attributes<br /> <br /> em<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Emphasis<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Form control group<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, accesskey, align<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> fieldset<br /> <br /> N/A<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part font II - Getting Started 7 with NHTML<br /> <br /> D<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter form 6<br /> <br /> - Finding 10 and Using N Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Local change to font<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, face, color, size<br /> <br /> Interactive form<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, accept, acceptcharset, action, enctype, method, name, onreset, onsubmit<br /> <br /> Subwindow<br /> <br /> All core attributes, frameborder, longdesc, marginheight, marginwidth, name, noresize, scrolling, src<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> frame<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Y<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> frameset<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> h1-h6 4 Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Window subdivision<br /> <br /> All core attributes, cols, onload, onunload, rows<br /> <br /> Heading 1-6<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Document head<br /> <br /> language attributes, profile<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix head C - Glossary 4<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> hr<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Y<br /> <br /> Horizontal rule<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Document root element<br /> <br /> Language attributes<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Italic text style<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> List of Tables List of Listings Listhtml of Sidebars<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> iframe<br /> <br /> N/A N Dummies, 4th Edition Inline subwindow HTML 4 for<br /> <br /> All core attributes, ISBN:0764519956 align, frameborder, height,<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-longdesc, by-step book will put you on the right track. marginheight,<br /> <br /> marginwidth, name,<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> scrolling, src, width<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> img<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Y<br /> <br /> Embedded image<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML input 10, 12,to theY Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML 15 Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> longdesc, name, src, usemap, width Form control<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter ins 19<br /> <br /> - Ten 7 Ways to Exterminate N Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, cite, datetime<br /> <br /> Single line prompt<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, prompt<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> D<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> kbd<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Text to be entered by the user<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> N/A<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Form field label text<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, accesskey, onblur, onfocus<br /> <br /> List of Tables List of Listings Listlabel of Sidebars<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, accept, accesskey, alt, checked, disabled, ismap, maxlength, name, onblur, onchange, onfocus, onselect, readonly, size, src, tabindex, type, usemap, value<br /> <br /> Inserted text<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix isindexB - HTML N/ACharacter Y Codes<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, alt, height, ismap,<br /> <br /> legend<br /> <br /> N/A N Dummies, 4th Edition Fieldset legend HTML 4 for<br /> <br /> All core attributes, ISBN:0764519956 language attributes, event attributes, accesskey<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> this step-All core attributes, 4 or one loaded N with frames, graphics, and Listanimation, item by-step book will put you on the right track. language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> li<br /> <br /> Table linkof Contents11<br /> <br /> Y<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> A mediaindependent link<br /> <br /> Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> map<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> menu6 Chapter<br /> <br /> N/A and Using N D Images - Finding<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Client-side image map<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, name<br /> <br /> Menu list<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, compact<br /> <br /> Generic metainformation<br /> <br /> Language attributes, http-equiv, name, content, scheme<br /> <br /> Alternate content container for non rendering<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter meta 9<br /> <br /> - HTML 4 Frames Y<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> noscript Chapter 15<br /> <br /> N/A N Alternate content - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> noframes<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> container<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> for non<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> script-based<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter object19<br /> <br /> - Ten 13Ways to Exterminate N Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> rendering Generic embedded object<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index List of Figures List of Tables List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, archive, classid, codebase, codetype, data, declare, height, name, standby, tabindex, type, usemap, width<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Listolof Listings<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, charset, href, hreflang, media, rel, rev, type<br /> <br /> Ordered list<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> optgroup<br /> <br /> N/A N Dummies, 4th Edition Option group HTML 4 for<br /> <br /> All core attributes, ISBN:0764519956 language attributes, by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts event attributes, John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) disabled, Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-multiple, name, onblur, onchange, by-step book will put you on the right track. onfocus, size, tabindex<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML option 4 For Dummies, 10 4th Edition N<br /> <br /> Selectable choice<br /> <br /> Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, disabled, multiple, name, onblur, onchange, onfocus, size, tabindex<br /> <br /> Paragraph<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, align<br /> <br /> Named property value<br /> <br /> id, name, type, value, valuetype<br /> <br /> Preformatted text<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, width<br /> <br /> Short inline quotation<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, cite<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> param8 Chapter<br /> <br /> 13 Tables Y - HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter pre 10<br /> <br /> - HTML 4 Forms N<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> q<br /> <br /> N/A<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> s V - From Web 7 Page to Web N Site Part<br /> <br /> D<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter samp 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great 7 N User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Strikethrough text style<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Sample program<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> output,<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix script A - HTML 12 4 Tags N Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> scripts, and so on Script statements<br /> <br /> charset, defer, language, src, type<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> select<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Option selector<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, disabled, multiple, name, onblur, onchange, onfocus, size, tabindex<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Small text style<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> small<br /> <br /> span<br /> <br /> 11HTML 4 for N Dummies, 4th Edition Generic All core attributes, language/style ISBN:0764519956 language attributes, by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts container event attributes John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> strike<br /> <br /> text-oriented Web 7 Whether your N goal is to D build a simple,Strikethrough text site All core attributes, or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-language attributes, by-step book will put you on the right track. event attributes<br /> <br /> strong<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Strong emphasis<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Style info<br /> <br /> language attributes, media, title, type<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> style<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter sub 3<br /> <br /> - Creating N/A Your NFirst HTML Page<br /> <br /> Subscript<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Superscript<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Table<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, align, border, cellpadding, cellspacing, frame, rules, summary, width<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> sup<br /> <br /> N/A<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> table 8 Chapter<br /> <br /> 8 Tables N - HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> tbody 15 Chapter<br /> <br /> 8 HTML Relates N Table body - How to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part td VI - The Part8of Tens<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Table data cell<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, abbr, align, axis, char,charoff, colspan, headers, rowspan, scope, valign<br /> <br /> Multi-line text field<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, accesskey, cols, disabled, name, onblur, onchange, onfocus, onselect, readonly, rows, tabindex<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4th Edition textarea 10 4 For Dummies, N List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, align, char, charoff, valign<br /> <br /> tfoot<br /> <br /> 8 HTML 4 for N Dummies, 4th Edition Table footer<br /> <br /> All core attributes, ISBN:0764519956 language attributes, by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts event attributes, John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) align, char, Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-charoff, valign<br /> <br /> th<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Table header cell<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter thead3<br /> <br /> - Creating 8 Your N First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Table header<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, align, char, charoff, valign<br /> <br /> Document title<br /> <br /> Language attributes<br /> <br /> Table row<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, align, bgcolor, char, charoff, valign<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter title 7<br /> <br /> - Top 4 Off Your Page N with Formatting<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes, abbr, align, axis, char, charoff, colspan, headers, rowspan, scope, valign<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> tr Chapter 8<br /> <br /> 8 Tables N - HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> tt Chapter 13<br /> <br /> 7 N - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Teletype or monospaced text Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML type Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Part u V - From Web 7 Page to Web N D Site<br /> <br /> Underlined text style<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Unordered list<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Instance of a variable or program argument<br /> <br /> All core attributes, language attributes, event attributes<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> ul<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> varVII - Appendixes 7 Part<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th Edition AppendixHTML B:4 for HTML Character Codes ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepIn This Appendix by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Knowing your Latin and Greek characters Table of Contents<br /> <br /> for special punctuation HTML Formatting 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Handling mathematical characters<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - with The Least You Needsets to Know about HTML and the Web Dealing ISO character Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web This appendix includes listings all the character sets supported by HTML 4.0 (and consequently HTML Chapter 3 - Creating Your First for HTML Page<br /> <br /> 4.01). the nine tables to Part II -Use Getting Started withhere HTML<br /> <br /> find out what you have to type in order to get HTML to output characters that aren’t part of the ASCII character set. Each table includes: Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> The character<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 character’s - Top Off Your Pageentity with Formatting The numeric Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> The character entity Chapter 8 character’s - HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Tip Chapter 1 details why you might want to use any of these entities and how you use them with your markup. - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish Remember Keep in mind with that CSS we couldn’t get some characters to display correctly because of font Chapter restrictions, 12 -so HTML be sure and Scripting to try using the entity and displaying it in your browser to see what symbol appears. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Warning -Even though everything listed here is part of the HTML 4.01 standard, not all browsers support Integrating a Database into Your HTML these characters. Even if you test your code on your favorite browser before you consider it ready for Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages action, such testing is no guarantee of universal usability. As a general rule, the character shortcuts are Part V - From Web Page to Web Site least supported and the numeric characters are most supported. Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ISO-Latin-1HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> ISO-Latin-1 is fully supported all©current and most older browsers. Review Table B-1 to find out what John Wiley & by Sons 2003 (408 pages) you need to know. Check out Table B-9 in the section “More ISO Character Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Sets Than You Can Shake a Stick At,” later in or thisone appendix. loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table B-1: The ISO-Latin-1 Character Set Table of Contents Character/Description<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Em space, not collapsed Introduction<br /> <br /> None<br /> <br /> Part - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment EnI space None<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br />    <br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Em space Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> &#00; - &#08;<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 - tab Creating Your First HTML Page Horizontal Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Line feed new line Your HTML Documents Chapter 4 -orStructuring <br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Unused Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources &#11; - &#31; - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Space<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Part Level ! ! III - Taking HTML to the Next<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 #<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> "<br /> <br /> "<br /> <br /> "<br /> <br /> #<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> $<br /> <br /> $<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 %<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting %<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> &<br /> <br /> &<br /> <br /> &<br /> <br /> Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates&#39; to Other Markup Languages ' (Apostrophe) Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> (<br /> <br /> (<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 )<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online ) Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> *<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> *<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 +<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate + Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> , (Comma)<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> ,<br /> <br /> Appendix A sign) - HTML 4 Tags - – (Minus Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> . (Period)<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index /<br /> <br /> . /<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> 0-9 (Numerals, where<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> 0 - 9<br /> <br /> List of Tables List: of Listings<br /> <br /> :<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ;<br /> <br /> ;<br /> <br /> <<br /> <br /> <<br /> <br /> =<br /> <br /> =<br /> <br /> ><br /> <br /> ><br /> <br /> ?<br /> <br /> ?<br /> <br /> None 0 is 0, 1 is 1, and so on)<br /> <br /> <<br /> <br /> ><br /> <br /> @<br /> <br /> @ 4th Edition HTML 4 for Dummies,<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya A - Pitts Z A-Z (Capitals, where<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 None A is A,<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> B is B,<br /> <br /> and so on)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded [ with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> [ \<br /> <br /> \<br /> <br /> ]<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> ]<br /> <br /> HTML ^ 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition^ Introduction<br /> <br /> _ (Underscore)<br /> <br /> _<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 accent) - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web ` ` (Grave Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> a-z (Lowercase, where<br /> <br /> a - z<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 {<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML { Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter } 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page} with Formatting<br /> <br /> |<br /> <br /> None a is a, b is b, and so on)<br /> <br /> |<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> ~<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter Unused 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Nonbreaking space<br /> <br /> ~ &#127; - &#159;  <br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter ¡ 11<br /> <br /> ¡ - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> £ Chapter 14<br /> <br /> £ - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> ¢<br /> <br /> €<br /> <br /> ¢<br /> <br /> ¤<br /> <br />   ¡ ¢ £ ¤<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> ¥ Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML ¥ Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> »<br /> <br /> ¦<br /> <br /> § VI - The Part of Tens Part<br /> <br /> §<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> ¨<br /> <br /> ¨<br /> <br /> © VII - Appendixes Part Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> ª<br /> <br /> ¥ ¦ § ¨<br /> <br /> ©<br /> <br /> ©<br /> <br /> ª<br /> <br /> ª<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> « Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> &#171<br /> <br /> «<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> ¬<br /> <br /> ¬<br /> <br /> ¬<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> (Soft hyphen) List- of Figures<br /> <br /> ­<br /> <br /> ­<br /> <br /> List®of Tables<br /> <br /> ®<br /> <br /> ®<br /> <br /> ¯<br /> <br /> ¯<br /> <br /> °<br /> <br /> °<br /> <br /> °<br /> <br /> ±<br /> <br /> ±<br /> <br /> ±<br /> <br /> ²<br /> <br /> ²<br /> <br /> ³<br /> <br /> ³<br /> <br /> List of Listings List¯ of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 2 3<br /> <br /> ´ 4th Edition ´ (Acute accent)HTML 4 for Dummies,<br /> <br /> ´<br /> <br /> µ<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts µ John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ¶<br /> <br /> ¶ Whether your ¶ goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step· · by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> • ¸ (Cedilla) 1 of Contents Table<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 µ<br /> <br /> ¸<br /> <br /> ¸<br /> <br /> ¹<br /> <br /> ¹<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> º<br /> <br /> º<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part Environment » » I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1/2 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First½ HTML Page<br /> <br /> 1/4<br /> <br /> ¼<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> 3/4<br /> <br /> ¾<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 ¿<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources ¿<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> À<br /> <br /> º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿<br /> <br /> À<br /> <br /> À<br /> <br /> Part Level Á Á III - Taking HTML to the Next<br /> <br /> Á<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 Ã<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Â<br /> <br /> Â<br /> <br /> Â<br /> <br /> Ã<br /> <br /> Ã<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Ä<br /> <br /> Ä<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 Å<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting Å<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter Ç 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML RelatesÇ to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Æ<br /> <br /> Æ<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> È<br /> <br /> È<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter É 17<br /> <br /> É - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Ê<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Ê<br /> <br /> Chapter Ë 19<br /> <br /> ËWeb Bugs - Ten Ways to Exterminate<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Ì<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix Í A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë<br /> <br /> Ì<br /> <br /> Ì<br /> <br /> Í<br /> <br /> Í<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Î<br /> <br /> Î<br /> <br /> Î<br /> <br /> Ï Index<br /> <br /> Ï<br /> <br /> Ï<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> Ð<br /> <br /> Ð<br /> <br /> ListÑof Tables<br /> <br /> Ñ<br /> <br /> Ñ<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> Ò<br /> <br /> Ò<br /> <br /> Ò<br /> <br /> Ó<br /> <br /> Ó<br /> <br /> Ó<br /> <br /> Ô<br /> <br /> Ô<br /> <br /> Ô<br /> <br /> Õ<br /> <br /> Õ<br /> <br /> Õ<br /> <br /> Ö<br /> <br /> Ö<br /> <br /> Ö<br /> <br /> x<br /> <br /> ×<br /> <br /> ×<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Ø<br /> <br /> Ø 4th Edition HTML 4 for Dummies,<br /> <br /> Ù<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts Ù John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Ú<br /> <br /> Ú Whether your Ú goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepÛ Û by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Û Ü Table ´Y of Contents<br /> <br /> Ø ISBN:0764519956 Ù<br /> <br /> Ü<br /> <br /> Ü<br /> <br /> Ý<br /> <br /> Ý<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> l<br /> <br /> Þ<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part Environment ß ß I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 á<br /> <br /> - Creating Your Firstá HTML Page<br /> <br /> à<br /> <br /> à<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> â<br /> <br /> â<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 ã<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources ã<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> ä<br /> <br /> ä<br /> <br /> Part Level å å III - Taking HTML to the Next<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 ç<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> æ<br /> <br /> ß à á â ã ä å<br /> <br /> æ<br /> <br /> æ<br /> <br /> ç<br /> <br /> ç<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> è<br /> <br /> Þ<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> è<br /> <br /> è<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 é<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting é<br /> <br /> é<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter ë 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relatesë to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> ê<br /> <br /> ê<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> ì<br /> <br /> ì<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter í 17<br /> <br /> í - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> î<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> î<br /> <br /> Chapter ï 19<br /> <br /> ïWeb Bugs - Ten Ways to Exterminate<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> b<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix ñ A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> ê ë ì í î ï<br /> <br /> ð<br /> <br /> ð<br /> <br /> ñ<br /> <br /> ñ<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> ò<br /> <br /> ò<br /> <br /> ò<br /> <br /> ó Index<br /> <br /> ó<br /> <br /> ó<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ô<br /> <br /> ô<br /> <br /> ô<br /> <br /> Listõ of Tables<br /> <br /> õ<br /> <br /> õ<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> ö<br /> <br /> ö<br /> <br /> ö<br /> <br /> ÷<br /> <br /> ÷<br /> <br /> ÷<br /> <br /> ø<br /> <br /> ø<br /> <br /> ø<br /> <br /> ù<br /> <br /> ù<br /> <br /> ù<br /> <br /> ú<br /> <br /> ú<br /> <br /> ú<br /> <br /> û<br /> <br /> û<br /> <br /> û<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ü<br /> <br /> ü 4th Edition HTML 4 for Dummies,<br /> <br /> ´y<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts ý John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> l<br /> <br /> þ Whether your þ goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepÿ ÿ by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> ÿ<br /> <br /> ü ISBN:0764519956 ý<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Greek Characters by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> If you have a need to use Greek characters, John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 Table pages) B-2 gives you everything you need to know. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Table B-2: Greek orCharacters one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Character A of Contents Table<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> Α<br /> <br /> Α<br /> <br /> HTML B 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Β Introduction<br /> <br /> G I - Meeting HTML in Its NaturalΓ Part Environment Chapter 1 D Chapter 2<br /> <br /> E Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Β Γ<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Δ Δ - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Ε - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Ε<br /> <br /> Part Z II - Getting Started with HTMLΖ<br /> <br /> Ζ<br /> <br /> H Chapter 5<br /> <br /> Η - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Η<br /> <br /> Chapter 6 Q<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images Θ<br /> <br /> Θ<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Ι I III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Part<br /> <br /> Ι<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 K<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Κ<br /> <br /> Κ<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Λ<br /> <br /> Λ<br /> <br /> L Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part Technologies Μ M IV - Extending HTML with Other<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> N Chapter 12<br /> <br /> Μ<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Ν<br /> <br /> Ν<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 X<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic Ξ<br /> <br /> Ξ<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> O<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Ο<br /> <br /> Part Π P V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 S<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great UserΣ Interface<br /> <br /> R<br /> <br /> Ρ<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> T<br /> <br /> Τ<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 U<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Υ<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> F<br /> <br /> Ο Π Ρ Σ Τ Υ<br /> <br /> Φ<br /> <br /> Φ<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Χ C<br /> <br /> Χ<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Y<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> Ψ<br /> <br /> Cheat Ω 4th Edition W Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, List of Figures<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> Ψ Ω<br /> <br /> α<br /> <br /> α<br /> <br /> β<br /> <br /> β<br /> <br /> g<br /> <br /> γ<br /> <br /> γ<br /> <br /> d<br /> <br /> δ<br /> <br /> δ<br /> <br /> e<br /> <br /> ε<br /> <br /> ε<br /> <br /> z<br /> <br /> ζ<br /> <br /> ζ<br /> <br /> h<br /> <br /> η<br /> <br /> η<br /> <br /> List of Tables Listb of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> q<br /> <br /> θ4th Edition HTML 4 for Dummies,<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya ιPitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> k<br /> <br /> θ ISBN:0764519956 ι<br /> <br /> κ Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-orientedκ Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepλ λ by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> l m Table n of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> x<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> μ<br /> <br /> μ<br /> <br /> ν<br /> <br /> ν<br /> <br /> ξ<br /> <br /> ξ<br /> <br /> Part Environment o I - Meeting HTML in Its Naturalο<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 r<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page ρ<br /> <br /> p<br /> <br /> π<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> V<br /> <br /> ς<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 s<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources σ<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> t<br /> <br /> τ<br /> <br /> Part υ u III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 c<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> f<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 w<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting ω<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter ° 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates toϒ Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> ϑ<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> ϖ<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> σ τ υ<br /> <br /> χ<br /> <br /> ψ<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> ς<br /> <br /> χ<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> p<br /> <br /> ρ<br /> <br /> φ<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> q<br /> <br /> π<br /> <br /> φ<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> y<br /> <br /> ο<br /> <br /> ψ ω ϑ ϒ ϖ<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Special Punctuation by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Use the information inWiley Table&B-3 to©help bullets, horizontal ellipsis, and other special punctuation. John Sons 2003 format (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Table B-3: Special or one Punctuation loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Character • of Contents Table<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> •<br /> <br /> •<br /> <br /> HTML . . . 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition…<br /> <br /> …<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> ′ ' I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Part Environment<br /> <br /> ′<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 "<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web ″<br /> <br /> ″<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> – Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First‾ HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part ⁄ / II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ‾ ⁄<br /> <br /> Dummies, Edition CharactersHTML That4 for Could Be 4th Letters by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Maybe in a parallel universe, might be letters. We’re not sure why you’d need to use John Wiley & these Sons ©characters 2003 (408 pages) these characters,Whether but theyyour are goal laid out for you in Table text-oriented B-4. is to build a simple, Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-stepCharacters book will put you on the right track. Table B-4: Letter-like<br /> <br /> Character<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition ℘<br /> <br /> ℘<br /> <br /> Introduction ¡<br /> <br /> ℑ<br /> <br /> ℑ<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> ¬ 1 Chapter<br /> <br /> ℜ - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> ℜ<br /> <br /> Chapter ™ 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the™ Web<br /> <br /> ™<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> ¿ II - Getting Started with HTMLℵ Part Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ℵ<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th Edition CharactersHTML That4 for Point by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> We never really knew how many ways you can make an arrow until we learned HTML. Now we pass on John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) this wisdom to you in Table B-5. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. Table B-5: Arrow Characters<br /> <br /> Character<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> ¨ 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition HTML<br /> <br /> ←<br /> <br /> ←<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> ↑<br /> <br /> ↑<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Æ Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to→ Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> →<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 Ø<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web ↓<br /> <br /> ↓<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> ´ II - Getting Started with HTML Part<br /> <br /> ↔<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 ø<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML↵ Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with⇑ Formatting<br /> <br /> ⇐<br /> <br /> ↔ ↵ ⇐ ⇑<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> ⇒<br /> <br /> ⇒<br /> <br /> ⇓<br /> <br /> ⇓<br /> <br /> ⇔<br /> <br /> ⇔<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, Characters 4th Edition Heavy-DutyHTML Mathematical by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Get out your pocket protector. If you’re in (408 a technical or scientific field, the characters in Table B-6 might John Wiley & Sons © 2003 pages) be right up your subset. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. Table B-6: Mathematical Characters<br /> <br /> Character<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> " 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition HTML<br /> <br /> ∀<br /> <br /> ∀<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> ∂<br /> <br /> ∂<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> $ Chapter 1<br /> <br /> ∃ - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> ∃<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the ∅ Web<br /> <br /> ∅<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> D II - Getting Started with HTML ∇ Part<br /> <br /> ∇<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents ∈<br /> <br /> ∈<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 '<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting ∋<br /> <br /> ∉<br /> <br /> ∉ ∋<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> p Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9 S<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> - IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Part<br /> <br /> −<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 *<br /> <br /> ∗<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS ∗ - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 µ<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML ∝<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> ÷<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> ∏<br /> <br /> ∏<br /> <br /> ∑<br /> <br /> ∑<br /> <br /> −<br /> <br /> √<br /> <br /> ∞<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox ∠<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> ∝ ∞ ∠<br /> <br /> ࢳ<br /> <br /> ∧<br /> <br /> ࢴ<br /> <br /> ∨<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> »<br /> <br /> √<br /> <br /> ∪<br /> <br /> ∪<br /> <br /> ∫<br /> <br /> ∫<br /> <br /> ∴<br /> <br /> ∴<br /> <br /> ∼<br /> <br /> ∼<br /> <br /> ≅<br /> <br /> ≅<br /> <br /> ≈<br /> <br /> ≈<br /> <br /> ≠<br /> <br /> ≠<br /> <br /> ≡<br /> <br /> ≡<br /> <br /> =<br /> <br /> ≤<br /> <br /> ≤<br /> <br /> =<br /> <br /> ≥<br /> <br /> ≥<br /> <br /> Ã<br /> <br /> ⊂<br /> <br /> ⊂<br /> <br /> ⊃<br /> <br /> ⊃<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> \<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary ~ Index<br /> <br /> @<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List˜ of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List+ of Sidebars<br /> <br /> À<br /> <br /> ⊄ HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Õ<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya ⊆Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ⊄ ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> ⊆<br /> <br /> ⊇ ⊇ Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step⊕ by-step book will ⊕ put you on the right track. Table ^ of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> ⊗<br /> <br /> ⊗<br /> <br /> ⊥<br /> <br /> ⊥<br /> <br /> ⋅<br /> <br /> ⋅<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Technical Characters by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> The technical characters in & Table are(408 funky-looking brackets. Do with them what you will, and rest John Wiley SonsB-7 © 2003 pages) easy knowing thatWhether they exist. your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. Table B-7: Technical Characters<br /> <br /> Character<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> È 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition HTML<br /> <br /> ⌈<br /> <br /> ⌈<br /> <br /> Introduction ¢<br /> <br /> ⌉<br /> <br /> ⌉<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Î Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to⌊ Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> ⌊<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the ⌋ Web<br /> <br /> ⌋<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> · II - Getting Started with HTML 〈 Part<br /> <br /> 〈<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 Ò<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents 〉<br /> <br /> 〉<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 Clubs, for Dummies, 4th Edition Hearts, Spades, and Diamonds by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Card fiend? Check outWiley Table John & B-8. Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Table B-8: Playing or one Card loaded Symbols with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Character Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Numeric Entity<br /> <br /> Character Entity<br /> <br /> ♠<br /> <br /> ♠<br /> <br /> HTML ß 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition ♣ Introduction<br /> <br /> ♣<br /> <br /> © I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural♥ Part Environment<br /> <br /> ♥<br /> <br /> Chapter ® 1<br /> <br /> ♦<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web ♦ - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition More ISO Character Sets Than You Can Shake a Stick At by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Not that you would shake a& stick at©anything. Ever. Who shakes sticks? Anyway, in addition to the various John Wiley Sons 2003 (408 pages) characters shownWhether in this appendix, numerous the ISO-Latin set have been created, your goal is to build avariants simple, of text-oriented Webcharacter site primarily to support developers (and users) who want to read Web pages in languages other than English. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book you versions on the right track. AsTable B-9 shows, there arewill 10 put named of the ISO-Latin character sets, and 15 versions of ISOLatin itself, each of which is aimed at a separate collection of languages. If you want to service readers in languages other than English, these character sets will be important to you.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Table B-9: ISO 8859 Character Sets<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Character Set Script<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-1<br /> <br /> Latin-1<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-2<br /> <br /> Latin-2<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Languages ASCII plus most Western European languages, including Albanian, Afrikaans, Basque, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, Flemish, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Scottish, Spanish, and Swedish. Omits certain Dutch, French, and German characters. ASCII plus most Central European languages, including Czech, English, German, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Croatian, Slovak, Slovene, and Serbian.<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-3 Latin-3 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs ISO-8859-4 Latin-4 Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-5<br /> <br /> ASCII plus characters required for English, Esperanto, German, Maltese, and Galician. ASCII plus most Baltic languages, including Latvian, Lithuanian, German, Greenlandic, and Lappish; now superseded by ISOLatin-6.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ASCII plus Cyrillic characters for Slavic languages, including Byelorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Serbian, and Ukrainian.<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-6<br /> <br /> ASCII plus Arabic characters.<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-7<br /> <br /> ASCII plus Greek characters.<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-8<br /> <br /> ASCII plus Hebrew.<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-9<br /> <br /> Latin-5 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-10<br /> <br /> Latin-1 except that some Turkish symbols replace ISBN:0764519956 Icelandic ones.<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site plus most Nordic Latin-6 ASCII or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this steplanguages, including Latvian, by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Lithuanian, Inuit, non-Skolt Sami, and Icelandic.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-11<br /> <br /> ASCII plus Thai.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-12 Introduction<br /> <br /> Latin-7<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-13<br /> <br /> Latin-8<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-14 Latin-9 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> ISO-8859-15<br /> <br /> Latin-10<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ASCII plus Celtic. ASCII plus the Baltic Rim characters. ASCII plus Sami (Finnish). Variation on Latin-1 that includes Euro currency sign, plus extra accented Finnish and French characters.<br /> <br /> Dummies, 4th Edition AppendixHTML C:4 for Glossary by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> A<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> absolute<br /> <br /> When used to modify pathnames or URLs, a full and complete file specification (as opposed Table of Contents to a relative one). An absolute specification includes a host identifier, a complete volume, and<br /> <br /> path specification. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> anchor<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> HTML, is Know tagged text or a graphic that acts as a link to another location - In The Least an Youanchor Need to about HTML and theelement Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> outside given - inside HTML or at Work onathe Webdocument, or an anchor may be a location in a document that acts<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> the destination an incoming link. The latter definition is most commonly how we use it in - as Creating Your Firstfor HTML Page<br /> <br /> thisStarted book. with HTML Part II - Getting Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> animation<br /> <br /> A computerized process of creating moving images by rapidly advancing from one still image to the next. In HTML, animated GIFs are typically used to produce this effect.<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> attribute<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> A named characteristic associated with a specific HTML element. Some attributes are required, and others are optional. Some attributes also take values (if so, the syntax is Chapter 10 - HTML Forms attribute="value"), depending on the particular element and attribute involved. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> B<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> bandwidth<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Technically, the range of electrical frequencies a device can handle; more often, bandwidth is or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepusedby-step as a measure a communication carrying capacity. The more bandwidth book willofput you on the right technology’s track. users have on their machines, the more quickly they can access HTML files.<br /> <br /> betaoftesting Table Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4thand Edition When you a limited group of users test your Web site before you share it with the rest of Introduction the world. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> bookmark Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> -A HTML reference at Work from on the a saved Web list of URLs kept by the Netscape Web browser. Bookmarks allow<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> loading a Web without retyping the URL. Bookmarks are also known as Favorites - quick Creating Your of First HTMLsite Page<br /> <br /> in Microsoft Internet Part II - Getting Started with HTMLExplorer. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Web access program -A Finding and Using Imagesthat can request HTML documents from Web servers and render<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> documents a user’s display device. See also client. - such Top Off Your Pageon with Formatting<br /> <br /> browser<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> that sometimes show up in software in the form of major or minor errors, mistakes, and - Issues HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV<br /> <br /> gotchas. Bugs got their name from insects found in antiquated tube-based computers of the late 1950s and early 1960s that were attracted to the glow of the filament in a tube. Bugs that - Extending HTML with Other Technologies show up in HTML markup can mess up a visitor’s attempt to navigate your site.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> C<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) CGI (Common Gateway Interface) your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether specification that governs how Web browsers communicate with and request services or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepfromby-step Web servers; also book will putthe youformat on theand rightsyntax track.for passing information from browsers to<br /> <br /> servers via HTML forms or document-based queries. client Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition The end-user side of the client/server arrangement; typically, client refers to a consumer Introduction (rather than a provider) of network services; a Web browser is therefore a client program that Part I - Meeting HTML in Itsservers. Natural Environment talks to Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> client-side map Chapter 2 -image HTML at Work on the Web sameYour as aFirst server-side image map, except that the hot-spot definitions are stored within Chapter 3 - The Creating HTML Page theStarted HTML with document Part II - Getting HTML on the client side, rather than in a map file stored on the server. Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> raison HTML; although form is important, content is why users access Web - The Finding andd’être Using for Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> why they come back for more. - documents Top Off Yourand Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> content<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> CSS (Cascading Style Sheets)<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> method of markup that allows users to define how certain HTML, XHTML, or XML structural -A HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV<br /> <br /> elements, such as paragraphs and headings, should be displayed using style rules instead of additional markup. The versions of CSS are CSS1 and CSS2. CSS2 is the most recent - Extending HTML with Other Technologies completed version, and CSS3 is underway.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> D<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> default<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site In general computer-speak, a selection made automatically in a program if the user specifies or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepno explicit selection. the right default is the value assigned to an attribute if none is by-step book will For put HTML, you on the track. supplied.<br /> <br /> deprecated Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition The term4th used to earmark an HTML element or attribute that is to be left for dead by future Introduction versions of HTML. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> DOCTYPE Chapter 1 -declaration The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML HTML at markup Work on that the tells Web the processor where to locate the DTD and contains declarations for<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> particular Also called a document type declaration. - the Creating Your document. First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> document Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> basic of Resources HTML information; a document refers to the entire contents of any single - The Linking to unit Online<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> this definition doesn’t always correspond to normal notions of a - HTML Findingfile. andBecause Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> wePage refer to what can formally be called HTML documents more or less - document, Top Off Your with Formatting<br /> <br /> interchangeably withLevel Web Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> pages, which is how browsers render such documents for display.<br /> <br /> DTD (Document Type Definition)<br /> <br /> Part IV<br /> <br /> A formal SGML specification for a document. A DTD lays out the structural elements and markup definitions to be used to create instances of documents. - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> E<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> element<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site A section of a document defined by a start and end tag or an empty tag. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> e-mail<br /> <br /> An abbreviation for electronic mail; e-mail is the preferred method for exchanging information Table of Contents between users on the Internet (and other networked systems). HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> empty tag Introduction Part I - Meeting in element Its Natural AnHTML HTML thatEnvironment does not require<br /> <br /> the use of a closing tag. In fact, the use of a closing<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - tag TheinLeast Youtags Need to Know about HTML and the Web empty is forbidden.<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> entity 3 Chapter<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting A character Started with string HTML that<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> represents another string of characters.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> error message Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> by a program to a user, usually to inform him or her that the process - Information Finding and delivered Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> properly, if at all. Error messages are an ill-appreciated art form and contain - hasn’t Top Offworked Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> some of the funniest and most Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8<br /> <br /> recipients). - their HTMLunfortunate Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> event<br /> <br /> opaque language we’ve ever seen (also, the most tragic for<br /> <br /> A userHTML activity, asTechnologies moving a mouse Part IV - Extending withsuch Other<br /> <br /> pointer over an image, clicking a link, or selecting a<br /> <br /> drop-down menu. Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting external style sheet<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> A style sheet that resides outside a Web document in a separate, external file.<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> F<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> footer<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether concluding part of an HTML document, containing contact, version, date, and attribution or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepinformation to help identify a document its authors. Most people use the <address rel="nofollow"> by-step book will put you on the rightand track. element to identify this information.<br /> <br /> formofhandler Table Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th on Edition A program the Web server or even possibly a simple mailto URL that manages the data Introduction a user sends to you via the form. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> forms 1 Chapter<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML HTML at markup Work on that the lets Web browsers solicit data from users and then deliver that data to specially<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> input-handling programs on a Web server. Briefly, forms provide a mechanism to - designated Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> let Started users interact with Part II - Getting with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> servers on the Web.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> FTP (File Transfer Protocol) - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Internet transfer service based on the TCP/IP protocols that provides a way to copy - An Finding andfile Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> to and from elsewhere on a network. - files Top Off Your PageFTP withservers Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> G<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) GIF (Graphic Interchange Format) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site A graphics format commonly used in Web documents because of its relatively small file size or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepand relatively sharp by-step book willresolution. put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> graphics Table of Contents Files in HTML documents that belong to one of a restricted family of types (usually .GIF or HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition .JPG). Graphics are referenced via URLs for inline display on Web pages. Introduction<br /> <br /> GUII (Graphical UserinInterface) Part - Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - Pronounced The Least You“gooey,” Need toGUIs Knowmake about graphical HTML andWeb the Web browsers possible; they create a visually - oriented HTML at interface Work on the thatWeb makes it easy for users to interact with computerized information of all<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - kinds. Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> H<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> heading<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site A markup element used to add document structure to HTML documents. Sometimes the term or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this steprefers to the initialwill portion of an document by-step book put you on HTML the right track. between the <head> . . . </head> tags, where titles and context definitions are commonly supplied.<br /> <br /> helper applications Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Applications that help a browser deliver Web information to users. Although recent browsers Introduction can display multiple graphics files (and sometimes other kinds of data), sometimes they must Part I - Meeting HTML in Itsfiles Natural Environment pass certain — for instance, motion<br /> <br /> picture or sound files — over to other applications<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - that The know Least how You Need to render to Know the about data they HTML contain. and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> hexadecimal Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page A numbering system Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> used to condense binary numbers. The hexadecimal system is<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> six letters and ten numbers. In HTML, hexadecimal numbering is used with - composed Structuringof Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> their attributes to denote what colors should comprise backgrounds and other - elements Linking to and Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> in Using a WebImages page. - elements Finding and<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> HTML (Hypertext Markup Language)<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> SGML-derived markup language used to create Web pages. Not quite a programming - The HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> language, HTML nevertheless provides a rich lexicon and syntax for designing and creating useful hypertext documents for the Web.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> The Internet protocol used to manage communication between Web clients (browsers) and servers.<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML hyperlink Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> A shorthand term for hypertext link, a block of text that a user can activate with a mouse click to navigate to another Web page.<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence hypermedia Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Any Creating a Greatof User Interface of a variety computer media — including text, graphics, video, sound, and so on —<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens available through<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> hypertext links on the Web.<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> hypertext Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes A method<br /> <br /> of organizing text, graphics, and other kinds of data for computer use that lets<br /> <br /> Appendix A - individual HTML 4 Tags data elements point to one another; a nonlinear method of organizing information, Appendix B - especially HTML Character text. Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> I<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> image map<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site A synonym for clickable image, an overlaid collection of pixel coordinates for a graphic that a or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepuser by-step can select activate a related hypertext booktowill put you on the right track.link for further Web navigation.<br /> <br /> inline content Table of Contents A word or string of words inside a block element. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> inline element Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Itsthat Natural Environment Any element controls presentation<br /> <br /> on an element-by-element basis, and an inline<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - element The Leastdoes You not Need denote to Know structure. about HTML In other and words, the Web it’s a text element, for example the <b><br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - element HTML at is Work an inline on theelement. Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> internal style sheet Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> style sheetYour thatHTML resides inside the Web document in which you’re working and controls how -A Structuring Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> information appears on-screen. - its Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Internet<br /> <br /> A worldwide collection of networks Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 9<br /> <br /> that began with technology and equipment funded by the U.S. Department of Defense in the 1970s. The World Wide Web is just a portion of the - HTML Tables Internet. Today, it links users in nearly every country, speaking nearly every known language. - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> ISP (Internet Service Provider)<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> An organization that provides individuals or other organizations with access to the Internet, usually for a fee. ISPs usually offer a variety of communications options for their customers, Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting ranging from analog telephone lines, to a variety of higher-bandwidth leased lines, to ISDN Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic and other digital communications services. Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> J<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Java<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site An object-oriented, platform-independent, secure, and compact programming language or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepdesigned for Web application deployment. Most system vendors support Java, which was by-step book will put you on the right track. created by Sun Microsystems.<br /> <br /> JPEG JPG) Table of (or Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Experts’ Group; an industry association that defined a highly compressible Joint Photographic Introduction format for images designed for complex color still images (such as photographs). JPEG files Part I - Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment take the in extension .JPG or .JPEG.<br /> <br /> Today, .JPG is one graphics format of choice for Web use,<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - particularly The Least You for Need complex to Know or photographic about HTML and images. the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> L<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> layout<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether overall arrangement of the elements in a document.<br /> <br /> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> link<br /> <br /> Also called a hyperlink. A pointer in one part of an HTML document that can transport users Table of Contents to another part of the same document, or to another document entirely. This capability puts HTML 4 For Dummies, thehyper4th intoEdition hypertext. In other words, a link is a one-to-one relationship/association Introduction<br /> <br /> between two concepts or ideas.<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Lynx 1 Chapter<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> -A HTML widely at Work used text-based on the WebWeb browser, useful for checking a Web page before going live with<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> (or using a Web to host the page on the Web). - itCreating Your Firstserver HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> M maintenance<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether process of regularly inspecting, testing, and updating the contents of Web pages; also, an or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepattitude that such activities areonboth by-step book will put you the inevitable right track.and advisable.<br /> <br /> mark up Table of Contents To embed special characters (metacharacters) within a text file to tell a computer program HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition how to handle the file’s contents. Introduction<br /> <br /> markup language Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> -A The Leastset You to Know about and HTMLrelated and the Web formal ofNeed special characters capabilities used to define a specific method for - handling HTML at Work the display on theof Web files that include markup; HTML is a markup language used to design<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> create Web pages. - and Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> metadata Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> elements that describe a document’s structure, content, or rendering within - Specially Linking todefined Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> document itselfImages or through external references. (Metadata literally means data about - the Finding and Using<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - data.) Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> multimedia<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> method of combining text, sound, graphics, and full-motion or animated video within a single -A HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> compound computer document.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> N nameservers<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Computers on the Internet that translate domain names into the actual Internet location for or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepyour by-step computer’s bookbrowser. will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> navigation Table of Contents Refers to the use of hyperlinks to move within or between HTML documents and other WebHTML 4 For Dummies, 4thresources. Edition accessible Introduction<br /> <br /> navigation barHTML in Its Natural Environment Part I - Meeting Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - An Theelement Least You to Know about HTML and the Web onNeed a Web page that arranges a series of hypertext links on a single line to provide - aHTML set ofatnavigation Work on the controls Web to help users move through an HTML document or a set of HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - documents. Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> nesting Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> structure thatResources occurs within another; in HTML, nesting happens most commonly with list - One Linking to Online<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> that may be freely nested within one another, regardless of type. - structures Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> O<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> online<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site A term that indicates information, activity, or communications located on or taking place in, an or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepelectronic, computing environment by-stepnetworked book will put you on the right track.(such as the Internet).<br /> <br /> operating system Table of Contents The underlying control program on a computer that makes the hardware run and supports the HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th execution ofEdition one or more applications. DOS, Windows, Unix, and OS/2 are all examples of Introduction<br /> <br /> operating systems.<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> P<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> page<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether generic term for an HTML document that Web users view on their browsers. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> PDF (Portable Document Format)<br /> <br /> The rich, typographically correct document format of Adobe, used to provide multiplatform Table of Contents document access through its Acrobat software as a more powerful alternative to HTML. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> plug-in Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in or Itssoftware Natural Environment Hardware added to a system<br /> <br /> that adds a specific feature such as plug-ins that<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - allow The Least You Need to Know HTML and the Web Netscape Navigator to about play video.<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> properties Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting In CSS, Started they with are HTML the different<br /> <br /> aspects of the display of text and graphics, such as font size or<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> color. - background Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> R<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) relative address Whether your goal is toaddress build a simple, text-oriented Webwith sitethe <base> element to create An abbreviated document that may be combined or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepa complete is you the on complete address by-step address book willor put the right track. for a local file found in the same directory.<br /> <br /> resource Table of Contents Any HTML document, capability, or other item or service available via the Web. URLs point to HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition resources. Introduction<br /> <br /> robot Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Chapter 1 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> -A The Least Web-traveling You Need to Know aboutthat HTML and thewidely, Web following and recording URLs and special program wanders - related HTML attitles Work foronfuture the Web reference in search engines. Also called a spider.<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> S<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> script<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site A setWhether of programming instructions that activate when an event that you define occurs. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> scripting language<br /> <br /> A special kind of programming language that a computer reads and executes at the same Table of Contents time (which means that the computer figures out what to do with the language when it HTML 4 For Dummies, appears4th in aEdition document or at the time that it's used. JavaScript is a common scripting Introduction<br /> <br /> language associated with Web use).<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> search1engine Chapter - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> -A HTML Web-based at Work application on the Web that searches the contents of a database of available Web pages<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> otherYour resources to provide - and Creating First HTML Page information that relates to specific topics or keywords, which a<br /> <br /> user supplies. Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> search tools - Linking to Online Resources of aand number programs that can permit HTML documents to become searchable, using Chapter 6 - Any Finding Usingof Images the <isindex> element to inform the browser of the need for a search window, and behindChapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting the-scenes indexing and Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Levelanchoring schemes to let users locate particular sections of or items document. Chapter 8 - within HTML a Tables Chapter 5<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> selector<br /> <br /> In CSS, identifies the element to which a style rule applies.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS SGML (Standard Generalized Markup Language)<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> An ISO standard document definition, specification, and creation mechanism that makes platform and display differences across multiple computers irrelevant to the delivery and Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML rendering of documents. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site shareware<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - trial Setting Up Your Online Presence period expires, users must register and purchase the software, or they must discontinue - its Creating use. a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> Software, available by various means, that users can run for free for a trial period. After that<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter specification 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> -A Ten HTMLdocument Do’s and Don’ts formal that describes the capabilities, functions, and interfaces for a specific<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes piece of<br /> <br /> software, a markup language, or a communications protocol.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> spider B - HTML Character Codes Appendix Appendix C - A Glossary Web-traversing program that tirelessly investigates Web pages and their links, while storing Index information about its travels for inclusion in the databases typically used by search engines.<br /> <br /> spider, crawler,search bot, and robot. Cheat Sheet - Also HTMLcalled 4 For Web Dummies, 4thWeb Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> style sheet<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings A file that holds the layout settings for a certain category of a document. Style sheets, like List of Sidebarstemplates, contain settings for headers and footers, tabs, margins, fonts, columns, and more.<br /> <br /> syntax The rules that govern how HTML markup looks and behaves within HTML documents. The real syntax definition for HTML comes from the SGML Document Type Definition (DTD). Markup written with the correct syntax is likelier to run well. syntax checker<br /> <br /> A program that checks a particular HTML document's markup against the rules that govern its 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition use; HTML a recommended part of the testing regimen for all HTML documents. by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> T<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> tag<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether formal name for a piece of HTML markup that signals a command of sorts (instructions), or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepusually enclosed in brackets >).track. by-step book willangle put you on the (< right<br /> <br /> template Table of Contents Literally, a model to imitate. In HTML terms, a template describes the skeleton of a Web HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition page, including the HTML for its heading and footer, and a consistent layout, and a set of Introduction navigation elements. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> test plan Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - The HTML series at Work of steps on the and Web elements to follow when conducting a formal test of software or other<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> systems; strongly recommend that you write - and use - a test plan as a part - computerized Creating Your First HTMLwe Page<br /> <br /> of your Web-publication Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4<br /> <br /> process.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> thumbnail - Linking to Online Resources miniature of a graphical image, used as a link to the full-size version. Chapter 6 -A Finding and rendering Using Images Chapter 5 Chapter 7<br /> <br /> title<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> text supplied to a Web page's title bar when displayed, used as data in many Web search - The HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - engines. HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> U<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Unix<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether operatingyour system of choice for the Internet community at large and the Web community, or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this steptoo, Unix offers the broadest tools, utilities, and programming libraries for Web server by-step book will put you range on the of right track. use.<br /> <br /> URLof (Uniform Resource Locator) Table Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition The primary naming scheme used to identify Web resources. URLs define the protocols to Introduction use, the domain name of the Web server where a resource resides, the port address to use Part I - Meeting in Its Natural Environment forHTML communication, and a directory path<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> to access named Web files or resources.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> URL-encoded textat Work on the Web Chapter 2 - HTML Chapter 3<br /> <br /> encoded specifically for the purpose of passing information requests and URL - Text Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> specifications Web Part II - Getting Started withtoHTML<br /> <br /> servers from browsers. URL encoding replaces spaces with plus signs<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> and substitutes special hexadecimal codes for a range of otherwise-irreproducible - (+) Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> This method is used to pass document queries from browsers to servers. - characters. Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> user interface<br /> <br /> TheHTML overall design your Part III - Taking to the NextofLevel Chapter 8<br /> <br /> site, including the way it looks, fits together, and works to provide access to information. Abbreviated as UI. See also GUI. - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> V<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> valid<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Markup that follows all the syntax rules defined in a DTD, allowing the document to pass or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepthrough a validator program no right errors. by-step book will put youwith on the track.<br /> <br /> validation Table of Contents The process of comparing a document to a set of document rules, in this context a DTD. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> W<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Web<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Also Whether called the World Wide Web, WWW, or W3. The complete collection of all Web servers or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepavailable on the which astrack. close to containing the “sum of human knowledge” by-step bookInternet, will put you on comes the right as anything we’ve yet seen.<br /> <br /> Webofpage Table Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Synonym forEdition an HTML document. In this book, we refer to Web pages as sets of related, Introduction interlinked HTML documents, usually produced by a single author or organization. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Web server Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> -A HTML computer, at Workusually on theon Web the Internet, that hosts HTTP protocols and related Web-service<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> See First also HTML Web-hosting provider. - software. Creating Your Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Web site Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> addressed location, usually on the Internet, that provides access to the set of Web pages - An Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> correspond toImages the URL for a given site. A Web site consists of a Web server and a named - that Finding and Using<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> of Web both accessible through a single Web address. See also URL. - collection Top Off Your Page documents, with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Web-hosting provider<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> company that provides space on Web servers for individuals or companies to host Web -A HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> sites. See also ISP.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> well-formed document<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> An HTML document that adheres to the rules that make it easy for a computer to interpret.<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic white space Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V<br /> <br /> The breathing room on a page — parts of a display or document unoccupied by text or other visual elements. A certain amount of white space is essential to make documents attractive - From Web Page to Web Site and readable.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 -(What SettingYou Up Your Online WYSIWYG See Is WhatPresence You Get) Chapter 18<br /> <br /> -A Creating a Great User Interface term used to describe text editors or other layout tools (such as HTML authoring tools) that<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens attempt to show<br /> <br /> on-screen what final, finished documents will look like.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> X<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) XHTML (Extensible Hypertext Markup Language) your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site The Whether reformulation of HTML 4.0 as an application of XML 1.0. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> XML (Extensible Markup Language)<br /> <br /> A system for defining, validating, and sharing document formats. Its main difference from Table of Contents HTML is that you can create your own elements. HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> A<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site <a> element, 352or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> attributes, 352 audio/video links, 237-238 links, 81-82 Tablebasic of Contents attribute,4th 177-178 HTMLtarget 4 For Dummies, Edition Introduction abbr attribute<br /> <br /> Part <td> I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment element, 359<br /> <br /> Chapter <th> 1 element, - The Least 359 You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2 element, - HTML 128, at Work <abbr rel="nofollow"> 352 on the Web Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> abbreviations,128<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> absolute, Chapter 4 375 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 links, - Linking absolute 83-84to Online Resources Chapter - Finding and Using Images accent 6marks, 20,22-24 Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> accept attribute <form> element, 354 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables <input> element, 355<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> acceptcharset attribute, 354 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part Access IV - Extending (Microsoft), HTML 250-251 with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS accessibility Chapter 12 - HTML andimages, Scripting alternative text for 100-102 Chapter 13 utility, - Making Bobby 321 Multimedia Magic Chapter 14 - for Integrating a Database intosite, Your HTML checklist making an accessible 321 Chapter frames, 15 161, - How 163, HTML 166Relates to Other Markup Languages Part resources V - From Web available, Page to344-345 Web Site<br /> <br /> text-only browsers, 16Toolbox Chapter 16 - Web Creating an HTML Web17Accessibility Guidelines, 321 Chapter - Setting Up Your Online Presence Web18Accessibility (WAI), 102 Chapter - Creating Initiative a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens accesskey attribute<br /> <br /> Chapter <a>19 element, - Ten Ways 352 to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> <area rel="nofollow"> Chapter 20 - element, Ten HTML352 Do’s and Don’ts element, Part <button> VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> 353<br /> <br /> <fieldset> Appendix A - HTMLelement, 4 Tags 354 <input> element, 355 Codes Appendix B - HTML Character <label> element, 356 Appendix C - Glossary Index<legend> element, 356<br /> <br /> <textarea> element, 359<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <acronym rel="nofollow"> List of Figures element, 128, 352 List of Tables128 acronyms, List of Listings<br /> <br /> action attribute, 186-187,354<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> <address rel="nofollow"> element, 352 Adobe GoLive,217,281-282 Photoshop,282-283 AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format), 233 align attribute<br /> <br /> <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 HTML 4 for <caption> element, 144Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts <col> element, 353 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) <colgroup> element, 353 <fieldset>Whether element,your 354goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<hr> element, 69 by-step book will put you on the right track. <iframe> element, 355 <img> element, 105-106 element, 61,357 Table<p> of Contents element, HTML<table> 4 For Dummies, 4th150-151 Edition <tbody> element, 359 Introduction element, 151, 359Natural Environment Part <td> I - Meeting HTML in Its <tfoot> element, 359 Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 1 - The Least You <th> element, 359 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web <thead> element, 359 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page <tr> element, 151,360 Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> alignment Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents horizontal rule, 69to Online Resources Chapter 5 - Linking images, 105-106 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images paragraphs, 61Off Your Page with Formatting Chapter 7 - Top captions, 144to the Next Level Part table III - Taking HTML table cells, 151-152 - HTML Tables table rows, 151-152 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames tables,150-152 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> alink 353 Part IV - attribute, Extending119, HTML with Other Technologies Chapter alt attribute 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <area rel="nofollow"> 109,352 Magic Chapter 13 - element, Making Multimedia <img> 100,a355 Chapter 14 element, - Integrating Database into Your HTML <input> element, Chapter 15 - How HTML355 Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - Fromtext, Web Page to Web Site alternative 100-102<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox Amazon.com Web site, 322-323<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> anchor,375<br /> <br /> anchor 81-82. Part VI - element, The Part of Tens See<br /> <br /> also<a> element<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 375 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs animation, Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts animated GIFs, 111-112 Part Flash, VII - Appendixes 235<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTMLWeb 4 Tags Apple QuickTime site, 237 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> archive attribute Index<br /> <br /> <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 <object> element, 357<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> <area rel="nofollow"> element, 109,352 List of Tables List of Listings arrow character set, 370-371 List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ASP.NET, 255-256<br /> <br /> ASP.NET For Dummies, Bill Hatfield, 257 attributes (HTML markup), 20-22,375.See alsoindividual attributes by name audio AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format), 233 AU (Sun/NeXT audio), 233 background music, 242<br /> <br /> embedding files into Web pages, 239-241 links,237-239 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts 233 MIDI (Musicalby Instrument Digital Interface), John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) MP3 (MPEG-1, Layer III), 233 Whether QT (QuickTime), 233 your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepRA (RealAudio), 233 by-step book will put you on the right track. RMF (Rich Music Format), 233-234 streaming audio, 242-244 (Shockwave Audio), 234 TableSWA of Contents 2344th Edition HTMLSWF 4 For(Flash), Dummies, WAV (RIFF WAVE), 234 Introduction (Windows Audio), Environment 234 Part WMA I - Meeting HTML Media in Its Natural Chapter 1 - The interleaved) Least You Need to Know about AVI (audio/video video format, 234HTML and the Web Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web axis attribute Chapter 3 element, - Creating <td> 359Your First HTML Page Part <th> II - Getting Started element, 359 with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> B<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or352 one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<b> element, 128, by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> background (of Web page) Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 205 Tablecolors, of Contents 120 HTMLimages, 4 For Dummies, 121–122 4th Edition Introduction music,242 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> background attribute, 121–122,353<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> bandwidth,375 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web <base> 352Your First HTML Page Chapter 3 element, - Creating Part II - Gettingelement, Started with <basefont> 352 HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> BBEdit, 275,280<br /> <br /> <bdo> element, 352<br /> <br /> beta testing, 375Your Page with Formatting Chapter 7 - 330, Top Off Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level bgcolor attribute Chapter 8 - element, HTML Tables <body> 120,122 Chapter <td> 9 element, - HTML 159–160 Frames <tr> Chapter 10 element, - HTML 360 Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies <bgsound> element, 242<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> <big> element, 128,352<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting <block> Chapter 13 element, - Making59 Multimedia Magic Chapter block quotes, 14 - Integrating 63–64 a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15 - How element, HTML Relates to 353 Other Markup Languages <blockquote> 63–66, Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> blocks of text, 60<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox Bobby utility scanning Web site accessibility, 321,353 Chapter 17 - for Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> <body> Chapter 18element - Creating a Great User Interface 119 Part alink VI - Theattribute, Part of Tens attributes, 353 Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 19 - Ten background attribute, Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s121–122 and Don’ts attribute, Part bgcolor VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> 120,122 content markup, Appendix A -and HTML 4 Tags58–59, 118 linkB attribute, Appendix - HTML 119 Character Codes text attribute, 118 Appendix C - Glossary vlink attribute, 119 Index<br /> <br /> boldfacing 1284 For Dummies, 4th Edition Cheat Sheet text, - HTML List of Figures bookmark, 375 List of Tables border attribute List of Listings <img> element, 104–105 List of Sidebars element, 143, 145 <table><br /> <br /> borders Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 206 frames,173–175 images,104–105 tables,138,143,145 <br> element, 67–68,353<br /> <br /> Bravenet Web site, 347<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> broken links ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts common causes of, 84–85 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) finding,304,329 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site link checkers,or 284–285, 329with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepone loaded browsers,375 by-step book will put you on the right track. alternative text, 100–102 Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 159,207–208 Table of Contents character set support, 361 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition client-side scripts, 223 Introduction color settings, 119 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment colors,116 Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web display instructions, 12–13 Chapter 2 161, - HTML frames, 166at Work on the Web Chapter 3 - Creating Your graphical browsers, 16 First HTML Page Part Hypertext II - Getting Started with HTML Transfer Protocol (HTTP), 17 Chapter 4 Structuring Your HTML Documents image display, 100 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources interpretation of HTML, 15–16 Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images line breaks, 67 Chapter Lynx, 7 16,-379 Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part opening III - Taking a new HTML window, to the 86–87 Next Level page display, 54 Chapter 8 title - HTML Tables plug-ins, Chapter 9 -236 HTML Frames redirecting users, 56–57 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms languages, 224 Other Technologies Part scripting IV - Extending HTML with streaming media,Stylish 242–243 Chapter 11 - Getting with CSS style sheets, 159, 203, 207–208 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting testing,16,337,339 Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic text-only browsers, 16 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML viewing Web pages, 42–43 Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages white space, 64–65 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site XHTML,260,263 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox XML (Extensible Markup Language), 260 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> bugs,376.See alsoerrors Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface Builder.com Webofsite, Part VI - The Part Tens96, 257<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs bullet styles, 75–76 Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> bulleted lists, 74–76<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> <button> element, 353<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index C<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one144, loaded <caption> element, 353with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> captions in tables, 144 card character set, 373<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 376 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition background properties, 205 Introduction properties, Part border I - Meeting HTML in206 Its Natural Environment browser 207–208 Chapter 1 -display, The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web browser-support, 159 HTML at Work on the Web classification properties, 206 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page core style sheets, 215 Part II - Getting Started with HTML CSS1,204–205 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents CSS2,204–205 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources CSS3,205 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images declarations, 207,209 Chapter 7 -style Top Off Your Page with Formatting external sheet, 213–215, 377 Part font III - properties, Taking HTML to the Next Level 206 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables inheritance, 211–212 Chapter 9 -style HTML Frames internal sheet, 213–214,379 Chapter 10 HTML Forms list properties, 206 Part margin IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies properties, 206 Chapter 11 Getting Stylish padding properties, 206 with CSS Chapter positioning 12 - HTML properties, and Scripting 206 predefined style sheets, 215Magic Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia properties, 207 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML properties, defined, Chapter 15 - How HTML 381 Relates to Other Markup Languages Part selector, V - From 381 Web Page to Web Site selectors, 207,209 an HTML Toolbox Chapter 16 - Creating size17 properties, Chapter - Setting206 Up Your Online Presence style classes, 209–211 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface style rules, 207,209 Part VI - The Part of Tens table properties, 206 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs tables,159 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts text properties, 206 Part VII - Appendixes validator,209 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags values,207 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes W3C,205 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Cascading Style Sheets For Dummies, Damon A. Dean, 206<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> case-sensitivity Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition HTML tags, 3 List of Figures URLs, 84 List of Tables cellpadding attribute, 148–149 List of Listings List of Sidebars cells (tables), 138<br /> <br /> alignment,151–152 colors,159–160 creating,140–142 height,146,148 padding,148–149 populating,155–156 spacing, 148–150<br /> <br /> span,138,142–143,152–155 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition width,138,146–147 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> cellspacing attribute, 148–150<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> <center> element, 150,353 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepCGI (Common Gateway Interface), 376 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> CGI Resource Index Web site, 197 CGI scripts for handling forms, 196–197<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> char4 attribute HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <col> element, 353 <colgroup> element, 353 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Introduction<br /> <br /> char attribute (continued) Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <tbody> element, 359 on the Web Chapter 2 - HTML at Work <td> 359Your First HTML Page Chapter 3 element, - Creating 359 HTML Part <tfoot> II - Gettingelement, Started with <th> 359 Your HTML Documents Chapter 4 element, - Structuring <thead> element, 359 - Linking to Online Resources <tr> element, 360<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> character Chapter 7 sets - Top Off Your Page with Formatting arrow character set, 370–371 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level browser support, 361 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables card9 character 373 Chapter - HTML set, Frames Greek character set, Chapter 10 - HTML Forms367–369 8859 character 373–374 Part ISO IV - Extending HTML sets, with Other Technologies ISO-Latin-1 character set, 362–367 Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS letter-like character set, 370 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting mathematical character set, 371–372 Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic punctuation character set, 369 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML specifying with the <meta> element, 57 Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages technical character set, 372–373 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> charoff attribute - Creating an HTML Toolbox <col> element, 353 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence <colgroup> element, 353 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface <tbody> element, 359 Part VI - The Part of Tens <td> element, 359 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs <tfoot> element, 359 Chapter 20 element, - Ten HTML <th> 359 Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes <thead> element, 359 Appendix - HTML 360 4 Tags <tr>A element, Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> charset attribute <a> element, 352 Index <link> element, 356 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For 358 Dummies, 4th Edition <script> element, Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> check boxes (forms), 189–190<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> checked attribute, 355 List of Listings List of Sidebars citations, 128<br /> <br /> cite attribute <blockquote> element, 353 <del> element, 354 <ins> element, 355 <q> element, 358 <cite> element, 128,353<br /> <br /> class attribute, 210–211,352<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> classid attribute, 357<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> “click here” phrasing links,&319 JohninWiley Sons © 2003 (408 pages) your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site clickable images.Whether Seeimage maps<br /> <br /> client,376<br /> <br /> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> client-side image maps, 376 client-side scripts, 223 Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition clip art, 113 Introduction code, denoting in text, 129 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> code attribute, 352<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> <code> 353 on the Web Chapter 2 element, - HTML 129, at Work Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page code examples Part companion II - Getting Web Started with site, 7 HTML Chapter typing 4 in, -2 Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 -attribute Linking to Online Resources codebase Chapter 6 - Finding and 352 Using Images <applet rel="nofollow"> element, Chapter 7 - Top Off Your357 Page with Formatting <object> element, Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> codetype attribute, 357<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> <col> element, 144,353<br /> <br /> <colgroup> element, 144,353 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - attribute Extending HTML with Other Technologies color<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish 352 with CSS <basefont> element, Chapter <font> 12 - element, HTML and125, Scripting 127 Chapter colors 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML background color, 120 Chapter 15 -display, How HTML browser 116Relates to Other Markup Languages Part converters V - From Web Page to Webto Site (RGB notation hexadecimal<br /> <br /> notation), 117<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox coordination tips, 119, 122–123 Chapter 17 -116, Setting Up Your Online Presence defining, 120–121 Chapter hexadecimal 18 - Creating codes, a Great 116–118 User Interface Part hexadecimal VI - The Part of color Tens codes,<br /> <br /> 378<br /> <br /> links, Chapter 19119–120 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs names, Chapter 20 116 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts cells, 159–160 Part table VII - Appendixes text color, 118,125 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Web Bbrowser 119 Appendix - HTMLsettings, Character Codes cols attribute Appendix C - Glossary Index<frameset> element, 167–170, 355<br /> <br /> <textarea> 359 Cheat Sheet - HTMLelement, 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures colspan attribute List of <td> Tables element, 142–143,152–154,359<br /> <br /> <th> element, 359 List of Listings List of Sidebars columns. See alsocells (tables)<br /> <br /> frames,167–172 tables,144 Common Gateway Interface (CGI), 376 compact attribute <dir> element, 354 <menu> element, 356<br /> <br /> compressing images, 96–97<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> content, 376 ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts checking and John updating, 304 Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) frames,172–173 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site images,94 or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepimportance of,by-step 335–336 book will put you on the right track. inline content, 379 inline element, 379 Tabletypes of Contents of, 11–12 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> content attribute, 55,356<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> converting colors (RGB notation toEnvironment hexadecimal Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural<br /> <br /> notation), 117<br /> <br /> coords Chapter 1 attribute - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <a>2element, Chapter - HTML352 at Work on the Web <area rel="nofollow"> Chapter 3 - element, Creating 109, Your 352 First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML copyright of images, 114<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> core style sheets, 215<br /> <br /> Corel WordPerfect 8.0 for Windows, 281 - Finding and Using Images crawlers, Chapter 7 307 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML the Next376 Level CSS (Cascading StyletoSheets),<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables 205 background properties, Chapter 9 properties, - HTML Frames border 206 Chapter browser 10 -display, HTML Forms 207–208 Part browser IV - Extending support, HTML 159with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> classification properties, 206 CSS Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with core12style sheets, 215 Chapter - HTML and Scripting CSS1, Chapter 13 204–205 - Making Multimedia Magic CSS2, Chapter 14 204–205 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML CSS3, Chapter 15 205 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages 209 Part declarations, V - From Web207, Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> external-style sheet, 213–215,377 Creating an HTML Toolbox font properties, 206 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence inheritance, 211–212 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface internal style sheet, 213–214,379 Part VI - The Part of Tens list properties, 206 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs margin properties, 206 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts padding properties, 206 Part VII - Appendixes positioning properties, 206 Appendix A - HTML Tags 215 predefined style4sheets, Appendix B HTML Character Codes properties,207,381 Appendix C - Glossary selectors, 207,209,381 Indexsize properties, 206 Cheat Sheet - HTML209–211 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition style classes, List of style Figures rules, 207,209 table properties, 206 List of Tables tables, 159 List of Listings text properties, 206 List of Sidebars validator,209 values,207 W3C,205 Chapter 16<br /> <br /> CuteFTP,300<br /> <br /> Index D<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepdata attribute, 357 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> data collection forms, 181,183–185 databases,245 ASP.NET, 255–256 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition design guidelines, 251 Introduction drivers,256 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment features,249 Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web instructions, 252,254 Chapter 2255–256 - HTML at Work on the Web JSP, Chapter 3 to- a Creating Your 246–248 First HTML Page linking Web page, Part Microsoft II - Getting Started with HTML Access, 250–251 Chapter 4 Structuring Your HTML Documents Microsoft SQL Server, 251–252 Chapter 5 Linking to Online Resources MySQL,249–250 Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images online catalogs, 247 Chapter Oracle, 7 251–252 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part PHP, III - Taking 253–254 HTML to the Next Level queries, 252–254 Chapter 8 -247, HTML Tables SQL9 (Structured Query Language), 246–247 Chapter - HTML Frames Sybase, Chapter 10 -251–252 HTML Forms support, 256–257 Part technical IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies user11interaction, 246 with CSS Chapter - Getting29, Stylish uses, Chapter 12245–246 - HTML and Scripting Web server connections, 256 Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> datetime Chapter 14 -attribute Integrating a Database into Your HTML <del> 354Relates to Other Markup Languages Chapter 15 element, - How HTML element, 355 Part <ins> V - From Web Page to Web Site Chapter <dd> element, 16 - Creating 76–77an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17 - (CSS), Setting 207, Up Your declarations 209Online Presence Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> declare attribute, 357<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> dedicated connections, 293–294 Chapter 19 Internet - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter default,20 376- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> defer attribute, 358<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> definition lists, 76–77<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> <del> element, 129,354 Appendix C - Glossary Index deprecated,376 Cheat Sheet -ofHTML For Dummies, 4th Edition description page,4 54–56 List of Figures<br /> <br /> DevGuru Web site, 206<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> <dfn> element, 129,354 List of Listings <dir> element, 354 List of Sidebars Director (Macromedia), 234 disabled attribute <button> element, 353 <input> element, 355 <optgroup> element, 357 <option> element, 357<br /> <br /> <select> element, 358 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition <textarea>HTML element, 359 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> <div> element, 354<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> <dl> element, 76–77, 354your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Whether or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepDoctor HTML spell checker, 328 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> DOCTYPE declaration, 376 HTML,52 TableXML, of Contents 267 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> document,376 footer,377 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment header,53 Chapter 1 - 51–52 The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web structure, Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web title,253–54 Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Document Type Definition (DTD), 377 HTML 4.01 specification, 25–26 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents XML,262–263 Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> domain names, 297–300 - Finding and Using Images download Chapter 7 links, - Top90–91 Off Your Page with Formatting Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking download time HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables images, 102–103 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames 1-second, 1K rule, 98 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms downloading plug-ins, 236 Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Dreamweaver (Macromedia), 217,274–277<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> drop-down (forms), 187,192–193 Chapter 12 -lists HTML and Scripting Chapter 13 -menus, Making33 Multimedia Magic drop-down Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <dt> element, 76–77,354 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> DTD (Document Type Definition), 377 HTML 4.01 specification, 25–26 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox XML,262–263 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index E<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site ECMAscript, 224 or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> editing HTML existing Web pages, 43–45 TableHTML of Contents Tidy, 268 HTMLword 4 Forprocessors, Dummies, 4th 281Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> editors HTML editors, 273–278,280–282 Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web image editors, 282–283 Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web text 2editors, 12,36, 272–273 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> elements, 377.See alsospecific elements <a>,81–82,177–178,237–238,352 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <abbr rel="nofollow">,128,352 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources <acronym rel="nofollow">, 128,352 Chapter 6 - Finding <address rel="nofollow">, 352and Using Images Chapter 7 81–82 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting anchor, Part <applet rel="nofollow">, III - Taking HTML 352 to the Next Level Chapter 8 - HTML Tables <area rel="nofollow">, 109,352 Chapter 9 128, - HTML <b>, 352 Frames Chapter 10 - HTML <base>, 352 Forms Part <basefont>, IV - Extending HTML 352 with Other Technologies Chapter <bdo>, 11 -352 Getting Stylish with CSS <bgsound>, 242 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <big>, 128, 352 Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic <block>, 59 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <blockquote>, 63–66, 353to Other Markup Languages Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates <body>, 58–59, 118–122, Part V - From Web Page to Web 353 Site <br>, 353 an HTML Toolbox Chapter 16 67–68, - Creating <button>,353 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence <caption>,144,353 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface case-sensitivity,3 Part VI - The Part of Tens <center>,150,353 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs <cite>,128,353 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts <code>,129,353 Part VII - Appendixes <col>,144,353 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags <colgroup>,144,353 Appendix B 76–77 - HTML Character Codes <dd>, Appendix C -129, Glossary <del>, 354 Index<dfn>,129, 354 Cheat Sheet -354 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <dir>, List of Figures354 <div>, List of <dl>, Tables 76–77,354 <dt>, 76–77,354 List of Listings <em>, 129,354 List of Sidebars <embed>,239–242,244 empty,21,377 end tags, 20,336–337 <fieldset>,354 <font>,123–127 <form>,186–187,354 <frame>,173–177,354 Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> <frameset>,166–170,355 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition <head>,53–54 ISBN:0764519956 <h1>,62,355 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) <hr>,68–70,355 <h6>,62,355Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<html>,53,355 by-step book will put you on the right track. <i>128,355 <iframe>,355 98–109,111,355 Table<img> of Contents HTMLinline, 4 For379 Dummies, 4th Edition <input>,187–190,194–195,355 Introduction 129, 355 in Its Natural Environment Part <ins>, I - Meeting HTML <isindex>, Chapter 1 - The 356 Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <kbd>, 129, 356 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web <label>,356 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page <legend>,356 Part II - Getting Started with HTML <li>,72–75,356 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <link>,213–215,356 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources <map>,109,356 Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images <menu>,- 356 Chapter 7 - 55–57 Top Off Your Page with Formatting <meta>, Part <noframes>, III - Taking HTML the Next Level 166,to356 Chapter 8 HTML Tables <noscript>,357 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames <object>, 239–240, 357 Chapter 10 HTML Forms <ol>,72–74,357 Part <optgroup>, IV - Extending 357 HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11 Getting Stylish with <option>,187,192–193, 357CSS Chapter <p>, 12 60–61, - HTML 357and Scripting <param>, 357 Multimedia Magic Chapter 13 - Making phrase, Chapter 14 128–131 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <pre>, 357 Relates to Other Markup Languages Chapter 15 65–66, - How HTML 358 Web Page to Web Site Part <q>, V - From <s>, 128, Chapter 16 - 358 Creating an HTML Toolbox <samp>, 358Up Your Online Presence Chapter 17 - 129, Setting <script>, 221–222, 358 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface <select>, 187, 192–193, 358 Part VI - The Part of Tens singleton tag, 98 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs <small>,128,358 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts <span>,358 Part VII - Appendixes start tag, 20 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags <strike>,128,358 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes <strong>,129,358 Appendix C - Glossary <style>, 213–214,358 Indexstyle,128–131 Cheat Sheet - HTML style rules, 215 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures <sub>,358 List of Tables358 <sup>, List of <table>, Listings 140–143, 145–146, 148–151, 358–359 List of tag Sidebars pair, 20 <tbody>,144,359 <td>,140–143,146,148,151–154,159–160,359 <textarea>,187,193,359 <tfoot>,144,359 <th>,144,359 <thead>,144,359 <title>,54,359<br /> <br /> <tr>,140–141,151–152,360 <tt>,128,360HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 <u>,128,360 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) <ul>,74–76,360 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site <var>,129,360 <em>,129,354<br /> <br /> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> e-mail,377 form data collection, 197 Table of Contents links to e-mail addresses, 91 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Post Office Protocol (POP), 17 Introduction Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), 17 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment spam,91 Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> <embed> element, 239–242,244<br /> <br /> embedding Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page files intowith a Web page, Part audio/video II - Getting Started HTML<br /> <br /> 239–241 database instructions into a Web page, 252–254 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Windows Media Player, 241–242 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Chapter empty element 6 - Finding (or tag), and 21, Using 377Images Chapter 7 attribute, - Top Off354 Your Page with Formatting enctype Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> end tags, 20,336–337<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> entities9(HTML markup), 20,22–24,377 Chapter - HTML Frames Chapter error message, 10 - HTML 377Forms Part IV -377 Extending HTML with Other Technologies errors,<br /> <br /> Chapter - Getting beta11testing, 330 Stylish with CSS Chapter 12 links, - HTML and Scripting broken 84–85, 284,329 Chapter - Making Multimedia 40413Object Not Found Magic error, 284 Chapter 14redirectors, - Integrating page 330a Database into Your HTML Chapter peer15reviews, - How 331 HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part spelling V - Fromerrors, Web Page 328–329 to Web Site<br /> <br /> validation of HTML, Chapter 16 - Creating an331 HTML Toolbox Chapter events,17 377 - Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18 - Creating attributes, 220–221a Great User Interface Part scripts, VI - The Part of Tens 219–220<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs expanding Web sites, 305–306,339–340<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Extensible Markup Language (XML), 384 browser support, 260 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags defined, 384 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes differences from HTML, 260 Appendix C - Glossary differences from XHTML, 260 IndexDOCTYPE declaration, 267 Cheat Sheet - HTML For Dummies, 4th262–263 Edition Document Type4Definition (DTD), List of Figures FAQ Web site, 262 List of Tables how it works, 261–262 List of Listings namespaces, 267–268 List of Sidebars rules, 265–268 uses,261 Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> external style sheets (CSS), 214–215,377<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> F<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> face attribute <basefont> element, 352 <font> element, 123–124,127 Table of Contents feedback from users, 331–332 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Fetch,289<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> <fieldset> element, 354<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter file download 1 - The links, Least 90–91 You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2 -for HTML at Work on the Web file formats graphics, 95–97 Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> file size of images, 96–98<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> File Transfer Protocol (FTP), 17,289, 377 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter file transfers 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> via FTP, Chapter 6 - 300–301 Finding and Using Images via hosting provider’s Chapter 7 - Top Off YourWeb Page site, with 301 Formatting Part - Taking to the Next Level file III upload fieldsHTML (forms), 191<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> FileMaker Pro 6 Bible, Steven A. Schwartz, 258 Fireworks (Macromedia), 283 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> FirstGov Web site,HTML 17–18 Part IV - Extending with Other Technologies Chapter Flash 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 - HTML animation, 235 and Scripting Chapter 13 235 - Making Multimedia Magic plug-in, Chapter SWF 14(Shockwave - Integrating File a Database Extension), into 234 Your HTML Chapter 15 Bible, - HowRobert HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Flash MX Reinhardt and Snow Dowd, 235 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> <font> element - Creating an HTML Toolbox color attribute, 125,127 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence face attribute, 123–124,127 Chapter 18 attribute, - Creating a Great User Interface size 125–127 Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> font size - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs absolute font sizes, 126–128 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 206 Part VII - Appendixes headings,62 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags relative font sizes, 126–128 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes setting,125–128 Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> footer document footer, 377 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition table footer, 144 Index<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> <form> element, 354 List of Tables<br /> <br /> action attribute, 186–187 attributes, 354 List of Sidebars method attribute, 186 List of Listings<br /> <br /> form handlers, 377 form validation, 229–230 formatting text phrase elements, 128–131 style elements, 128–131<br /> <br /> forms,377 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition check boxes, HTML 189–190 ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts creating,185–186 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) data collection forms, 181,183–185 Whether degree of difficulty, 33 your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepdesign tips, 198–199 by-step book will put you on the right track. drop-down lists, 187,192–193 e-mail collection of data, 197 fields, 191 Tablefile of upload Contents handlers, 186, HTMLform 4 For Dummies, 4th195–197, Edition 377 hidden fields, 190–191 Introduction controls, 187–195 Part input I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment password fields, 188–189 Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web radio buttons, 189–190 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web reset buttons, 194–195 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page search forms, 181–184 Part II - Getting Started with HTML structure of, 186 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents submit buttons, 194–195 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources text areas, 187,193–194 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images text fields, 187–188 Chapter 7 Top Off Your Page with Formatting types of,- 181 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level usability, 198 Chapter 8 181–182 - HTML Tables uses, Chapter 9 - HTML Frames validating, 229–230 Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> 404 Object Not Found error, 284<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> <frame> Chapter 11 element, - Getting354 Stylish with CSS attributes, 354 and Scripting Chapter 12 - HTML<br /> <br /> frameborder attribute, 173–174 - Making Multimedia Magic marginheight attribute, 174–175 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML marginwidth attribute, 174–175 Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages name attribute, 177 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site scrolling attribute, 175–176 Chapter 13<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> frameborder attribute - Setting Up Your Online Presence <frame> element, 173–174,354 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface <iframe> element, 355 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> frames19 Chapter<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> accessibility 161,and 163,Don’ts 166 Chapter 20 - Tenissues, HTML Do’s 173–175 Part borders, VII - Appendixes browser Appendix A -support, HTML 4 161, Tags166 columns, Appendix B - 167–172 HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> combining rows and columns, 170–172 content, 172–173 Index creating,164–165 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition frameset document, 165–166 List of Figures height,167–168 List of Tables HTML Frameset, 25,52 List of Listings layout, 164–165 List of Sidebars links, 177–179 margins, 174–175 naming,177 navigation,164 nesting,179–180 rows,167–172 rules,173 scroll bars, 175–176 Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> splitting,179–180 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition target frame, HTML 177–178 ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts usability issues, 163 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) uses,161–162,164 width,167–168Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> frameset document, 165–166 by-step book will put you on the right track. <frameset> element attributes, 355 Table of Contents cols attribute, 167–170 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition description, 355 Introduction hierarchy among other elements, 166 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment rows attribute, 167–170 Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> FrontPage (Microsoft), 277–278 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> FTP (File Protocol), 17, 289,Page 377 Chapter 3 Transfer - Creating Your First HTML Part - Getting Started300–301 with HTML FTPIIclients, 289–290,<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> G<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site ghost sites, 341 or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> GIF Construction Set animation software, 111 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format), 95,97,378<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> GifBuilder animation 4th software, HTML 4 For Dummies, Edition111 Introduction GoLive (Adobe), 217,281–282 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> graphic file formats, 95–97<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Graphical User Interface (GUI), 378<br /> <br /> graphical browsers, Chapter 3 Web - Creating Your16 First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML graphics, 378.See alsoimages<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents graphics applications<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Photoshop, - Linking to 282–283 Online Resources Adobe Chapter - FindingPro, and 283 Using Images Jasc6 PaintShop<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 - TopFireworks, Off Your Page Macromedia 283with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Graphics Interchange Format (GIF), 95,97,378<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables Greek character set, 367–369 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> GUI (Graphical User Interface), defined, 378 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> H<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<head> element,or53-54 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> headers page,53 Tabletable, of Contents 144 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> headers attribute <td> element, 359 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its <th> element, 359 Introduction Chapter 1<br /> <br /> Natural Environment<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> headings,61-63, 378 - HTML at Work on the Web height attribute Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page 352HTML Part <applet rel="nofollow"> II - Getting element, Started with <iframe> element, 355 HTML Documents Chapter 4 - Structuring Your <img> element, 102-103, Chapter 5 - Linking to Online 355 Resources <object> element, 357 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images <table> element, 148 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting <td> element, 148 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> help resources, 345Tables Chapter 8 - HTML Chapter - HTML Frames helper 9applications, 378 Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms hexadecimal color codes, 116-118,378<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> hidden fields (forms), 190-191 - Getting Stylish with CSS HomeSite, 278-279 Chapter 12 275, - HTML and Scripting Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic <h1> element, 62,355 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML horizontal rule, 68-71<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> hosting Web sites domain names, 297-300 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox free Web hosting, 295 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence with a hosting provider, 291,294-297 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface on your own, 291-294 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> <hr> element, 68-70,355 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs href attribute Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts 83,91,352 Part <a> VII - element, Appendixes <area rel="nofollow"> 109,352 Appendix A - element, HTML 4 Tags <base> 352 Appendix B - element, HTML Character Codes <link> element, 215, 356 Appendix C - Glossary Chapter 19<br /> <br /> hreflang attribute Index <a> element, Cheat Sheet - HTML352 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <link> List of Figures element, 356 List of Tables <h6> element, 62,355 List of Listings hspace attribute List of Sidebars element, 352 <applet rel="nofollow"><br /> <br /> <img> element, 106-107 .htm suffix, 42 HTML,378 HTML editors Adobe GoLive, 281-282 BBEdit, 280<br /> <br /> Corel WordPerfect 8.0 for Windows, 281 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition DreamweaverHTML (Macromedia), 274-277 ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts FrontPage (Microsoft), 277-278 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) functionality to look for, 273-274 your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site helper editors,Whether 273 or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepHomeSite,278-279 by-step book will put you on the right track. Microsoft Word 97/2000 for Windows, 281 word processors, 281 editors, 273 TableWYSIWYG of Contents HTML 4 Forelement, Dummies, <html> 53,4th 355Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> HTML elements. Seeelements<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> HTML forms, 377Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 1 - The check boxes, 189-190 - HTML at Work on the Web creating,185-186 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page data collection forms, 181,183-185 Part II - Getting Started with HTML degree of difficulty, 33 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents design tips, 198-199 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources drop-down lists, 187,192-193 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images e-mail collection of data, 197 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your file upload fields, 191 Page with Formatting Part form III - Taking HTML to195-197, the Next 377 Level handlers, 186, Chapter 8 HTML Tables hidden fields, 190-191 Chapter 9 controls, - HTML187-195 Frames input Chapter 10 HTML Forms password fields, 188-189 Part radio IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies buttons, 189-190 Chapter 11 Getting Stylish with CSS reset buttons, 194-195 Chapter search 12 forms, - HTML181-184 and Scripting structure 186 Multimedia Magic Chapter 13 - of, Making submit 194-195 Chapter 14 buttons, - Integrating a Database into Your HTML text 15 areas, 187,HTML 193-194 Chapter - How Relates to Other Markup Languages fields,Web 187-188 Part text V - From Page to Web Site types Chapter 16of,- 181 Creating an HTML Toolbox usability, Chapter 17 -198 Setting Up Your Online Presence uses, 181-182 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface validating,229-230 Part VI - The Part of Tens Chapter 2<br /> <br /> HTML 4.01 Chapter 19 -specification, Ten Ways to 25-26 Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20 - Ten HTML HTML Frameset, 25,52Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> HTML Goodies Web site, 348<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> HTML help Web site, 345<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> HTML markup, 380 Appendix C - Glossary Indexattributes, 20-22<br /> <br /> browser 15-16 4th Edition Cheat Sheet -interpretation, HTML 4 For Dummies, DOCTYPE declaration, 52 document structure, 51-53 List of Tables elements, 20-21 List of Listings entities,20,22-24,377 List of Sidebars examples,13-14 help resources, 345 limitations,204,259 testing on browsers, 16 tips for entering, 157 validating,286-289,331,337 List of Figures<br /> <br /> HTML page, 380<br /> <br /> HTML Strict, 25,52 .html suffix, 42<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> HTML Tidy, 268 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether HTML Transitional, 25,52 your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> HTML Writers Guild, 346book will put you on the right track. by-step HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol), 17,378 http://, 85 Table of Contents HTML httpequiv 4 For Dummies, attribute, 4th 56-57, Edition 356 Introduction hyperlinks,378-379 Part absolute I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment links, 83-84<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 link, - The active 119Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2 element, - HTML at81-82 Work on the Web anchor Chapter 3 links, - Creating Your broken 84-85, 304,First 329HTML Page Part 'click II - Getting Started with here' phrasing, 319HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 119-120 - Structuring Your HTML Documents colors, Chapter creating 5 -aLinking basic hyperlink, to Online Resources 81-82<br /> <br /> creating hyperlink opens in a new window, 86-87 Chapter 6 -aFinding andthat Using Images creating hyperlink to Page a specific location on another Web page, 89 Chapter 7 -aTop Off Your with Formatting a hyperlink a document, Part creating III - Taking HTML to within the Next Level<br /> <br /> 87-88 descriptive text, 319 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables e-mail 91 Chapter 9 addresses, - HTML Frames file downloads, 90-91 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms 177-179HTML with Other Technologies Part frames, IV - Extending how they work, 17 Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS image maps, 110 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting images,99-100,107-108 Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic intradocument hyperlinks, 87-89 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML link checkers, 284-285,329 Chapter 15 - links, How HTML mailto 91 Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site multimedia,237-239 Chapter 16 links, - Creating an HTML Toolbox off-site 318-319 Chapter 17 Setting Up relative links, 83-84 Your Online Presence Chapter 18 119 - Creating a Great User Interface states, Part underline, VI - The Part 120of Tens Chapter 1981-84 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs URL, Chapter 20 link, - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts visited 119 Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> hypermedia,378<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> hypertext,378<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Hypertext Language (HTML), 378 Appendix C Markup - Glossary Index Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), 17,378 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index I<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or355 one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<i> element, 128, by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> id attribute <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 Table<basefont> of Contents element, 352 HTML<param> 4 For Dummies, 4th357 Edition element, Introduction<br /> <br /> <iframe> element, 355<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> image editing Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Adobe Photoshop, 282-283 - HTML at Work on the Web Jasc PaintShop Pro, 283 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Macromedia Fireworks, 283 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> image maps, 379 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <area rel="nofollow"> Chapter 5 - element, Linking to109 Online Resources client-side image and maps, 376Images Chapter 6 - Finding Using<br /> <br /> creating,-108-111 Top Off Your Page with Formatting <img> element, 109 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level links,110 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables <map> element, 109 Chapter 7<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames image rollovers, 224-227 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies images<br /> <br /> Chapter alignment, 11 - Getting 105-106 Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> alternative text, and 100-102 Chapter 12 - HTML Scripting animated GIFs, 111-112 Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic background image, 121-122 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML border, Chapter 15 104-105 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages art, 113 Part clip V - From Web Page to Web Site compression, 96-97an HTML Toolbox Chapter 16 - Creating<br /> <br /> content,-94Setting Up Your Online Presence copyright,114 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface digital formats, 113-114 Part VI - The Part of Tens download time, 102-103 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs file size, 96-98 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts GIFs,95,97 Part VII - Appendixes graphic file formats, 95-97 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags inserting,98-100 Appendix B 96-97 - HTML Character Codes JPEGs, Appendix - Glossary links,C99-100, 107-108 Indexlook and feel, 95 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition navigation, 94,107-108 List of Figures 97-98 optimizing, List of PNGs, Tables 96-97 size, 102-104 List of Listings sources of low-cost and free images, 113-114 List of Sidebars spacing, 106-107 stock photography, 113 thumbnails,110,382 TIFFs,113-114 tiling,121 transparent images, 112 uses,93-95 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> <img> element, 355 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition align attribute, 105-106 ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel alt attribute, 100-101 and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) animated GIFs, 111 attributes, 355Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepborder attribute, 104-105 by-step book will put you on the right track. height attribute, 102-103 hspace attribute, 106-107 maps, 108-109 Tableimage of Contents tag status, HTMLsingleton 4 For Dummies, 4th 98 Edition src attribute, 99-100,111 Introduction attribute, Part usemap I - Meeting HTML in109 Its Natural Environment vspace Chapter 1 - attribute, The Least106-107 You Need to Know about HTML and the Web width attribute, 102-103 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Impact 3Online Web site, 28First HTML Page Chapter - Creating Your Part II content, - Getting59, Started inline 379 with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> input controls (forms) - Linking to Online Resources check boxes, 189-190 Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images creating,-187 Chapter 7 - Top Off187, Your192-193 Page with Formatting drop-down lists, Part file III upload - Takingfields, HTML 191 to the Next Level Chapter 8 fields, - HTML190-191 Tables hidden Chapter 9 HTML password fields,Frames 188-189 Chapter 10buttons, - HTML189-190 Forms radio Part reset IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies buttons, 194-195 Chapter 11 Getting Stylish with CSS submit buttons, 194-195 Chapter text 12 areas, - HTML 187,193-194 and Scripting text 13 fields, 187-188 Chapter - Making Multimedia Magic Chapter 5<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 element, - Integrating <input> 355 a Database into Your HTML Chapter 15 - How attributes, 355 HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part type V - From Web Page to Web Site attribute, 187-190, 194-195<br /> <br /> Chapter - Creating an HTML Toolbox <ins>16 element, 129,355 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> inserting Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface images,98-100 Part VI - The Part of Tens paragraphs,60-61 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs scripts into Web pages, 221 interactivity with databases, Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> 29,246<br /> <br /> Appendix interface. ASee - HTML user interface 4 Tags Appendix - HTMLService Character Codes Internal B Revenue (IRS) Web site, 322,324 Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> internal style sheets (CSS), 213-214,379<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> Internet, 379- HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Cheat Sheet Internet connections (dedicated), 293-294 List of Figures List of Tables Internet protocols List of Listings File Transfer Protocol (FTP), 17,289,377 List of Sidebars Transfer Protocol (HTTP), 17, 378 Hypertext<br /> <br /> Post Office Protocol (POP), 17 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), 17 Internet Service Provider (ISP), 379 intradocument hyperlinks, 87-89 IRS Web site, 322,324 <isindex> element, 356<br /> <br /> ismap attribute HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition <img> element, 355 by Ed Tittel <input> element, 355 and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISO 8859 character sets, 373-374<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> or oneset, loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepISO-Latin-1 character 362-367 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> ISP (Internet Service Provider), 379 italicizing text, 128 Table of Contents<br /> <br /> iTunes MP3 player, 236<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> J<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepJakob Nielsen's Useit Web site, 344 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Jasc PaintShop Pro, 283 Java,379<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> JavaScript HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition browser support, 225 Introduction validation, Part form I - Meeting HTML229-230 in Its Natural Environment image 224-227 Chapter 1 rollovers, - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web pop-up windows, 227-229 - HTML at Work on the Web sources of scripts, 225<br /> <br /> Chapter 2 Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> JavaScript City Started Web site, 225 Part II - Getting with HTML Chapter 4 - Structuring HTML Documents JavaScript For Dummies,Your Emily A. Vander Veer, 217 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> JavaScript Kit Web site, 225<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> JavaScript Source Web site, 225<br /> <br /> Java-Scripts.Net Webtosite, Part III - Taking HTML the 225 Next Level Chapter 8 - Pages HTML Tables JavaServer For Dummies, Mac Rinehart, 257 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group), 96-97,379<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> JSP, 255-256<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> K<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<kbd> element, or 129, 356 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> keywords metadata, 55 Tablesearch of Contents engines, 308 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Kira’s Web Toolbox Web site, 347<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Krug, usability 344 Environment Part I - Steve, Meeting HTML inexpert, Its Natural Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> L<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one <label> element, 356 loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> language attribute, 358 language options, 57<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> layout, HTML 4 379 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction <legend> element, 356 Part I - element, Meeting HTML in 356 Its Natural Environment <li> 72–75,<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> line breaks, 67–68<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web linear versus nonlinearYour approach to design, Chapter 3 - Creating First HTML Page 340–341 Part II(rules), - Getting Started with HTML lines 68–71<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring link attribute, 119,353 Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> link checkers, 284–285,329<br /> <br /> <link> 213–215, 356with Formatting Chapter 7 element, - Top Off Your Page Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level linking Chapter 8 - HTML Tables database to a Web page, 246–248 Chapter domain 9 -name HTMLtoFrames a Web site, 299 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms links,378–379 Part absolute IV - Extending links, HTML 83–84with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 link, - Getting active 119 Stylish with CSS Chapter 12 element, - HTML and Scripting anchor 81–82 Chapter 13 links, - Making Multimedia broken 84–85, 304,329Magic Chapter “click 14here” - Integrating phrasing,a319 Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> colors, Chapter 15 119–120 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages basic link,to81–82 Part creating V - From aWeb Page Web Site creating link thatan opens a new window, 86–87 Chapter 16 -aCreating HTMLinToolbox creating link to a location on another Web page, 89 Chapter 17 -aSetting Upspecific Your Online Presence creating link within a document, 87–88 Chapter 18 -aCreating a Great User Interface text, 319 Part descriptive VI - The Part of Tens e-mail Chapter 19 addresses, - Ten Ways91 to Exterminate Web Bugs file downloads, 90–91 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts frames, 177–179 Part VII - Appendixes how they work, 17 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags image maps, 110 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes images,99–100,107–108 Appendix C - Glossary intradocument links, 87–89 Index link checkers, 284–285,329 Cheat Sheet - links, HTML91 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition mailto List of Figures multimedia,237–239 List of Tableslinks, 318–319 off-site List of Listings relative links, 83–84 List of Sidebars states, 119 underline,120 URL,81–84 visited link, 119 Chapter 20<br /> <br /> lists bulleted lists, 74–76 Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 206 definition lists, 76–77<br /> <br /> drop-down lists (forms), 187,192–193 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition nested lists, 77–79 ISBN:0764519956 by 72–74 Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts numbered lists, John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) ordered lists, 72–74 types of, 71 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepunordered lists, 74–76 by-step book will put you on the right track. uses,71 longdesc attribute Table<frame> of Contents element, 354 HTML<iframe> 4 For Dummies, 4th 355 Edition element, Introduction <img> element, 355 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> loop attribute, 242<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Lynx Web browser, 16,379 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> M<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Macromedia Director,234 Dreamweaver, 217,274-277 283 TableFireworks, of Contents HTMLFlash, 4 For235 Dummies, 4th Edition Web site, 235,277 Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTMLMX in Its Environment Macromedia Flash ForNatural Dummies, Gurdy Leete<br /> <br /> and Ellen Finkelstein, 235<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 links, - The mailto 91Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> maintaining Web sites, 301-305,341,380<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <map> element, 109,356 Part II - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4 out - Structuring HTML Documents mapping a Web site,Your 311-315 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources marginheight attribute Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images <frame> element, 174-175, 354 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your355 Page with Formatting <iframe> element, Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> margins - HTML Tables Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 206 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames frames,174-175 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> marginwidth attribute <frame> element, 174-175,354 Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS <iframe> element, 355<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> markup13languages, Chapter - Making 380 Multimedia Magic Chapter Integrating markup14with- HTML, 380 a Database into Your HTML Chapter attributes, 15 - How 20-22 HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part browser V - From interpretation, Web Page to Web 15-16 Site<br /> <br /> DOCTYPE declaration, 52 Toolbox Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML document structure, 51-53 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence elements, 20-21 a Great User Interface Chapter 18 - Creating 22-24, 377 Part entities, VI - The20, Part of Tens examples, 13-14 Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs help20resources, 345Do’s and Don’ts Chapter - Ten HTML 204,259 Part limitations, VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> testing on browsers, 16 tips for entering, 157 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes validating,286-289,331,337 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> mathematical character set, 371-372 Index Cheat Matt'sSheet Script- archive HTML 4 Web For Dummies, site, 197 4th Edition List of Figures attribute, 355 maxlength List of Tables<br /> <br /> media attribute <link> element, 356 List of Sidebars element, 358 <style> List of Listings<br /> <br /> Mega Web Tools Web site, 347 <menu> element, 356 <meta> element, 55-57 metadata, 54-55,380 keywords,55-56<br /> <br /> page description, 55-56 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition redirecting users, 56-57 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts search engines, 55-56<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> method attribute, 186,354<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Microsoft or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track. Access,250-251 FrontPage,277-278 SQL Server, 251-252 Table of Contents Word97/2000 for Windows, 281 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface), 233 Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its 285, Natural MOMSpider link checker, 329Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 Layer - TheIIILeast You233 Need to Know about HTML and the Web MPEG-1, (MP3), Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> MPG (Motion Picture Experts Group) video format, 234<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> MP3II(MPEG-1, Layer III), 233 Part - Getting Started with HTML Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents MP3 players, 236 Chapter 5 -380 Linking to Online Resources multimedia, Chapter 6 formats, - Finding and Using Images audio 233-234 Chapter 7 - Topmusic, Off Your Page with Formatting background 242 Part bandwidth III - Takingrequirements, HTML to the Next 231 Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables degree of difficulty, 33 Chapter 9 - HTML embedding filesFrames into Web pages, 239-241 Chapter links, 10237-239 - HTML Forms Part players, IV - Extending 235-237, HTML 241-242 with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> pros11and- cons of Stylish using, 320 Chapter Getting with CSS standards, 231 and Scripting Chapter 12 - HTML streaming media,Multimedia 242-244 Magic Chapter 13 - Making uses, Chapter 14232 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML video 234-235 Chapter 15formats, - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages multiple Part V - Fromattribute Web Page to Web Site <optgroup> element, 357Toolbox Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML <option> element, 357 Online Presence Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your <select> element, 358 User Interface Chapter 18 - Creating a Great Part VI -See Theaudio Part of Tens music.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI), 233<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> MySQL,249-250<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> MySQL Bible, Steve 258 Appendix A - HTML 4 Suehring, Tags Appendix - HTML Crash Character CodesJay Greenspan, 258 MySQL B Weekend Course, Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> MySQL: Your Visual Blueprint for Creating Open Source Databases, Michael Moncur, 258<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> MySQL/PHP Database Applications, 2nd Edition, Jay Greenspan and Brad Bulger, 258<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> N<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> name attribute <a> element, 87,352 <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 element, 353 Table<button> of Contents element,4th 354Edition HTML<form> 4 For Dummies, <frame> element, 177,354 Introduction element, 355 Part <iframe> I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment <img> 355 Chapter 1 element, - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <input> element, 355 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web <map> element, 356 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page <meta> element, 55,356 Part II - Getting Started with HTML <object> element, 357 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <optgroup> element, 357 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources <option> element, 357 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images <param> element, 357 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your358 Page with Formatting <select> element, Part <textarea> III - Taking HTML to the Next Level element, 359 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> nameservers, 380<br /> <br /> naming10 Web pages, 41–42 Chapter - HTML Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies navigation, 380<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 164 - Getting Stylish with CSS frames, Chapter home 12 page, - HTML 317and Scripting<br /> <br /> images, 107–108 Chapter 13 94, - Making Multimedia Magic intradocument links, a 87–89 Chapter 14 - Integrating Database into Your HTML navigation bar,HTML 162,340, 380to Other Markup Languages Chapter 15 - How Relates Part rollovers, V - From 227 Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> scrolling, Chapter 16 - 340 Creating an HTML Toolbox site 17 maps, 314–315 Chapter - Setting Up Your Online Presence testing,317–318 - Creating a Great User Interface topical navigation, 315–317 Part VI - The Part of Tens user interface, 309 Chapter 18 Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> nesting,20 380- Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Chapter (HTML markup), Part elements VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> 21 frames, 179–180 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags lists,77–79 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes <pre> element inside <blockquote> element, 65–66 Appendix C - Glossary tables,158 Index<br /> <br /> Nielsen, Jakob, usability expert, 324, Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th344 Edition List <noframes> of Figures element, 166, 356 List of Tables nohref attribute, 352 List of Listings<br /> <br /> nonlinear versus linear approach to design, 340–341<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> noresize attribute, 354 <noscript> element, 357 noshade attribute, 70 Notepad,12 numbered lists, 72–74<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> O<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepobject attribute,or352 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> <object> element, 239–240,357 <ol> element, 72–74,357<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> onabort attribute, 220 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction onblur attribute Part <a> I - Meeting element, HTML 352in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> <area rel="nofollow"> Chapter 1 - element, The Least352 You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <button> element, 353 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web how3it works, 221 Your First HTML Page Chapter - Creating 355 HTML Part <input> II - Gettingelement, Started with <label> element, 356 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <optgroup> element, 357 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> <option> element, 357 - Finding and Using Images <select> element, 358 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting <textarea> element, 359 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> onchange Chapter 8 -attribute HTML Tables how9it works, 221 Chapter - HTML Frames <input> element, 355 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> 357 Part <optgroup> IV - Extending element, HTML with Other Technologies <option> element, 357 - Getting Stylish with CSS <select> element, 358 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting <textarea> element, 359 Chapter 11 Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic onclick 221 a Database into Your HTML Chapter 14 attribute, - Integrating Chapter ondblclick 15 - How attribute, HTML Relates 221 to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page onerror attribute, 220to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> 1-second, 1K rule, 98<br /> <br /> onfocus Chapter 18 attribute - Creating a Great User Interface <a> element, 352 Part VI - The Part of Tens <area rel="nofollow"> element, Chapter 19 - Ten Ways352 to Exterminate Web Bugs <button> element, 353 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts works, 221 Part how VII -itAppendixes <input> element, 355 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags <label> element, 356 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes <optgroup> element, 357 Appendix C - Glossary <option> element, 357 Index <select> element, 358 Cheat Sheet - HTMLelement, 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <textarea> 359 List of Figures<br /> <br /> onkeydown attribute, 221<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> onkeypress List of Listings attribute, 221 List onkeyup of Sidebars attribute, 221<br /> <br /> online, 380 online catalogs, 247 online training resources, 346 onload attribute <body> element, 353 <frameset> element, 355<br /> <br /> how it works, 220<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> onmousedown attribute, 221<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> onmousemove attribute, 220 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site onmouseout attribute, 221 or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> onmouseover attribute, 221 will put you on the right track. by-step book onmouseup attribute, 221 onreset attribute Table of Contents element,4th 354Edition HTML<form> 4 For Dummies, how it works, 221 Introduction onselect attribute Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> how1it works, Chapter - The 221 Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <input> element, 355 on the Web Chapter 2 - HTML at Work <textarea> element, 359 HTML Page Chapter 3 - Creating Your First Part II - Getting Started with HTML onsubmit attribute<br /> <br /> Chapter <form> 4 - element, Structuring 354Your HTML Documents Chapter how5it works, - Linking 221to Online Resources Chapter 6 -attribute Finding and Using Images onunload Chapter 7 - element, Top Off Your <body> 353 Page with Formatting Part <frameset> III - Taking HTML to the 355 Next Level element,<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML Tables how8it works, 220 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> opening a new window, 86–87<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> operating system, 380<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> <optgroup> element, 357with CSS Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish Chapter 12 images, - HTML and Scripting optimizing 97–98 Chapter 13 -element, Making Multimedia Magic <option> 187,192–193, 357 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Oracle,251–252<br /> <br /> ordered lists,Web 72–74 Part V - From Page to Web Site Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> P<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one <p> element, 60-61, 357loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> page,380 page description, 54-56<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> page4header, 53 HTML For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction page redirectors, 56-57,330 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> page refresh, 330<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> page titles, 308,382<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web PaintShop Pro (Jasc),Your 283 First HTML Page Chapter 3 - Creating Part Getting pairIIof-tags, 20 Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Structuring Your HTML Documents paragraphs,-60-61<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> <param> element, 357<br /> <br /> password Chapter 7 fields - Top(forms), Off Your188-189 Page with Formatting Part - Taking Document HTML to the Next Level PDFIII(Portable Format), 380 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables PDImages.com Web site, 114<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> peer reviews, 331<br /> <br /> Photoshop (Adobe), 282-283 Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11 -All-in-One Getting Stylish CSS Photoshop Desk with Reference For Dummies, Barbara Obermeier, 283 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> PHP,253-254<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> PHP and MySQL For Dummies, Janet Valade, 258<br /> <br /> PHP Bible, Edition, Tim Converse Joyce Park, 258 Chapter 15 -2nd How HTML Relates to Otherand Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site phrase elements, 128-131<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox players for multimedia, 235-237,241-242<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> plug-ins, 381 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface downloading,236 Part VI - The Part of Tens Flash,235 PNG (Portable Network Graphics), 96-97 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII - Appendixes pointers, 370-371<br /> <br /> Appendix A -Office HTMLProtocol), 4 Tags POP (Post 17 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> populating tables, 155-156<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> pop-up text screens for alternative text, 100-102 Index Cheat pop-up Sheet windows - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> opening List of Figuresa new window, 86-87 scripting, List of Tables 227-229 List of Listings Portable Document Format (PDF), 380 List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Portable Network Graphics (PNG), 96-97 Post Office Protocol (POP), 17 posting Web pages, 45-47 <pre> element, 65-66,357 predefined style sheets (CSS), 215 preformatted text, 64-66<br /> <br /> programming HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition interactive Web sites, 30 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts scripts, 218-219<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Progressive Networks, 236<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> progressive videoorstreaming, one loaded243 with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> promoting Web sites, 307-308 properties,381 Table of Contents<br /> <br /> protocols File Transfer Protocol (FTP), 17,289,377 Introduction Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), 17,378 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment Post Office Protocol (POP), 17 Chapter - The Least YouProtocol Need to (RTSP), Know about Real1 Time Streaming 243HTML and the Web Chapter 2 Mail - HTML at Work on the Web Simple Transfer Protocol (SMTP), 17 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> publishing Web pages, 45-47<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> punctuation set, 369 Chapter 4 - character Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Q<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site <q> element, 358or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> queries to a database, 247,252-254 QuickTime (QT) audio,233 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition functionality,236-237 Introduction movies,234-235<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> quotes 1 Chapter<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <blockquote> element, 63-64 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web <q> element, 358 Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> R<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepradio buttons (forms), 189-190 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> RateGenius Web site, 199 readonly attribute <input> element, 355 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition <textarea> element, 359<br /> <br /> Table of Contents Introduction<br /> <br /> Real Streaming (RTSP), 243 Part I -Time Meeting HTML inProtocol Its Natural Environment Chapter Real Video 1 -(RV) The video Least You format, Need 235 to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web RealAudio (RA), 233 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> RealNetworks,236<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> RealOne 236 Your HTML Documents Chapter 4 Player, - Structuring Chapter real-time 5 video - Linking streaming, to Online 243Resources Chapter 6 - Finding and 330 Using Images redirecting users, 56-57, Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> refreshing pages, 330<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> registering Chapter 8 - HTML Tables domain 299-300 Chapter 9 -names, HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Web sites with search engines, 307 - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> relIVattribute Part - Extending HTML with Other Technologies <a>11 element, 352Stylish with CSS Chapter - Getting <link> Chapter 12 - element, HTML and356 Scripting Chapter - Making relative13 address, 381Multimedia Magic Chapter - Integrating a Database into Your HTML relative14 links, 83-84 Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> reset buttons (forms), 194-195<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> resources, Chapter 16 381 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter rev attribute 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> <a>18 element, 352 a Great User Interface Chapter - Creating element, 356 Part <link> VI - The Part of Tens Chapter 19 -Format Ten Ways to Exterminate Rich Music (RMF), 233-234 Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> robots,381<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> rolloversA - HTML 4 Tags Appendix degree difficulty, 33 Appendix B of - HTML Character Codes navigation,227 scripting, 219-220,224-227<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> rows Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Cheat frames, 167-172 List of Figures tables, 140-142 List of Tables rows attribute List of Listings <frameset> element, 167-170,355 List of Sidebars <textarea> element, 359 rowspan attribute <td> element, 153-154,359 <th> element, 359 RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol), 243 rules (lines), 68-71<br /> <br /> RV (Real Video) video format, 235<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> S<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or358 one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<s> element, 128, by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> <samp> element, 129,358 saving Web pages, 41 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Word documents as text files, 38<br /> <br /> Table of Contents Introduction<br /> <br /> scheme attribute, 356<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> scope1attribute Chapter - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <td> Chapter 2 element, - HTML 359 at Work on the Web <th> 359Your First HTML Page Chapter 3 element, - Creating Part II - Getting Started with HTML <script> element, 221–222, 358<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> scripting languages, 224,381<br /> <br /> scripts, 381 - Finding and Using Images Adobe GoLive, 217 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting CGI scripts, 196–197 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level client-side scripts, 223 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables event attributes, 220–221 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames events,219–220 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms form validation, 229–230 Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies inserting into Web pages, 221 Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with 217 CSS Macromedia Dreamweaver, Chapter 12 windows, - HTML and Scripting pop-up 227–229 Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia218–219 Magic programming functionality, Chapter 14 - 219–220, Integrating a Database into Your HTML rollovers, 224–227 Chapter 15 - How HTML223 Relates to Other Markup Languages server-side scripts, Part sources V - From of Web Page225 to Web Site scripts, Chapter uses, 16217–218 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your ScriptSearch Web site, 197 Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> scroll bars (frames), 175–176<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> scrolling, of inWays navigation, 340 Chapter 19 use - Ten to Exterminate Web Bugs scrolling attribute Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts element, Part <frame> VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> 175–176,354<br /> <br /> <iframe> element, Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags355 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes search engines, 381 Appendix C - Glossary alternative text (for indexing images), 100 Indexkeywords, 308 Cheat metadata, Sheet - HTML 54–564 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> page titles, 54 List of Figures registering your Web site, 307 List of Tables List of Listings search forms, 181–184 List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> search tools, 381<br /> <br /> <select> element, 187,192–193,358 selectors (CSS), 207,209,381 server-side scripts, 223 SGML (Standard Generalized Markup Language), 260,381 shading horizontal rules, 70<br /> <br /> shape attribute <a> element,HTML 352 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed109, Tittel and Natanya Pitts <area rel="nofollow"> element, 352 shareware,381<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Shockwave Audioor(SWA), one loaded 234 with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> shopping carts, 33<br /> <br /> Shoutcast multimedia streaming service, 236 Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), 17<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> SimpleText,12 Introduction Part singleton I - Meeting tag, 98 HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 311–315, - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web site maps, 327–328, 336 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> site reviews, 332<br /> <br /> size Part II -attribute Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> <basefont> element, 352 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <font> element, 125–127 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources <hr> element, 69 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images <input> element, 355 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting <optgroup> element, 357 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level <option> element, 357 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables <select> element, 358 Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> <small> element, 128,358<br /> <br /> SMTP Mail Transfer Protocol), 17 Part IV -(Simple Extending HTML with Other Technologies Chapter 11MP3 - Getting Sonique player,Stylish 236 with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> sound.Seeaudio<br /> <br /> spacing of images, 106–107 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML spam,91 Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Part V -attribute From Web Page to Web Site span<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 element, - Creating353 an HTML Toolbox <col> Chapter <colgroup> 17 - Setting element, Up Your144, Online 353Presence Chapter 18element, - Creating <span> 358a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> specification,382<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> spell check, Chapter 20 - 328–329 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VII 382 - Appendixes spider,<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> splitting frames, 179–180<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> SQL (Structured Query Language), 246–247<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> SQL For Dummies, Allen G. Taylor, 257 Index Cheat HTML 4 For 251–252 Dummies, 4th Edition SQL Sheet Server- (Microsoft), List of Weekend Figures SQL Crash Course, Allen G. Taylor, 258 List of Tables<br /> <br /> src attribute <bgsound> element, 242 List of Sidebars <frame> element, 354 <iframe> element, 355 <img> element, 99,111,355 <input> element, 355 <script> element, 358 List of Listings<br /> <br /> Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), 260,381 standards<br /> <br /> multimedia,231 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Web Standards Project, 157 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> standby attribute, 357<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> start attribute, 73 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site one20 loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepstart element (or or tag), by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> stock photography, 113 streaming media, 242–244<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> <strike> element, 4th 128,Edition 358 HTML 4 For Dummies, Introduction strikethrough text, 128 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its358 Natural Environment <strong> element, 129,<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Structured Query Language (SQL), 246–247<br /> <br /> style3attribute, 215,352 Chapter - Creating Your First HTML Page Part - Getting Started with HTML styleIIclasses (CSS), 209–211<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 element, - Structuring Your 358 HTML Documents <style> 213–214, Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> style rules - Finding and Using Images Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 207,209 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting HTML elements, 215 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> style (text elements, Chapter 8 style) - HTML Tables 128–131 style sheets, 382See alsoCascading Style Sheets (CSS) Chapter 9 - HTML Frames browser 207–208 Chapter 10 -display, HTML Forms support, 159, 203Other Technologies Part browser IV - Extending HTML with external sheet, 377with CSS Chapter 11 -style Getting Stylish internal sheet, 379 Chapter 12 -style HTML and Scripting testing, Chapter 13 203 - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> uses,203–204 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <sub>15 element, Chapter - How358 HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to194–195 Web Site submit buttons (forms),<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> suffixes of HTML documents, 42 <sup> element, 358<br /> <br /> surveying users, 331–332 Part VI - The Part of Tens Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs SWA (Shockwave Audio), 234 Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> SWF (Flash) audio format, 234<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Sybase,A 251–252 Appendix - HTML 4 Tags symbols,B20,- 22–24 Appendix HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary syntax, 382 Index<br /> <br /> syntax checker, 382<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index T<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this steptabindex attribute by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> <a> element, 352 <area rel="nofollow"> element, 352 element, 353 Table<button> of Contents element, HTML<input> 4 For Dummies, 4th355 Edition <object> element, 357 Introduction element, 357 Environment Part <optgroup> I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural <option> element, 357 Chapter 1 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <select> element, 358 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web <textarea> element, 359 Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <table> element, 358with HTML Part II - Getting Started align 150–151 Chapter 4 attribute, - Structuring Your HTML Documents attributes, 358–359 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources border 143, 145 Images Chapter 6 - attribute, Finding and Using<br /> <br /> cellpadding attribute, 148–149 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting cellspacing attribute, 148–150 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level height attribute, 148 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables hierarchy among other table elements, 140–142 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames width attribute, 146 Chapter 7<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> tables Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies alignment, 150–152 Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS body, Chapter 12144 - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> borders,-138, 143,145 Making Multimedia Magic captions,144 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 159 Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages cell padding, 148–149 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site cell spacing, 148–150 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox cell span, 138,142–143,152–155 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence cell width, 138 Chapter 18138, - Creating Great User Interface cells, 140–142,a146–147 Part colors, VI - The Part of Tens 159–160 Chapter 19 -groups, Ten Ways column 144to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts columns,144 Part creating, VII - Appendixes 140–142 Appendix A 144 - HTML 4 Tags footer, Appendix - HTML Character Codes head,B144 Appendix headers, C -144 Glossary Indexheight,146, 148 invisibility of, 135 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition layout, 138–140,144,159 List of Figures nesting, List of Tables158 populating, List of Listings 155–156 rows,140–142 List of Sidebars standards,157 table properties (CSS), 206 testing,156 uses,135–137 white space, 148 width,146–147 Chapter 13<br /> <br /> tag,382.See alsoelements<br /> <br /> target attribute 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition <a> element,HTML 86,177–178 by Ed Tittel <base> element, 352 and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> <tbody> element, 144,359<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> <td> element, 359 or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step align attribute, 151 book will put you on the right track. attributes, 359 bgcolor attribute, 159–160 Table of Contents colspan attribute, 142–143,152–154 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition height attribute, 148 Introduction hierarchy among other table elements, 140–141 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment rowspan attribute, 153–154 Chapter 1 - attribute, The Least151–152 You Need to Know about HTML and the Web valign Chapter 2 attribute, - HTML at146 Work on the Web width Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> technical character set, 372–373<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> teletype4 text, 128 Chapter - Structuring Your HTML Documents Chapter 5 382 - Linking to Online Resources template, Chapter 6 382 - Finding and Using Images test plan, Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> testing beta testing, 330,375 Chapter 8 - HTML Tables browsers,16,337,339 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames navigation,317–318 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms peer reviews, 331 Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies site maps, 328 Chapter - Getting site 11 reviews, 332 Stylish with CSS Chapter - HTML and Scripting style12sheets, 203 Chapter 13 156 - Making Multimedia Magic tables, Chapter - Integrating a Database into Your HTML user14feedback, 331–332 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages text abbreviations,128 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox acronyms, 128 Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence alternative text, 100–102 Chapter 18 -128 Creating a Great User Interface big text, Part block VI - The Part of Tens quotes, 63–64 Chapter 19 of - text, Ten Ways blocks 59–60to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20 - 128 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts boldface, Part Cascading VII - Appendixes Style Sheets (CSS), 206 Appendix citations, A -128 HTML 4 Tags colors, 125 Character Codes Appendix B 118, - HTML computer code, display of, 129 Appendix C - Glossary definition text, display of, 129 Index deleted text, display of, 129 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition emphasized text, display of, 129 List of Figures font face, 123–124 List of Tables font size, 125–128 List of Listings headings,61–63 List of Sidebars inline content, 59 inserted text, display of, 129 italics, 128 keyboard input text, display of, 129 line breaks, 67–68 link descriptions, 319 paragraphs,60–61 preformatted text, 64–66 Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> sample output text, display of, 129 small text, 128HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts spell check, 328–329 John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) strikethrough,128 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site teletype text, 128 one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepunderline text,or128 by-step book will put you on the right track. URL-encoded text, 383 variables, display of, 129 space, 64–65 Tablewhite of Contents 67–68 4th Edition HTMLwrapping, 4 For Dummies, Introduction text areas (forms), 187,193–194 Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> text attribute, 118,353<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> text editors,-12, 36,272–273 Chapter 2 HTML at Work on the Web text fields (forms), 187–188 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part - Getting Started62 with HTML textII size in headings,<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> text style elements, 128–131<br /> <br /> <textarea> element, 187,193,359<br /> <br /> text-only browsers, Chapter 7 Web - Top Off Your16 Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level TextPad, 36 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables <tfoot> element, 144,359<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> <th> element, 144,359<br /> <br /> <thead> element,HTML 144,with 359 Other Technologies Part IV - Extending Chapter 11 images, - Getting110, Stylish thumbnail 382with CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> tiling images, 121<br /> <br /> title attribute - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages <style> element, 358 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> <title> 54, Chapter 16 element, - Creating an359 HTML Toolbox Chapter 17 titles,382<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter page 18titles, - Creating 53–54,a308 Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens toolbox resources, 347<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> <tr> element, 360 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts align attribute, 151 Part VII - Appendixes attributes, 360 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags hierarchy among other table elements, 140–141 Appendix B - attribute, HTML Character Codes valign 151–152 Chapter 20<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> training resources, 346<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> transferring Cheat Sheet -files HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition viaFigures FTP, 300–301 List of viaTables hosting provider’s Web site, 301 List of transparent List of Listingsimages, 112 List of Sidebars <tt> element, 128,360<br /> <br /> TUCOWS Web site, 111,274,293 type attribute <a> element, 352 <button> element, 353 <input> element, 187,355 <link> element, 356<br /> <br /> <object> element, 357 HTML <ol> element, 74 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel <param> element, 357 and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) <script> element, 358 Whether <style> element, 358your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<ul> element, 75–76 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> U<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or360 one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step<u> element, 128, by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> UI.Seeuser interface (UI) <ul> element, 74-76,360<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> under4 construction HTML For Dummies,messages, 4th Edition314 Introduction underline Part hyperlinks, I - Meeting120 HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter text,1128- The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web Uniform2 Resource Locator. See URL Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Unix, 382<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> unordered lists, 74-76 Your HTML Documents Chapter 4 - Structuring Chapter updating 5 Web - Linking sites, 301-305 to Online Resources Chapter 6 URL,382<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7 - Top bookmark, 375Off Your Page with Formatting Part broken III - Taking to the Next Level links,HTML 84-85<br /> <br /> Chapter - HTML Tables case8 sensitivity, 84 Chapter 9 -19HTML Frames domain, Chapter filename, 10 - 19, HTML 85 Forms Part filename IV - Extending extension, HTML84 with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> how11 it works, 18-19 Chapter - Getting Stylish with CSS http://, 85 and Scripting Chapter 12 - HTML hyperlinks, 81-84 Multimedia Magic Chapter 13 - Making path, 19 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML Chapter 14 protocol, Chapter 15 -19 How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part URL-encoded V - From Web text, Page 383to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter usability16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 198 - Setting Up Your Online Presence forms, Chapter 18 163 - Creating a Great User Interface frames, Part resources VI - The Part of Tens 344 available,<br /> <br /> Chapter 19attribute - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs usemap Chapter 20 element, - Ten HTML Do’s <img> 109, 355and Don’ts Part <input> VII - Appendixes element,<br /> <br /> 355<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags357 <object> element, Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> user feedback, 331-332<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> user interface (UI), 383 Index<br /> <br /> accessibility,321 design resources, 324 List of Figures examples,321-324 List of Tables goals of, 310-311 List of Listings multimedia,320 List of Sidebars navigation,309 navigation schemes, 315-318 off-site links, 318-319 purpose of, 309 site maps, 311-315<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> V<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> valid,383<br /> <br /> validating Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), 209 Tableforms, of Contents 229-230 HTMLHTML, 4 For 286-289, Dummies,331, 4th337 Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> validation,383<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> valign attribute - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <col> element, 353 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web <colgroup> element, 353 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page <tbody> element, 359 Part II - Getting Started with HTML <td> element, 151-152,359 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <tfoot> element, 359 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources <th> element, 359 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images <thead> element, 359 Chapter 7 element, - Top Off Your Page <tr> 151-152, 360with Formatting Chapter 1<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> value attribute - HTML Tables <button> element, 353 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames <input> element, 355 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms <param> element, 357 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> valuetype attribute, 357 - Getting Stylish with CSS <var>12 element, 129, 360 Chapter - HTML and Scripting Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 13224 - Making Multimedia Magic VBScript, Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> VeriSign Web site, 298<br /> <br /> video Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> embedding files into Web pages, 239-241 - Creating an HTML Toolbox links,237-239 Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your Online Presence players, 234-235 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface streaming video, 242-243 Part VI - The Part of Tens video formats, 234-235 Chapter 16<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> viewing20 Web pages, 42-43 Chapter - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Part VIVO VIIvideo - Appendixes format, 235<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags vlink attribute, 119, 353 Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> vspace attribute <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 Index<img> element, 106-107 Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Index W<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepWAI (Web Accessibility Initiative), 102 by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> WAV (RIFF WAVE) audio format, 234 Web,383<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Web4browsers, 375 4th Edition HTML For Dummies, alternative text, 100-102 Introduction Style Sheets (CSS),Environment 159,207-208 Part Cascading I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural character set support, Chapter 1 - The Least You361 Need to Know about HTML and the Web client-side scripts, 223 - HTML at Work on the Web color settings, 119 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page colors,116 Part II - Getting Started with HTML display instructions, 12-13 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents frames,161,166 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources graphical Web browsers, 16 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), 17 Chapter 7 display, - Top Off Your Page with Formatting image 100 Part interpretation III - Taking HTML to the15-16 Next Level of HTML, Chapter 8 HTML Tables line breaks, 67 Chapter 9 16,-379 HTML Frames Lynx, Chapter 10 Forms 86-87 opening aHTML new window, Part page IV - Extending HTML title display, 54 with Other Technologies Chapter 11 Getting Stylish with CSS plug-ins,-236 Chapter redirecting 12 - HTML users, and 56-57 Scripting scripting 224 Chapter 13 - languages, Making Multimedia Magic streaming media, 242-243 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML style15sheets, 207-208 Chapter - How203, HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages 16, 337,Page 339 to Web Site Part testing, V - From Web text-only browsers, 16Toolbox Chapter 16 - Web Creating an HTML viewing pages, 42-43 Chapter 17 -Web Setting Up Your Online Presence white space, 64-65 Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface XHTML,260,263 Part VI - The Part of Tens XML (Extensible Markup Language), 260 Chapter 2<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs Web Design For Dummies, LisaDon’ts Lopuck, 114,324 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Part VII - Appendixes Web Design Group Web<br /> <br /> site, 212, 345<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Web Developer's Journal Web site, 347<br /> <br /> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Web Developer's Library Web site, 345<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Web Hosting Ratings Web site, 297 Index Cheat HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Web Sheet pages,- 383 List of advanced Figures features, 33-34<br /> <br /> content List of Tables types, 11-12 creating List of Listingsfrom scratch, 36-43 design tips, 338 List of Sidebars editing,43-45 functionality,31-32 hosting,291-297 hosting services, 14-15 .htm suffix, 42 .html suffix, 42 layout,337-338<br /> <br /> linear versus nonlinear approach to design, 340-341 look and feel,HTML 32 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 by multimedia,33 Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) naming,41-42 Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site page titles, 308 or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepplanning for an entire Web site, 34 by-step book will put you on the right track. posting,45-47 publishing,45-47 41 Tablesaving, of Contents 33 HTMLscripting, 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition scripts, 221 Introduction cart, 33in Its Natural Environment Part shopping I - Meeting HTML testing browsers, 16 Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter 1 on - The Least You viewing, 42-43 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Web Pages SuckYour Web site, 324 Page Chapter 3 - That Creating First HTML Part II Reference - Getting Started with346 HTML Web Web site,<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Web server, 383 - Linking to Online Resources database connections, 256 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images dedicated Internet connections, 293-294 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), 17 Part requirements, III - Taking HTML to the Next Level 293 Chapter - HTML Tables role8of, 14-15 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames server-side scripts, 223 Chapter 5<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Web site resources Adobe GoLive, 282 Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS Adobe Photoshop, 283 Chapter 12 - HTML322-323 and Scripting Amazon.com, Chapter 13 QuickTime, - Making Multimedia Magic Apple 237 Chapter 14 - Integrating a Database into Your HTML ASP.NET, 256 Chapter 15 280 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages BBEdit, Part Bobby, V - From Web Page to Web Site 321 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Bravenet, 347 Chapter Builder.com, 17 - Setting 96,257 Up Your Online Presence CGI18 Resource Index, 197 User Interface Chapter - Creating a Great DevGuru, 206 Part VI - The Part of Tens Fetch, Chapter 19 289 - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs FirstGov, Chapter 20 - 17-18 Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts 278 Part HomeSite, VII - Appendixes HTML Goodies, Appendix A - HTML 4348 Tags HTML 346 Codes Appendix B Writers - HTMLGuild, Character HTMLhelp, 345 Appendix C - Glossary Impact Online, 28 Index IRS, 322,324 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Jakob Nielsen's Useit, 324, 344 List of Figures Jasc PaintShop Pro, 283 List of Tables JavaScript City, 225 List of Listings Kit, 225 JavaScript List of Sidebars Source, 225 JavaScript Java-Scripts.Net,225 JSP, 256 Kira's Web Toolbox, 347 Macromedia,235,277,283 Matt's Script archive, 197 Microsoft Access, 251 Microsoft FrontPage, 278 Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Microsoft SQL Server, 252 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition MOMSpider,285 ISBN:0764519956 MySQL,250 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Oracle,252 Whether PDImages.com, 114 your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepPHP,254 by-step book will put you on the right track. RateGenius,199 ScriptSearch,197 252 TableSybase, of Contents 111,274, HTMLTUCOWS, 4 For Dummies, 4th293 Edition VeriSign,298 Introduction DesignHTML Group, 212 Part Web I - Meeting in Its Natural Environment Web1 Developer's 347 Chapter - The LeastJournal, You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Web Developer's Library, 345 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web Web Hosting Ratings, 297 Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Web Pages That Suck, 324 Part II - Getting Started with HTML Web Reference, 346 Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents Web Standards Project, 157 Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources WebAttack, 347 Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Webmonkey,96,98,110,112,186,196,257,324, 347 Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting World Wide Mart, 299 Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level WS_FTP Pro for Windows, 289 Chapter 8 (World - HTML Tables W3C Wide Web Consortium), 29,261 Chapter 9 HTML Frames W3C Link Checker, 284 Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Web sites, 383 accessibility,321 Chapter 11 - Getting Stylish with CSS design tips, 338 Chapter 12 - HTML and Scripting expanding,305-306,339-340 Chapter 13 sites, - Making ghost 341 Multimedia Magic Chapter 14 Integrating a Database into Your HTML goals,310 Chapter 15 How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages hosting,291-297 Part layout, V - From Web Page to Web Site 337-338 Chapter 16 versus - Creating an HTML Toolbox linear nonlinear approach to design, 340-341 Chapter 17 Setting Up Your Online Presence look and feel, 32,311 Chapter maintaining, 18 - Creating 301-305, a Great 341 User Interface Part Mega VI - The Web Part Tools, of Tens 347 page 330 Chapter 19redirectors, - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs promoting, 307-308 Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts 310 Part scope, VII - Appendixes site maps, 311-315, 327-328,336 Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags site reviews, 332Character Codes Appendix B - HTML transferring files, 300-301 Appendix C - Glossary 'under construction' messages, 314 Index updating,301-305 Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition user feedback, 331-332 Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> List of Figures<br /> <br /> Web Standards Project, 157 List of Tables List Web of Listings Usability For Dummies, Richard Mander and Bud Smith, 324 List of Sidebars WebAttack Web site, 347<br /> <br /> Web-hosting provider, 383 Webmonkey Web site ASP resources, 257 CGI scripts article, 196 database resources, 257 Design Basics article, 324<br /> <br /> GIF animation tutorial, 112 HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Good Forms article, 186 ISBN:0764519956 by Edtutorial, Tittel and graphic formatting 96Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) image map resources, 110 Whether your goal image optimization tutorial, 98 is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepPHP resources, 257 by-step book will put you on the right track. resources available, 347 Site Redesign Tutorial, 324 Table of Contents Web-server software, 293 HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> well-formed document, 383<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> What See HTML Is What YouNatural Get (WYSIWYG), 383 Part I - You Meeting in Its Environment Chapter white space, 1 - The 64-65, Least 148, You 383Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter - HTML at Work on the Web width2attribute Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page <applet rel="nofollow"> element, 352 Part <col> II - Getting Started with HTML element, 353<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents <colgroup> element, 353 Chapter <hr> 5 element, - Linking69to Online Resources<br /> <br /> <iframe> element, Chapter 6 - Finding and 355 Using Images <img> Chapter 7 element, - Top Off 102-103, Your Page355 with Formatting 357Next Level Part <object> III - Taking element, HTML to the <pre> 357 Chapter 8 element, - HTML Tables <table> element, 146 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames <td> Chapter 10 element, - HTML 146 Forms Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies WinAmp MP3 player, 236<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 windows<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 -aHTML and Scripting opening new window, 86-87 Chapter 13 - 227-229 Making Multimedia Magic scripting, Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Windows Media Audio (WMA), 234<br /> <br /> Windows Media 241-242 Part V - From WebPlayer, Page to237, Web Site<br /> <br /> Word documents, saving as text files, 38 Chapter 16 - Creating an HTML Toolbox Chapter 17 - Setting Up Your(Microsoft), Online Presence Word97/2000 for Windows 281 Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> word processing programs, 36<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> WordPerfect 8.0 for Windows (Corel),Web 281Bugs Chapter 19 - Ten Ways to Exterminate World Wide Web site, Chapter 20 - Mart Ten HTML Do’s 299 and Don’ts Part VII Wide - Appendixes World Web Consortium<br /> <br /> (W3C)<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML Tags (CSS), 205 Cascading Style4 Sheets Appendix B HTML Character Codes HTML 4.01 specification, 26 Appendix C - Glossary resources available, 343-344 Indexstandards,3<br /> <br /> Web Accessibility Guidelines, Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies,102, 4th321 Edition Web site, 29 List of Figures XML, 261 List of Tables List of Listings wrapping text, 67-68 List of Sidebars WS_FTP Pro for Windows, 289-290,300<br /> <br /> W3C.SeeWorld Wide Web Consortium (W3C) WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get), 383<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> X<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> XHTML,384 browser support, 260,263 differences from HTML, 260 from XML, 260 Tabledifferences of Contents it works, 2634th Edition HTMLhow 4 For Dummies, HTML Tidy, 268 Introduction 267-268 Part namespaces, I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment rules, Chapter 1 265-268 - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web switching from HTML toon XHTML, 264-265 Chapter 2 - HTML at Work the Web XML (Extensible Markup Chapter 3 - Creating YourLanguage), First HTML 384 Page support, 260 Part browser II - Getting Started with HTML differences from HTML, Chapter 4 - Structuring Your260 HTML Documents differences from XHTML, Chapter 5 - Linking to Online 260 Resources DOCTYPE declaration, 267 Images Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Document Type 262-263 Chapter 7 - Top Off Definition Your Page(DTD), with Formatting Web site, 262to the Next Level Part FAQ III - Taking HTML how it works, 261-262 - HTML Tables namespaces,267 Chapter 9 - HTML Frames rules,265-268 Chapter 10 - HTML Forms uses,261 Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> XML For Edition, Chapter 11Dummies, - Getting 3rd Stylish with Ed CSSTittel and Natanya Pitts, 263 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Cheat Sheet: HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> Overview<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Golden Rules of HTML Always nest correctly. Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Always include ending tags in tag pair elements.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part IAlways - Meeting HTML in Its Natural quote attribute values.Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Always documents with a DOCTYPE declaration. Chapter 2 -begin HTMLHTML at Work on the Web Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Always include the <html>,<head>,<title>, and <body><br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> elements in your document.<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Layout andHTML Structure Elements by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Element<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Name<br /> <br /> Function<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site and animation, this step<!DOCTYPE> or one loaded with frames, graphics, Document type Specifies the version of by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> HTML used in the document<br /> <br /> Attribution information<br /> <br /> Lists author contact information<br /> <br /> Body<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Defines or indicates a document’s body<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - - </div> The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web <div> Logical divisions Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Marks divisions in a document<br /> <br /> <address rel="nofollow"> - </address> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <body> - </body> Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <h1> - </h1> -<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Headings<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter <head> 6 - Finding </head> and Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> Head<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> <html> - </html><br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> <meta> Chapter 10 - HTML Forms - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Indicates a document’s head<br /> <br /> HTML document<br /> <br /> Identifies an HTML document<br /> <br /> Meta-information<br /> <br /> Describes aspects of the page’s information structure, contents, or relationships to other documents<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Identifies first-level through sixth-level<h6> - </h6> headings<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 - Integrating HTML <span> </span> a Database into YourLocalized style formatting Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Applies style to subparts of a paragraph<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> <title> - -Creating </title> an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> Document title<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 -> - Creating a Great User Interface Comments <!- Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Briefly describes document information Inserts comments are not displayed by browsers<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Layout Elements by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Element<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Name<br /> <br /> Function<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site graphics, and animation, this Marks step- the definition for a term <dd> - </dd>or one loaded with frames, Definition description by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> in a glossary list<br /> <br /> <dir> - </dir> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Directory list<br /> <br /> Marks an unbulleted list of short elements<br /> <br /> Definition list<br /> <br /> Marks a special format for terms and their definitions<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> <dl> - </dl> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter - The Least You Need to Know aboutterm HTML and the Web <dt>1 - </dt> Definition Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> <li> - </li><br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> List item<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources <menu> </menu> Menu list Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> <ol> - </ol><br /> <br /> Unordered list<br /> <br /> Marks a bulleted list of elements<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Marks a pickable list of elements Marks a numbered list of elements<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Marks a member item within a list of any type<br /> <br /> Ordered list<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables <ul>9 - </ul> Chapter - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Marks the term being defined in a glossary list<br /> <br /> 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition Text LayoutHTML Elements by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Element<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Name<br /> <br /> Function<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this Identifies step<abbr rel="nofollow"> - </abbr> Abbreviation expansion for an by-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> acronym<br /> <br /> <acronym rel="nofollow"> - </acronym> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> <blockquote> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Acronym<br /> <br /> Indicates an acronym<br /> <br /> Quote style<br /> <br /> Sets off long quotations or citations -</blockquote><br /> <br /> Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment <br> Force line break<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> <cite> </cite> - Creating Your First HTMLCitation Page markup<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring <code> </code> Your HTML Documents Program code text Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> <del> - </del><br /> <br /> Deleted text<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level <dfn> - </dfn> Defined<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> <em> - </em><br /> <br /> term<br /> <br /> Emphasis<br /> <br /> Part <ins> IV - Extending - </ins> HTML with Other Technologies Inserted text<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> <kbd> - </kbd><br /> <br /> Keyboard text<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML <p> Paragraph Chapter 15 </p> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> <pre> - </pre><br /> <br /> Preformatted text<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> <q> </q> Part VI --The Part of Tens Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Quotation markup<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts <samp> </samp> Sample output Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Forces a line break in the onscreen text flow Marks distinctive text for citations Used for code samples Identifies sections of a Web page deleted in revision Emphasizes a term about to be defined in the text Emphasizes enclosed text Identifies Web page sections inserted in revision Marks text entered by the user at the keyboard Breaks text into content blocks Keeps spacing and layout of original text in monospaced font Marks a short quotation within a sentence Indicates sample output from a program or script<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> <strong> - </strong> Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Strong emphasis Appendix C - Glossary Index <sub> - </sub> Subscript Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> <sup> - </sup><br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> Renders text smaller and slightly lowered<br /> <br /> Superscript<br /> <br /> Renders text smaller and slightly raised<br /> <br /> Variable text<br /> <br /> Marks variable or substitution for some other value<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> - </var> List<var> of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Provides maximum emphasis to enclosed text<br /> <br /> Wiley, the Wiley Publishing logo, For Dummies, the Dummies Man logo, the For Dummies BestsellingBook Series logo and all related trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Wiley Publishing, Inc. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. Copyright © 2003 Wiley Publishing, Inc. All rights reserved.<br /> <br /> Item 1995-6.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 by Edabout Tittel Wiley and Natanya Pitts call 1-800-762-2974. For more information Publishing,<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Chapter 1: Whether The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step you ondifferent the rightcomponents. track. Figure 1-1:This Web book pagewill hasput several<br /> <br /> Figure 1-2:FirstGov is a gateway that uses hyperlinks to help visitors find government information on the Web.<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction Figure 1-3:The components of a URL help it define the exact location of a single file on the Web. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Figure 1-4: ASCII all textHTML characters HTML entities do instead. Chapter 1 - The Leasttest Youcan't Needrepresent to Know about and theso Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Figure 1-5:Always use entities when you want to display a less-than sign, greater-than sign, or - Creating Your First HTML Page ampersand in the browser window.<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter- Linking 2: HTML at Work on the Web to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Figure 2-1: The Impact Online Web page is simple but direct - the best way to present its creator's Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting message. Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Chapter 8 - HTML Figure 2-2: TheTables W3C home page is complex and robust; it helps visitors access the hundreds of other Chapter 9 HTML Frames pages on the W3C site. Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter- Getting 3: Creating Your First HTML Page Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Figure 3-1:Taking a few minutes to sketch your page design makes writing HTML easier.<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 3-2: - Integrating Database HTML Figure The lettera that is the into text Your for our page in word-processing form. Chapter 15 - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Choose anWeb easy-to-access Part VFigure - From3-3: Web Page to Site<br /> <br /> location and a descriptive filename for your HTML pages.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Figure 3-4:Use Internet Explorer to navigate to your Web pages.<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 3-5: - Creating a Great User Interface Figure Viewing a file in your Web browser. Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Figure Viewing anExterminate HTML file inWeb your text editor and Web browser at the same time. Chapter 19 3-6: - Ten Ways to Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Figure 3-7:A change in the HTML is displayed in a browser after a quick save and refresh.<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A 3-8: - HTML Tagsdrop HTML files from your local system to a Web server to make them available Figure Drag4 and Appendix B HTML Character Codes on the Internet. Appendix C - Glossary IndexFigure 3-9:After you transfer a file to a Web server, it's available via a URL to anyone with a Web<br /> <br /> Internet connection. Cheatbrowser Sheet - and HTMLlive 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures<br /> <br /> Chapter 4: Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> List of Tables<br /> <br /> List of Listings List ofFigure Sidebars 4-1:HTML page titles usually appear in a Web browser's window title bar.<br /> <br /> Figure 4-2:When you use a <meta> element to create a page redirector, include text that visitors can click if their browsers can't handle the redirector. Figure 4-3:Only Content in the <body>element appears in the browser's window. Figure 4-4:Web browsers delineate paragraphs with a line break and white space.<br /> <br /> Figure 4-5:Use the align attribute with a paragraph to specify its horizontal alignment. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956 by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts in decreasing size Figure 4-6:Web browsers display headings from level one to level six.<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Figure 4-7: Web browsers typically block quote to separate it from paragraphs. Whether your goal is to indent build aasimple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Figure 4-8:Web browsers routinely ignore white by-step book will put you on the rightspace. track.<br /> <br /> Figure 4-9: Use preformat-ted text to force browsers to recognize white space. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Figure 4-10: Use <pre> with <block quote> to control white space within a quotation.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Introduction Figure 4-11: Using the <br> element to specify where lines in block elements should break. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Figure 4-12: the <hr> add horizontal lines to your page. Chapter 1 - TheUse Least You Needelement to Knowtoabout HTML and the Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Figure 4-13:Use the <hr> attributes to better control how a browser displays the rule.<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Figure 4-14:The LANWrights, Inc. Web site uses hard rules to draw your attention to important<br /> <br /> Chapter 4 - Structuring Your HTML Documents information on the page. Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources Figure 4-15: Use and the Using <ol> Images and <li> attributes to create a numbered list. Chapter 6 - Finding Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Figure 4-16: Web browsers set the numbers for your list according to the order items appear in the list.<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 - HTML Tables Figure 4-17: Use the start and type attributes to guide the display of a numbered list in a browser. Chapter 9 - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Figure AnForms unordered list uses bullets instead of numbers to mark items. Chapter 10 4-18: - HTML Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Figure 4-19: Use the type attribute to change the bullet style for an unordered list.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 4-20: - HTML and Scripting Figure Definition lists group terms and their related definitions into a single list. Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Figure Nestedalists combine orHTML more lists for a multi-level organization of information. Chapter 14 4-21: - Integrating Database intotwo Your Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Chapter 5: Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17 5-1: - Setting Up Your with Online Presence Figure A paragraph a link to the W3C. Chapter 18 - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Figure Use the target Part VI - The5-2: Part of Tens<br /> <br /> attribute to open a new window in a Web browser to display a linked file.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Figure 5-3:Use anchor elements to mark spots on a page and link to them.<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Figure 5-4:This browser prompts you to save or view the ZIP file.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Chapter 6: Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Figure 6-1:The White House Web page uses images in a variety of ways.<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> List ofFigure Figures6-2:Use the <img> element to place graphics in a Web page. List of Tables<br /> <br /> 6-3:When a browser doesn't show an image, it shows alternative text instead. List ofFigure Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 6-4:Even when a browser shows an image, it may display the alternative text as a pop-up tip as well. Figure 6-5:A small box. Figure 6-6:A small box becomes a long line. Figure 6-7:Don't use a browser to resize complex images.<br /> <br /> Figure 6-8:Use the border attribute to create a border around your image. HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> by can Ed Tittel Natanya Pitts to control imageISBN:0764519956 Figure 6-9:You vary and image alignment placement on the page. John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Figure 6-10:The hspace and vspace attributes control the white space around an image. Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> Figure 6-11:Combine image anchor elements to create a linked image. by-step book willand put you on the right track. Figure 6-12:Image maps turn different areas of an image into linking regions. Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Chapter 7: Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Part IFigure - Meeting in Its Naturalelement Environment 7-1:HTML Use the <body> attributes<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> to define the colors on your Web page.<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Figure 7-2: A back-ground image Chapter 2 - HTML at Work on the Webcan be any size; the browser tiles it to fill in the entire page background. Chapter 3 - Creating Your First HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Figure 7-3:A Web page with both colors and a background image defined.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Resources Figure 7-4: Be sure to coordinate your text colors and background colors, or your page may be Chapter 6 Finding and Using Images unreadable. Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Figure 7-5:Use the Part III - Taking HTML to <font> the Next element Level<br /> <br /> and the face attribute to change the font face for sections of<br /> <br /> text8 on -the page. Chapter HTML Tables Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Figure 7-6:Use the <font> element and the color attribute to change the font color for sections of - HTML Forms text on the page.<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 7-7: - Getting Stylish with CSS Figure Use the <font> element and the size attribute to change the font size for sections of text Chapter - HTML and Scripting on 12 the page. Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic Figure Relative font sizes use and negative numbers to set font size relative to the Chapter 14 7-8: - Integrating a Database intopositive Your HTML<br /> <br /> browser's default font size. - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Figure 7-9:You can often get the same results using relative font sizes or absolute font sizes.<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 17 7-10: - Setting Many UpofYour the Online font style Presence and phrase elements display the same way in a Web browser. Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Chapter 8: HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 8-1: - Ten HTML Do’s anduses Don’ts Figure This Web page three different tables for layout. Each table is numbered. Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix Figure A 8-2: - HTML This4Web Tagspage uses one simple table with three cells for its layout. Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Figure 8-3:After you delete a few cell walls, an HTML table might not look like much of a table at all, but it's perfect for laying out Web page elements.<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> CheatFigure Sheet 8-4: - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Always start by sketching the table dimensions, even before opening text editor. List of Figures List ofFigure Tables8-5:The beginning og the table structure contains only two rows. List of Listings<br /> <br /> Figure 8-6:Most Web pages that use tables for layout don't use borders; here you can see why.<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 8-7:This image doesn't define width properties. Figure 8-8:This image defines width properties. Figure 8-9:Cellpadding increases the space within each cell. Figure 8-10:Cellspacing increases the width of the border.<br /> <br /> Figure 8-11:Our simple table centered.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel andtwo Natanya Pitts Figure 8-12:The cell spans columns.<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Figure 8-13:We have your changed our sotext-oriented that the last Web cell containing our navigational items Whether goal is totable build design a simple, site spans two rows. or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Figure 8-14:Our simple table with the last rows spanned. 8-15: Nested tables. Table Figure of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Chapter 9: HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 - The Least Need Know about HTML and the Web Figure 9-1: This siteYou uses twotoframes. Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Figure 9-2: A sketch of First Figure 9-1.Page Chapter 3 - Creating Your HTML Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Figure 9-3:Navigational elements are defined as a row on top of the content.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 - Linking to Online Figure 9-4: This Web pageResources consists of two columns. Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Figure 9-5: The of two rows. Chapter 7 - Top OffWeb Your page Page consists with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Figure 9-6:The Web page consists of three rows, with the third row taking up the remaining height in - HTML Tables the browser.<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10 9-7: - HTML Figure ThisForms frame structure has three rows and two columns, which results in six separate frames. Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Figure Borders turned using frameborder="0". Chapter 11 9-8: - Getting Stylish withoff CSS Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Figure 9-9:Borders turned on using frame-border="1".<br /> <br /> Chapter 14 9-10: - Integrating a Database intodisplays Your HTML Figure The browser window a scroll bar for the first frame, yet leaves it off for the Chapter 15 -frame, How HTML Other Markup Languages second evenRelates thoughtothe content is cut off. Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Figure The first frame, split into two smaller frames that contain navigational elements and a Chapter 16 9-11: - Creating an HTML Toolbox note Chapter 17to -users. Setting Up Your Online Presence Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Chapter 10: HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 10-1: - TenThe HTML Do’s and page Don’tsuses two short search forms to help users find what they are looking Figure IRS home Part VII for -inAppendixes minimum time.<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Figure The refund status Appendix B 10-2: - HTML Character Codes search form is a little more complex. Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Figure 10-3:A subscription form collects information to help teachers subscribe to an online<br /> <br /> Indexnewsletter.<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List ofFigure Figures10-4: An online car loan site uses many long and detailed forms to collect necessary data. List of Tables<br /> <br /> Figure 10-5:Text entry fields in a form.<br /> <br /> List of Listings<br /> <br /> List ofFigure Sidebars 10-6:You can specify the length and the maximum number of characters for a text field.<br /> <br /> Figure 10-7:Password fields are like text fields except that the browser masks the text a user enters. Figure 10-8: Check boxes and radio buttons. Figure 10-9:A file upload field. Figure 10-10:A drop-down list.<br /> <br /> Figure 10-11:HTML A drop-down list with modifications. 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Figure 10-12:A text box.<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> yourreset goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Figure 10-13:Whether Submit and buttons.<br /> <br /> or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this step-<br /> <br /> will put you on the rightprepare track. to fill out a long form. Figure 10-14:by-step A form book gateway page helps users<br /> <br /> Chapter 11: Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Figure 11-1:An HTML page without style specifications. Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Figure 11-2: HTML styleabout specifications effect. Chapter 1 - TheAn Least You page Need with to Know HTML andinthe Web Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Figure 11-3: Use classes to target your style rules more precisely.<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTMLstyle rules Figure 11-4: You can create<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> that work with any element by using classes.<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Figure 11-5: Inheritance style rules apply to nested elements. Chapter 5 - Linking to Onlinemeans Resources Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 12:OffHTML and Chapter 7 - Top Your Page with Scripting Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 8 12-1: - HTML . . Tables . a script makes a dialog box appear to tell you what you did wrong. Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Figure 12-2:When the page loads, it displays the image referenced in the image src attribute.<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Figure 12-3:When a mouse pointer moves over the image, the browser displays a different graphic.<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter Figure 12 12-4: - HTML You and can Scripting use JavaScript to open a Web page in a new window and carefully control the<br /> <br /> display the window. Chapter 13 -ofMaking Multimedia Magic Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Figure 12-5:A good use of JavaScript is to validate form data.<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter- Creating 13: Making Multimedia Magic an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Figure This site shows a Interface link for downloading an MP3 file. Chapter 18 13-1: - Creating a Great User Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Figure 13-2:A console (defined as a control) is visible in the Web page.<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Chapter 14: Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags<br /> <br /> Figure The components Appendix B 14-1: - HTML Character Codes of a data-driven Web solution may exist on separate systems. Appendix C - Glossary<br /> <br /> Chapter 16: Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Index<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List ofFigure Figures16-1: The New Document dialog box. List of Tables<br /> <br /> 16-2:Adding a title to your HTML document. List ofFigure Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Figure 16-3: HomeSite's interface displaying a blank HTML document. Figure 16-4:Using the W3C Link Checker we can verify that all links found at www.lanw.com/staff are not broken. Figure 16-5:The W3C Validator Web page is simple and easy to use. Figure 16-6:Error message that found a missing closing </title> tag.<br /> <br /> Figure 16-7:The basic WS_FTP Pro interface.<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Chapter 18:John Creating a©Great User Interface Wiley & Sons 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Figure 18-1:The siteloaded map for the XML For Dummies, 3rd Editionthis Web site. or one with frames, graphics, and animation, stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Figure 18-2:TheXML For Dummies site without the book examples. 18-3:The XML For Dummies site with the book examples. Table Figure of Contents HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> Figure 18-4:The Dummies.com site is organized by topic.<br /> <br /> Introduction<br /> <br /> Part IFigure - Meeting HTML Its Natural Environment 18-5: The in main topic areas on the Dummies.com<br /> <br /> Chapter 1 bar.<br /> <br /> site are accessible from the top navigation<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web Figure 18-6: Main Your areasFirst on the IRS site are accessible from a persistent navigation bar. Chapter 3 - Creating HTML Page Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Figure 18-7:Each area of the site uses the same general layout.<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition List of Tables by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Chapter 2: Whether HTMLyour at goal Work on the Web is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will Features put you ontothe right track. Table 2-1: Adding Advanced a Page<br /> <br /> Chapter 6: Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Table 6-1: Choosing the Right File Format Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter- The 7: Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page Table 7-1: The 16 Color Names with Their Hex Codes<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Appendix A: HTML 4 Tags - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Table A-1: HTML Tags Chapter 7 - Top Off Your Page with Formatting Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Appendix B:Tables HTML Character Codes - HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 8 Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames Table TheForms ISO-Latin-1 Character Set Chapter 10 B-1: - HTML Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Table B-2: Greek Characters - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> Chapter 12 B-3: - HTML and Scripting Table Special Punctuation Chapter 13 - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Table Letter-likea Characters Chapter 14 B-4: - Integrating Database into Your HTML Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Table B-5: Arrow Characters<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 B-6: - Creating an HTMLCharacters Toolbox Table Mathematical Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Table Technical Characters Chapter 18 B-7: - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Table B-8: Playing Card Symbols - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> Chapter 20 B-9: - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts Table ISO 8859 Character Sets Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition List of Listings by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages)<br /> <br /> Chapter 1: Whether The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site or one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepwillMarkup put you on the right track. Listing 1-1: by-step Samplebook HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 3: Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Table of Contents<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction Listing 3-1: The Complete HTML Page for the Zog Letter Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web Chapter- The 5: Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page Listing 5-1: Intradocument Hyperlinks<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter- Linking 7: Top Off Your Page with Formatting to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 5 Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Listing 7-1: Using <body> Element Attributes to Control a Page’s Colors<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Listing 7-2: Text Treatments at Work<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter- HTML 10: HTML Forms Forms<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Listing -10-1: A Simple Form Processed by a Form Handler Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 11 Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter- Making 11: Getting with CSS Multimedia Stylish Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Listing Adding an Internal Style Sheet to an HTML Document Chapter 15 -11-1: How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> an HTML Toolbox Chapter- Creating 12: HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18 -12-1: Creating a Great User Interface Listing Verifying the User Fills Out Both Form Fields Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Listing Image Chapter 19 -12-2: Ten Ways to Rollover Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Listing 12-3: Pop-Up Window<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A -12-4: HTML Form 4 Tags Listing Validation Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> HTML 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition<br /> <br /> by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> John Wiley & Sons © 2003 (408 pages) your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site Chapter 1: Whether The Least You Need to and Know about HTML and the Web or one loaded with frames, graphics, animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> A bevy of browsers Table of Contents Technical Stuff<br /> <br /> Introducing Internet protocols<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Chapter 5: Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Anchor elements aren’t block elements<br /> <br /> Chapter 3 importance - Creatingof Your First The http:// in HTML HTMLPage links Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> Your HTML Documents Chapter- Structuring 6: Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Creating thumbnail images<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level Remember Copyright matters<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> Frames Chapter- HTML 7: Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Remember Just because you can do something . . .<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter- Making 8: HTML Tables Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 13 Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Other table elements - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter- Creating 11: Getting Stylish with CSS an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 16 Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Tip18 Paying attention to inheritance Chapter - Creating a Great User Interface Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> to Exterminate Web Bugs Chapter- Ten 12:Ways HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 19 Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Tip Finding Scripts Online<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes<br /> <br /> Chapter 14: Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Appendix C - Glossary Index<br /> <br /> Technical Stuff A bit about SQL<br /> <br /> Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Tricks Figuresof the Trade The importance of good database design List of Tables List of Technical Listings Stuff<br /> <br /> And now for some superfluous, geeky information<br /> <br /> List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> Tip Do it yourself or hire an expert?<br /> <br /> Chapter 15: How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages Warning Avoiding mutant markup Tip Keeping markup clean with HTML Tidy<br /> <br /> Chapter 16:HTML Creating an HTML Toolbox 4 for Dummies, 4th Edition by Ed Tittel and Natanya Pitts<br /> <br /> ISBN:0764519956<br /> <br /> Tip Where John to goWiley for more & Sons information © 2003 (408 pages) Whether your goal is to build a simple, text-oriented Web site<br /> <br /> Tricks of theor Trade The one-two punch of using a WYSIWYG editor with a helper editor one loaded with frames, graphics, and animation, this stepby-step book will put you on the right track.<br /> <br /> Warning Word processors and HTML Table of Contents<br /> <br /> Chapter 18: Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition Introduction<br /> <br /> Tricks of the Trade Design matters<br /> <br /> Part I - Meeting HTML in Its Natural Environment<br /> <br /> Chapter 1<br /> <br /> - The Least You Need to Know about HTML and the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 2<br /> <br /> - HTML at Work on the Web<br /> <br /> Chapter 3<br /> <br /> - Creating Your First HTML Page<br /> <br /> Part II - Getting Started with HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 4<br /> <br /> - Structuring Your HTML Documents<br /> <br /> Chapter 5<br /> <br /> - Linking to Online Resources<br /> <br /> Chapter 6<br /> <br /> - Finding and Using Images<br /> <br /> Chapter 7<br /> <br /> - Top Off Your Page with Formatting<br /> <br /> Part III - Taking HTML to the Next Level<br /> <br /> Chapter 8<br /> <br /> - HTML Tables<br /> <br /> Chapter 9<br /> <br /> - HTML Frames<br /> <br /> Chapter 10<br /> <br /> - HTML Forms<br /> <br /> Part IV - Extending HTML with Other Technologies<br /> <br /> Chapter 11<br /> <br /> - Getting Stylish with CSS<br /> <br /> Chapter 12<br /> <br /> - HTML and Scripting<br /> <br /> Chapter 13<br /> <br /> - Making Multimedia Magic<br /> <br /> Chapter 14<br /> <br /> - Integrating a Database into Your HTML<br /> <br /> Chapter 15<br /> <br /> - How HTML Relates to Other Markup Languages<br /> <br /> Part V - From Web Page to Web Site<br /> <br /> Chapter 16<br /> <br /> - Creating an HTML Toolbox<br /> <br /> Chapter 17<br /> <br /> - Setting Up Your Online Presence<br /> <br /> Chapter 18<br /> <br /> - Creating a Great User Interface<br /> <br /> Part VI - The Part of Tens<br /> <br /> Chapter 19<br /> <br /> - Ten Ways to Exterminate Web Bugs<br /> <br /> Chapter 20<br /> <br /> - Ten HTML Do’s and Don’ts<br /> <br /> Part VII - Appendixes<br /> <br /> Appendix A - HTML 4 Tags Appendix B - HTML Character Codes Appendix C - Glossary Index Cheat Sheet - HTML 4 For Dummies, 4th Edition List of Figures List of Tables List of Listings List of Sidebars<br /> <br /> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <script> $(document).ready(function () { var inner_height = $(window).innerHeight() - 250; $('#pdfviewer').css({"height": inner_height + "px"}); }); </script> <footer class="footer" style="margin-top: 60px;"> <div class="container-fluid"> Copyright &copy; 2024 V.VIBDOC.COM. All rights reserved. <div class="pull-right"> <span><a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/about">About Us</a></span> | <span><a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/privacy">Privacy Policy</a></span> | <span><a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/term">Terms of Service</a></span> | <span><a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/copyright">Copyright</a></span> | <span><a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/contact">Contact Us</a></span> </div> </div> </footer> <!-- Modal --> <div class="modal fade" id="login" tabindex="-1" role="dialog" aria-labelledby="myModalLabel"> <div class="modal-dialog" role="document"> <div class="modal-content"> <div class="modal-header"> <button type="button" class="close" data-dismiss="modal" aria-label="Close" on="tap:login.close"><span aria-hidden="true">&times;</span></button> <h4 class="modal-title" id="add-note-label">Sign In</h4> </div> <div class="modal-body"> <form action="https://v.vibdoc.com/login" method="post"> <div class="form-group"> <label class="sr-only" for="email">Email</label> <input class="form-input form-control" type="text" name="email" id="email" value="" placeholder="Email" /> </div> <div class="form-group"> <label class="sr-only" for="password">Password</label> <input class="form-input form-control" type="password" name="password" id="password" value="" placeholder="Password" /> </div> <div class="form-group"> <div class="checkbox"> <label class="form-checkbox"> <input type="checkbox" name="remember" value="1" /> <i class="form-icon"></i> Remember me </label> <label class="pull-right"><a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/forgot">Forgot password?</a></label> </div> </div> <button class="btn btn-primary btn-block" type="submit">Sign In</button> </form> <hr style="margin-top: 15px;" /> <a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/login/facebook" class="btn btn-facebook btn-block"><i class="fa fa-facebook"></i> Login with Facebook</a> <a href="https://v.vibdoc.com/login/google" class="btn btn-google btn-block"><i class="fa fa-google"></i> Login with Google</a> </div> </div> </div> </div> <!-- Google tag (gtag.js) --> <script async src="https://www.googletagmanager.com/gtag/js?id=G-ZC1Q65B00D"></script> <script> window.dataLayer = window.dataLayer || []; function gtag(){dataLayer.push(arguments);} gtag('js', new Date()); gtag('config', 'G-ZC1Q65B00D'); </script> <script src="https://v.vibdoc.com/assets/js/jquery-ui.min.js"></script> <link rel="stylesheet" href="https://v.vibdoc.com/assets/css/jquery-ui.css"> <script> $(function () { $("#document_search").autocomplete({ source: function (request, response) { $.ajax({ url: "https://v.vibdoc.com/suggest", dataType: "json", data: { term: request.term }, success: function (data) { response(data); } }); }, autoFill: true, select: function( event, ui ) { $(this).val(ui.item.value); $(this).parents("form").submit(); } }); }); </script> </html>